SEL -411L Relay Protection and Automation System Instruction manual
Advertisement
Advertisement
Instruction Manual
SEL-411L Relay
Protection and
Automation System
Instruction Manual
Communications Manual
20151029
*PM411L-03-NB*
© 2011–2015 by Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.
All brand or product names appearing in this document are the trademark or registered trademark of their respective holders. No SEL trademarks may be used without written permission. SEL products appearing in this document may be covered by U.S. and Foreign patents.
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc. reserves all rights and benefits afforded under federal and international copyright and patent laws in its products, including without limitation software, firmware, and documentation.
The information in this document is provided for informational use only and is subject to change without notice. Schweitzer Engineering
Laboratories, Inc. has approved only the English language document.
This product is covered by the standard SEL 10-year warranty. For warranty details, visit www.selinc.com or contact your customer service representative.
PM411L-03
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Table of Contents
List of Tables
List of Figures
Preface
Protection Manual
Section 1: Introduction and Specifications
Features......................................................................................................................................................... P.1.2
Models and Options...................................................................................................................................... P.1.5
Applications.................................................................................................................................................. P.1.8
Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. P.1.13
Section 2: Installation
Shared Configuration Attributes................................................................................................................... P.2.1
Plug-In Boards............................................................................................................................................ P.2.11
Jumpers....................................................................................................................................................... P.2.14
Relay Placement ......................................................................................................................................... P.2.24
Connection.................................................................................................................................................. P.2.25
AC/DC Connection Diagrams .................................................................................................................... P.2.44
Section 3: Protection Functions
87L Theory of Operation.............................................................................................................................. P.3.2
87L Differential Elements .......................................................................................................................... P.3.28
CT Selection Procedure............................................................................................................................ P.3.102
Current and Voltage Source Selection ...................................................................................................... P.3.106
Polarizing Quantity for Distance Element Calculations........................................................................... P.3.119
Frequency Estimation ............................................................................................................................... P.3.119
Time-Error Calculation............................................................................................................................. P.3.122
Fault Location........................................................................................................................................... P.3.123
Open-Phase Detection Logic .................................................................................................................... P.3.134
Pole Open Logic ....................................................................................................................................... P.3.134
Loss-of-Potential Logic ............................................................................................................................ P.3.137
Fault Type Identification Selection Logic ................................................................................................ P.3.141
Ground Directional Element..................................................................................................................... P.3.142
Phase- and Negative-Sequence Directional Elements .............................................................................. P.3.152
Directionality............................................................................................................................................ P.3.154
CVT Transient Detection.......................................................................................................................... P.3.154
Series-Compensation Line Logic ............................................................................................................. P.3.155
Load-Encroachment Logic ....................................................................................................................... P.3.156
Out-of-Step Logic (Conventional)............................................................................................................ P.3.157
Out-of-Step Logic (Zero Settings)............................................................................................................ P.3.163
Mho Ground-Distance Elements .............................................................................................................. P.3.178
Quadrilateral Ground-Distance Elements................................................................................................. P.3.182
Mho Phase Distance Elements ................................................................................................................. P.3.186
Quadrilateral Phase Distance Elements.................................................................................................... P.3.191
Zone Time Delay ...................................................................................................................................... P.3.197
Instantaneous Line Overcurrent Elements................................................................................................ P.3.200
Selectable Time-Overcurrent Elements (51) ............................................................................................ P.3.205
Over/Undervoltage Elements ................................................................................................................... P.3.213
Switch-Onto-Fault Logic.......................................................................................................................... P.3.217
Communications-Assisted Tripping Logic............................................................................................... P.3.220
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
ii
Table of Contents
Directional Comparison Blocking Scheme .............................................................................................. P.3.221
Permissive Overreaching Transfer Tripping Scheme ............................................................................... P.3.224
Directional Comparison Unblocking Scheme Logic................................................................................ P.3.232
Trip Logic ................................................................................................................................................. P.3.237
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection............................................................................................................ P.3.247
Over/Underfrequency Elements ............................................................................................................... P.3.257
Undervoltage Supervision Logic .............................................................................................................. P.3.258
87L Communication and Timing ............................................................................................................. P.3.261
Configuration, Monitoring, Alarming, and Logic for 87L Channels ....................................................... P.3.279
87L Enable and Blocking Logic............................................................................................................... P.3.280
87L Active and Required Channel Logic ................................................................................................. P.3.282
87L Channel Synchronization Logic and Status ...................................................................................... P.3.284
87L Channel Monitoring and Alarming Logic......................................................................................... P.3.291
87L Standby Channel Switchover Logic.................................................................................................. P.3.297
87L Time Fallback Logic ......................................................................................................................... P.3.300
87L Master, Outstation, and Loss of Protection Logic............................................................................. P.3.306
87L Communications Report ................................................................................................................... P.3.308
87L Channel Recorder.............................................................................................................................. P.3.313
Protection Application Examples ............................................................................................................. P.3.315
Section 4: Autoreclosing and Synchronism-Check
Autoreclosing ............................................................................................................................................... P.4.2
One-Circuit-Breaker Autoreclosing ............................................................................................................. P.4.4
Two-Circuit-Breaker Autoreclosing ........................................................................................................... P.4.10
Autoreclose Logic Diagrams ...................................................................................................................... P.4.27
Manual Closing .......................................................................................................................................... P.4.40
Voltage Checks for Autoreclosing and Manual Closing ............................................................................ P.4.43
Settings and Relay Word Bits for Autoreclosing and Manual Closing ...................................................... P.4.45
Synchronism Check.................................................................................................................................... P.4.49
Section 5: Settings
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................... P.5.1
Alias Settings................................................................................................................................................ P.5.2
Global Settings ............................................................................................................................................. P.5.4
Protection Free-Form SEL
OGIC
Control Equations ..................................................................................... P.5.9
Automation Free-Form SEL
OGIC
Control Equations................................................................................... P.5.9
Notes Settings ............................................................................................................................................. P.5.10
Output Settings ........................................................................................................................................... P.5.10
Front-Panel Settings ................................................................................................................................... P.5.11
Port Settings................................................................................................................................................ P.5.18
DNP3 Settings—Custom Maps .................................................................................................................. P.5.25
Bay Settings................................................................................................................................................ P.5.26
Section 6: PC Software
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................... P.6.1
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet Setup.................................................................................................................... P.6.3
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet Terminal .............................................................................................................. P.6.5
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet HMI ..................................................................................................................... P.6.6
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet Settings ................................................................................................................ P.6.9
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet Event Analysis................................................................................................... P.6.15
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet Settings Database Management ........................................................................ P.6.20
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet Help ................................................................................................................... P.6.21
Section 7: Front-Panel Operations
Front-Panel Layout ....................................................................................................................................... P.7.1
Front-Panel Menus and Screens ................................................................................................................. P.7.12
Front-Panel Automatic Messages............................................................................................................... P.7.35
Operation and Target LEDs ........................................................................................................................ P.7.36
Front-Panel Operator Control Pushbuttons ................................................................................................ P.7.41
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
Table of Contents
iii
Section 8: Oscillography, Events, and SER
Data Processing ............................................................................................................................................ P.8.2
Triggering Data Captures and Event Reports............................................................................................... P.8.4
Duration of Data Captures and Event Reports ............................................................................................. P.8.5
Oscillography ............................................................................................................................................... P.8.7
Event Reports, Event Summaries, and Event Histories.............................................................................. P.8.14
Sequential Events Recorder (SER)............................................................................................................. P.8.31
Section 9: Monitoring and Metering
Circuit Breaker Monitor ............................................................................................................................... P.9.1
Station DC Battery System Monitor........................................................................................................... P.9.20
Metering ..................................................................................................................................................... P.9.25
Section 10: Basic Relay Operations
Inspecting a New Relay.............................................................................................................................. P.10.1
Connecting and Applying Power................................................................................................................ P.10.3
Establishing Communication...................................................................................................................... P.10.4
Changing the Default Passwords ................................................................................................................ P.10.6
Checking Relay Status.............................................................................................................................. P.10.10
Making Simple Settings Changes............................................................................................................. P.10.13
Operating the Relay Inputs and Outputs .................................................................................................. P.10.21
Readying the Relay for Field Application................................................................................................ P.10.27
Section 11: Testing and Troubleshooting
Testing Philosophy ..................................................................................................................................... P.11.1
Test Precautions.......................................................................................................................................... P.11.3
Test Mode ................................................................................................................................................... P.11.4
Testing Features and Tools ......................................................................................................................... P.11.6
Relay Test Connections ............................................................................................................................ P.11.11
Test Methods ............................................................................................................................................ P.11.14
Checking Relay Operation ....................................................................................................................... P.11.19
Relay Self-Tests........................................................................................................................................ P.11.38
Relay Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................. P.11.43
Factory Assistance.................................................................................................................................... P.11.46
Section 12: Bay Control
Overview .................................................................................................................................................... P.12.1
Circuit Breaker Status Logic ...................................................................................................................... P.12.2
Disconnect Logic........................................................................................................................................ P.12.2
Bay Control Front-Panel Operations ........................................................................................................ P.12.13
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet SEL-5030 Software Bay Control Screens ....................................................... P.12.27
Predefined Bay Control One-Line Diagrams ........................................................................................... P.12.37
Section 13: Time-Synchronized Measurements
Relay Configuration for High-Accuracy Timekeeping .............................................................................. P.13.1
Configuring High-Accuracy Timekeeping ................................................................................................. P.13.1
Fault Analysis ........................................................................................................................................... P.13.11
Section 14: SEL
OGIC
Control Equation Programming
SEL
OGIC
Control Equation History ........................................................................................................... P.14.1
Separation of Protection and Automation Areas ........................................................................................ P.14.2
SEL
OGIC
Control Equation Programming ................................................................................................. P.14.3
SEL
OGIC
Control Equation Setting Structure ............................................................................................ P.14.6
Multiple Setting Groups ............................................................................................................................. P.14.8
SEL
OGIC
Control Equation Capacity ....................................................................................................... P.14.10
SEL
OGIC
Control Equation Elements....................................................................................................... P.14.11
SEL
OGIC
Control Equation Operators...................................................................................................... P.14.24
Effective Programming............................................................................................................................. P.14.33
SEL-311 and SEL-351 Series Users......................................................................................................... P.14.35
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
iv
Table of Contents
Section 15: ASCII Command Reference
Description of Commands .......................................................................................................................... P.15.1
Section 16: Relay Word Bits
Alphabetic................................................................................................................................................... P.16.1
Row List ................................................................................................................................................... P.16.39
Section 17: Analog Quantities
Quantities Listed Alphabetically ................................................................................................................ P.17.1
Quantities Listed by Function .................................................................................................................. P.17.19
Appendix A: Firmware and Manual Versions
Firmware.......................................................................................................................................................P.A.1
SEL
BOOT
......................................................................................................................................................P.A.8
ICD File ........................................................................................................................................................P.A.8
Manual ..........................................................................................................................................................P.A.9
Appendix B: Firmware Upgrade Instructions
Overview ......................................................................................................................................................P.B.1
Upgrade Procedure .......................................................................................................................................P.B.1
Troubleshooting..........................................................................................................................................P.B.15
Factory Assistance......................................................................................................................................P.B.17
SEL-411L Relay
Communications Manual
Section 1: Communications Interfaces
Section 2: SEL Communications Protocols
Section 3: SEL Communications Processor Applications
Section 4: DNP3 Communications
Section 5: IEC 61850 Communications
Date Code 20151029
Table of Contents
v
Section 6: Synchrophasors
Section 7: Cybersecurity Features
Glossary
Index
SEL-411L Relay Command Summary
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
This page intentionally left blank
List of Tables
Protection Manual
Table 3.6
Table 3.7
Table 3.8
Table 3.9
Table 3.10
Table 3.11
Table 3.12
Table 3.13
Table 3.14
Table 3.15
Table 3.16
Table 3.17
Table 3.18
Table 3.19
Table 3.20
Table 3.21
Table 1.1
Table 1.2
Table 2.1
Table 2.2
Table 2.3
Table 2.4
Table 2.5
Table 2.6
Table 2.7
Table 2.8
Table 2.9
Table 3.1
Table 3.2
Table 3.3
Table 3.4
Table 3.5
Table 3.22
Table 3.23
Table 3.24
Table 3.25
Table 3.26
Table 3.27
Table 3.28
Table 3.29
Table 3.30
Table 3.31
Table 3.32
Table 3.33
Table 3.34
Table 3.35
Table 3.36
Table 3.37
Communications Cards Options (Excluding EIA-232 Card).............................................. P.1.7
Application Highlights ...................................................................................................... P.1.10
Required Settings for Use With AC Control Signals .......................................................... P.2.5
I/O Interface Boards Control Inputs.................................................................................. P.2.12
I/O Interface Boards Control Outputs ............................................................................... P.2.12
Main Board Jumpers ......................................................................................................... P.2.15
Serial Port Jumpers............................................................................................................ P.2.17
I/O Board Jumpers ............................................................................................................ P.2.23
Fuse Requirements for the Power Supply ......................................................................... P.2.32
Communications Options .................................................................................................. P.2.37
Current Differential Communication Interface Options ................................................... P.2.39
87L Current Input Configuration Settings......................................................................... P.3.31
87L Current Input Configuration Relay Word Bits........................................................... P.3.31
87LP Phase Differential Elements Settings....................................................................... P.3.32
87LP Phase Differential Elements Analog Quantities ...................................................... P.3.33
87LP Phase Differential Elements Relay Word Bits ......................................................... P.3.36
87LQ Negative-Sequence Differential Element Settings ....................................................... P.3.36
87LQ Negative-Sequence Differential Element Analog Quantities.................................. P.3.36
87LQ Negative-Sequence Differential Element Relay Word Bits .................................... P.3.39
87LG Zero-Sequence Differential Element Settings......................................................... P.3.39
87LG Zero-Sequence Differential Element Analog Quantities ........................................ P.3.40
87LG Zero-Sequence Differential Element Relay Word Bits ........................................... P.3.42
51S Operating Quantities Related to the Differential Current .......................................... P.3.44
Stub Bus Settings .............................................................................................................. P.3.45
Stub Bus Relay Word Bits................................................................................................. P.3.45
87DTT Direct Transfer Tripping Settings ......................................................................... P.3.47
87DTT Direct Transfer Tripping Relay Word Bits ........................................................... P.3.47
87L User-Programmable Communications Bits Settings (Serial Channels)..................... P.3.49
87L User-Programmable Communications Bits (Serial Channels) Relay Word Bits....... P.3.50
User-Programmable Communications Bits Settings......................................................... P.3.51
87L User-Programmable Communications Bits (Ethernet) Relay Word Bits .................. P.3.51
External Fault Detection Relay Word Bits ........................................................................ P.3.59
Adaptive Threshold Limits in the Adaptive Disturbance Detection Algorithm................ P.3.64
External Fault Detection Relay Word Bits ........................................................................ P.3.64
Extended Security Alpha Plane Switchover Logic Settings ............................................. P.3.66
Extended Security Alpha Plane Switchover Logic Relay Word Bits................................ P.3.67
Open CT Logic Settings .................................................................................................... P.3.69
Open CT Logic Relay Word Bits ...................................................................................... P.3.70
Line Charging Current Compensation Settings ................................................................ P.3.75
Line Charging Current Compensation Relay Word Bits................................................... P.3.75
87L Applications With In-Line Transformers Winding Configuration Settings............... P.3.81
Transformer Winding Compensation Matrices ................................................................. P.3.83
87L Applications With In-Line Transformers Harmonic Blocking and
Restraining Settings ......................................................................................................... P.3.86
Analog Quantities Related to Harmonic Blocking and Restraining ................................. P.3.86
87L Relay Word Bits Related to Harmonic Blocking and Restraining........................................... P.3.89
87LP Settings Specific to Applications With In-Line Transformers...............................................P.3.90
87LP Phase Differential Analog Quantities Specific To Applications With In-Line
Transformers .................................................................................................................... P.3.92
87L Relay Word Bits Related Unrestrained 87LP Operation ........................................... P.3.92
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
viii
List of Tables
SEL-411L Relay
Table 3.38
Table 3.39
Table 3.40
Table 3.41
Table 3.42
Table 3.43
Table 3.44
Table 3.58
Table 3.59
Table 3.60
Table 3.61
Table 3.62
Table 3.63
Table 3.64
Table 3.65
Table 3.66
Table 3.67
Table 3.68
Table 3.69
Table 3.70
Table 3.71
Table 3.72
Table 3.73
Table 3.45
Table 3.46
Table 3.47
Table 3.48
Table 3.49
Table 3.50
Table 3.51
Table 3.52
Table 3.53
Table 3.54
Table 3.55
Table 3.56
Table 3.57
Table 3.74
Table 3.75
Table 3.76
Table 3.77
Table 3.78
Table 3.79
Table 3.80
Table 3.81
Table 3.82
Table 3.83
Table 3.84
Table 3.85
Table 3.86
Table 3.87
Table 3.88
Table 3.89
Table 3.90
Table 3.91
87L Applications With In-Line Transformers and Charging Current
Compensation Settings..................................................................................................... P.3.95
87L Watchdog Relay Word Bits........................................................................................ P.3.99
Current Line Differential Elements Operating Times (Cycles)—Serial
Communication ................................................................................................................ P.3.99
Current Line Differential Operating Times (Cycles)—Ethernet Communication .......... P.3.101
Available Current Source Selection Settings Combinations ........................................... P.3.108
Available Current Source Selection Settings Combinations When ESS := Y,
NUMBK := 1 ................................................................................................................. P.3.109
Available Current Source Selection Settings Combinations When ESS := Y,
NUMBK := 2 ................................................................................................................. P.3.109
Available Voltage Source-Selection Setting Combinations ............................................ P.3.111
ESS := N, Current and Voltage Source Selection............................................................ P.3.112
ESS := 1, Current and Voltage Source Selection ............................................................ P.3.113
ESS := 2, Current and Voltage Source Selection ............................................................ P.3.113
ESS := 3, Current and Voltage Source Selection ............................................................ P.3.114
ESS := 4, Current and Voltage Source Selection ............................................................ P.3.115
ESS := Y, Tapped Line .................................................................................................... P.3.117
ESS := Y, Current Polarizing Source .............................................................................. P.3.118
VMEMC Relay Setting ................................................................................................... P.3.119
Frequency Measurement and Frequency Tracking Ranges............................................. P.3.120
Frequency Estimation...................................................................................................... P.3.121
Voltage and Breaker Pole Correlation ............................................................................. P.3.121
Frequency Estimation Outputs ........................................................................................ P.3.122
Time-Error Calculation Inputs and Outputs .................................................................... P.3.122
Traveling Wave Fault Location Settings ......................................................................... P.3.125
Fault Location Triggering Elements................................................................................ P.3.130
Fault Type........................................................................................................................ P.3.131
Fault Location Settings for 2-, 3-, and 4-Terminal Lines With One TAP Point.............. P.3.132
Fault Location Settings for 4-Terminal Line With Two TAP Points ............................... P.3.133
Fault Location Relay Word Bit ....................................................................................... P.3.133
Open-Phase Detection Relay Word Bits ......................................................................... P.3.134
Pole Open Logic Settings ................................................................................................ P.3.134
EPO Setting Selections.................................................................................................... P.3.135
Pole Open Logic Relay Word Bits .................................................................................. P.3.135
LOP Logic Setting........................................................................................................... P.3.138
LOP Logic Relay Word Bits ........................................................................................... P.3.138
Fault Type Identification Logic Settings ......................................................................... P.3.141
FIDS Relay Word Bits..................................................................................................... P.3.141
Directional Elements Supervising Ground Elements...................................................... P.3.142
Ground Directional Element Settings ............................................................................. P.3.142
Ground Directional Element Settings AUTO Calculations............................................. P.3.143
Ground Directional Element Enables.............................................................................. P.3.145
Ground Directional Element Relay Word Bits................................................................ P.3.147
Reference Table for Figure 3.87–Figure 3.89 ................................................................. P.3.150
Vector Definitions for Equation 3.49–Equation 3.61 ...................................................... P.3.151
Phase- and Negative-Sequence Directional Elements Relay Word Bits .......................................P.3.153
Zone Directional Settings................................................................................................ P.3.154
CVT Transient Detection Logic Setting.......................................................................... P.3.155
CVT Transient Detection Logic Relay Word Bit ............................................................ P.3.155
Series-Compensation Line Logic Relay Settings............................................................ P.3.156
Load-Encroachment Logic Relay Settings...................................................................... P.3.157
Load-Encroachment Logic Relay Word Bits .................................................................. P.3.157
OOS Logic Relay Settings .............................................................................................. P.3.159
OOS Logic Relay Word Bits ........................................................................................... P.3.160
Input/Output Combinations of the Pole-Open OOS Blocking Logic ............................. P.3.173
Mho Ground-Distance Element Settings......................................................................... P.3.179
Mho Ground-Distance Elements Relay Word Bits ......................................................... P.3.179
Date Code 20151029
List of Tables
ix
Table 3.92
Table 3.93
Table 3.94
Table 3.95
Table 3.96
Table 3.97
Table 3.98
Differences Between the Adaptive Right Resistance and the Existing
Resistance Blinder.......................................................................................................... P.3.183
Quadrilateral Ground-Distance Element Settings ........................................................... P.3.183
Quadrilateral Ground-Distance Elements Relay Word Bits............................................ P.3.184
Mho Phase Distance Element Settings............................................................................ P.3.187
Mho Phase Distance Elements Relay Word Bits............................................................. P.3.187
High-Speed and Conventional Element Directional Setting Summary .......................... P.3.191
Quadrilateral Phase Distance Element Settings .............................................................. P.3.195
Table 3.99
Quadrilateral Phase Distance Elements Relay Word Bits ............................................... P.3.195
Table 3.100
Zone Delay Settings ........................................................................................................ P.3.198
Table 3.101
Zone Time Delay Relay Word Bits ................................................................................. P.3.198
Table 3.102
Phase Overcurrent Element Settings ............................................................................... P.3.200
Table 3.103
Negative-Sequence Overcurrent Element Settings.......................................................... P.3.201
Table 3.104
Residual Ground Overcurrent Element Settings ............................................................. P.3.201
Table 3.105
Phase Instantaneous/Definite-Time Line Overcurrent Relay Word Bits .....................................P.3.202
Table 3.106
Negative-Sequence Instantaneous/Definite-Time Line Overcurrent Relay Word Bits ... P.3.202
Table 3.107
Residual Ground Instantaneous/Definite-Time Line Overcurrent Relay Word Bits....... P.3.202
Table 3.108
U.S. Time-Overcurrent Equations ................................................................................... P.3.206
Table 3.109
IEC Time-Overcurrent Equations.................................................................................... P.3.206
Table 3.110
Time-Overcurrent Operating Quantity List..................................................................... P.3.210
Table 3.111
Settings for the Time-Overcurrent Elements................................................................... P.3.212
Table 3.112
Undervoltage Operating Quantity List ............................................................................ P.3.214
Table 3.113
Overvoltage Operating Quantity List .............................................................................. P.3.215
Table 3.114
SOTF Settings ................................................................................................................. P.3.218
Table 3.115
SOTF Relay Word Bits.................................................................................................... P.3.218
Table 3.116
ECOMM Setting ............................................................................................................. P.3.220
Table 3.117
DCB Settings................................................................................................................... P.3.223
Table 3.118
DCB Relay Word Bits ..................................................................................................... P.3.223
Table 3.119
POTT Settings ................................................................................................................. P.3.227
Table 3.120
POTT Relay Word Bits ................................................................................................... P.3.228
Table 3.121
DCUB Settings ................................................................................................................ P.3.233
Table 3.122
DCUB Relay Word Bits .................................................................................................. P.3.234
Table 3.123
Additional Settings for Single-Pole Tripping (SPT) ....................................................... P.3.237
Table 3.124
Setting TULO Unlatch Trip Options............................................................................... P.3.239
Table 3.125
Trip Logic Settings .......................................................................................................... P.3.241
Table 3.126
Trip Logic Relay Word Bits ............................................................................................ P.3.244
Table 3.127
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Logic Settings .......................................................... P.3.253
Table 3.128
Circuit Breaker Failure Relay Word Bits ........................................................................ P.3.254
Table 3.129
87L Serial Interface Options ........................................................................................... P.3.261
Table 3.130
Enable 87L Channel Settings .......................................................................................... P.3.263
Table 3.131
Primary Serial Channel Setting ....................................................................................... P.3.263
Table 3.132
Channel Out of Service Settings ..................................................................................... P.3.264
Table 3.133
Relay Address Settings.................................................................................................... P.3.264
Table 3.134
Virtual Terminal Over Serial Channel............................................................................. P.3.264
Table 3.135
EIA-422 Clock Settings .................................................................................................. P.3.265
Table 3.136
EIA-422 Configuration Settings and Cables ................................................................... P.3.266
Table 3.137
SEL-3094 Settings........................................................................................................... P.3.266
Table 3.138
CCITT G.703 Cables....................................................................................................... P.3.267
Table 3.139
Timing Source Settings ................................................................................................... P.3.268
Table 3.140
Data Synchronization Settings ........................................................................................ P.3.270
Table 3.141
Time Fallback Modes ...................................................................................................... P.3.271
Table 3.142
Ethernet Interface Options .............................................................................................. P.3.271
Table 3.143
Ethernet MAC Address Settings ..................................................................................... P.3.272
Table 3.144
Ethernet VLAN Settings ................................................................................................. P.3.273
Table 3.145
Impact of Network Performance on 87L Protection ....................................................... P.3.278
Table 3.146
87L Enable and Blocking Settings .................................................................................. P.3.280
Table 3.147
87L Blocking Relay Word Bits ....................................................................................... P.3.281
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
x
List of Tables
SEL-411L Relay
Table 4.22
Table 4.23
Table 4.24
Table 4.25
Table 4.26
Table 5.1
Table 5.2
Table 5.3
Table 5.4
Table 5.5
Table 5.6
Table 5.7
Table 5.8
Table 5.9
Table 4.6
Table 4.7
Table 4.8
Table 4.9
Table 4.10
Table 4.11
Table 4.12
Table 4.13
Table 4.14
Table 4.15
Table 4.16
Table 4.17
Table 4.18
Table 4.19
Table 4.20
Table 4.21
Table 3.148
Active 87L Channels as Determined by the Relay Part Number and the E87CH and
87PCH Settings .............................................................................................................. P.3.282
Table 3.149
Active and Required Channel Relay Word Bits .............................................................. P.3.284
Table 3.150
Clock Offset Calculation Quality Relay Word Bits ........................................................ P.3.286
Table 3.151
87L Absolute Time Quality Relay Word Bit................................................................... P.3.287
Table 3.152
87L Synchronization Method Settings ............................................................................ P.3.287
Table 3.153
Channel Synchronization Method Relay Word Bits ....................................................... P.3.290
Table 3.154
87L Channel Alarm Settings ........................................................................................... P.3.291
Table 3.155
87L Channel Alarm Relay Word Bits ............................................................................. P.3.296
Table 3.156
87L Channel Monitoring Analog Quantities................................................................... P.3.297
Table 3.157
Hot Standby Logic Settings............................................................................................. P.3.298
Table 3.158
Hot Channel Standby Logic Relay Word Bits................................................................. P.3.299
Table 3.159
Time Fallback Logic Setting ........................................................................................... P.3.300
Table 3.160
Summary of Time Fallback Modes ................................................................................. P.3.300
Table 3.161
Merits of Time Fallback Modes Depending on the E87CH Application Setting............ P.3.301
Table 3.162
Time Fallback Mode Relay Word Bits ............................................................................ P.3.305
Table 3.163
87L Status Relay Word Bits ............................................................................................ P.3.308
Table 3.164
COM87L Report Data Items ........................................................................................... P.3.310
Table 3.165
87L Channel Recorder Settings....................................................................................... P.3.315
Table 3.166
System Data—500 kV Overhead Transmission Line and CT/PT Ratios........................ P.3.316
Table 3.167
Secondary Values ............................................................................................................ P.3.317
Table 3.168
System Data—345 kV Overhead Transmission Line ..................................................... P.3.332
Table 3.169
Secondary Impedances .................................................................................................... P.3.333
Table 4.1
Autoreclose Logical States for Circuit Breaker 1 ............................................................... P.4.4
Table 4.2
Table 4.3
Table 4.4
Table 4.5
One-Circuit-Breaker Three-Pole Reclose Initial Settings ................................................... P.4.8
One-Circuit-Breaker Single-Pole Reclose Initial Settings .................................................. P.4.8
One Circuit Breaker Modes of Operation ........................................................................... P.4.8
Dynamic Leader/Follower Settings................................................................................... P.4.16
Leader/Follower Selection ................................................................................................ P.4.18
Example One: Reset and 79CY3 States ............................................................................ P.4.18
Example One: Lockout State............................................................................................. P.4.18
Example One: Reset State After Reclaim Time ................................................................ P.4.19
Leader/Follower Selection ................................................................................................ P.4.19
Example Two: Initial Reset State ...................................................................................... P.4.20
Example Two: Final Reset State ....................................................................................... P.4.20
Leader/Follower Selection ................................................................................................ P.4.21
Example Three: Reset State .............................................................................................. P.4.21
Example Three: Three-Pole Cycle State ........................................................................... P.4.21
Example Three: Lockout State, BK1 ................................................................................ P.4.22
Leader/Follower Selection ................................................................................................ P.4.22
Two Circuit Breakers: Circuit Breaker BK1 Out of Service ............................................. P.4.23
Two-Circuit-Breaker Three-Pole Reclose Initial Settings................................................. P.4.23
Two-Circuit-Breaker Single-Pole Reclose Initial Settings................................................ P.4.24
Circuit Breaker BK1 Modes of Operation ........................................................................ P.4.24
Circuit Breaker BK2 Modes of Operation ........................................................................ P.4.25
Trip Logic Enable Options ................................................................................................ P.4.26
Autoreclose Logic Settings ............................................................................................... P.4.45
Autoreclose Logic Relay Word Bits.................................................................................. P.4.47
Synchronism-Check Relay Word Bits............................................................................... P.4.52
Setting Categories and Appropriate Section ....................................................................... P.5.1
Default Alias Settings.......................................................................................................... P.5.3
Global Settings Categories .................................................................................................. P.5.4
General Global Settings ...................................................................................................... P.5.4
Global Enables .................................................................................................................... P.5.5
Station DC1 Monitor (and Station DC2 Monitor) .............................................................. P.5.5
Control Inputs...................................................................................................................... P.5.5
Interface Board #1 Control Inputs....................................................................................... P.5.5
Interface Board #2 Control Inputs....................................................................................... P.5.6
Date Code 20151029
List of Tables
xi
Table 5.54
Table 5.55
Table 5.56
Table 5.57
Table 6.1
Table 6.2
Table 6.3
Table 6.4
Table 6.5
Table 7.1
Table 7.2
Table 7.3
Table 7.4
Table 7.5
Table 5.38
Table 5.39
Table 5.40
Table 5.41
Table 5.42
Table 5.43
Table 5.44
Table 5.45
Table 5.46
Table 5.47
Table 5.48
Table 5.49
Table 5.50
Table 5.51
Table 5.52
Table 5.53
Table 5.23
Table 5.24
Table 5.25
Table 5.26
Table 5.27
Table 5.28
Table 5.29
Table 5.30
Table 5.31
Table 5.32
Table 5.33
Table 5.34
Table 5.35
Table 5.36
Table 5.37
Table 5.10
Table 5.11
Table 5.12
Table 5.13
Table 5.14
Table 5.15
Table 5.16
Table 5.17
Table 5.18
Table 5.19
Table 5.20
Table 5.21
Table 5.22
Settings Group Selection..................................................................................................... P.5.6
Data Reset Control .............................................................................................................. P.5.6
Frequency Estimation.......................................................................................................... P.5.7
Time-Error Calculation ....................................................................................................... P.5.7
Current and Voltage Source Selection................................................................................. P.5.7
Synchronized Phasor Measurement .................................................................................... P.5.7
Time and Date Management ............................................................................................... P.5.8
DNP3 ................................................................................................................................... P.5.9
Protection Free-Form SEL
OGIC
Control Equations ............................................................ P.5.9
Output Settings Categories................................................................................................ P.5.10
Interface Board #1 ............................................................................................................. P.5.10
Interface Board #2 ............................................................................................................. P.5.10
Remote Analog Outputs .................................................................................................... P.5.11
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Transmit Equations ................................................................................ P.5.11
87L Communication Bits Transmit Equations .................................................................. P.5.11
Front-Panel Settings Categories ........................................................................................ P.5.11
Front-Panel Settings .......................................................................................................... P.5.12
Selectable Screens for the Front Panel .............................................................................. P.5.15
Selectable Operator Pushbuttons....................................................................................... P.5.16
Front-Panel Event Display ................................................................................................ P.5.16
Boolean Display Points ..................................................................................................... P.5.17
Analog Display Points....................................................................................................... P.5.17
Local Control..................................................................................................................... P.5.17
Local Bit SEL
OGIC
............................................................................................................ P.5.17
SER Parameters................................................................................................................. P.5.18
Port Settings Categories .................................................................................................... P.5.18
Protocol Selection ............................................................................................................. P.5.18
Communications Settings.................................................................................................. P.5.19
SEL Protocol Settings ....................................................................................................... P.5.19
Fast Message Read Data Access ....................................................................................... P.5.19
DNP3 Serial Protocol Settings .......................................................................................... P.5.20
DNP3 LAN/WAN Settings................................................................................................ P.5.21
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Protocol Settings .................................................................................... P.5.22
RTD Protocol Settings....................................................................................................... P.5.23
PMU Protocol Settings...................................................................................................... P.5.23
87L Port Settings ............................................................................................................... P.5.23
87L Channel Monitoring Settings ..................................................................................... P.5.24
87L Communications Bits Debounce Time Delay—Serial Communication ................................ P.5.24
87L Communications Bits Debounce Time Delay—Ethernet Communication............................ P.5.25
DNP3 Settings Categories ................................................................................................. P.5.25
DNP3 Object Default Map Enables .................................................................................. P.5.25
Binary Input Map .............................................................................................................. P.5.25
Binary Output Map............................................................................................................ P.5.26
Counter Map...................................................................................................................... P.5.26
Analog Input Map ............................................................................................................. P.5.26
Analog Output Map........................................................................................................... P.5.26
Minimum and Maximum Fault Location .......................................................................... P.5.26
Bay Settings....................................................................................................................... P.5.26
SEL Software Solutions ...................................................................................................... P.6.1
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet Applications ............................................................................... P.6.2
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet Submenu Options....................................................................... P.6.2
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet HMI Tree View Functions.......................................................... P.6.6
Help ................................................................................................................................... P.6.21
Front-Panel Inactivity Time-Out Setting............................................................................. P.7.3
Metering Screens Enable Settings....................................................................................... P.7.4
SER Point Settings .............................................................................................................. P.7.7
Display Point Settings—Boolean........................................................................................ P.7.9
Display Point Settings—Analog ....................................................................................... P.7.10
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
xii
List of Tables
SEL-411L Relay
Table 9.18
Table 9.19
Table 9.20
Table 9.21
Table 9.22
Table 10.1
Table 10.2
Table 10.3
Table 10.4
Table 10.5
Table 10.6
Table 10.7
Table 10.8
Table 11.1
Table 11.2
Table 11.3
Table 11.4
Table 11.5
Table 11.6
Table 11.7
Table 11.8
Table 11.9
Table 8.6
Table 8.7
Table 8.8
Table 8.9
Table 8.10
Table 9.1
Table 9.2
Table 9.3
Table 9.4
Table 9.5
Table 9.6
Table 9.7
Table 9.8
Table 9.9
Table 9.10
Table 7.6
Table 7.7
Table 7.8
Table 7.9
Table 7.10
Table 7.11
Table 7.12
Table 7.13
Table 8.1
Table 8.2
Table 8.3
Table 8.4
Table 8.5
Table 9.11
Table 9.12
Table 9.13
Table 9.14
Table 9.15
Table 9.16
Table 9.17
Display Point Settings—Boolean and Analog Examples ................................................. P.7.10
Front-Panel Pushbutton Functions While Viewing SER Events ....................................... P.7.20
Local Bit Control Settings................................................................................................. P.7.26
Local Bit SEL
OGIC
Control Equations.............................................................................. P.7.26
Settings Available From the Front Panel........................................................................... P.7.28
Front-Panel Target LEDs................................................................................................... P.7.37
TIME Target LED Trigger Elements—Factory Defaults .................................................. P.7.38
Operator Control Pushbuttons and LEDs—Factory Defaults ........................................... P.7.41
Report Settings .................................................................................................................... P.8.6
Event Report Nonvolatile Storage Capability ..................................................................... P.8.7
EVE Command ................................................................................................................. P.8.15
EVE Command Examples................................................................................................. P.8.16
Event Report Metered Analog Quantities ......................................................................... P.8.18
87L Event Report Analog Quantities ................................................................................ P.8.18
Event Types ....................................................................................................................... P.8.27
SUM Command................................................................................................................. P.8.27
HIS Command................................................................................................................... P.8.29
SER Commands ................................................................................................................ P.8.32
Circuit Breaker Monitor Configuration............................................................................... P.9.2
Circuit Breaker Maintenance Information—Example ........................................................ P.9.4
Contact Wear Monitor Settings—Circuit Breaker 1 ........................................................... P.9.4
Circuit Breaker Monitor Initiate SEL
OGIC
Control Equations............................................ P.9.7
Circuit Breaker Monitor Close SEL
OGIC
Control Equations.............................................. P.9.8
BRE Command ................................................................................................................. P.9.17
DC Monitor Settings and Relay Word Bit Alarms............................................................ P.9.21
Example DC Battery Voltage Conditions.......................................................................... P.9.21
Example DC Battery Monitor Settings—125 Vdc for Vdc1 and 48 Vdc for Vdc2.......... P.9.22
Example DC Battery Monitor Settings—AC Ripple Voltages.......................................... P.9.23
Example DC Battery Monitor Settings—Ground Detection Factor (EGADVS := Y) ..... P.9.24
MET Command................................................................................................................. P.9.25
Instantaneous Metering Quantities—Voltages, Currents, Frequency.............................................. P.9.27
Instantaneous Metering Quantities—Powers .................................................................... P.9.28
Instantaneous Metering Accuracy—Voltages, Currents, and Frequency .......................... P.9.29
Instantaneous Metering Accuracy—Power....................................................................... P.9.29
Maximum/Minimum Metering Quantities—Voltages, Currents, Frequency, and Powers ....................................................................................................................... P.9.30
Demand and Peak Demand Metering Quantities—(LINE) .............................................. P.9.32
Rolling Demand Calculations ........................................................................................... P.9.33
Demand Metering Settings................................................................................................ P.9.35
Energy Metering Quantities—(LINE)............................................................................... P.9.36
Differential Metering Quantities ....................................................................................... P.9.39
Power Supply Voltage Inputs ............................................................................................ P.10.3
General Serial Port Settings .............................................................................................. P.10.5
Access Levels Commands and Passwords ........................................................................ P.10.7
Settings Classes and Instances ...................................................................................... P.10.14
Actions at Settings Prompts ............................................................................................ P.10.16
Actions at Text-Edit Mode Prompts ................................................................................ P.10.18
Control Inputs.................................................................................................................. P.10.27
Communications Port Commands That Clear Relay Buffers ......................................... P.10.28
Acceptance Testing ........................................................................................................... P.11.2
Commissioning Testing..................................................................................................... P.11.2
Maintenance Testing ......................................................................................................... P.11.3
Test Mode Output Supervision Under Default Settings .................................................... P.11.4
UUT Database Entries for SEL-5401 Relay Test System Software—5 A Relay ........... P.11.10
UUT Database Entries for SEL-5401 Relay Test System Software—1 A Relay ........... P.11.10
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Pickup ........................................................................ P.11.15
CT Ratios for the W and X Current Inputs of Relay 1 and Relay 2................................ P.11.20
Tap Values of the Four Terminals.................................................................................... P.11.20
Date Code 20151029
List of Tables
xiii
Table 11.10
Negative-Sequence Directional Element Settings AUTO Calculations .......................... P.11.33
Table 11.11
Alarm Relay Word Bits ................................................................................................... P.11.38
Table 11.12
Overall Status Section ..................................................................................................... P.11.41
Table 11.13
Channel Configuration and Status Section...................................................................... P.11.42
Table 11.14
Channel Statistics Section ............................................................................................... P.11.43
Table 11.15
Troubleshooting Procedures............................................................................................ P.11.44
Table 12.1
Table 12.2
Circuit Breaker and Disconnect Switch Definitions ....................................................... P.12.14
Circuit Breaker State Representations............................................................................. P.12.15
Table 12.3
Table 12.4
Table 12.5
Table 13.1
Table 13.2
Disconnect Switch State Representations ....................................................................... P.12.15
Three-Position Disconnect Switch State Representations .............................................. P.12.24
Three-Position Disconnect Switch Control Screen Status and Control Options ............ P.12.25
Relay Timekeeping Modes................................................................................................ P.13.2
Date/Time Last Update Sources........................................................................................ P.13.5
Table 14.1
Table 14.2
Table 14.3
Table 14.4
Advanced SEL
OGIC
Control Equation Features................................................................ P.14.1
SEL
OGIC
Control Equation Programming Summary........................................................ P.14.2
Definitions for Active Setting Group Indication Relay Word Bits SG1–SG6 .................. P.14.9
Definitions for Active Setting Group Switching SEL
OGIC
Control Equation
Settings SS1–SS6............................................................................................................. P.14.9
Summary of SEL
OGIC
Control Equation Elements ........................................................ P.14.12
First Execution Bit Operation on Power-Up ................................................................... P.14.12
Table 14.5
Table 14.6
Table 14.7
Table 14.8
Table 14.9
First Execution Bit Operation on Automation Settings Change ..................................... P.14.13
First Execution Bit Operation on Protection Settings Change, Group Switch, and Source Selection ...................................................................................................... P.14.13
SEL
OGIC
Control Equation Variable Quantities ............................................................. P.14.13
Table 14.10
SEL
OGIC
Control Equation Math Variable Quantities .................................................... P.14.14
Table 14.11
Latch Bit Quantities ........................................................................................................ P.14.15
Table 14.12
Latch Bit Parameters ....................................................................................................... P.14.15
Table 14.13
Conditioning Timer Quantities........................................................................................ P.14.17
Table 14.14
Conditioning Timer Parameters ...................................................................................... P.14.17
Table 14.15
Sequencing Timer Quantities .......................................................................................... P.14.20
Table 14.16
Sequencing Timer Parameters ......................................................................................... P.14.20
Table 14.17
Counter Quantities........................................................................................................... P.14.22
Table 14.18
Counter Parameters ......................................................................................................... P.14.22
Table 14.19
Operator Precedence from Highest to Lowest ................................................................ P.14.25
Table 14.20
Boolean Operator Summary............................................................................................ P.14.25
Table 14.21
Parentheses Operation in Boolean Equation ................................................................... P.14.26
Table 14.22
NOT Operator Truth Table .............................................................................................. P.14.26
Table 14.23
AND Operator Truth Table ............................................................................................. P.14.26
Table 14.24
OR Operator Truth Table................................................................................................. P.14.27
Table 14.25
Comparison Operations................................................................................................... P.14.28
Table 14.26
Math Operator Summary................................................................................................. P.14.29
Table 14.27
Math Error Examples ...................................................................................................... P.14.29
Table 14.28
SEL-300 Series Relays and SEL-400 Series SEL
OGIC
Control Equation
Programming Features ................................................................................................... P.14.35
Table 14.29
SEL-300 Series Relays and SEL-400 Series SEL
OGIC
Control Equation
Boolean Operators.......................................................................................................... P.14.35
Table 15.1
Table 15.2
2AC Command.................................................................................................................. P.15.1
89CLOSE n Command...................................................................................................... P.15.2
Table 15.3
Table 15.4
Table 15.5
Table 15.6
89OPEN n Command........................................................................................................ P.15.3
AAC Command ................................................................................................................. P.15.3
ACC Command ................................................................................................................. P.15.3
BAC Command ................................................................................................................. P.15.3
Table 15.7
Table 15.8
BNA Command ................................................................................................................. P.15.3
BRE n Command .............................................................................................................. P.15.4
Table 15.9
BRE n C and BRE n R Commands ................................................................................... P.15.4
Table 15.10
BRE C A and BRE R A Commands ................................................................................. P.15.4
Table 15.11
BRE n H Command........................................................................................................... P.15.4
Table 15.12
BRE n P Command ........................................................................................................... P.15.5
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
xiv
List of Tables
SEL-411L Relay
Table 15.13
CAL Command ................................................................................................................. P.15.5
Table 15.14
CAS Command ................................................................................................................. P.15.5
Table 15.15
CBR Command ................................................................................................................. P.15.5
Table 15.16
CBR TERSE Command .................................................................................................... P.15.6
Table 15.17
CEV Command ................................................................................................................. P.15.6
Table 15.18
CEV ACK Command ........................................................................................................ P.15.6
Table 15.19
CEV C Command.............................................................................................................. P.15.7
Table 15.20
CEV L Command.............................................................................................................. P.15.7
Table 15.21
CEV Lyyy Command ........................................................................................................ P.15.7
Table 15.22
CEV N Command ............................................................................................................. P.15.7
Table 15.23
CEV NSET Command ...................................................................................................... P.15.8
Table 15.24
CEV NSUM Command..................................................................................................... P.15.8
Table 15.25
CEV Sx Command ............................................................................................................ P.15.8
Table 15.26
CEV TERSE Command .................................................................................................... P.15.9
Table 15.27
CEV Command Option Groups ........................................................................................ P.15.9
Table 15.28
CHI Command ................................................................................................................ P.15.10
Table 15.29
CHI TERSE Command ................................................................................................... P.15.10
Table 15.30
CLOSE n Command........................................................................................................ P.15.10
Table 15.31
COM 87L Command....................................................................................................... P.15.11
Table 15.32
COM c Command ........................................................................................................... P.15.11
Table 15.33
COM c C and COM c R Command ................................................................................ P.15.12
Table 15.34
COM c L Command ........................................................................................................ P.15.12
Table 15.35
COM RTC c Command................................................................................................... P.15.13
Table 15.36
COM RTC c C and COM RTC c R Command ............................................................... P.15.13
Table 15.37
CON nn Command.......................................................................................................... P.15.14
Table 15.38
COPY Command............................................................................................................. P.15.14
Table 15.39
CPR Command................................................................................................................ P.15.15
Table 15.40
CSE Command................................................................................................................ P.15.15
Table 15.41
CSE TERSE Command................................................................................................... P.15.16
Table 15.42
CST Command................................................................................................................ P.15.17
Table 15.43
CSU Command ............................................................................................................... P.15.17
Table 15.44
CEV ACK Command ...................................................................................................... P.15.17
Table 15.45
CSU MB Command ........................................................................................................ P.15.17
Table 15.46
CSU N Command............................................................................................................ P.15.18
Table 15.47
CSU TERSE Command .................................................................................................. P.15.18
Table 15.48
DATE Command ............................................................................................................. P.15.18
Table 15.49
DNA Command............................................................................................................... P.15.19
Table 15.50
DNP Command ............................................................................................................... P.15.19
Table 15.51
ETH Command ............................................................................................................... P.15.19
Table 15.52
ETH C and ETH R Command......................................................................................... P.15.20
Table 15.53
EVE Command ............................................................................................................... P.15.20
Table 15.54
EVE A Command............................................................................................................ P.15.20
Table 15.55
EVE ACK Command ...................................................................................................... P.15.21
Table 15.56
EVE C Command............................................................................................................ P.15.21
Table 15.57
EVE D Command............................................................................................................ P.15.21
Table 15.58
EVE L Command ............................................................................................................ P.15.21
Table 15.59
EVE Lyyy Command ...................................................................................................... P.15.22
Table 15.60
EVE N Command............................................................................................................ P.15.22
Table 15.61
EVE NSET Command .................................................................................................... P.15.22
Table 15.62
EVE NSUM Command ................................................................................................... P.15.22
Table 15.63
EVE Sx Command .......................................................................................................... P.15.23
Table 15.64
EVE Command Option Groups....................................................................................... P.15.23
Table 15.65
EVE Command Examples............................................................................................... P.15.23
Table 15.66
EXIT Command .............................................................................................................. P.15.24
Table 15.67
FILE Command............................................................................................................... P.15.24
Table 15.68
GOOSE Command.......................................................................................................... P.15.24
Table 15.69
Accessible GOOSE IED Information ............................................................................. P.15.25
Table 15.70
GROUP Command.......................................................................................................... P.15.26
Date Code 20151029
List of Tables
xv
Table 15.71
HELP Command ............................................................................................................. P.15.27
Table 15.72
HIS Command................................................................................................................. P.15.27
Table 15.73
HIS C and HIS R Commands.......................................................................................... P.15.27
Table 15.74
HIS CA and HIS RA Commands .................................................................................... P.15.28
Table 15.75
ID Command ................................................................................................................... P.15.28
Table 15.76
IRIG Command ............................................................................................................... P.15.29
Table 15.77
LOOP Command............................................................................................................. P.15.30
Table 15.78
LOOP DATA Command.................................................................................................. P.15.30
Table 15.79
LOOP R Command ......................................................................................................... P.15.31
Table 15.80
MAC Command .............................................................................................................. P.15.31
Table 15.81
MAP 1 Command............................................................................................................ P.15.31
Table 15.82
MAP 1 Region Command ............................................................................................... P.15.32
Table 15.83
MET Command............................................................................................................... P.15.32
Table 15.84
MET AMV Command .................................................................................................... P.15.33
Table 15.85
MET ANA Command ..................................................................................................... P.15.33
Table 15.86
MET BAT Command ...................................................................................................... P.15.33
Table 15.87
MET D Command........................................................................................................... P.15.34
Table 15.88
MET DIF Command ....................................................................................................... P.15.34
Table 15.89
MET E Command ........................................................................................................... P.15.35
Table 15.90
MET M Command .......................................................................................................... P.15.36
Table 15.91
MET PM Command ........................................................................................................ P.15.36
Table 15.92
MET PMV Command ..................................................................................................... P.15.37
Table 15.93
MET RMS Command ..................................................................................................... P.15.37
Table 15.94
MET RTC Command ...................................................................................................... P.15.38
Table 15.95
MET SYN Command...................................................................................................... P.15.38
Table 15.96
MET T Command ........................................................................................................... P.15.38
Table 15.97
OAC Command ............................................................................................................... P.15.39
Table 15.98
OPEN n Command.......................................................................................................... P.15.39
Table 15.99
PAC Command ................................................................................................................ P.15.39
Table 15.100
PAS Level New_Password Command............................................................................. P.15.40
Table 15.101
PAS Level DISABLE Command .................................................................................... P.15.40
Table 15.102
PING Command .............................................................................................................. P.15.40
Table 15.103
PORT p Command .......................................................................................................... P.15.41
Table 15.104
PORT KILL n Command ................................................................................................ P.15.42
Table 15.105
PRO Command................................................................................................................ P.15.42
Table 15.106
PUL OUTnnn Command ................................................................................................ P.15.43
Table 15.107
QUIT Command.............................................................................................................. P.15.43
Table 15.108
RTC Command................................................................................................................ P.15.43
Table 15.109
SER Command................................................................................................................ P.15.44
Table 15.110
SER C and SER R Commands ........................................................................................ P.15.44
Table 15.111
SER CA and SER RA Commands .................................................................................. P.15.44
Table 15.112
SER CV or SER RV Commands..................................................................................... P.15.45
Table 15.113
SER D Command ............................................................................................................ P.15.45
Table 15.114
SET Command Overview ............................................................................................... P.15.46
Table 15.115
SET A Command ............................................................................................................ P.15.46
Table 15.116
SET B Command ............................................................................................................ P.15.46
Table 15.117
SET D Command ............................................................................................................ P.15.47
Table 15.118
SET F Command ............................................................................................................. P.15.47
Table 15.119
SET G Command ............................................................................................................ P.15.47
Table 15.120
SET L Command............................................................................................................. P.15.47
Table 15.121
SET M Command............................................................................................................ P.15.48
Table 15.122
SET N Command ............................................................................................................ P.15.48
Table 15.123
SET O Command ............................................................................................................ P.15.48
Table 15.124
SET P Command ............................................................................................................. P.15.48
Table 15.125
SET R Command ............................................................................................................ P.15.49
Table 15.126
SET T Command............................................................................................................. P.15.49
Table 15.127
SET TERSE Command Examples .................................................................................. P.15.49
Table 15.128
SHO Command Overview............................................................................................... P.15.50
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
xvi
List of Tables
Table 15.129
SHO A Command ........................................................................................................... P.15.50
Table 15.130
SHO B Command............................................................................................................ P.15.50
Table 15.131
SHO D Command ........................................................................................................... P.15.51
Table 15.132
SHO F Command ............................................................................................................ P.15.51
Table 15.133
SHO G Command ........................................................................................................... P.15.51
Table 15.134
SHO L Command............................................................................................................ P.15.51
Table 15.135
SHO M Command........................................................................................................... P.15.52
Table 15.136
SHO N Command ........................................................................................................... P.15.52
Table 15.137
SHO O Command ........................................................................................................... P.15.52
Table 15.138
SHO P Command ............................................................................................................ P.15.52
Table 15.139
SHO R Command............................................................................................................ P.15.53
Table 15.140
SHO T Command............................................................................................................ P.15.53
Table 15.141
SNS Command................................................................................................................ P.15.53
Table 15.142
STA Command ................................................................................................................ P.15.53
Table 15.143
STA A Command ............................................................................................................ P.15.54
Table 15.144
STA C and STA R Command.......................................................................................... P.15.54
Table 15.145
STA S Command............................................................................................................. P.15.54
Table 15.146
STA SC and STA SR Command ..................................................................................... P.15.54
Table 15.147
SUM Command............................................................................................................... P.15.55
Table 15.148
SUM ACK Command ..................................................................................................... P.15.55
Table 15.149
SUM N Command........................................................................................................... P.15.55
Table 15.150
TAR Command................................................................................................................ P.15.56
Table 15.151
TAR ALL Command....................................................................................................... P.15.56
Table 15.152
TAR R Command ............................................................................................................ P.15.56
Table 15.153
TAR X Command............................................................................................................ P.15.57
Table 15.154
TEC Command................................................................................................................ P.15.57
Table 15.155
TEST DB Command ....................................................................................................... P.15.58
Table 15.156
TEST DB OFF Command............................................................................................... P.15.58
Table 15.157
TEST DB2 Command ..................................................................................................... P.15.59
Table 15.158
TEST DB2 OFF Command............................................................................................. P.15.59
Table 15.159
TEST FM Command ....................................................................................................... P.15.60
Table 15.160
TEST FM DEM Command ............................................................................................. P.15.60
Table 15.161
TEST FM OFF Command............................................................................................... P.15.61
Table 15.162
TEST FM PEAK Command ........................................................................................... P.15.61
Table 15.163
TIME Command ............................................................................................................. P.15.61
Table 15.164
TIME Q Command.......................................................................................................... P.15.62
Table 15.165
TIME DST Command..................................................................................................... P.15.62
Table 15.166
TRI Command................................................................................................................. P.15.62
Table 15.167
VER Command ............................................................................................................... P.15.63
Table 15.168
VIEW 1 Commands—Region......................................................................................... P.15.64
Table 15.169
VIEW 1 Commands—Register Item............................................................................... P.15.64
Table 15.170
VIEW 1 Commands—Bit ............................................................................................... P.15.65
Table 16.1
Table 16.2
Alphabetical List of Relay Word Bits ............................................................................... P.16.1
Row List of Relay Word Bits .......................................................................................... P.16.39
Table 17.1
Table 17.2
Table A.1
Table A.2
Table A.3
Table A.4
Table A.5
Table B.1
Alphabetical List of Analog Quantities............................................................................. P.17.1
Analog Quantities List By Function................................................................................ P.17.19
Firmware Revision History .................................................................................................P.A.2
Firmware Compatibility ......................................................................................................P.A.7
SEL
BOOT
Revision History .................................................................................................P.A.8
SEL-411L ICD File Revision History.................................................................................P.A.8
Manual Revision History.....................................................................................................P.A.9
Firmware Upgrade Files......................................................................................................P.B.2
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
List of Tables
xvii
Communications Manual
Commands in Recommended Sequence for Automatic Configuration ............................C.2.10
Communications Features ......................................................................C.2.10
Communications Protocol Settings ........................................................C.2.16
Communications Message Transmission Period....................................C.2.17
Communications ID Settings for Three-Terminal Application..............C.2.17
SEL-2885 Initialization String [MODE PREFIX ADDR:SPEED] ..................................C.2.17
SEL Communications Processor Port 1 Automatic Messaging Settings ............................C.3.7
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
xviii
List of Tables
SEL-411L Relay
User-Defined Digital Status Words Selected by the NUMDSW Setting ..........................C.6.13
Date Code 20151029
List of Tables
xix
PMU Settings in the Relay for SEL Fast Message Protocol (in Global Settings) ............C.6.38
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
This page intentionally left blank
List of Figures
Protection Manual
Figure 1.1
Figure 1.2
Figure 1.3
Figure 1.4
Functional Overview ........................................................................................................... P.1.2
Two-Terminal Application With Hot Standby Channel ...................................................... P.1.9
Two-Terminal Application With In-Line Power Transformer and Hot Standby
Channel ............................................................................................................................ P.1.9
Two-Terminal Application With Hot Standby Channel and Tapped Load
(Load Significantly Less Than Through-Current) ........................................................... P.1.9
Two-Terminal Application With Voltage Inputs ................................................................. P.1.9
Terminal Master/Slave Application With Optional Third Communications Channel ...... P.1.10
Figure 1.5
Figure 1.6
Figure 1.7
Figure 2.1
Figure 2.2
Figure 2.3
Figure 2.4
Figure 2.5
Figure 2.6
Figure 2.7
Four-Terminal Ethernet Application ................................................................................. P.1.10
Horizontal Front-Panel Template (a); Vertical Front-Panel Template (b)........................... P.2.3
Rear 4U Template, Fixed Terminal Block Analog Inputs ................................................... P.2.4
Standard Control Output Connection.................................................................................. P.2.6
Hybrid Control Output Connection..................................................................................... P.2.7
High-Speed, High-Current Interrupting Control Output Connection, INTE ...................... P.2.8
High-Speed, High-Current Interrupting Control Output Connection, INTC ...................... P.2.8
High-Speed, High-Current Interrupting Control Output Typical Terminals, INTE............ P.2.9
Figure 2.8
Precharging Internal Capacitance of High-Speed, High-Current Interrupting Output
Contacts, INTE ................................................................................................................ P.2.9
Figure 2.9
INT2 I/O Interface Board .................................................................................................. P.2.11
Figure 2.10
INTC I/O Interface Board (High Speed)........................................................................... P.2.11
Figure 2.11
INTD I/O Interface Board (Standard) ............................................................................... P.2.11
Figure 2.12
INT7 I/O Interface Board .................................................................................................. P.2.11
Figure 2.13
INTE I/O Interface Board ................................................................................................. P.2.11
Figure 2.14
Jumper Location on the Main Board................................................................................. P.2.15
Figure 2.15
Major Jumper and Connector Locations on the Main Board ............................................ P.2.16
Figure 2.16
Main Components of the EIA-232 Board, Showing the Location of Serial Port
Jumpers JMP1 and JMP2 .............................................................................................. P.2.17
Figure 2.17
Major Jumper and Connector Locations on the INT2 I/O Board ..................................... P.2.19
Figure 2.18
Major Jumper and Connector Locations on the INTC I/O Board..................................... P.2.20
Figure 2.19
Major Jumper and Connector Locations on the INTE I/O Board ..................................... P.2.21
Figure 2.20
Major Jumper and Connector Locations on the INT7 I/O Board ..................................... P.2.22
Figure 2.21
Chassis Dimensions........................................................................................................... P.2.25
Figure 2.22
5U Rear, Main Board With EIA-422 Serial Communications Card in Bay 1, INT2
(200 Slot) and INTE (300 Slot) Interface Boards.......................................................... P.2.26
Figure 2.23
4U Rear, Main Board With 1300 nm IEEE C37.94 Fiber-Optic Serial Communications
Card in Bay 1, EIA-422 Serial Communications Card in Bay 2, 10/100BASE-T and 100BASE-FX Ethernet Card in Bay 3, INT7 (200 Slot) Interface Board....................... P.2.27
Figure 2.24
5U Rear, Main Board With 850 nm IEEE C37.94 Fiber-Optic Card in Bay 1, EIA-422
Serial Communications Card in Bay 2, 10/100BASE-T and 100BASE-FX in Bay 3,
Standard INTD (200 Slot) and INT 7 (300 Slot) Interface Boards....................................... P.2.27
Figure 2.25
4U Rear, Main Board With EIA-422 Serial Communications Card in Bay 1,
High-Speed INTC (200 Slot) Interface Board............................................................... P.2.28
Figure 2.26
6U Rear, Main Board With EIA-422 Serial Communications Card in Bay 1,
1550 nm Fiber-Optic Communications Card in Bay 2, Four 10/100BASE-T Port
Ethernet Card in Bay 3, High-Speed INTC (200 Slot) Interface Board, INT 7 (300 Slot)
Interface Board, INTE (400 Slot) Interface Board, Connectorized Terminal Blocks for
Current and Voltage Inputs ............................................................................................... P.2.28
Figure 2.27
Rear-Panel Symbols .......................................................................................................... P.2.29
Figure 2.28
Screw Terminal Connector Keying ................................................................................... P.2.30
Figure 2.29
Rear-Panel Receptacle Keying .......................................................................................... P.2.31
Figure 2.30
Control Output OUT208 (INT2) ....................................................................................... P.2.35
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
xxii
List of Figures
Figure 2.31
Card Layout (Rear View of the Main Board).................................................................... P.2.38
Figure 2.32
Relay to Computer—D-Subminiature 9-Pin Connector ................................................... P.2.38
Figure 2.33
G.703 Card in the Bay 1 Position and a 850nm IEEE C39.94 Fiber Card in the
Bay 2 Position................................................................................................................ P.2.39
Figure 2.34
Typical EIA-422 Interconnection...................................................................................... P.2.40
Figure 2.35
Typical G.703 Codirectional Interconnection ................................................................... P.2.40
Figure 2.36
IEEE Standard C37.94 Fiber-to-Multiplexer Interface ..................................................... P.2.41
Figure 2.37
1300 nm Direct Fiber Connection..................................................................................... P.2.41
Figure 2.38
1550 nm Direct Fiber Connection..................................................................................... P.2.41
Figure 2.39
Four 100BASE-FX Port Configuration............................................................................. P.2.43
Figure 2.40
Four 10/100BASE-T Port Configuration .......................................................................... P.2.43
Figure 2.41
100BASE-FX and 10/100BASE-T Port Configuration..................................................... P.2.43
Figure 2.42
Typical External AC/DC Connections—Single Circuit Breaker ...................................... P.2.45
Figure 2.43
Typical External AC/DC Connections—Dual Circuit Breaker......................................... P.2.46
Figure 3.1
Sampling and Transmitting Instantaneous Local Currents in the 87L Scheme
(Breaker-and-a-Half Scheme).......................................................................................... P.3.5
Figure 3.2
Figure 3.3
Figure 3.4
Figure 3.5
Consolidating Currents in the 87L Scheme While Conserving the Channel Bandwidth ............. P.3.5
Traditional Alpha Plane Operating Characteristic for 87L Zone With Two Currents ........ P.3.7
AC Saturation Path of the External Fault Detector (Simplified)....................................... P.3.10
Sharing the EFD Bits Among Relay Terminals ................................................................ P.3.11
Figure 3.6
Figure 3.7
Figure 3.8
Figure 3.9
DC Saturation Path of the External Fault Detector (Simplified)....................................... P.3.12
Illustration of Signal Processing for Line Charging Current Compensation .................... P.3.13
Admittance of a Sample Transmission Line as a Function of Frequency and
Line Length in Per-Unit of the Value at 60 Hz Differences Between the
Distributed Line and Its Lumped Parameter Model Can Lead to Under- or Over-
Compensation of the Charging Current ......................................................................... P.3.15
The Under- or Over-Compensated High-Frequency Components of the Charging
Current Are Taken Care of by Boosting the Fundamental Frequency Restraining Term..........P.3.15
Figure 3.10
A Combined Transformer and Line Zone Protected With a Single Line Differential Relay
Capable of Handling In-Line Transformers (a), With Dedicated Transformer and
Line Relays (b), and With the Primary Protection Following the Dedicated Relay
Approach While the Backup Protection Uses a Single 87L Relay (c).................................. P.3.16
Figure 3.11
Compensation for In-Line Transformers is Performed at Early Stages of Signal
Processing, Allowing the Rest of the Algorithm to Remain Unchanged ...................... P.3.17
Figure 3.12
The Relay Allows Different Transformer Windings for each Measured CT (a) as
Well as Dual-Breaker Terminations of the In-Line Transformer Windings (b)............. P.3.18
Figure 3.13
Principle of Harmonic Restraint in the Generalized Alpha Plane Operating
Characteristic ................................................................................................................. P.3.19
Figure 3.14
Illustration of the Channel-Based Synchronization Method ............................................. P.3.21
Figure 3.15
Application of Disturbance Detection in the Relay .......................................................... P.3.25
Figure 3.16
Local (87DDL) and Remote (87DDR) Disturbance Detection Harmonized With the
Stub Bus (ESTUB) and Test (87TEST) Conditions ...................................................... P.3.25
Figure 3.17
Adaptive Disturbance Detector Algorithm........................................................................ P.3.26
Figure 3.18
Disturbance Detection Guards Against Multiple Problems Greatly Increasing
Security .......................................................................................................................... P.3.27
Figure 3.19
87LP Phase Differential Element Logic............................................................................ P.3.33
Figure 3.20
Overcurrent Supervision Logic for Line Current Differential Elements (Use With
Logic Diagrams in Figure 3.19, Figure 3.22, and Figure 3.23)..................................... P.3.34
Figure 3.21
Alpha Plane Comparator Logic for Line Current Differential Elements (Use With
Logic Diagrams in Figure 3.19, Figure 3.22, and Figure 3.23)..................................... P.3.34
Figure 3.22
87LQ Negative-Sequence Differential Element Logic ..................................................... P.3.37
Figure 3.23
87LG Zero-Sequence Differential Element Logic ............................................................ P.3.40
Figure 3.24
87OP Logic ....................................................................................................................... P.3.42
Figure 3.25
87DTT Transmit Logic ..................................................................................................... P.3.46
Figure 3.26
87DTT Logic..................................................................................................................... P.3.47
Figure 3.27
Interaction Between Debounce Timing and Fail-Safe Substitution in the
User-Programmable 87L Bits Logic.............................................................................. P.3.49
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
List of Figures
xxiii
Figure 3.28
Providing Extra Security for Critical 87L Communications Bits Used for Unconditional
Tripping (a Combination of Delay and Disturbance Detection Supervision)........................ P.3.53
Figure 3.29
Providing Extra Security for Critical 87L Communications Bits Used for
Unconditional Tripping (Two Bits Used) ...................................................................... P.3.53
Figure 3.30
External Fault Detection Logic—AC Path and Reset ....................................................... P.3.56
Figure 3.31
External Fault Detection Logic—DC Path........................................................................ P.3.57
Figure 3.32
External Fault Detection Logic—Communications .......................................................... P.3.58
Figure 3.33
External Fault Detection Logic—Usage in the 87L Elements .......................................... P.3.59
Figure 3.34
Disturbance Detection Logic Responding to Local and Remote Signals, Stub Bus, and Test Mode................................................................................................................ P.3.61
Figure 3.35
Disturbance Detection Logic Responding to Local Current and Voltage Signals ............ P.3.62
Figure 3.36
Disturbance Detection Logic Responding to Remote Currents ........................................ P.3.63
Figure 3.37
Adaptive Disturbance Detection Algorithm...................................................................... P.3.64
Figure 3.38
Extended Security Switchover Logic for the Alpha Plane Settings .................................. P.3.67
Figure 3.39
Open CT Detection Logic ................................................................................................. P.3.70
Figure 3.40
Line Charging Current Compensation Control Logic....................................................... P.3.73
Figure 3.41
Line Charging Current Calculations and Removal ........................................................... P.3.74
Figure 3.42
Augmenting Restraint Terms for Finite Accuracy of Line Charging Current
Compensation at Higher Frequencies............................................................................ P.3.75
Figure 3.43
Sample Three-Terminal Relay Application....................................................................... P.3.78
Figure 3.44
Sample Three-Terminal Relay Application With In-Line Transformer ............................ P.3.82
Figure 3.45
Harmonic Sensing Logic................................................................................................... P.3.87
Figure 3.46
Magnetizing Inrush and Overexcitation Blocking Logic .................................................. P.3.88
Figure 3.47
87LP Logic in Applications With In-Line Transformers .................................................. P.3.91
Figure 3.48
87LP Alpha Plane Concept With Harmonic Restraint ...................................................... P.3.92
Figure 3.49
87LQ Logic In Applications With In-Line Transformers ................................................. P.3.94
Figure 3.50
Level 1 Watchdog Monitor Diagram................................................................................. P.3.98
Figure 3.51
Level 2 Watchdog Monitor Diagram................................................................................. P.3.99
Figure 3.52
Phase Elements Operating Times—Serial Communication............................................ P.3.100
Figure 3.53
Negative-Sequence Elements Operating Times—Serial Communication....................................P.3.100
Figure 3.54
Zero-Sequence Elements Operating Times—Serial Communication............................. P.3.101
Figure 3.55
Phase Elements Operating Times—Ethernet Communication ....................................... P.3.101
Figure 3.56
Negative-Sequence Elements Operating Times—Ethernet Communication .................. P.3.102
Figure 3.57
Zero-Sequence Elements Operating Times—Ethernet Communication......................................P.3.102
Figure 3.58
Power System Used for CT Selection Example.............................................................. P.3.103
Figure 3.59
Simulation of CT Transient Response on the 600:5 Tap................................................. P.3.106
Figure 3.60
Current and Voltage Source Connections for the Relay.................................................. P.3.107
Figure 3.61
Main and Alternate Line Current Source Assignments .................................................. P.3.107
Figure 3.62
Combined Currents for Line Current Source Assignment .............................................. P.3.108
Figure 3.63
Breaker Current Source Assignments ............................................................................. P.3.108
Figure 3.64
ESS := 1, Single Circuit Breaker Configuration ............................................................. P.3.113
Figure 3.65
ESS := 2, Single Circuit Breaker Configuration ............................................................. P.3.113
Figure 3.66
ESS := 3, Double Circuit Breaker Configuration............................................................ P.3.114
Figure 3.67
ESS := 4, Double Circuit Breaker Configuration............................................................ P.3.115
Figure 3.68
Tapped EHV Overhead Transmission Line..................................................................... P.3.116
Figure 3.69
ESS := Y, Tapped Line .................................................................................................... P.3.117
Figure 3.70
ESS := Y, Single Circuit Breaker With Current Polarizing Source Tapped
Power Transformer ...................................................................................................... P.3.118
Figure 3.71
SEL-411L Alpha Quantity Calculation........................................................................... P.3.121
Figure 3.72
Sample TEC Command Response .................................................................................. P.3.123
Figure 3.73
Sample TEC n Command Response ............................................................................... P.3.123
Figure 3.74
Relay Exchanging TW Peak Information Via 87L Communications Channel............... P.3.125
Figure 3.75
Summary Command Output Showing the TW Fault Location Result .........................................P.3.126
Figure 3.76
Simplified Equivalent Network for Fault Location in Two-Terminal Lines ................... P.3.127
Figure 3.77
Fault Location on Three-Terminal Lines......................................................................... P.3.128
Figure 3.78
Fault Location on Four-Terminal Lines .......................................................................... P.3.129
Figure 3.79
Line With Two TAP Points.............................................................................................. P.3.132
Figure 3.80
Pole Open Logic Diagram............................................................................................... P.3.136
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
xxiv
List of Figures
SEL-411L Relay
Figure 3.81
LOP Logic Process Overview ......................................................................................... P.3.138
Figure 3.82
LOP Logic ....................................................................................................................... P.3.140
Figure 3.83
Level 2 Watchdog Monitor Diagram............................................................................... P.3.141
Figure 3.84
32Q and 32QG Enable Logic Diagram ........................................................................... P.3.146
Figure 3.85
32V and 32I Enable Logic Diagram ............................................................................... P.3.146
Figure 3.86
Best Choice Ground Directional Logic ........................................................................... P.3.148
Figure 3.87
Negative-Sequence Voltage-Polarized Directional Element Logic................................. P.3.149
Figure 3.88
Zero-Sequence Voltage-Polarized Directional Element Logic ....................................... P.3.149
Figure 3.89
Zero-Sequence Current-Polarized Directional Element Logic ....................................... P.3.150
Figure 3.90
Ground Directional Element Output Logic Diagram ...................................................... P.3.150
Figure 3.91
32P, Phase Directional Element Logic Diagram ............................................................. P.3.153
Figure 3.92
32Q, Negative-Sequence Directional Element Logic Diagram ...................................... P.3.153
Figure 3.93
CVT Transient Detection Logic ...................................................................................... P.3.155
Figure 3.94
Load-Encroachment Logic Diagram ............................................................................... P.3.156
Figure 3.95
Load-Encroachment Characteristics ............................................................................... P.3.157
Figure 3.96
OOS Characteristics ........................................................................................................ P.3.158
Figure 3.97
OOS Positive-Sequence Measurements .......................................................................... P.3.161
Figure 3.98
OOS Override Logic ....................................................................................................... P.3.161
Figure 3.99
OOS Logic Diagram........................................................................................................ P.3.162
Figure 3.100
Open-Pole OSB Unblock Logic ...................................................................................... P.3.163
Figure 3.101
Zero-Setting OOS Blocking Function............................................................................. P.3.163
Figure 3.102
Swing Center Voltage Slope Detection Logic................................................................. P.3.165
Figure 3.103
Starter Zone Characteristic.............................................................................................. P.3.166
Figure 3.104
Swing Signature Detector Logic ..................................................................................... P.3.166
Figure 3.105
Swing Signature Detector Logic ..................................................................................... P.3.168
Figure 3.106
Reset Conditions Logic ................................................................................................... P.3.169
Figure 3.107
Type of Power Swings Detected by the DOSB Function................................................ P.3.169
Figure 3.108
Dependable Power-Swing Block Detector Logic (EOOS = Y1) .................................... P.3.170
Figure 3.109
Dependable Power-Swing Block Detector Logic (EOOS = Y) ...................................... P.3.171
Figure 3.110
Relay Word Bit DOSB Is the OR Combination of DOSBY1 and DOSBY.................... P.3.171
Figure 3.111
Logic Diagram of the Three-Phase Fault Detector ......................................................... P.3.172
Figure 3.112
Pole Open OOS Blocking Logic ..................................................................................... P.3.172
Figure 3.113
I0/IA2 Angle Supervision During Pole-Open Situation ................................................. P.3.173
Figure 3.114
Blocking of the MAG Signal by the OSBA Fault Detection .......................................... P.3.173
Figure 3.115
Unblocking of the MAB Signal by the 67QUB Element................................................ P.3.173
Figure 3.116
Directional Element Signals 67QUBF and 67QUBR ..................................................... P.3.174
Figure 3.117
OST Scheme Logic Resistive and Reactive Blinders...................................................... P.3.175
Figure 3.118
Logic that Determines Positive-Sequence Impedance Trajectory (EOOS = Y1) ........... P.3.176
Figure 3.119
Out-of-Step Trip Logic (EOOS = Y1) ............................................................................ P.3.177
Figure 3.120
Out-of-Step Blocking for Zone 1–Zone 5 ....................................................................... P.3.178
Figure 3.121
Zone 1 Mho Ground-Distance Element Logic Diagram ................................................. P.3.180
Figure 3.122
Zone 2 Mho Ground-Distance Element Logic Diagram ................................................. P.3.181
Figure 3.123
Zones 3, 4, and 5 Mho Ground-Distance Element Logic Diagram................................. P.3.182
Figure 3.124
Zone 1 Quadrilateral Ground-Distance Element Logic Diagram ................................... P.3.185
Figure 3.125
Zone 2 Quadrilateral Distance Element Logic Diagram ................................................. P.3.185
Figure 3.126
Zones 3, 4, and 5 Quadrilateral Ground-Distance Element Logic .................................. P.3.186
Figure 3.127
Zone 1 Mho Phase Distance Element Logic Diagram .................................................... P.3.188
Figure 3.128
Zone 2 Mho Phase Distance Element Logic Diagram .................................................... P.3.189
Figure 3.129
Zones 3, 4, and 5 Mho Phase Distance Element Logic Diagram.................................... P.3.190
Figure 3.130
Quadrilateral Phase Distance Element Characteristic (TANGP = 0) .............................. P.3.192
Figure 3.131
Quadrilateral Phase Distance Element Characteristic (TANGP = –10 degrees) ............. P.3.193
Figure 3.132
Network to Determine Homogeneity .............................................................................. P.3.193
Figure 3.133
Tilt in Apparent Fault Impedance Resulting From Nonhomogeneity............................. P.3.194
Figure 3.134
Zone 1 AB Loop Conventional Quadrilateral Phase-Distance Element Logic ............... P.3.196
Figure 3.135
Zone 2 AB Loop Conventional Quadrilateral Phase Distance Element Logic ............... P.3.196
Figure 3.136
Zone 3, 4, and 5 AB Loop Conventional Quadrilateral Phase Distance
Element Logic.............................................................................................................. P.3.197
Figure 3.137
Zone Timers .................................................................................................................... P.3.199
Date Code 20151029
List of Figures
xxv
Figure 3.138
Phase Instantaneous/Definite-Time Overcurrent Elements............................................. P.3.203
Figure 3.139
Residual Ground Instantaneous/Directional Overcurrent Elements...........................................P.3.204
Figure 3.140
Negative-Sequence Instantaneous/Directional Overcurrent Elements............................ P.3.205
Figure 3.141
U.S. Curves U1, U2, U3, and U4 .................................................................................... P.3.207
Figure 3.142
U.S. Curve U5 and IEC Curves C1, C2, and C3 ............................................................. P.3.208
Figure 3.143
IEC Curves C4 and C5 .................................................................................................... P.3.209
Figure 3.144
Time-Overcurrent Logic.................................................................................................. P.3.210
Figure 3.145
Over/Undervoltage Logic................................................................................................ P.3.213
Figure 3.146
SOTF Logic Diagram ...................................................................................................... P.3.219
Figure 3.147
Required Zone Directional Settings ................................................................................ P.3.220
Figure 3.148
DCB Logic Diagram ....................................................................................................... P.3.224
Figure 3.149
Permissive Trip Receiver Logic Diagram ....................................................................... P.3.229
Figure 3.150
Directional Permissive Trip Receiver Logic Diagram .................................................... P.3.229
Figure 3.151
POTT Logic Diagram...................................................................................................... P.3.230
Figure 3.152
POTT Scheme Logic (ECOMM := POTT3) With Echo and Weak Infeed ..................... P.3.231
Figure 3.153
POTT Cross-Country Logic Diagram ............................................................................. P.3.232
Figure 3.154
Permissive Trip Received Logic Diagram....................................................................... P.3.235
Figure 3.155
DCUB Logic Diagram .................................................................................................... P.3.236
Figure 3.156
Trip Logic Diagram......................................................................................................... P.3.242
Figure 3.157
87L Single-Pole Trip Select Logic .................................................................................. P.3.244
Figure 3.158
Two Circuit Breakers Trip Logic Diagram...................................................................... P.3.246
Figure 3.159
Trip A Unlatch Logic ...................................................................................................... P.3.247
Figure 3.160
Trip During Open Pole .................................................................................................... P.3.247
Figure 3.161
Scheme 1 Logic Diagram................................................................................................ P.3.248
Figure 3.162
Scheme 2 Three-Pole Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Logic..................................... P.3.249
Figure 3.163
Scheme 2 Single-Pole Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Logic.................................... P.3.250
Figure 3.164
Current-Supervised Three-Pole Retrip Logic ................................................................. P.3.250
Figure 3.165
Current-Supervised Single-Pole Retrip Logic................................................................. P.3.251
Figure 3.166
No Current/Residual Current Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Logic Diagram.......... P.3.251
Figure 3.167
Circuit Breaker Failure Seal-In Logic Diagram .............................................................. P.3.256
Figure 3.168
Failure to Interrupt Load Current Logic Diagram........................................................... P.3.256
Figure 3.169
Flashover Protection Logic Diagram .............................................................................. P.3.257
Figure 3.170
Circuit Breaker Failure Trip Logic Diagram................................................................... P.3.257
Figure 3.171
Over/Underfrequency Logic............................................................................................ P.3.258
Figure 3.172
Frequency Source Logic.................................................................................................. P.3.258
Figure 3.173
Undervoltage Supervision Logic..................................................................................... P.3.258
Figure 3.174
Table Y12. Summary of the Valpha and 81UVSP Calculations ..................................... P.3.260
Figure 3.175
EIA-422 Three-Terminal, Master/Outstation Serial Application Using SEL-3094
Interface Converters..................................................................................................... P.3.262
Figure 3.176
Four-Terminal Ethernet Application Using SEL ICON Multiplexers ..........................................P.3.262
Figure 3.177
Two Terminal Serial Application using Redundant Channels ........................................ P.3.263
Figure 3.178
EIA-422 Typical Connection........................................................................................... P.3.265
Figure 3.179
Back-to-Back EIA-422 Connection ................................................................................ P.3.266
Figure 3.180
Back-to-Back EIA-422 Connection Using the SEL-3094 .............................................. P.3.266
Figure 3.181
CCITT G.703 Typical Connection .................................................................................. P.3.267
Figure 3.182
Back-to-Back CCITT G.703 Connection........................................................................ P.3.267
Figure 3.183
C37.94, 850/1300 nm Typical Connection...................................................................... P.3.268
Figure 3.184
C37.94 Back-to-Back Connection................................................................................... P.3.269
Figure 3.185
Typical Ethernet Connections ......................................................................................... P.3.272
Figure 3.186
Redundant Ethernet Connection...................................................................................... P.3.272
Figure 3.187
Shared Ethernet Connection............................................................................................ P.3.273
Figure 3.188
Line Module of a Single ICON for Transporting Current Differential Data of Eight
Relays to the SONET Network.................................................................................... P.3.276
Figure 3.189
Isolated Redundant Network Topology With Star Configuration and a Ring
Topology With Dedicated, Managed Switches Between Substations ......................... P.3.277
Figure 3.190
Redundant Isolated Ring-Connected Network With Dedicated, Managed Switches ..... P.3.277
Figure 3.191
Isolated Ring-Connected Network With Dedicated, Managed Switches........................ P.3.278
Figure 3.192
Isolated, Star-Connected Network With Managed or Unmanaged Switches.................. P.3.278
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
xxvi
List of Figures
SEL-411L Relay
Figure 3.193
Enable Logic for the 87L Data Transmission and Differential Elements ....................... P.3.281
Figure 3.194
Blocking Logic for the 87L Function.............................................................................. P.3.281
Figure 3.195
87CHpRQ Logic for the 2SS and 3SM 87L Configurations........................................... P.3.283
Figure 3.196
87CHpRQ Logic for the 2SD 87L Configuration ........................................................... P.3.284
Figure 3.197
Synchronization Method Logic (p-th Channel) .............................................................. P.3.289
Figure 3.198
Quality of Synchronization Logic (p-th Channel)........................................................... P.3.290
Figure 3.199
Quality of Synchronization Logic (87L Scheme) ........................................................... P.3.290
Figure 3.200
Maximum Round-Trip Delay Alarm Logic .................................................................... P.3.292
Figure 3.201
Step Change in Round-Trip Delay Logic........................................................................ P.3.293
Figure 3.202
Channel Asymmetry Alarm Logic .................................................................................. P.3.294
Figure 3.203
Lost Packet Alarm Logic................................................................................................. P.3.295
Figure 3.204
Noise Burst Alarm Logic ................................................................................................ P.3.295
Figure 3.205
Momentary Channel Break Alarm Logic........................................................................ P.3.295
Figure 3.206
Channel OK Status .......................................................................................................... P.3.296
Figure 3.207
Default Channel Alarm Logic ......................................................................................... P.3.296
Figure 3.208
Principle of Hot Standby Channel Switching ................................................................. P.3.298
Figure 3.209
Channel Switchover Logic (87HSB)............................................................................... P.3.299
Figure 3.210
Request for Time Fallback From the p-th 87L Channel.................................................. P.3.302
Figure 3.211
Time Fallback Mode 1 Logic .......................................................................................... P.3.302
Figure 3.212
Time Fallback Mode 2 Logic .......................................................................................... P.3.303
Figure 3.213
Time Fallback Modes 3 and 4 Logic............................................................................... P.3.305
Figure 3.214
87L Master (87MTR) Logic............................................................................................ P.3.307
Figure 3.215
87L Outstation (87SLV) Logic........................................................................................ P.3.307
Figure 3.216
87L Lost (87LST) Logic ................................................................................................. P.3.308
Figure 3.217
COM 87L Report Layout ................................................................................................ P.3.310
Figure 3.218
500 kV Overhead Transmission Line.............................................................................. P.3.316
Figure 3.219
Channel Report During Commissioning Testing ............................................................ P.3.320
Figure 3.220
345 kV Overhead Tapped Line With In-Line Transformer............................................. P.3.332
Figure 3.221
CT Saturation Plot ........................................................................................................... P.3.337
Figure 3.222
Various Overcurrent Elements Used in this Example ..................................................... P.3.339
Figure 4.1
Figure 4.2
Autoreclose State Diagram for Circuit Breaker 1 ............................................................... P.4.4
Multiple Circuit Breaker Arrangement ............................................................................. P.4.15
Figure 4.3
Figure 4.4
Figure 4.5
Figure 4.6
Multiple Circuit Breaker Arrangement ............................................................................. P.4.18
Leader/Follower Selection by Relay Input........................................................................ P.4.22
Circuit Breaker Pole-Open Logic Diagram....................................................................... P.4.27
Line-Open Logic Diagram When E79 := Y ...................................................................... P.4.27
Figure 4.7
Figure 4.8
Line-Open Logic Diagram When E79 := Y1 .................................................................... P.4.27
Single-Pole Reclose Enable .............................................................................................. P.4.28
Figure 4.9
Three-Pole Reclose Enable ............................................................................................... P.4.28
Figure 4.10
One Circuit Breaker Single-Pole Cycle State (79CY1) .................................................... P.4.29
Figure 4.11
One Circuit Breaker Three-Pole Cycle State (79CY3) ..................................................... P.4.30
Figure 4.12
Two Circuit Breakers Single-Pole Cycle State (79CY1) When E79 := Y ........................ P.4.31
Figure 4.13
Two Circuit Breakers Single-Pole Cycle State (79CY1) When E79 := Y1 ...................... P.4.33
Figure 4.14
Two Circuit Breakers Three-Pole Cycle State (79CY3) When E79 := Y ......................... P.4.35
Figure 4.15
Two Circuit Breakers Three-Pole Cycle State (79CY3) When E79 := Y1 ....................... P.4.38
Figure 4.16
Manual Close Logic .......................................................................................................... P.4.42
Figure 4.17
Voltage Check Element Applications................................................................................ P.4.44
Figure 4.18
Voltage Check Element Logic........................................................................................... P.4.45
Figure 4.19
Partial Breaker-and-a-Half or Partial Ring-Bus Breaker Arrangement............................. P.4.49
Figure 4.20
Synchronism-Check Voltages for Two Circuit Breakers................................................... P.4.50
Figure 4.21
Synchronism-Check Settings ............................................................................................ P.4.51
Figure 4.22
Synchronism-Check Relay Word Bits............................................................................... P.4.51
Figure 4.23
Example Synchronism-Check Voltage Connections to the Relay..................................... P.4.53
Figure 4.24
Synchronism-Check Voltage Reference............................................................................ P.4.54
Figure 4.25
Normalized Synchronism-Check Voltage Sources VS1 and VS2..................................... P.4.55
Figure 4.26
Healthy Voltage Window and Indication........................................................................... P.4.56
Figure 4.27
Synchronism-Check Enable Logic.................................................................................... P.4.56
Figure 4.28
“No Slip” System Synchronism-Check Element Output Response.................................. P.4.58
Date Code 20151029
List of Figures
xxvii
Figure 4.29
“Slip—No Compensation” Synchronism-Check Element Output Response ................... P.4.59
Figure 4.30
“Slip—With Compensation” Synchronism-Check Element Output Response ................ P.4.61
Figure 4.31
Alternative Synchronism-Check Source 2 Example and Settings .................................... P.4.63
Figure 5.1
Changing a Default Name to an Alias................................................................................. P.5.3
Figure 6.1
Figure 6.2
Figure 6.3
Figure 6.4
Figure 6.5
Figure 6.6
Figure 6.7
Figure 6.8
Figure 6.9
Terminal Prompt.................................................................................................................. P.6.5
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet Driver Information in the FID String ......................................... P.6.5
Virtual Relay Front Panel .................................................................................................... P.6.6
Control Window .................................................................................................................. P.6.8
Settings Editor Selection ..................................................................................................... P.6.9
Setting the Part Number .................................................................................................... P.6.10
Settings Driver................................................................................................................... P.6.10
Opening Settings ............................................................................................................... P.6.11
Reading Settings................................................................................................................ P.6.11
Figure 6.10
Relay Editor....................................................................................................................... P.6.12
Figure 6.11
Settings Editor Window .................................................................................................... P.6.13
Figure 6.12
Expression Builder ............................................................................................................ P.6.13
Figure 6.13
Retrieving an Event History .............................................................................................. P.6.16
Figure 6.14
Event Waveform Window ................................................................................................. P.6.16
Figure 6.15
Sample Event Oscillogram................................................................................................ P.6.17
Figure 6.16
Retrieving Event Report Waveforms................................................................................. P.6.17
Figure 6.17
Sample Phasors Event Waveform Screen.......................................................................... P.6.18
Figure 6.18
Sample Harmonic Analysis Event Waveform Screen ....................................................... P.6.18
Figure 6.19
Sample Event Report Summary Screen ............................................................................ P.6.19
Figure 6.20
Sample Event Waveform Settings Screen ......................................................................... P.6.19
Figure 6.21
Database Manager ............................................................................................................. P.6.20
Figure 6.22
Database Manager Copy/Move ......................................................................................... P.6.21
Figure 7.1
Figure 7.2
Front Panel (12 Pushbutton Model) .................................................................................... P.7.1
LCD Display and Navigation Pushbuttons ......................................................................... P.7.2
Figure 7.3
Figure 7.4
Figure 7.5
Figure 7.6
RELAY ELEMENTS Highlighted in MAIN MENU ......................................................... P.7.3
Sample ROTATING DISPLAY ........................................................................................... P.7.5
Sample Alarm Points Screen............................................................................................... P.7.6
Deasserted Alarm Point....................................................................................................... P.7.7
Figure 7.7
Figure 7.8
Clear Alarm Point Confirmation Screen ............................................................................. P.7.8
No Alarm Points Screen ...................................................................................................... P.7.8
Figure 7.9
Alarm Points Data Loss Screen........................................................................................... P.7.8
Figure 7.10
Sample Display Points Screen............................................................................................. P.7.9
Figure 7.11
Fast Meter Display Points Sample Screen ........................................................................ P.7.12
Figure 7.12
Contrast Adjustment.......................................................................................................... P.7.13
Figure 7.13
Enter Password Screen ...................................................................................................... P.7.13
Figure 7.14
Invalid Password Screen.................................................................................................... P.7.14
Figure 7.15
MAIN MENU ................................................................................................................... P.7.14
Figure 7.16
METER MENU Screens ................................................................................................... P.7.14
Figure 7.17
METER SUBMENU......................................................................................................... P.7.15
Figure 7.18
RMS, FUND, and DEMAND Metering Screens .............................................................. P.7.16
Figure 7.19
ENERGY, MAX/MIN, and SYNCH CHECK Metering Screens ..................................... P.7.17
Figure 7.20
Differential Metering......................................................................................................... P.7.18
Figure 7.21
Events Menu Screen.......................................................................................................... P.7.19
Figure 7.22
EVENT SUMMARY Screens ........................................................................................... P.7.19
Figure 7.23
SER Events Screen With Three Events ............................................................................. P.7.20
Figure 7.24
No SER Events Screen ...................................................................................................... P.7.20
Figure 7.25
BREAKER MONITOR Report Screens ........................................................................... P.7.21
Figure 7.26
RELAY ELEMENTS Screen ............................................................................................ P.7.22
Figure 7.27
ELEMENT SEARCH Screen............................................................................................ P.7.22
Figure 7.28
LOCAL CONTROL Initial Menu ..................................................................................... P.7.23
Figure 7.29
BREAKER CONTROL Screens ....................................................................................... P.7.24
Figure 7.30
LOCAL CONTROL Example Menus............................................................................... P.7.25
Figure 7.31
Local Bit Supervision Logic ............................................................................................. P.7.27
Figure 7.32
OUTPUT TESTING Screen.............................................................................................. P.7.28
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
xxviii
List of Figures
Figure 7.33
SET/SHOW Screens.......................................................................................................... P.7.29
Figure 7.34
Sample Settings Input Screens .......................................................................................... P.7.30
Figure 7.35
Changing the ACTIVE GROUP........................................................................................ P.7.31
Figure 7.36
DATE/TIME Screen .......................................................................................................... P.7.31
Figure 7.37
Edit DATE and Edit TIME Screens .................................................................................. P.7.32
Figure 7.38
Relay STATUS Screens..................................................................................................... P.7.32
Figure 7.39
VIEW CONFIGURATION Sample Screens..................................................................... P.7.33
Figure 7.40
DISPLAY TEST Screens .................................................................................................. P.7.34
Figure 7.41
RESET ACCESS LEVEL Screen ..................................................................................... P.7.34
Figure 7.42
One-Line Diagram Screen................................................................................................. P.7.34
Figure 7.43
Sample Status Warning, Alarm Point Assertion, and Trip
EVENT SUMMARY Screens ....................................................................................... P.7.35
Figure 7.44
Sample Status Warning in the LCD Message Area........................................................... P.7.36
Figure 7.45
Factory Default Front-Panel Target Areas......................................................................... P.7.37
Figure 7.46
Operator Control Pushbuttons and LEDs .......................................................................... P.7.41
Figure 7.47
Factory-Default Operator Control Pushbuttons ................................................................ P.7.43
Figure 8.1
Figure 8.2
Figure 8.3
Figure 8.4
Signal Processing in the Relay ............................................................................................ P.8.3
Data Capture/Event Report Times....................................................................................... P.8.6
Sample Oscillogram ............................................................................................................ P.8.8
Sample COMTRADE .HDR Header File ........................................................................... P.8.9
Figure 8.5
Figure 8.6
Figure 8.7
Figure 8.8
COMTRADE .CFG Configuration File Data.................................................................... P.8.10
COMTRADE Header File................................................................................................. P.8.12
Example Traveling Wave Oscillogram.............................................................................. P.8.14
Fixed Analog Section of the Event Report........................................................................ P.8.17
Figure 8.9
Digital Section of the Event Report .................................................................................. P.8.20
Figure 8.10
Sample Digital Portion of the Event Report...................................................................... P.8.21
Figure 8.11
Summary Section of the Event Report .............................................................................. P.8.23
Figure 8.12
Settings Section of the Event Report................................................................................. P.8.24
Figure 8.13
Sample Compressed ASCII Event Report ........................................................................ P.8.25
Figure 8.14
Sample Event Summary Report ........................................................................................ P.8.26
Figure 8.15
Sample Compressed ASCII Summary .............................................................................. P.8.28
Figure 8.16
Sample Event History........................................................................................................ P.8.29
Figure 8.17
Sample Compressed ASCII History Report...................................................................... P.8.30
Figure 8.18
Sample SER Report........................................................................................................... P.8.31
Figure 8.19
Sample Compressed ASCII SER Report .......................................................................... P.8.33
Figure 9.1
Intelligent Circuit Breaker Monitor..................................................................................... P.9.2
Figure 9.2
Figure 9.3
Figure 9.4
Figure 9.5
Figure 9.6
Figure 9.7
Figure 9.8
Figure 9.9
Circuit Breaker Maintenance Curve (Manufacturer’s Data) ............................................... P.9.4
Circuit Breaker Contact Wear Curve With Relay Settings.................................................. P.9.5
Trip Bus Sensing With Relay Input IN206 ......................................................................... P.9.8
Mechanical Operating Time for Circuit Breaker 1 A-Phase ............................................... P.9.9
Electrical Operating Time for Circuit Breaker 1 A-Phase ................................................ P.9.11
Timing Illustration for Pole Scatter at Trip ....................................................................... P.9.12
Pole Discrepancy Measurement ........................................................................................ P.9.14
Breaker Report (for the Most Recent Operation).............................................................. P.9.18
Figure 9.10
Breaker History Report ..................................................................................................... P.9.18
Figure 9.11
Circuit Breaker Preload Data ............................................................................................ P.9.19
Figure 9.12
Typical Station DC Battery System................................................................................... P.9.20
Figure 9.13
Ground Detection Factor Areas......................................................................................... P.9.23
Figure 9.14
Battery Metering: Terminal ............................................................................................... P.9.24
Figure 9.15
Complex Power (P/Q) Plane ............................................................................................. P.9.28
Figure 9.16
Typical Current Measuring Accuracy ............................................................................... P.9.30
Figure 9.17
Thermal Demand Metering ............................................................................................... P.9.33
Figure 9.18
Rolling Demand Metering ................................................................................................ P.9.34
Figure 9.19
Demand Current Logic Outputs ........................................................................................ P.9.35
Figure 9.20
Response to the MET DIF Command ............................................................................... P.9.38
Figure 9.21
Response to the MET DIF Command When 87kF, 87kQ and 87kG Are
Not Forced to Zero......................................................................................................... P.9.39
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
List of Figures
xxix
Figure 9.22
Response to the MET DIF Command When 87kF, 87kQ and 87kG Are
Forced to Zero................................................................................................................ P.9.39
Figure 10.1
Serial Number Label ........................................................................................................ P.10.2
Figure 10.2
Power Connection Area of the Rear Panel ........................................................................ P.10.3
Figure 10.3
PORT F, LCD Display, and Navigation Pushbuttons ........................................................ P.10.4
Figure 10.4
Report Header ................................................................................................................... P.10.6
Figure 10.5
Access Level Structure ...................................................................................................... P.10.6
Figure 10.6
Relay Status..................................................................................................................... P.10.10
Figure 10.7
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet Communication Parameters and Password Entry .................. P.10.11
Figure 10.8
Retrieving Relay Status:
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet......................................................... P.10.12
Figure 10.9
Checking Relay Status: Front-Panel LCD ...................................................................... P.10.13
Figure 10.10
Components of SET Commands ..................................................................................... P.10.15
Figure 10.11
Initial Global Settings...................................................................................................... P.10.17
Figure 10.12
Using Text-Edit Mode Line Editing to Set Display Points ............................................. P.10.20
Figure 10.13
Terminal Display for PULSE Command ........................................................................ P.10.22
Figure 10.14
Front-Panel Menus for Pulsing OUT204 ........................................................................ P.10.23
Figure 10.15
Password Entry Screen.................................................................................................... P.10.24
Figure 10.16
Assigning an Additional Close Output:
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet ................................. P.10.26
Figure 10.17
Uploading Output Settings to the relay ........................................................................... P.10.27
Figure 11.1
87TOUT Logic .................................................................................................................. P.11.8
Figure 11.2
Low-Level Test Interface................................................................................................... P.11.9
Figure 11.3
Test Connections for the Multiterminal 87L Test ........................................................... P.11.12
Figure 11.4
Test Connections for the Single-Terminal 87L Test........................................................ P.11.13
Figure 11.5
Test Connections for Protection Functions Other Than 87L........................................... P.11.14
Figure 11.6
Sample Targets Display on a Serial Terminal ................................................................. P.11.15
Figure 11.7
Viewing Relay Word Bits From the Front-Panel LCD ................................................... P.11.16
Figure 11.8
Setting I/O Board #1 Outputs:
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet ............................................... P.11.18
Figure 11.9
Uploading Output Settings to the Relay.......................................................................... P.11.19
Figure 11.10
Single-Terminal Test ....................................................................................................... P.11.26
Figure 11.11
System Under Loopback Testing .................................................................................... P.11.27
Figure 11.12
Negative-Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Element Settings:
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet ...................................................................................................................... P.11.29
Figure 11.13
Uploading Group 1 Settings to the Relay........................................................................ P.11.29
Figure 11.14
ELEMENT SEARCH Screen.......................................................................................... P.11.30
Figure 11.15
RELAY ELEMENTS Screen Containing Element 50Q1 ............................................... P.11.30
Figure 11.16
Uploading Group 1 and Breaker Monitor Settings to the Relay ..................................... P.11.33
Figure 11.17
Finding Phase-to-Phase Test Quantities .......................................................................... P.11.35
Figure 11.18
Relay Status:
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet HMI.................................................................. P.11.39
Figure 11.19
Relay Status From a STATUS A Command on a Terminal ............................................ P.11.40
Figure 11.20
Compressed ASCII Status Message................................................................................ P.11.40
Figure 12.1
Disconnect Switch Close Logic ........................................................................................ P.12.3
Figure 12.2
Disconnect Switch Open Logic......................................................................................... P.12.3
Figure 12.3
Disconnect Switch Status and Alarm Logic...................................................................... P.12.7
Figure 12.4
Close Immobility Timer Logic.......................................................................................... P.12.9
Figure 12.5
Open Immobility Timer Logic .......................................................................................... P.12.9
Figure 12.6
Disconnect in Transition ................................................................................................. P.12.12
Figure 12.7
Bay Control One-Line Diagram ...................................................................................... P.12.13
Figure 12.8
Screens for Circuit Breaker Selection ............................................................................. P.12.17
Figure 12.9
Screens During a Pole-Discrepancy Condition ............................................................... P.12.18
Figure 12.10
Screens for Disconnect Switch Selection........................................................................ P.12.19
Figure 12.11
HMI Disconnect Operation Initiation ............................................................................. P.12.21
Figure 12.12
HMI Disconnect Operation in Progress .......................................................................... P.12.22
Figure 12.13
HMI Disconnect Operation Completed........................................................................... P.12.23
Figure 12.14
Bay Control One-Line Diagram With Three-Position Disconnect Open........................ P.12.23
Figure 12.15
Three-Position Disconnect Control Screens ................................................................... P.12.25
Figure 12.16
Bay Control One-Line Diagram With Three-Position Disconnect Closed In-Line ........ P.12.27
Figure 12.17
Example Application....................................................................................................... P.12.28
Figure 12.18
Interactive Bay Control Setting Form ............................................................................. P.12.28
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
xxx
List of Figures
SEL-411L Relay
Figure 12.19
Illustration of Local and Remote Control Logic With Key Control................................ P.12.29
Figure 12.20
Busbar Label ................................................................................................................... P.12.30
Figure 12.21
Disconnect 1 Settings ...................................................................................................... P.12.31
Figure 12.22
Breaker 1 Settings ........................................................................................................... P.12.34
Figure 12.23
Break 1 Settings for a Single Pole Breaker ..................................................................... P.12.34
Figure 12.24
Analog Quantity Setting Form ........................................................................................ P.12.35
Figure 12.25
Analog Quantity Setting Form ........................................................................................ P.12.35
Figure 12.26
Analog Quantity Expression MDELE2........................................................................... P.12.35
Figure 12.27
Analog Quantity Expression MDELE3........................................................................... P.12.36
Figure 12.28
Bay Control Screen Selected for Rotating Display......................................................... P.12.36
Figure 12.29
Configuring PB1_HMI for Direct Bay Control Access .................................................. P.12.37
Figure 12.30
Bay With Ground Switch (Option 1) .............................................................................. P.12.38
Figure 12.31
Bay Without Ground Switch (Option 2) ......................................................................... P.12.38
Figure 12.32
Tie Breaker Bay (Option 3)............................................................................................. P.12.39
Figure 12.33
Bay With Ground Switch (Option 4) .............................................................................. P.12.39
Figure 12.34
Bay Without Ground Switch (Option 5) ......................................................................... P.12.40
Figure 12.35
Transfer Bay (Option 6) .................................................................................................. P.12.40
Figure 12.36
Tie Breaker Bay (Option 7)............................................................................................. P.12.41
Figure 12.37
Bay With Ground Switch (Option 8) .............................................................................. P.12.41
Figure 12.38
Bay Without Ground Switch (Option 9) ......................................................................... P.12.42
Figure 12.39
Bay With Ground Switch (Option 10) ............................................................................ P.12.42
Figure 12.40
Bay Without Ground Switch (Option 11) ....................................................................... P.12.43
Figure 12.41
Left Breaker Bay With Ground Switch (Option 12) ....................................................... P.12.43
Figure 12.42
Right Breaker Bay With Ground Switch (Option 13) ..................................................... P.12.44
Figure 12.43
Middle Breaker Bay (Option 14) .................................................................................... P.12.44
Figure 12.44
Left Breaker Bay Without Ground Switch (Option 15) .................................................. P.12.45
Figure 12.45
Right Breaker Bay Without Ground Switch (Option 16)................................................ P.12.45
Figure 12.46
Bay With Ground Switch (Option 17) ............................................................................ P.12.46
Figure 12.47
Bay Without Ground Switch (Option 18) ....................................................................... P.12.46
Figure 12.48
Left Breaker Bay With Ground Switch (Option 19) ....................................................... P.12.47
Figure 12.49
Left Breaker Bay Without Ground Switch (Option 20) .................................................. P.12.47
Figure 12.50
Right Breaker Bay With Ground Switch (Option 21) ..................................................... P.12.48
Figure 12.51
Right Breaker Bay Without Ground Switch (Option 22)................................................ P.12.48
Figure 12.52
Source Transfer (Option 23)............................................................................................ P.12.49
Figure 12.53
Throw-Over Bus Type 1 Switch (Option 24) .................................................................. P.12.49
Figure 12.54
Throw-Over Bus Type 2 Switch (Option 25) .................................................................. P.12.50
Figure 12.55
Screen 1 ........................................................................................................................... P.12.50
Figure 12.56
Screen 2 ........................................................................................................................... P.12.51
Figure 12.57
Different Types of Circuit Breakers and Disconnects ..................................................... P.12.52
Figure 12.58
Different Types of Power System Components .............................................................. P.12.52
Figure 13.1
TIME BNC Connector ...................................................................................................... P.13.3
Figure 13.2
Confirming the High-Accuracy Timekeeping Relay Word Bits ....................................... P.13.3
Figure 13.3
Results of the TIME Q Command..................................................................................... P.13.4
Figure 13.4
Programming a PSV in
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet ............................................................ P.13.7
Figure 13.5
Setting OUT108 in
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet ................................................................... P.13.7
Figure 13.6
High-Accuracy Timekeeping Connections ....................................................................... P.13.8
Figure 13.7
Setting PMV64 With the Expression Builder Dialog Box.............................................. P.13.10
Figure 13.8
230 kV Transmission Line System ................................................................................. P.13.11
Figure 14.1
Protection and Automation Separation ............................................................................. P.14.3
Figure 14.2
SEL
OGIC
Control Equation Programming Areas .............................................................. P.14.6
Figure 14.3
Conditioning Timer With Pickup and No Dropout Timing Diagram.............................. P.14.18
Figure 14.4
Conditioning Timer With Pickup Not Satisfied Timing Diagram................................... P.14.18
Figure 14.5
Conditioning Timer With Dropout and No Pickup Timing Diagram.............................. P.14.18
Figure 14.6
Conditioning Timer With Pickup and Dropout Timing Diagram ................................... P.14.19
Figure 14.7
Conditioning Timer Timing Diagram for Example 14.7................................................. P.14.19
Figure 14.8
Sequencing Timer Timing Diagram ................................................................................ P.14.21
Figure 14.9
R_TRIG Timing Diagram ............................................................................................... P.14.27
Figure 14.10
F_TRIG Timing Diagram................................................................................................ P.14.28
Date Code 20151029
List of Figures
xxxi
Figure 15.1
Sample ETH Command Response .................................................................................. P.15.20
Figure 15.2
GOOSE Command Response.......................................................................................... P.15.26
Figure 15.3
Sample ID Command Response From Ethernet Card..................................................... P.15.29
Figure 15.4
Sample MAC Command Response ................................................................................. P.15.31
Figure 15.5
Response to the MET DIF Command ............................................................................. P.15.35
Figure 15.6
Sample PING Command Response................................................................................. P.15.41
Figure 15.7
Sample VER Command Response .................................................................................. P.15.63
Figure B.1
Prepare the Device (Step 1 of 4) .........................................................................................P.B.4
Figure 3
Figure B.2
Figure B.3
Figure B.4
Figure B.5
Load Firmware (Step 2 of 4) ...............................................................................................P.B.5
Load Firmware (Step 3 of 4) ...............................................................................................P.B.6
Verify Device Settings (Step 4 of 4)....................................................................................P.B.7
Example Relay STA A Command Results..........................................................................P.B.9
Transferring New Firmware ..............................................................................................P.B.12
Communications Manual
HTTP Server Home Page and Response to Version Menu Selection ...............................C.2.23
Enhancing Multidrop Networks With the SEL Communications Processors.....................C.3.4
Example SEL Relay and SEL Communications Processors Configuration........................C.3.5
DNP3 LAN/WAN Application Example Ethernet Network.............................................C.4.46
Example Calculation of Real and Imaginary Components of Synchrophasor....................C.6.5
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
xxxii
List of Figures
Ethernet Port 5 Settings for Communications Using C37.118 Extended Fame................C.6.44
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
Preface
Overview
NOTE:
In the -0, -1 versions of the relay, the LED alias settings (TnLEDA) are no longer supported. Their equivalent functionality is available by aliasing the Tn_LED_n bits using
SET T. The only difference is that the
TnLEDA alias settings accept eight character aliases, whereas aliases set using the SET T command only accept seven characters.
For SEL-5030 mapping purposes, take any assigned TnLEDA settings and create alias settings for the corresponding TLED_n bits. The aliases will need to be truncated to seven characters.
Protection Manual
This manual provides information and instructions for installing and operating the relay. This manual is for use by power engineers and others experienced in protective relaying applications. Included are detailed technical descriptions of the relay and application examples. While this manual gives reasonable examples and illustrations of relay uses, you must exercise sound judgment at all times when applying the relay in a power system.
The SEL-411L Relay Manual consists of two volumes:
➤
➤
Protection Manual
Communications Manual
The manual contains a comprehensive index that encompasses the entire manual. The index appears at the end of each printed volume. In the electronic version of the manual, the index appears once; hyperlinks take you to material referenced in the index. Also included is a glossary that lists and defines technical terms used throughout the manual.
An overview of each manual section follows.
Preface.
Describes manual organization and conventions used to present information (appears once in the electronic form of the manual; repeated in each printed volume).
Section 1: Introduction and Specifications.
Introduces the relay features; summarizes relay functions and applications; lists relay specifications, type tests, and ratings.
Section 2: Installation.
Discusses the ordering configurations and interface features (control inputs, control outputs, and analog inputs, for example); provides information about how to design a new physical installation and secure the relay in a panel or rack; details how to set relay board jumpers and make proper rear-panel connections
(including wiring to CTs, PTs, and a GPS receiver); explains basic connections for the relay communications ports.
Section 3: Protection Functions.
Describes the function of various relay protection elements; describes how the relay processes these elements; gives detailed specifics on protection scheme logic for POTT, DCB,
DCUB, and DTT; provides trip logic diagrams, and current and voltage source selection details. Also describes basic 87L communications channel options and configuration parameters.
Section 4: Autoreclosing and Synchronism-Check.
Explains how to operate the two-circuit breaker multi-shot recloser; describes how to set the relay for single-pole reclosing, three-pole reclosing, or both; shows selection of the lead and follow circuit breakers; explains how to set and apply synchronism-check elements for automatic and manual closing.
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
xxxiv
Preface
Overview
SEL-411L Relay
Section 5: Settings.
Provides a list of all relay settings and defaults. The settings list is organized in the same order as in the relay and in the
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet software.
Section 6: PC Software.
Explains how to use the
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet
®
SEL-5030 software program.
Section 7: Front-Panel Operations.
Describes the LCD display messages and menu screens; shows you how to use front-panel pushbuttons and read targets; provides information about local substation control and how to make relay settings via the front panel.
Section 8: Oscillography, Events, and SER.
Explains how to obtain and interpret high-resolution raw data oscillograms, filtered event reports, event summaries, history reports, and SER reports; discusses how to enter SER trigger settings.
Section 9: Monitoring and Metering.
Describes how to use the circuit breaker monitors and the substation dc battery monitors; provides information on viewing fundamental and rms metering quantities for voltages and currents, as well as power and energy metering data.
Section 10: Basic Relay Operations.
Describes how to perform fundamental operations such as applying power and communicating with the relay, setting and viewing passwords, checking relay status, operating relay control outputs and control inputs, and using relay features to make relay commissioning easier.
Section 11: Testing and Troubleshooting.
Describes techniques for testing, troubleshooting, and maintaining the relay; includes the list of status notification messages and a troubleshooting chart.
Section 12: Bay Control.
Describes the logic and settings for the control of up to ten disconnects and two circuit breakers. Includes 25 bay layouts.
Section 13: Time-Synchronized Measurements.
Explains synchronized phasor measurements and estimation of power system states using the relay’s high-accuracy time-stamping capability; presents real-time load flow/power flow application ideas.
Section 14: SEL
OGIC
Control Equation Programming.
Describes multiple setting groups and SEL
OGIC
control equations and how to apply these equations; discusses expanded SEL
OGIC
control equation features such as PLC-style commands, math functions, counters, and conditioning timers; provides a tutorial for converting older format
SEL
OGIC
control equations to new free-form equations.
Section 15: ASCII Command Reference.
Provides an alphabetical listing of all ASCII commands with examples for each ASCII command option.
Section 16: Relay Word Bits.
Contains a summary of Relay Word bits.
Section 17: Analog Quantities.
Contains a summary of analog quantities.
Appendix A: Firmware and Manual Versions.
Lists the current firmware and manual versions and details differences between the current and previous versions.
Appendix B: Firmware Upgrade Instructions.
Describes the procedure to update the firmware stored in Flash memory.
Date Code 20151029
Communications
Manual
Preface
Overview xxxv
Preface.
Describes manual organization and conventions used to present information (appears once in the electronic form of the manual; repeated in each printed volume).
Section 1: Communications Interfaces.
Explains the physical connection of the relay to various communications network topologies.
Section 2: SEL Communications Protocols.
Describes the various SEL software protocols and how to apply these protocols to substation integration and automation; includes details about SEL ASCII, SEL
Compressed ASCII, SEL Fast Meter, SEL Fast Operate, SEL Fast
SER, and enhanced M
IRRORED
B
ITS®
communications.
Section 3: SEL Communications Processor Applications.
Provides examples of how to use the relay with the SEL-2032, SEL-2030, and
SEL-2020 Communications Processors for total substation automation solutions.
Section 4: DNP3 Communications.
Describes the DNP3 communications protocol and how to apply this protocol to substation integration and automation; provides an example for implementing DNP3 in a substation.
Section 5: IEC 61850 Communications.
Describes the IEC 61850 protocol and how to apply this protocol to substation automation and integration. Includes IEC 61850 protocol compliance statements.
Section 6: Synchrophasors.
Describes the phasor measurement unit
(PMU) functions of the relay; provides details on synchrophasor measurement; describes the IEEE C37.118 synchrophasor protocol settings; describes the SEL Fast Message synchrophasor protocol settings.
Section 7: Cybersecurity Features.
Describes the cybersecurity of the relay.
The CD-ROM contains the Instruction Manual in an electronic form that you can search easily.
Safety Information
Dangers, Warnings, and Cautions
This manual uses three kinds of hazard statements, defined as follows:
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or equipment damage.
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
xxxvi
Preface
Overview
Safety Symbols
The following symbols are often marked on SEL products.
CAUTION
Refer to accompanying documents.
Earth (ground)
ATTENTION
Se reporter à la documentation.
Terre
Protective earth (ground) Terre de protection
Direct current
Alternating current
Courant continu
Courant alternatif
Both direct and alternating current Courant continu et alternatif
Instruction manual Manuel d’instructions
Safety Marks
The following statements apply to this device.
General Safety Marks
For use in Pollution Degree 2 environment.
Pour l'utilisation dans un environnement de Degré de Pollution 2.
Other Safety Marks (Sheet 1 of 3)
DANGER
Disconnect or de-energize all external connections before opening this device. Contact with hazardous voltages and currents inside this device can cause electrical shock resulting in injury or death.
DANGER
Débrancher tous les raccordements externes avant d’ouvrir cet appareil. Tout contact avec des tensions ou courants internes à l’appareil peut causer un choc électrique pouvant entraîner des blessures ou la mort.
DANGER
Contact with instrument terminals can cause electrical shock that can result in injury or death.
DANGER
Tout contact avec les bornes de l’appareil peut causer un choc
électrique pouvant entraîner des blessuers ou la mort.
WARNING
Use of this equipment in a manner other than specified in this manual can impair operator safety safeguards provided by this equipment.
AVERTISSEMENT
L’utilisation de cet appareil suivant des procédures différentes de celles indiquées dans ce manuel peut désarmer les dispositifs de protection d’opérateur normalement actifs sur cet équipement.
WARNING
Have only qualified personnel service this equipment. If you are not qualified to service this equipment, you can injure yourself or others, or cause equipment damage.
AVERTISSEMENT
Seules des personnes qualifiées peuvent travailler sur cet appareil. Si vous n’êtes pas qualifiés pour ce travail, vous pourriez vous blesser avec d’autres personnes ou endommager l’équipement.
WARNING
This device is shipped with default passwords. Default passwords should be changed to private passwords at installation. Failure to change each default password to a private password may allow unauthorized access. SEL shall not be responsible for any damage resulting from unauthorized access.
WARNING
Do not look into the fiber ports/connectors.
AVERTISSEMENT
Cet appareil est expédié avec des mots de passe par défaut. A l’installation, les mots de passe par défaut devront être changés pour des mots de passe confidentiels. Dans le cas contraire, un accés nonautorisé á l’équipement peut être possible. SEL décline toute responsabilité pour tout dommage résultant de cet accés nonautorisé.
AVERTISSEMENT
Ne pas regarder vers les ports ou connecteurs de fibres optiques.
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
Preface
Overview xxxvii
Other Safety Marks (Sheet 2 of 3)
WARNING
Do not look into the end of an optical cable connected to an optical output.
AVERTISSEMENT
Ne pas regarder vers l’extrémité d’un câble optique raccordé à une sortie optique.
WARNING
Do not perform any procedures or adjustments that this instruction manual does not describe.
AVERTISSEMENT
Ne pas appliquer une procédure ou un ajustement qui n’est pas décrit explicitement dans ce manuel d’instruction.
WARNING
During installation, maintenance, or testing of the optical ports, use only test equipment qualified for Class 1 laser products.
AVERTISSEMENT
Durant l’installation, la maintenance ou le test des ports optiques, utilisez exclusivement des équipements de test homologués comme produits de type laser de Classe 1.
WARNING
Incorporated components, such as LEDs and transceivers are not user serviceable. Return units to SEL for repair or replacement.
AVERTISSEMENT
Les composants internes tels que les leds (diodes
électroluminescentes) et émetteurs-récepteurs ne peuvent pas être entretenus par l'usager. Retourner les unités à SEL pour réparation ou remplacement.
CAUTION
Equipment components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Undetectable permanent damage can result if you do not use proper
ESD procedures. Ground yourself, your work surface, and this equipment before removing any cover from this equipment. If your facility is not equipped to work with these components, contact SEL about returning this device and related SEL equipment for service.
ATTENTION
Les composants de cet équipement sont sensibles aux décharges
électrostatiques (DES). Des dommages permanents non-décelables peuvent résulter de l’absence de précautions contre les DES.
Raccordez-vous correctement à la terre, ainsi que la surface de travail et l’appareil avant d’en retirer un panneau. Si vous n’êtes pas équipés pour travailler avec ce type de composants, contacter SEL afin de retourner l’appareil pour un service en usine.
CAUTION
There is danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with Ray-O-Vac
®
no. BR2335 or equivalent recommended by manufacturer. See Owner's Manual for safety instructions. The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100°C or incinerate. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Keep battery out of reach of children.
ATTENTION
Une pile remplacée incorrectement pose des risques d’explosion.
Remplacez seulement avec un Ray-O-Vac
®
no BR2335 ou un produit
équivalent recommandé par le fabricant. Voir le guide d’utilisateur pour les instructions de sécurité. La pile utilisée dans cet appareil peut présenter un risque d’incendie ou de brûlure chimique si vous en faites mauvais usage. Ne pas recharger, démonter, chauffer à plus de 100°C ou incinérer. Éliminez les vieilles piles suivant les instructions du fabricant. Gardez la pile hors de la portée des enfants.
CAUTION
Equipment damage can result from connecting ac circuits to Hybrid
(high-current interrupting) control outputs. Do not connect ac circuits to Hybrid control outputs. Use only dc circuits with Hybrid control outputs.
ATTENTION
Des dommages à l’appareil pourraient survenir si un circuit CA était raccordé aux contacts de sortie à haut pouvoir de coupure de type
“Hybrid.” Ne pas raccorder de circuit CA aux contacts de sortie de type
“Hybrid.” Utiliser uniquement du CC avec les contacts de sortie de type “Hybrid.”
CAUTION
Substation battery systems that have either a high resistance to ground (greater than 10 k
) or are ungrounded when used in conjunction with many direct-coupled inputs can reflect a dc voltage offset between battery rails. Similar conditions can exist for battery monitoring systems that have high-resistance balancing circuits or floating grounds. For these applications, SEL provides optional ground-isolated (optoisolated) contact inputs. In addition, SEL has published an application advisory on this issue. Contact the factory for more information.
ATTENTION
Les circuits de batterie de postes qui présentent une haute résistance
à la terre (plus grande que 10 k
) ou sont isolés peuvent présenter un biais de tension CC entre les deux polarités de la batterie quand utilisés avec plusieurs entrées à couplage direct. Des conditions similaires peuvent exister pour des systèmes de surveillance de batterie qui utilisent des circuits d’équilibrage à haute résistance ou des masses flottantes. Pour ce type d’applications, SEL peut fournir en option des contacts d’entrée isolés (par couplage optoélectronique).
De surcroît, SEL a publié des recommandations relativement à cette application. Contacter l’usine pour plus d’informations.
CAUTION
If you are planning to install an INT4 I/O interface board in your relay, first check the firmware version of the relay. If the firmware version is
R111 or lower, you must first upgrade the relay firmware to the newest version and verify that the firmware upgrade was successful before installing the new board. Failure to install the new firmware first will cause the I/O interface board to fail, and it may require factory service.
Complete firmware upgrade instructions are provided when new firmware is ordered.
ATTENTION
Si vous avez l’intention d’installer une Carte d’Interface INT4 I/O dans votre relais, vérifiez en premier la version du logiciel du relais (voir l’indentification de la Version du logiciel). Si la version est R111 ou antérieure, vous devez mettre à jour le logiciel du relais avec la version la plus récente et vérifier que la mise à jour a été correctement installée sur la nouvelle carte. Les instructions complètes de mise à jour sont fournies quand le nouveau logiciel est commandé.
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
xxxviii
Preface
Overview
Other Safety Marks (Sheet 3 of 3)
CAUTION
Field replacement of I/O boards INT1, INT2, INT5, INT6, INT7, or INT8 with INT4 can cause I/O contact failure. The INT4 board has a pickup and dropout delay setting range of 0–1 cycle. For all other I/O boards, pickup and dropout delay settings (IN201PU–IN224PU, IN201DO–
IN224DO, IN301PU–IN324PU, and IN301DO–IN324DO) have a range of
0–5 cycles. Upon replacing any I/O board with an INT4 board, manually confirm reset of pickup and dropout delays to within the expected range of 0–1 cycle.
ATTENTION
Le remplacement en chantier des cartes d’entrées/sorties INT1, INT2,
INT5, INT6, INT7 ou INT8 par une carte INT4 peut causer la défaillance du contact d’entrée/sortie. La carte INT4 présente un intervalle d’ajustement pour les délais de montée et de retombée de 0 à 1 cycle.
Pour toutes les autres cartes, l’intervalle de réglage du délai de montée et retombée (IN201PU–IN224PU, IN201DO– IN224DO, IN301PU–
IN324PU, et IN301DO–IN324DO) est de 0 à 5 cycles. Quand une carte d’entrées/sorties est remplacée par une carte INT4, vérifier manuellement que les délais de montée et retombée sont dans l’intervalle de 0 à 1 cycle.
CAUTION
Do not install a jumper on positions A or D of the main board J21 header. Relay misoperation can result if you install jumpers on positions J21A and J21D.
ATTENTION
Ne pas installer de cavalier sur les positions A ou D sur le connecteur
J21 de la carte principale. Une opération intempestive du relais pourrait résulter suite à l’installation d’un cavalier entre les positions
J21A et J21D.
CAUTION
Insufficiently rated insulation can deteriorate under abnormal operating conditions and cause equipment damage. For external circuits, use wiring of sufficiently rated insulation that will not break down under abnormal operating conditions.
ATTENTION
Un niveau d’isolation insuffisant peut entraîner une détérioration sous des conditions anormales et causer des dommages à l’équipement.
Pour les circuits externes, utiliser des conducteurs avec une isolation suffisante de façon à éviter les claquages durant les conditions anormales d’opération.
CAUTION
Relay misoperation can result from applying other than specified secondary voltages and currents. Before making any secondary circuit connections, check the nominal voltage and nominal current specified on the rear-panel nameplate.
ATTENTION
Une opération intempestive du relais peut résulter par le branchement de tensions et courants secondaires non conformes aux spécifications.
Avant de brancher un circuit secondaire, vérifier la tension ou le courant nominal sur la plaque signalétique à l’arrière.
CAUTION
Severe power and ground problems can occur on the communications ports of this equipment as a result of using non-SEL cables. Never use standard null-modem cables with this equipment.
ATTENTION
Des problèmes graves d’alimentation et de terre peuvent survenir sur les ports de communication de cet appareil si des câbles d’origine autre que SEL sont utilisés. Ne jamais utiliser de câble de modem nul avec cet équipement.
CAUTION
Do not connect power to the relay until you have completed these procedures and receive instruction to apply power. Equipment damage can result otherwise.
ATTENTION
Ne pas mettre le relais sous tension avant d’avoir complété ces procédures et d’avoir reçu l’instruction de brancher l’alimentation. Des dommages à l’équipement pourraient survenir autrement.
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
ATTENTION
L’utilisation de commandes ou de réglages, ou l’application de tests de fonctionnement différents de ceux décrits ci-après peuvent entraîner l’exposition à des radiations dangereuses.
General Information
Typographic
Conventions
There are three ways to communicate with the relay:
➤
Using a command line interface in a PC terminal emulation window.
➤
➤
Using the front-panel menus and pushbuttons.
Using
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet
®
SEL-5030 Software
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
Examples
Notes
Commands
Numbers
Date Code 20151029
Preface
Overview xxxix
The instructions in this manual indicate these options with specific font and formatting attributes. The following table lists these conventions:
Example
STATUS
n
SUM n
<Enter>
<Ctrl+D>
Start > Settings
CLOSE
ENABLE
RELAY RESPONSE
MAIN > METER
SEL
OGIC equations
Modbus
control
Description
Commands, command options, and command variables typed at a command line interface on a PC.
Variables determined based on an application (in bold if part of a command).
Single keystroke on a PC keyboard.
Multiple/combination keystroke on a PC keyboard.
PC software dialog boxes and menu selections.
The > character indicates submenus.
Relay front-panel pushbuttons.
Relay front- or rear-panel labels.
Relay front-panel LCD menus and relay responses visible on the PC screen.
The > character indicates submenus.
SEL trademarks and registered trademarks contain the appropriate symbol on first reference in a section. In this instruction manual, certain SEL trademarks appear in small caps. These include
SEL
OGIC
control equations, M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications, and the
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet
software program.
Registered trademarks of other companies include the registered trademark symbol with the first occurrence of the term in a section.
This instruction manual uses several example illustrations and instructions to explain how to effectively operate the relay. These examples are for demonstration purposes only; the firmware identification information or settings values included in these examples may not necessarily match those in the current version of your relay.
Margin notes serve two purposes in the manual. Notes present valuable or important points about relay features or functions. Use these notes as tips to easier and more efficient operation of the relay.
You can simplify the task of entering commands by shortening any ASCII command to the first three characters (upper- or lowercase); for example,
ACCESS becomes ACC.
Always send a carriage return <CR> character, or a carriage return character followed by a line feed character <CR><LF>, to command the relay to process the ASCII command. Usually, most terminals and terminal programs interpret the <Enter> key as a <CR>. For example, to send the ACCESS command, type the following:
ACC <Enter>
This manual displays numbers as decimal values.
Hexadecimal numbers include the letter h appended to the number. Alternatively, the prefix 0X can also indicate a hexadecimal number. For instance, 11 is the decimal number eleven, but 11h and 0X11 are hexadecimal representations of the decimal value seventeen.
SEL-411L Relay
xl
Preface
Overview
Logic Diagrams
Logic diagrams in this manual follow the conventions and definitions shown below.
NAME SYMBOL FUNCTION
COMPARATOR
A
B
+
—
C
Input A is compared to input B. Output C asserts if A is greater than B.
INPUT FLAG
OR
C
Input A comes from other logic.
Either input A or input B asserted cause output C to assert.
EXCLUSIVE OR
NOR
AND
AND W/ INVERTED INPUT
NAND
B
A
A
A
B
A
A
B
A
B
B
A
B
C
C
C
C
C
If either A or B is asserted, output C is asserted. If A and B are of the same state,
C is deasserted.
If neither A nor B asserts, output C asserts.
Input A and input B must assert to assert output C.
If input A is asserted and input B is deasserted, output C asserts. Inverter "O" inverts any input or output on any gate.
If A and/or B are deasserted, output C is asserted.
X
TIME DELAYED PICK UP AND/OR
TIME DELAYED DROP OUT
EDGE TRIGGER TIMER
SET RESET FLIP FLOP
A
A
X
S
R
Y
Y
Q
B
B
X is a time-delay-pickup value;
Y is a time-delay-dropout value.
B asserts time X after input A asserts;
B will not assert if A does not remain asserted for time X. If X is zero, B will assert when A asserts. If Y is zero, B will deassert when A deasserts.
Rising edge of A starts timers. Output B will assert time X after the rising edge of
A. B will remain asserted for time Y. If
Y is zero, B will assert for a single processing interval. Input A is ignored while the timers are running.
Input S asserts output Q until input R asserts.
Output Q deasserts or resets when R asserts.
FALLING EDGE
A B B asserts at the falling edge of input A.
RISING EDGE A B B asserts at the rising edge of input A.
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
Section 1
C.Communications Manual
Communications Interfaces
This section provides information on communications interface options for the relay. The following topics are discussed:
➤
➤
➤
➤
Serial Communication on page C.1.2
Ethernet Communications on page C.1.5
Virtual File Interface on page C.1.13
Communications Database on page C.1.17
Communications Interfaces
The relay collects, stores, and calculates a variety of data. These include electrical power system measurements, calculated quantities, diagnostic data, equipment monitoring data, fault oscillography, and sequential event reports.
You must enter settings to configure the relay to protect and monitor your power system properly. A communications interface is the physical connection on the relay that you can use to collect data from the relay, set the relay, and perform relay test and diagnostic functions.
The relay has three rear-panel serial ports and one front-panel serial port.
These serial ports conform to the EIA/TIA-232 standard (often called
RS-232). Several optional SEL devices are available to provide alternative physical interfaces, including EIA-485 and fiber-optic cable. The relay also has a Ethernet card slot for the optional Ethernet card.
Once you have established a physical connection, you must use a communications protocol to interact with the relay. A communications protocol is a language that you can use to perform relay operations and collect data. For information on protocols that you can use with the relay, see the
instruction manual sections listed in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
Relay Communications Protocols (Sheet 1 of 2)
Communications
Protocol
DNP3 (serial)
Communications Interface For More Information See
EIA-232 a
DNP3 (LAN/WAN)
IEC 61850
Ethernet Card
Ethernet Card
Distributed Port Switch
(LMD)
SEL Binary Protocols
(Fast Meter, Fast Operate,
Fast SER)
SEL-2885 EIA-232 to
EIA-485 transceiver on an
EIA-232 port
Ethernet card
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.1.2
Communications Interfaces
Serial Communication
Table 1.1
Relay Communications Protocols (Sheet 2 of 2)
Communications
Protocol
SEL Fast Message RTD protocol
M
IRRORED
B
ITS® communications
Phasor Measurement
Protocols (C37.118 and
SEL Fast Message)
ASCII Commands
Communications Interface For More Information See
EIA
EIA
-
232
-
232
Ethernet Card b
FTP
HTTP
EIA-232 or Telnet using
Ethernet card
Ethernet Card
Ethernet Card
Section 15: ASCII
Command Reference
SNTP Ethernet Card
a b
You can add converters to transform EIA-232 to other physical interfaces.
Phasor Measurement over the Ethernet card is only C37.118 protocol.
Section 3: SEL Communications Processor Applications and Section 4: DNP3
Communications include more information on communication topologies and
protocols.
Serial Communication
Each relay has four serial ports that you can use for serial communication with other devices. While these ports are all EIA-232, you can add transceivers or converters to operate on different physical media including EIA-485 and fiberoptic cable.
EIA-232
The relay has four EIA-232 communications interfaces. The serial port
locations for the 4U chassis are shown in Figure 1.1 and Figure 1.2; other
chassis sizes are similar. The port on the front panel is PORT F and the three rear-panel ports are PORT 1, PORT 2, and PORT 3.
Port F
SEL-411L Relay
Figure 1.1
Relay 4U Chassis Front-Panel Layout
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
NOTE:
Pins 5 and 9 are not intended to provide a chassis ground connection. See Section 2:
Installation in the Protection Manual.
EIA-232
Communications
Cables
Communications Interfaces
Serial Communication
C.1.3
Ports 1 – 3
1300nm IEEE C37.94 FIBER EIA-422 10/100BASE-T / 100BASE-FX EIA-232
PORT 3 PORT 2
TX TX RX TX 1
LNK LNK LNK LNK
25
ACT PORT 5A ACT PORT 5B ACT PORT 5C ACT PORT 5D
BAY 1 - CHANNEL 1
200
+
OUT01 OUT02
+
OUT03
+
OUT04
+
OUT05
+
OUT06
+ +
OUT07 OUT08
+
BAY 2 - CHANNEL 2
OUT09
+
OUT10
+ +
OUT11
+
OUT12
+
OUT13 OUT14
BAY 3
OUT15
TIME IRIG–B
BAY 4
PORT 1
+
IN01
+
IN02
+
IN03
+
IN04
+
IN05
+
IN06
+
IN07
+
IN08
200
B
01
02
03
04
D A N G E R
05
06
07
08
09
10
IAW IBW ICW
11
12
13
14
15
16
IAX IBX ICX
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
VAY VBY VCY VAZ VBZ
33
34
35
VCZ
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
B
MONITOR
Vdc 1 Vdc 2
+ — + —
POWER
/N
Z
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Figure 1.2
Relay 4U Rear-Panel Layout
19 20 21 22 23 24
Z
25 26 27 28 29 30
The EIA-232 ports are standard female 9-pin connectors with the pin
numbering shown in Figure 1.3. The pin functions are listed in Table 1.2. See
the manual section listed in Table 1.1 for a description of how the relay uses
these pins with your specific protocol. Pin 1 can provide power to an external device. See Serial Port Jumpers on page P.2.17 for more information on installing the jumper to provide voltage on Pin 1.
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
Figure 1.3
EIA-232 Connector Pin Numbers
Table 1.2
EIA-232 Pin Assignments
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
9
Signal Name
5 Vdc
RXD
TXD
+IRIG
-
B
GND
–IRIG
-
B
RTS
CTS
TX/RX CLK (for
SPEED:= SYNC, only available when PROTO:=
MBA or MBB)
GND
Description Comments
Modem power Jumper selectable on
PORT1–PORT 3. No connection on PORT F.
Receive data
Transmit data
Time code signal positive
PORT 1 only. No connection on
PORT F, PORT 2, and PORT 3.
Signal ground
Time code signal negative PORT 1 only. No connection on
PORT F, PORT 2, and PORT 3.
Request to send
Also connected to chassis ground.
Clear to send (input)
Transmit and receive clock (input)
Chassis ground
Rear-panel serial ports only
For most installations, you can obtain information on the proper EIA-232 cable configuration from the SEL-5801 Cable Selector Program. Using the
SEL-5801 software, you can choose a cable by application. The software provides the SEL cable number with wiring and construction information, so you can order the appropriate cable from SEL or construct one. If you do not
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.1.4
Communications Interfaces
Ethernet Card
see information for your application, please contact SEL and we will assist you. You can obtain a copy of the SEL-5801 software by contacting SEL or from the SEL website www.selinc.com.
CAUTION
Severe power and ground problems can occur on the communications ports of this equipment as a result of using non-SEL cables. Never use standard null-modem cables with this equipment.
You can connect to a standard 9-pin computer port with the SEL cable C234A for relay configuration and programming with a terminal program or with the
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet
®
SEL-5030 software. See Figure 2.32 for the construction of SEL cable C234A.
IRIG-B Connections
The relay accepts demodulated (B002) IRIG-B on the BNC IRIG-B input
connector (see Figure 1.2) and on pins 4 and 6 of Serial Port 1 (see
Figure 1.3). The relay does not distribute IRIG-B out of any of its
communications ports.
Use the IRIG-B input to update time-of-day and day-of-the-year. A C37.118 compliant IRIG-B source will also update the year. Otherwise, you must manually update the year. The relay stores the year for the set date in nonvolatile memory. Once the date is set properly, the relay maintains the proper year even through a loss of power.
Fiber-Optic Interface
You can add transceivers to the EIA-232 ports to use fiber-optic cables to connect devices. We strongly recommend that you use fiber-optic cables to connect devices within a substation. Power equipment and control circuit switching can cause substantial interference with communications circuits.
You can also experience significant ground potential differences during fault conditions that can interfere with communications and damage equipment.
Fiber-optic cables provide electrical isolation that increases safety and equipment protection.
Use the SEL-2800 product family transceivers for multimode or single-mode fiber-optic communications. All of these transceivers are port powered, require no settings, and operate automatically over a broad range of data rates.
SEL-2800 series transceivers operate over the same wide temperature ranges as SEL relays, providing reliable operations in extreme conditions.
EIA-485
There is no EIA-485 port integral to the relay. You can install an SEL-2885 or
SEL-2886 transceiver to convert one of the rear-panel EIA-232 ports (PORT
1–PORT 3) on the relay to an EIA-485 port. The SEL-2885 and SEL-2886 are powered by the +5 Vdc output on Pin 1. These transceivers offer transformer isolation not found on most EIA-232-to-EIA-485 transceivers. See the transceiver product flyers for more information. The SEL-2885 offers the SEL
Distributed Port Switch Protocol (LMD). With this protocol you can selectively communicate with multiple devices on an EIA-485 network. You can communicate with other network nodes including EIA-232 devices with an SEL-2885 and SEL devices having integral EIA-485 ports. You can find
more information about using SEL LMD in Section 2: SEL Communications
Ethernet Card
Bay 3 of the relay is a slot for the optional Ethernet card. You can either field install the optional communications card or order the relay with the card installed at the factory. As with other SEL products, SEL has designed and tested SEL Ethernet cards for operation in harsh environments.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Communications Interfaces
Ethernet Communications
C.1.5
The optional Ethernet card provides Ethernet communications for the relay.
The Ethernet card is available with standard twisted-pair and fiber-optic physical interfaces. The Ethernet card includes redundant physical interfaces with the capability to automatically transfer communications to the backup interface in the event that the primary network fails. For information on
substation integration architectures, see Section 3: SEL Communications
Processor Applications, Section 4: DNP3 Communications, and Section 5:
Once installed in a relay, the settings needed for network operation and data exchange protocols, including DNP3 and IEC 61850, are available in the PORT
5 settings.
Ethernet Communications
Ethernet Network
Operation Settings
Several settings control how the relay with the optional Ethernet card operates on an Ethernet network. These settings include IP addressing information, network port fail-over options, and network speed.
Network Configuration
NOTE:
Network Ports A and B connect the relay to the Process Bus, and only 87L and future Sampled
Value (SV) network traffic are transmitted and received on these ports. Network Ports C and D connect the relay to the Station Bus. IP-based network traffic and GOOSE network traffic are transmitted and received on these ports. Take care not to use the same VLAN tags for outgoing 87L and outgoing GOOSE data to avoid mixing
Process Bus traffic with Station Bus traffic. However, the VLAN IDs of incoming GOOSE data can be the same as outgoing 87L VLAN IDs.
Use the network configuration settings shown in Table 1.3 to configure the
relay for operation on an IP network and to set other parameters affecting the physical Ethernet network interface operation. The relay is equipped with four
Ethernet ports: A, B, C, and D. Ports C and D may be used for standard
Ethernet, DNP3, or optional IEC 61850 communications. This section focuses primarily on ports C and D. Ports A and B can only be used for the optional
87L communications.
Table 1.3
Ethernet Card Network Configuration Settings (Sheet 1 of 2)
Label
EPORT
IPADDR
DEFRTR
ETCPKA
Description
Enable Ethernet port communication
IP network address/CIDR network prefix
Default router
Range
Y, N
IP address w.x.y.z/t where:
w = 0–126, 128–223
x = 0–255
y = 0–255
z = 0–255
t = 1–30
w = 0–126, 128–223
x = 0–255
y = 0–255
z = 0–255
Y, N
Default
N
192.168.1.2/24
192.168.1.1
Y
KAIDLE
Enable TCP keep-alive functionality in all TCP communication supported by the relay
Length of time to wait with no detected activity before sending a keep alive packet
10
KAINTV
KACNT
Length of time to wait between sending keep-alive packets after receiving no response for the prior keep-alive packet
Maximum number of keep-alive packets to send
1–20 s
(must be greater than or equal to KAINTV)
1–20 s (must be less than or equal to KAIDLE)
1–20
1
6
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.1.6
Communications Interfaces
Ethernet Communications
Table 1.3
Ethernet Card Network Configuration Settings (Sheet 2 of 2)
Label
NETMODE Network operating mode
Description
NETPORT Primary network port
FTIME Fail-over time out
NETASPD Network speed or auto-detect on Port A
NETBSPD Network speed or auto-detect on Port B
NETCSPD Network speed or auto-detect on Port C
NETDSPD Network speed or auto-detect on Port D
Range
FIXED, FAILOVER,
SWITCHED, PRP,
ISOLATEIP
C, D
0–65535 ms
AUTO, 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps
AUTO, 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps
AUTO, 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps
AUTO, 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps
Default
FAILOVER
C
1
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
The relay IPADDR setting uses Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) notation and a variable-length subnet mask (VLSM) to define its local network and host address.
An IP address consists of two parts: a prefix that identifies the network followed by a host address within that network. Early network devices used a subnet mask to define the network prefix of an associated host address. Within the mask, subnet boundaries were defined by the 8-bit segments of the 32-bit
IP address. These boundaries constrained network prefixes to 8, 16, or 24 bits, defining Class A, B, and C networks, respectively.
This classful networking often created subnetworks that were not sized efficiently for actual requirements. CIDR allows more effective usage of a given range of IP addresses. In CIDR notation, you enter the IPADDR setting in the form a.b.c.d/p, where a.b.c.d is the host address in standard dotted decimal form and p is the network prefix expressed as the number of “1” bits in the mask. For example, if IPADDR := 192.168.1.2/24, the host address is
192.168.1.2 and the network prefix is the first 24 bits of the address, or
192.168.1. The network address is derived by applying the network prefix to
IPADDR and filling the remaining bits with zeros (in our example, it is
192.168.1.0). The broadcast address is derived similarly, but the remaining bits are filled with ones (192.168.1.255 for the example above). Neither the network (base) address nor the broadcast address can be used for any host or router addresses on the network.
Table 1.4
CIDR Notation (Sheet 1 of 2)
CIDR Value
/26
/25
/24
/23
/22
/21
/32
/31
/30
/29
/28
/27
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.254
255.255.255.252
255.255.255.248
255.255.255.240
255.255.255.224
255.255.255.192
255.255.255.128
255.255.255.000
255.255.254.000
255.255.252.000
255.255.248.000
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Date Code 20151029
Communications Interfaces
Ethernet Communications
C.1.7
Table 1.4
CIDR Notation (Sheet 2 of 2)
CIDR Value
/7
/6
/9
/8
/13
/12
/11
/10
/17
/16
/15
/14
/20
/19
/18
/3
/2
/5
/4
/1
/0
Subnet Mask
255.255.240.000
255.255.224.000
255.255.192.000
255.255.128.000
255.255.000.000
255.254.000.000
255.252.000.000
255.248.000.000
255.240.000.000
255.224.000.000
255.192.000.000
255.128.000.000
255.000.000.000
254.000.000.000
252.000.000.000
248.000.000.000
240.000.000.000
224.000.000.000
192.000.000.000
128.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
The relay uses the DEFRTR address setting to determine how to communicate with nodes on other local networks. The relay communicates with the default router to send data to nodes on other local networks. The default router must be on the same local network as the relay or the relay will reject the DEFRTR setting. You must also coordinate the default router with your general network
implementation and administration plan. See Table 1.5 for examples of how
IPADDR and SUBNETM define the network and node and how these settings affect the DEFRTR setting.
If there is no router on the network, enter a null string (“”).
Table 1.5
DEFRTR Address Setting Examples (Sheet 1 of 2)
IPADDR
(CIDR)
SUBNET Mask
(non-CIDR)
Network
Address
Broadcast
Address
DEFRTR
Range a
192.168.1.2/28
192.168.1.2/24
192.168.1.2/20
192.168.1.2/16
192.168.1.2/12
255.255.255.240
255.255.255.0
255.255.240.0
255.255.0.0
255.240.0.0
192.168.1.0
192.168.1.15
192.168.1.0–19
2.168.1.15
192.168.1.0
192.168.1.255
192.168.1.a
b
192.168.0.0
192.168.15.255
192.168.0.a
–1
92.168.15.a
192.168.0.0
192.168.255.255
192.160.0.0
192.175.255.255
–
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.1.8
Communications Interfaces
Ethernet Communications
NOTE:
The ETCPKA setting applies to all TCP traffic on Ethernet ports, including TELNET, FTP, DNP3,
IEC 61850 MMS, and C37.118.
Table 1.5
DEFRTR Address Setting Examples (Sheet 2 of 2)
IPADDR
(CIDR)
SUBNET Mask
(non-CIDR)
Network
Address
Broadcast
Address
DEFRTR
Range a
192.168.1.2/8
192.168.1.2/4
255.0.0.0
240.0.0.0
192.0.0.0
192.0.0.0
192.255.255.255
192.a
.b
207.255.255.255
192.a
.b
.b
.c
a b
DEFRTR cannot be the same as IPADDR, Network Address, or Broadcast Address.
Value in the range 0–255.
The ETCPKA setting, along with the KAIDLE, KAINTV, and KACNT settings, can be used to verify that the computer at the remote end of a TCP connection is still available. If ETCPKA is enabled and the relay does not transmit any TCP data within the interval specified by the KAIDLE setting, the relay sends a keep-alive packet to the remote computer. If the relay does not receive a response from the remote computer within the time specified by
KAINTV, the keep-alive packet is re-transmitted as many as KACNT times.
After this count is reached, the relay considers the remote device no longer available, so the relay can terminate the connection without waiting for the idle timer (TIDLE or FTPIDLE) to expire.
Using Redundant
Ethernet Ports
The relay Ethernet card operates over either twisted-pair or fiber-optic media.
Each Ethernet card is equipped with four network ports. With an initial ordering option, you can select the medium for each port (10/100 Mbps twisted pair or 100 Mbps fiber optic). Speeds for the physical media are fixed for fiber-optic connections. For twisted-pair connections, the Ethernet card can auto-detect the network speed or you can set a fixed speed.
The four Ethernet ports work together in pairs: A and B, C and D. Ports A and
B are only for use with the optional 87L Ethernet communications. Designed for redundancy, they always operate in immediate FAILOVER mode, equivalent to FTIME of 0. Redundant operation for Ports A and B is not userconfigurable. Ports C and D are for all other Ethernet communications, for example, FTP, TELNET, DNP3 LAN/WAN, IEC 61850 GOOSE, etc. You can configure Ports C and D for redundant network architectures, or force the relay to use a single Ethernet port for these protocols.
Redundant Ethernet Network Using FAILOVER Mode
Make the following settings in Port 5 to configure the relay for FAILOVER mode.
➤
➤
NETMODE := FAILOVER
FTIME := desired timeout for the active port before failover to the backup port
➤
NETPORT := the preferred primary network interface (C for
Port 5C, D for Port 5D)
Use the internal failover switch to connect the relay to redundant networks as
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Date Code 20151029
Communications Interfaces
Ethernet Communications
C.1.9
Network
SEL-2725
Relay
Relay
Relay
SEL-2725
Figure 1.4
Failover Network Topology
On startup, the relay communicates using the primary network interface selected by the NETPORT setting. If the relay detects a link failure on the primary interface, and the link status on the standby interface is healthy, the relay activates the standby network interface after time FTIME. If the link status on the primary interface returns to normal before time FTIME, the failover timer resets and operation continues on the primary network interface.
After failover, while communicating via the standby interface, if the relay detects a link failure on the standby interface and the link status on the primary interface is healthy, the relay activates the primary network interface after time FTIME. The choice of active port is reevaluated after settings change, and after relay restart.
Network Connection Using Isolated IP Connection Mode
The Isolated IP mode (NETMODE = ISOLATEIP) permits IEC 61850
GOOSE messages on two ports, but restricts IP traffic to just one port. This mode is useful for cases where it is desired to connect one port to a secured network (the IP port) but have the other port leave the security perimeter.
The NETPORT setting selects which port will be the IP port. The other port will only support GOOSE traffic. IP transmissions will only go out the IP port.
IP receptions will only be processed from the IP port. GOOSE publications will go out both ports. GOOSE subscriptions will be accepted from either port. Any non-GOOSE traffic received on the non-IP port will be ignored. No traffic will go from one external port to the other.
Redundant Ethernet Network Using SWITCHED Mode
Make Port 5 setting NETMODE = SWITCHED to activate the internal
Ethernet switch. The internal switch connects a single Ethernet stack inside the relay to two external Ethernet ports. The combination of relay and internal switch operate the same as if a single Ethernet port on a relay were connected to an external unmanaged Ethernet switch. Use the internal switch to create
“self-healing rings” as shown in Figure 1.5.
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.1.10
Communications Interfaces
Ethernet Communications
Network
Managed
Ethernet
Switch
Managed
Ethernet
Switch
Relay Relay Relay Relay
Figure 1.5
Self-Healing Ring Using Internal Ethernet Switch
Relay
Using this topology, the network can still connect to any relay even if another relay, cable, or switch fails. The external managed network switches select which of the two relay Ethernet ports are used for what purpose. That selection is invisible to the relay, and does not require special relay configuration, other than making setting NETMODE := SWITCHED.
Network Connection Using Fixed Connection Mode
Force the relay to use a single Ethernet port even when it is equipped with two or more Ethernet ports by making setting NETMODE := FIXED. When
NETMODE := FIXED, only the interface selected by NETPORT is active.
The other interfaces are disabled.
Network Connection Using PRP Connection Mode
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) is part of an IEC standard for high availability automation networks (IEC 62439-3). The purpose of the protocol is to provide seamless recovery from any single Ethernet network failure.
The basic concept is that the Ethernet network and all traffic are fully duplicated with the two copies operating in parallel.
Make the following settings in Port 5 to configure the relay for PRP mode.
➤
➤
➤
NETMODE := PRP
PRPTOUT := desired timeout for PRP frame entry
PRPADDR := PRP destination MAC address LSB
01-15-4E-00-01-XX
➤
PRPINTV := desired supervision frame transmit interval
When NETMODE is not set to PRP, the following settings are hidden.
Table 1.6
PRP Settings
Setting Name Range
PRPTOUT
PRPADDR
PRPINTV
100–10000
0–255
1–10
Units
msec seconds
Default Value Setting Description
500
00
2
PRP Entry Timeout
The multicast MAC address of
PRP supervision frames is
01-15-4E-00-01-XX where
XX is specified by this setting.
PRP Supervision TX Interval
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Communications Interfaces
Ethernet Communications
C.1.11
When PRP is enabled, SEL recommends reducing the maximum number of incoming GOOSE subscriptions to 64. Incoming GOOSE buffers are sized to accommodate a maximum of 128 GOOSE messages. The number of messages doubles when PRP is enabled.
Data Access Settings
Access data using either the standard TCP/IP Telnet and FTP interfaces or, optionally, through the (Web) HTTP Server, DNP3 LAN/WAN or IEC 61850 interface. You cannot access all data through all interfaces. See the appropriate interface section below for details on data access.
Note: The relay prioritizes processing IEC 61850 GOOSE and Line
Differential (87L) data over the data access protocols listed above. With both
GOOSE and 87L protocols enabled, high GOOSE traffic to and from the relay sustained over long periods may cause slowed responsiveness to data transfer requests via TCP/IP protocols.
FTP
FTP is a standard application-level protocol for exchanging files between computers over a TCP/IP network. The relay Ethernet card operates as an FTP server, presenting files to FTP clients. The relay Ethernet card can support as many as three simultaneous FTP sessions, allowing simultaneous FTP access to as many as three separate users at a time. Subsequent requests to establish
FTP sessions will be denied. If your FTP client does not work properly, be sure to set your client to use a single session.
Table 1.7 lists the settings that affect FTP server operation.
File Structure
The basic file structure is organized as a directory and subdirectory tree similar to that used by Unix, DOS, Windows, and other common operating
systems. See Virtual File Interface for information on the basic file structure.
NOTE:
SEL advises against enabling anonymous FTP logins (FTPANMS = Y) except under test conditions. The
Ethernet card does not require a password for the special FTP user name “anonymous”. If you enable anonymous FTP logins, you are allowing unrestricted access to the relay and host files.
Access Control
The standard FTP logins consist of the three-character access level command
(e.g. ACC, BAC) with their respective passwords. For example, with default passwords, if you use the user name of 2AC and password of TAIL, you will connect with Access Level 2 privileges.
FTP settings control anonymous file access features. The special FTP user name “anonymous” does not require a password. It has the access rights of the access level selected by the FTPAUSR setting. For example, if FTPAUSR is set to 1 (for Access Level 1), the FTP anonymous user has Access Level 1 rights.
Table 1.7
FTP Settings
Label
FTPSERV a
Description
FTP session enable
Range
Y, N
Default
N
FTPCBAN
FTPIDLE
FTPANMS
FTP connect banner
FTP connection timeout
254 characters
5–255 minutes
FTP SERVER:
5
Anonymous login enable Y, N N
FTPAUSR User level from which anonymous
FTP client inherits access rights
0, 1, B, P, A,
O, 2
0 a
If you change these settings and accept the new settings, the Ethernet card closes all active network connections and briefly pauses network operation.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.1.12
Communications Interfaces
Ethernet Communications
HTTP (Hypertext
Transfer Protocol)
Server
Telnet
NOTE:
Telnet works with other
NETMODE settings also, but
NETMODE = SWITCHED is easiest to begin communication.
NOTE:
Many computers and most newer Ethernet switches support autocrossover, so nearly any Cat 5
Ethernet cable with RJ45 connectors, such as SEL cable C627 will work.
When the computer does not support autocrossover, use a crossover cable between the computer and relay, such as SEL cable C628. For fiber-optic
Ethernet ports use SEL cable C807
(62.5
μ m fiber-optic cable with LC connectors).
Telnet is also part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. You can use Telnet to establish terminal access to a remote device. A Telnet connection provides access to the relay user interface. Telnet access is similar to an ASCII terminal connection to the front port of an SEL device.
Factory default settings for the Ethernet ports disable all Ethernet protocols, including PING. Command SET P 5 accesses settings for all Ethernet ports on the relay. See SHO P on page P.15.52 for a sample of the SHO P 5 command with factory-default settings.
Make the following settings using the SET P 5 command:
➤
➤
EPORT := Y
IPADDR := IP and Network Address assigned by network administrator in CIDR notation
➤
DEFRTR := Default router IP Address assigned by network administrator
➤
➤
NETMODE := SWITCHED
ETELNET := Y
Leave all other settings at their default values.
Connect an Ethernet cable between your PC or a network switch and any
Ethernet port on the relay. Verify that the amber Link LED illuminates on the connected relay port. If your relay is equipped with dual Ethernet ports, connect to either port.
Use a Telnet client or
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet on the host PC to communicate with the relay. During Ethernet transmit or receive activity, the green Activity LED blinks on the relay Ethernet port. To terminate a Telnet session, use the EXI command from any access level.
Telnet settings available when ETELNET := Y are listed in Table 1.8.
Table 1.8
Telnet Settings
Label Description Range Default
TCBAN
TPORT a
Telnet connect banner
Telnet TCP/IP port
254 characters
23, 1025–65534
TERMINAL SERVER:
23
1–30 minutes 15 timeout a
If you change these settings and accept the new settings, the relay closes all active network connections and briefly pauses network operation.
The relay provides an HTTP (Web) server to provide read-only access to selected settings, metering, and reports. The HTTP server is disabled by default. To enable the HTTP server, make the following settings using the
SET P 5 command.
Table 1.9
Web Server Settings
Label Description
EHTTP Enable or disable Web Server
HTTPPOR Web Server TCP/IP Port Number
HIDLE Web server inactivity timeout (minutes)
Range
Y, N
1–65535
1–30
Default
N
80
5
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Communications Interfaces
Virtual File Interface
C.1.13
When enabled, the HTTP server opens TCP/IP Port 80 by default. Set
HTTPPOR to configure any other port as needed.
Virtual File Interface
You can retrieve and send data as files through the relay’s virtual file interface.
Devices with embedded computers can also use the virtual file interface.
When using serial ports or virtual terminal links, use the FILE DIR command. When you use a communications card, the file transfer protocol(s) supported by the card can present the file structure and send and receive files.
The relay has a two-level file structure. There is one file at the root level and
five subdirectories or folders. Table 1.10 shows the directories and the
contents of each directory.
Table 1.10
Virtual File Structure
Directory
Root
COMMS
SETTINGS
REPORTS
Usage
CFG.TXT file, CFG.XML
a
file, SWCFG.ZIP file and the EVENTS, REPORTS,
SETTINGS, and SYNCHROPHASORS directories.
87L Channel recording files
Relay Settings
SER, circuit breaker, protection and history reports
Access Level
1
1
1
1
EVENTS
SYNCHROPHASORS
EVE, CEV, COMTRADE and history reports 1
Synchrophasor recording files a
Present only if the optional Ethernet card is installed.
1
System Data Format
Settings files and the CFG.TXT file use the system data format (SDF) unless otherwise specified. The files may contain keywords to aid external support software parsing. A keyword is defined as a string surrounded by the open and close bracket characters, followed by a carriage return and line feed. Only one keyword is allowed per line in the file. For example, the keyword INFO would look like this in the file: [INFO]<CR><LF>.
Records are defined as comma-delimited text followed by a carriage return and line feed. One line in a text file equals one record. Fields are defined as comma-delimited text strings.
Comma-Delimited Text Rules
Field strings are separated by commas or spaces and may be enclosed in optional double quotation marks. Double quotes within the field string are repeated to distinguish these double quotes from the quotes that surround the field string. Delimiters are spaces and commas that are not contained within double quotes. Two adjacent commas indicate an empty string, but spaces that appear next to another delimiter are ignored. Consider the following examples for converting a list of fields to comma-delimited text. Consider the following list of fields.
Stri,ng 1
Stri"ng 2
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.1.14
Communications Interfaces
Virtual File Interface
String 3
String4
The translation to comma-delimited text is as follows:
"Stri,ng 1","Stri""ng 2","String 3","String4"
Root Directory
The root directory contains five subdirectories (SETTINGS, REPORTS,
COMMS, EVENTS, and SYNCHROPHASORS) and two or three files
(CFG.TXT, CFG.XML, and SWCFG.ZIP). CFG.XML is only present if the optional Ethernet card is installed. SWCFG.ZIP is for internal use.
CFG.TXT File (Read-Only)
The CFG.TXT file contains general configuration information about the relay and each setting class. External support software retrieves the CFG.TXT file to interact automatically with the connected relay.
CFG.XML File (Read-Only)
Present only in units with the optional Ethernet card installed, the CFG.XML file is supplementary to the CFG.TXT file. The CFG.XML file describes the
IED configuration, any options such as the Ethernet port, and includes firmware identification, settings class names, and configuration file information.
SWCFG.ZIP File (Read/Write)
The SWCFG.ZIP file is a compressed file used to store external support software settings. It is readable at Access Level 1 and above, and writable at
Access Level 2 and above.
Settings Directory
You can access the relay settings through files in the SETTINGS directory. We recommend that you use support software to access the settings files, rather than directly accessing them via other means. External settings support software reads settings from all of these files to perform its functions. The relay only allows you to write to the individual SET_cn files, where c is the settings class code and n is the settings instance. Except for the SET_61850
CID file, changing settings with external support software involves the following steps:
Step 1. The PC software reads the CFG.TXT and SET_ALL.TXT files from the relay.
Step 2. You modify the settings at the PC. For each settings class that you modify, the software sends a SET_cn.TXT file to the relay.
Step 3. The PC software reads the ERR.TXT file. If it is not empty, the relay detects errors in the SET_cn.TXT file.
Step 4. For any detected errors, modify the settings and send the settings until the relay accepts your settings.
Step 5. Repeat Step 2–Step 4 for each settings class that you want to
modify.
Step 6. Test and commission the relay.
SET_ALL.TXT File (Read-Only)
The SET_ALL.TXT file contains the settings for all of the settings classes in the relay.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Communications Interfaces
Virtual File Interface
C.1.15
SET_cn.TXT Files (Read and Write)
There is a file for each instance of each setting class. Table 1.11 summarizes
the settings files. The settings class is designated by c, and the settings instance number is n.
ERR.TXT (Read-Only)
The ERR.TXT file contents are based on the most recent SET_cn.TXT or
SET_61850.CID file written to the relay. If there were no errors, the file is empty. If errors occurred, the relay logs these errors in the ERR.TXT file.
SET_61850.CID
Present if ordered with the IEC 61850 protocol option, the SET_61850.CID file contains the IEC 61850 configured IED description in XML. This file is generated by
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect
®
SEL-5032 Software and downloaded
to the relay. See Section 5: IEC 61850 Communications for more information
on the SET_61850.CID file.
Table 1.11
Settings Directory Files
Settings
Class
A
Filename
SET_An.TXT
O
P
G
L
M
N
B
D
F
P87
R
S SET_Sn.TXT
T
All
All
NA
SET_B1.TXT
SET_Dn.TXT
SET_F1.TXT
SET_G1.TXT
SET_Ln.TXT
SET_SM.TXT
SET_N1.TXT
SET_O1.TXT
SET_Pn.TXT
SET_P87.TXT
SET_R1.TXT
SET_T1.TXT
SET_ALL.TXT
ERR.TXT
SET_61850.CID
Settings Description
Automation; n in range 1–10
For relay-0, n = 1
Bay Control
DNP3 remapping; n in range 1–5
Front panel
Global
Protection logic; n in range 1–6
Breaker monitor settings
Notes
Contact outputs
Port; n in range 1, 2, 3, 5, F
87L communications
Report
Group n; n in range 1–6
Alias settings
All instances of all setting classes
Error log for most recently written settings file
IEC 61850 configured IED description file
Read Access
Level
1, B, P, A, O, 2
1, B, P, A, O, 2
1, B, P, A, O, 2
1, B, P, A, O, 2
1, B, P, A, O, 2
1, B, P, A, O, 2
1, B, P, A, O, 2
1, B, P, A, O, 2
1, B, P, A, O, 2
1, B, P, A, O, 2
1, B, P, A, O, 2
1, B, P, A, O, 2
1, B, P, A, O, 2
1, B, P, A, O, 2
1, B, P, A, O, 2
1, B, P, A, O, 2
1, B, P, A, O, 2
Write Access
Level
A, 2
P, A, O, 2
P, A, O, 2
P, A, O, 2
P, A, O, 2
P, 2
P, 2
P, A, O, 2
O, 2
P, A, O, 2
P, 2
P, A, O, 2
P, 2
P, A, O, 2
N/A
N/A
2
Reports Directory
Use the REPORTS directory to retrieve files that contain the reports shown in
Table 1.12. Note that the relay provides a report file that contains the latest
information each time you request the file.
Table 1.12
REPORTS Directory Files (Sheet 1 of 2)
File
SER.TXT
CSER.TXT
BRE_n.TXT
Usage: All Are Read-Only Files
ASCII SER report, clears SER when read
Compressed ASCII SER report
BRE n H report, n in range 1–2
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.1.16
Communications Interfaces
Virtual File Interface
Events Directory
Synchrophasors
Directory
Table 1.12
REPORTS Directory Files (Sheet 2 of 2)
File
BRE_Sn
CBRE.TXT
HISTORY.TXT
CHISTORY.TXT
PRO.TXT
CPRO.TXT
Usage: All Are Read-Only Files
BRE Sn report, n in range 1–2
Compressed ASCII CBR report
History file
Compressed ASCII History file
ASCII Profiling report
Compressed ASCII profiling report
The relay provides history, event reports, and oscillography files in the
EVENTS directory. Event reports are available in the following formats: SEL
ASCII 4- or 8-samples/cycle reports and Compressed ASCII 4- or 8samples/cycle reports. The size of each event report file is determined by the
LER setting in effect at the time the event is triggered. Higher resolution oscillography is available in binary COMTRADE (IEEE C37.111-1999) format at the sample rate (SRATE) and length (LER) settings in effect at the time the event is triggered.
The 4- and 8-samples/cycle report files (files with names that begin with E or
C) are text files with the same format as the EVENT and CEVENT command responses. Event file names start with the prefix E4_, E8_, C4_, C8_, or HR_, followed by a unique event serial number. For example, if one event is triggered, with serial number of “10001”, the EVENTS directory contains the
files shown in Table 1.13. Event oscillography in COMTRADE format
consists of three files (.CFG, .DAT, and .HDR) that conform to the
COMTRADE standard.
Table 1.13
EVENTS Directory Files (for Event 10001)
File Usage
HISTORY.TXT
History file; read-only
CHISTORY.TXT
Compressed ASCII history file; read-only
C4_10001.TXT
4-samples/cycle Compressed ASCII event report; read-only
C8_10001.TXT
8-samples/cycle Compressed ASCII event report; read-only
E4_10001.TXT
E8_10001.TXT
4-samples/cycle event report; read-only
8-samples/cycle event report; read-only
HR_10001.CFG
Sample/second COMTRADE configuration file; read-only
HR_10001.DAT
Sample/second COMTRADE binary data file; read-only
HR_10001.HDR
Sample/second COMTRADE header file; read-only
Table 1.14 shows the SYNCHROPHASORS directory. Synchrophasor data
recording is enabled when synchrophasors are enabled and EPMDR := Y. The filename includes a time stamp based on the first data frame in the file. The data in the file conforms to the C37.118 data format.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Comms Directory
Communications Interfaces
Communications Database
C.1.17
Table 1.14
SYNCHROPHASORS Directory File Sample
File
080528,160910,0,ONA,1,ABC.PMU
Description
080528 = date
160910 = time
0 = GMT (no time offset)
ONA = Last three letter (spaces removed) of the
PMSTN setting
1 = PMID setting
ABC = CONAM setting (company name)
PMU = file extension indicating synchrophasor recording file
The COMMS directory contains 87L communications channel recording files.
The relay generates recording files for all enabled 87L serial channels. The file time stamp is the (local) time of the rising edge of the 87TRIG setting that
generated the recording file. Table 1.15 shows an example COMMS directory
filename.
Table 1.15
COMMS Directory Filename
Filename
110224,110552334,0,CHL1,TX.87L
Description
110224 = date (February 24, 2011)
110552334 = UTC trigger time (11:05:52.334)
0 = GMT Time Offset
CHL1 = Channel from which the data was recorded (1 or 2)
TX = Direction of data stream with respect to local relay (TX or RX)
87L = File extension indicating 87L communications channel recording file
Communications Database
The relay maintains a database of key relay data for access via the Fast
Message Data Access (see SEL Fast Meter, Fast Operate, Fast SER Messages,
and Fast Message Data Access on page C.2.8 for more information). The
SEL-2032 Communications Processor and SEL-5030 RTAC can use this for data access. The database includes the regions and data described in
Table 1.16. Use the MAP and VIEW commands to display maps and contents
of the database regions. See Section 15: ASCII Command Reference in the
Protection Manual for more information on the MAP and VIEW commands.
Table 1.16
Relay Database Regions (Sheet 1 of 2)
Region Name Contents
LOCAL
METER
DEMAND
TARGET
Relay identification data including FID, Relay ID, Station
ID, and active protection settings group
Metering and measurement data
Demand and peak demand measurement data
Selected rows of Relay Word bit data
Update Rate
Updated on settings change and whenever monitored values change
0.5 s
15 s
0.5 s
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.1.18
Communications Interfaces
Communications Database
Table 1.16
Relay Database Regions (Sheet 2 of 2)
Region Name Contents
HISTORY
BREAKER
STATUS
ANALOGS
Update Rate
Relay event history records for the 10 most recent events Within 15 s of any new event
Circuit breaker monitor summary data
Self-test diagnostic status data
Protection and automation math variables
15 s
5 s
0.5 s
Data within the Ethernet card regions are available for access by external devices via the SEL Fast Message protocol.
The LOCAL region contains the device FID, SID, and RID. It will also provide appropriate status points. This region is updated on settings changes
and whenever monitored status points change (see Table 1.17).
Table 1.17
Relay Database Structure—LOCAL Region
Address (Hex)
0000
0030
0060
0070
0088
0090
0098
00C0
00E8
00E9
Name
FID
BFID
SER_NUM
PART_NUM
CONFIG
SPECIAL
DEVICE_ID
NODE_ID
GROUP
STATUS
Type
char[48] char[48] char[16] char[24] char[8] char[8] char[40] char[40] int int
Description
FID string
SELboot FID string
Device serial number, from factory settings
Device part number, from factory settings
Device configuration string (as reported in ID command)
Special device configuration string (as reported in ID command)
Relay ID setting, from Global settings
Station ID from Global settings
Active group
Bit map of status flags: 0 for okay, 1 for failure
The METER region contains all the basic meter and energy information. This
region is updated every 0.5 seconds. See Table 1.18 for the Map.
Table 1.18
Relay Database Structure—METER Region (Sheet 1 of 3)
Address (Hex)
1000
1001
1002
1004
1006
1008
100A, 100C
100E, 1010
1012, 1014
1016, 1018
101A, 101C
101E, 1020
1022, 1024
1026, 1028
Name
IC1
I0_1
I1_1
I2_1
IA2
IB2
_YEAR
DAY_OF_YEAR
TIME(ms)
FREQ
VDC1
VDC2
IA1
IB1
Type
float[2] float[2] float[2] float[2] float[2] float[2] int int long int float float float float[2] float[2]
Description
4-digit year when data were sampled
1–366 day when data were sampled
Time of day in ms when data were sampled (0–86,400,00)
System frequency
Battery 1 voltage
Battery 2 voltage
Line A-phase current magnitude and phase
Line B-phase current magnitude and phase
Line C-phase current magnitude and phase
Line Terminal W 0-sequence current magnitude and phase
Line 1-sequence current magnitude and phase
Line 2-sequence current magnitude and phase
Breaker 1 A-phase current magnitude and phase
Breaker 1 B-phase current magnitude and phase
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Communications Interfaces
Communications Database
C.1.19
Name
SC
S
PFA
PFB
QB
QC
Q
SA
SB
ANG2_DIF
VS2_SLIP
PA
PB
PC
P
QA
PFC
PF
PEA
PEB
PEC
PE
NEA
NEB
NEC
NE
IC2
IA3
IB3
IC3
VA
VB
VC
V0
V1
V2
VP
VS1
VS2
ANG1_DIF
VS1_SLIP
Table 1.18
Relay Database Structure—METER Region (Sheet 2 of 3)
Address (Hex)
106A
106C
106E
1070
1072
1074
1076
1078
107A
105C
105E
1060
1062
1064
1066
1068
107C
107E
1080
1082
1084
1086
1088
108A
108C
108E
102A, 102C
102E, 1030
1032, 1034
1036, 1038
103A, 103C
103E, 1040
1042, 1044
1046, 1048
104A, 104C
104E, 1050
1052
1054
1056
1058
105A
Type
float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float[2] float[2] float[2] float float[2] float[2] float[2] float[2] float[2] float[2] float[2]
Description
Breaker 1 C-phase current magnitude and phase
Breaker 2 A-phase current magnitude and phase
Breaker 2 B-phase current magnitude and phase
Breaker 2 C-phase current magnitude and phase
A-phase voltage magnitude and phase
B-phase voltage magnitude and phase
C-phase voltage magnitude and phase
0-sequence voltage magnitude and phase
1-sequence voltage magnitude and phase
2-sequence voltage magnitude and phase
Polarizing voltage magnitude
Synchronizing Voltage 1 magnitude
Synchronizing Voltage 2 magnitude
VS1 and VP angle difference, in degrees
VS1 frequency slip with respect to VP, in HZ
VS2 and VP angle difference, in degrees
VS2 frequency slip with respect to VP, in HZ
A-phase real power
B-phase real power
C-phase real power
Total real power
A-phase reactive power
B-phase reactive power
C-phase reactive power
Total reactive power
A-phase apparent power, if available
B-phase apparent power, if available
C-phase apparent power, if available
Total apparent power
A-phase power factor
B-phase power factor
C-phase power factor
Three-phase power factor positive A-phase energy in KWh positive B-phase energy in KWh positive C-phase energy in KWh
Total positive energy in KWh
Negative A-phase energy in KWh
Negative B-phase energy in KWh
Negative C-phase energy in KWh
Total negative energy in KWh
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.1.20
Communications Interfaces
Communications Database
Table 1.18
Relay Database Structure—METER Region (Sheet 3 of 3)
Address (Hex)
1090
1094
1098
109C
10A0
Name
87IAD
87IBD
87ICD
87IQD
87IGD
Type
float float float float float
Description
A-phase differential meter (87IADM, 87IADA)
B-phase differential meter (87IBDM, 87IBDA)
C-phase differential meter (87ICDM, 87ICDA)
Negative-sequence differential meter (87IQDM, 87IQDA)
Ground differential meter (87IGDM, 87IGDA)
The DEMAND region contains demand and peak demand information. This
region is updated every 15 seconds. See Table 1.19 for the Map.
Name
PK_PA
PK_PB
PK_PC
PK_P
PK_SA
PK_SB
PK_SC
PK_S
SB
SC
S
PK_IA
PK_IB
PK_IC
PK_I0
PK_I2
PB
PC
P
SA
IC
I0
I2
PA
_YEAR
DAY_OF_YEAR
TIME(ms)
IA
IB
Table 1.19
Relay Database Structure—DEMAND Region
Address (Hex)
2028
202A
202C
202E
2030
2032
2034
2036
2018
201A
201C
201E
2020
2022
2024
2026
2008
200A
200C
200E
2010
2012
2014
2016
2000
2001
2002
2004
2006
Type
float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float int int long int float float
Description
4-digit year when data were sampled
1–366 day when data were sampled
Time of day in ms when data were sampled (0–86,400,00)
A-phase demand current
B-phase demand current
C-phase demand current
0-sequence demand current
2-sequence demand current
A-phase demand real power
B-phase demand real power
C-phase demand real power total demand real power
A-phase demand apparent power
B-phase demand apparent power
C-phase demand apparent power total demand apparent power
A-phase demand current
B-phase demand current
C-phase demand current
0-sequence demand current
2-sequence demand current
A-phase demand real power
B-phase demand real power
C-phase demand real power total demand real power
A-phase demand apparent power
B-phase demand apparent power
C-phase demand apparent power total demand apparent power
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Communications Interfaces
Communications Database
C.1.21
The TARGET region contains the entire visible Relay Word plus the rows designated specifically for the TARGET region. This region is updated every
0.5 seconds. See Table 1.20 for the Map. See Section 16: Relay Word Bits in
the Protection Manual for detailed information on the Relay Word bits.
Table 1.20
Relay Database Structure—TARGET Region
Address (Hex)
3000
3001
3002
3004
Name
_YEAR
DAY_OF_YEAR
TIME(ms)
TARGET
Type
int int long int char[~240]
Description
4-digit year when data were sampled
1–366 day when data were sampled
Time of day in ms when data were sampled (0–86,400,000)
Entire Relay Word with bit labels
The HISTORY region contains all information available in a History report for the most recent 10 events. This region is updated within 15 seconds of any
new events. See Table 1.21 for the Map.
Table 1.21
Relay Database Structure—HISTORY Region
Address (Hex)
4018
4022
402C
4036
4040
404A
4054
4090
4000
4001
4002
4004
400E
409A
40AE
414E
4162
416C
4176
4180
Name
_YEAR
DAY_OF_YEAR
TIME(ms)
REF_NUM
MONTH
DAY
YEAR
HOUR
MIN
SEC
MSEC
EVENT
GROUP
FREQ
TARGETS
FAULT_LOC
SHOT
SHOT_1P
SHOT_3P
CURR
Type
int int long int int[10] int[10] int[10] int[10] int[10] int[10] int[10] int[10] char[60] int[10] float[10] char[160] float[10] int[10] int[10] int[10] int[10]
Description
4-digit year when data were sampled
1–366 day when data were sampled
Time of day in ms when data were sampled (0–86,400,000)
Event serial number
Month of event
Day of event
Year of event
Hour of event
Minute of event
Second of event
Milliseconds of event
Event type string
Active group during fault
System frequency at time of fault
System targets from event
Fault location
Recloser shot counter (sum of 1-pole and 3-pole)
Single-pole recloser counter
Three-pole recloser counter
Fault current in primary amps
The BREAKER region contains some of the information available in a summary Breaker report. This region is updated every 15 seconds. See
Table 1.22
Relay Database Structure—BREAKER Region (Sheet 1 of 2)
Address (Hex)
5000
5001
Name
_YEAR
DAY_OF_YEAR
Type
int int
Description
4-digit year when data were sampled
1–366 day when data were sampled
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.1.22
Communications Interfaces
Communications Database
Table 1.22
Relay Database Structure—BREAKER Region (Sheet 2 of 2)
Address (Hex)
500E
5010
5012
5014
5016
5018
501A
501C
5002
5004
5006
5008
500A
500C
501E
5020
5022
5024
5026
Name
TIME(ms)
BCWA1
BCWB1
BCWC1
BCWA2
BCWB2
BCWC2
CURA1
CURB1
CURC1
CURA2
CURB2
CURC2
NOPA1
NOPB1
NOPC1
NOPA2
NOPB2
NOPC2
Type
long int float float float float float float float float float float float float long int long int long int long int long int long int
Description
Time of day in ms when data were sampled (0–86,400,000)
Breaker 1 A-phase breaker wear (%)
Breaker 1 B-phase breaker wear (%)
Breaker 1 C-phase breaker wear (%)
Breaker 2 A-phase breaker wear (%)
Breaker 2 B-phase breaker wear (%)
Breaker 2 C-phase breaker wear (%)
Breaker 1 A-phase accumulated current (kA)
Breaker 1 B-phase accumulated current (kA)
Breaker 1 C-phase accumulated current (kA)
Breaker 2 A-phase accumulated current (kA)
Breaker 2 B-phase accumulated current (kA)
Breaker 2 C-phase accumulated current (kA)
Breaker 1 A-phase number of operations
Breaker 1 B-phase number of operations
Breaker 1 C-phase number of operations
Breaker 2 A-phase number of operations
Breaker 2 B-phase number of operations
Breaker 2 C-phase number of operations
The STATUS region contains complete relay status information. This region is
updated every 5 seconds. See Table 1.23 for the Map.
Table 1.23
Relay Database Structure—STATUS Region (Sheet 1 of 2)
Address (Hex)
6006
6007
6008
6009
600A
600B
600C
600D
6000
6001
6002
6004
6005
600E
600F
6010
6011
Name
_YEAR
DAY_OF_YEAR
TIME(ms)
CH1(mV)
CH2(mV)
CH3(mV)
CH4(mV)
CH5(mV)
CH6(mV)
CH7(mV)
CH8(mV)
CH9(mV)
CH10(mV)
CH11(mV)
CH12(mV)
MOF(mV)
OFF_WARN
Type
int int int int int int int int int int long int int int int int int char[8]
Description
4-digit year when data were sampled
1–366 day when data were sampled
Time of day in ms when data were sampled (0–86,400,000)
Channel 1 offset
Channel 2 offset
Channel 3 offset
Channel 4 offset
Channel 5 offset
Channel 6 offset
Channel 7 offset
Channel 8 offset
Channel 9 offset
Channel 10 offset
Channel 11 offset
Channel 12 offset
Master offset
Offset warning string
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Communications Interfaces
Communications Database
C.1.23
Table 1.23
Relay Database Structure—STATUS Region (Sheet 2 of 2)
Address (Hex)
602B
6033
603B
6063
608B
612B
6135
615D
61FD
621D
6019
6021
6023
6025
6027
6029
Name
OFF_FAIL
PS3(V)
PS5(V)
PS_N5(V)
PS15(V)
PS_N15(V)
PS_WARN
PS_FAIL
HW_FAIL
CC_STA
PORT_STA
TIME_SRC
LOG_ERR
TEST_MD
WARN
FAIL
Type
char[8] float float float float float char[8] char[8] char[40] char[40] char[160] char[10] char[40] char[160] char[32] char[64]
Description
Offset failure string
3.3 Volts power supply voltage
5 Volts power supply voltage
–5 Volts regulated voltage
15 Volts power supply voltage
–15 Volts power supply voltage
Power supply warning string
Power supply failure string
Hardware failure strings
Comm. card status strings
Serial port status strings
Time source
SEL
OGIC
error strings
Test mode string
Warning strings for any active warnings
Failure strings for any active failures
The ANALOGS region contains protection and automation variables. This
region is updated every 0.5 seconds. See Table 1.24 for the Map.
Table 1.24
Relay Database Structure—ANALOGS Region
Address (Hex)
7000
7001
7002
7004
7084
Name
_YEAR
DAY_OF_YEAR
TIME(ms)
PMV01_64
AMV001_256
Type
int int long int float[64] float[256]
Description
4-digit year when data were sampled
1–366 day when data were sampled
Time of day in ms when data were sampled (0–86400000)
PMV01–PMV64
AMV001–AMV256
The database is virtual Device 1 in the relay. You can display the contents of a region using the MAP 1:region command (where region is one of the
database region names listed in Table 1.16). An example of the MAP
command is shown in Figure 1.6.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.1.24
Communications Interfaces
Communications Database
=>>MAP 1 METER <Enter>
Virtual Device 1, Data Region METER Map
Data Item Starting Address Type
_YEAR 1000h int
DAY_OF_YEAR 1001h int
TIME(ms) 1002h int[2]
FREQ 1004h float
VDC1 1006h float
VDC2 1008h float
IA1 100ah float[2]
IB1 100eh float[2]
IC1 1012h float[2]
I0_1 1016h float[2]
I1_1 101ah float[2]
I2_1 101eh float[2]
IA2 1022h float[2]
IB2 1026h float[2]
IC2 102ah float[2]
IA3 102eh float[2]
IB3 1032h float[2]
IC3 1036h float[2]
VA 103ah float[2]
VB 103eh float[2]
VC 1042h float[2]
V0 1046h float[2]
V1 104ah float[2]
V2 104eh float[2]
VP 1052h float
VS1 1054h float
VS2 1056h float
ANG1_DIF 1058h float
VS1_SLIP 105ah float
ANG2_DIF 105ch float
VS2_SLIP 105eh float
PA 1060h float
PB 1062h float
PC 1064h float
P 1066h float
QA 1068h float
QB 106ah float
QC 106ch float
Q 106eh float
SA 1070h float
SB 1072h float
SC 1074h float
S 1076h float
PFA 1078h float
PFB 107ah float
PFC 107ch float
PF 107eh float
PEA 1080h float
PEB 1082h float
PEC 1084h float
PE 1086h float
NEA 1088h float
NEB 108ah float
NEC 108ch float
NE 108eh float
87IAD 1090h float[2]
87IBD 1094h float[2]
87ICD 1098h float[2]
87IQD 109ch float[2]
Figure 1.6
MAP 1:METER Command Example
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Section 2
C.Communications Manual
SEL Communications Protocols
This section describes features of the communications protocols and includes the following topics:
➤
➤
➤
➤
➤
➤
➤
Serial Port Hardware Protocol on page C.2.1
Software Protocol Selections on page C.2.2
Protocol Active When Setting PROTO := SEL on page C.2.3
SEL Distributed Port Switch Protocol (LMD) on page C.2.17
SEL-2600A RTD Module Operation on page C.2.18
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) on page C.2.20
Serial Port Hardware Protocol
The serial ports comply with the EIA/TIA-232 Standard, commonly referred to as EIA-232 (formerly known as RS-232). The serial ports support RTS/CTS
hardware flow control. See also Software Flow Control.
Hardware Flow
Control
Hardware handshaking is one form of flow control that two serial devices use to prevent input buffer information overflow and loss of characters. To support hardware handshaking, connect the RTS output pin of each device to the CTS input pin of the other device. To enable hardware handshaking, use the SET P command (or front-panel SET pushbutton sequence) to set RTSCTS := Y.
Disable hardware handshaking by setting RTSCTS := N. Table 2.1 shows
actions the relay takes for the RTSCTS setting values and the conditions relevant to hardware flow control.
Table 2.1
Hardware Handshaking
Setting
RTSCTS Value
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Condition Relay Action
All
Normal input reception
Local input buffer is close to full
Normal transmission
Remote device buffer is close to full, so remote device deasserts RTS
Assert RTS output pin and ignore CTS input pin.
Assert RTS output pin.
Deassert RTS pin to signal remote device to stop transmitting.
Sense CTS input is asserted, transmit normally.
Sense CTS input is deasserted, stop transmitting
Note that the relay must assert the RTS pin to provide power for some modems, fiber-optic transceivers, and hardware protocol converters that are port powered. Check the documentation for any port-powered device to determine if the device supports hardware handshaking or if you must always assert RTS (RTSCTS := N) for proper operation.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.2.2
SEL Communications Protocols
Software Protocol Selections
Data Frame
The relay ports use asynchronous data frames to represent each character of data. Four port settings influence the framing: SPEED, DATABIT, PARITY, and STOPBIT. The time allocated for one bit is the reciprocal of the SPEED.
For example, at 9600 bits per second, one bit-time is 0.104 milliseconds (ms).
The default port framing uses one start bit, 8 data bits, no parity bit, and one stop bit. The transmitter asserts the TXD line for one data frame, as described in the following steps:
The TXD pin is normally in a deasserted state.
➤
To send a character, the transmitter first asserts the TXD pin for one bit time (start bit).
➤
For each data bit, if the bit is set, the transmitter asserts TXD for one bit time. If the bit is not set, it deasserts the pin for one bit time (data bits).
➤
If the PARITY setting is E, the transmitter asserts or deasserts the parity bit so that the number of asserted data bits plus the parity bit is an even number. If the PARITY setting is O, the transmitter asserts or deasserts the parity bit so that the number of asserted data bits plus the parity bit is an odd number. If the
PARITY setting is N, the data frame does not include a parity bit.
➤
At the completion of the data bits and parity bit (if any), the transmitter deasserts the line for one bit time (stop bit). If
STOPBIT is set to 2, the transmitter deasserts the line for one more bit time (stop bit).
➤
Until the relay transmits another character, the TXD pin will remain in the unasserted state.
Software Protocol Selections
The relay supports the protocols and command sets shown in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2
Supported Serial Command Sets (Sheet 1 of 2)
PROTO
Setting Value
Command Set Description
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
MBA or MBB SEL M
IRRORED
B
ITS® communications
PMU Phasor Measurement
Unit
PMU
SEL ASCII
SEL Fast Meter
Commands and responses
SEL Compressed ASCII Commands and comma-delimited responses
Binary meter and digital element commands and responses
SEL Fast Operate
SEL Fast Message
Binary operation commands
Fast Message database access, binary SER commands and responses
Binary high-speed control commands
SEL Fast Operate
Binary synchrophasor protocol, as selected by Port Setting PMUMODE and Global
Binary operation commands
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Virtual Serial Ports
SEL Communications Protocols
Protocol Active When Setting PROTO := SEL
C.2.3
Table 2.2
Supported Serial Command Sets (Sheet 2 of 2)
PROTO
Setting Value
RTD
DNP
Command Set Description
SEL Fast Message protocol for Resistance
Temperature Detector
(RTD) data
Up to 12 analog temperature readings from the SEL
-
2600A.
DNP3 Level 2 Outstation Binary commands and responses (see
Section 4: DNP3 Communications).
Actual serial ports are described in Serial Port Hardware Protocol. In addition
to actual serial ports, the relay supports several virtual serial ports. A virtual serial port does the following:
➤
Transmits and receives characters through a different mechanism than the physical serial port
➤
“Encapsulates” characters in virtual terminal messages of a different protocol
➤
➤
Simulates an actual serial port with setting PROTO := SEL
May have restrictions imposed by the protocol that encapsulates the virtual serial data
You can set the relay to use virtual serial ports encapsulated in SEL
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications links, DNP3 links, and through the Telnet background (BAY1 and BAY2) mechanism of an installed Ethernet card.
Protocol Active When Setting PROTO := SEL
This subsection describes the command sets that are active when the port setting PROTO := SEL. You can also access these protocols through virtual serial ports that simulate ports with PROTO := SEL
.
SEL ASCII Commands
SEL originally designed the SEL ASCII commands for communication between the relay and a human operator via a keyboard and monitor or a printing terminal. A computer with a serial port can also use the SEL ASCII protocol to communicate with the relay, collect data, and issue commands.
The ASCII character set specifies numeric codes that represent printing characters and control characters. The complete ASCII command set is shown
in Section 15: ASCII Command Reference in the Protection Manual. Table 2.3
shows the subset of the ASCII control characters used in this section.
Table 2.3
Selected ASCII Control Characters (Sheet 1 of 2)
Decimal Code
13
10
02
03
24
Name
CR
LF
STX
ETX
CAN
Usage
Carriage return
Line feed
Start of transmission
End of transmission
Cancel
Keystroke(s)
<Enter> or <RETURN> or <Ctrl+M>
<Ctrl+J>
<Ctrl+B>
<Ctrl+C>
<Ctrl+X>
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.2.4
SEL Communications Protocols
Protocol Active When Setting PROTO := SEL
Table 2.3
Selected ASCII Control Characters (Sheet 2 of 2)
Decimal Code
17
19
Name
XON
XOFF
Usage
Flow control on
Flow control off
Keystroke(s)
<Ctrl+Q>
<Ctrl+S>
The <Enter> key on standard keyboards sends the ASCII character CR for a carriage return. This manual instructs you to press the <Enter> key after commands to send the proper ASCII code to the relay. A correctly formatted command transmitted to the relay consists of the command, including optional parameters, followed by either a CR character (carriage return) or CR and LF characters (carriage return and line feed). The following line contains this information in the format this manual uses to describe user input:
<command> <Enter> or <command> <Enter> <CR>
You may truncate commands to the first three characters. For example,
EVENT 1 <Enter> is equivalent to EVE 1 <Enter>. You may use upper- and lowercase characters without distinction, except in passwords.
In response to a command, the relay may respond with an additional dialog line or message. The relay transmits dialog lines in the following format:
<DIALOG LINE ><CR><LF>
The relay transmits messages in the following format:
<STX><MESSAGE LINE 1><CR><LF>
<MESSAGE LINE 2><CR><LF>
…
<LAST MESSAGE LINE><CR><LF>< ETX>
Each message begins with the start-of-transmission character, STX, and ends with the end-of-transmission character, ETX. Each line of the message ends with a carriage return, CR, and line feed, LF.
Send the CAN character to the relay to abort a transmission in progress. For example, if you request a long report and want to terminate transmission of this report, depress the <Ctrl> and <X> keys (<Ctrl+X>) to terminate the report.
SEL Compressed ASCII Commands
The relay supports a subset of SEL ASCII commands identified as
Compressed ASCII commands. Each of these commands results in a commadelimited message that includes a checksum field. Most spreadsheet and database programs can directly import comma-delimited files. Devices with embedded processors connected to the relay can execute software to parse and interpret comma-delimited messages without expending the customization and maintenance labor needed to interpret nondelimited messages. The relay calculates a checksum for each line by numerically summing all of the bytes that precede the checksum field in the message. The program that uses the data can detect transmission errors in the message by summing the characters of the received message and comparing this sum to the received checksum.
Most commands are available only in SEL ASCII format. Selected commands have versions in both standard SEL ASCII and Compressed ASCII formats.
Compressed ASCII reports generally have fewer characters than conventional
SEL ASCII reports, because the compressed reports reduce blanks, tabs, and other white space between data fields to a single comma.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Protocols
Protocol Active When Setting PROTO := SEL
C.2.5
Compressed ASCII Message Format
Each message begins with the start-of-transmission character, STX, and ends with the end-of-transmission character, ETX:
<STX><MESSAGE LINE 1><CR><LF>
<MESSAGE LINE 2><CR><LF>
...
<LAST MESSAGE LINE><CR><LF><ETX>
Each line in the message consists of one or more data fields, a checksum field, and a CRLF. Commas separate adjacent fields. Each field is either a number or a string. Number fields contain base-10 numbers using the ASCII characters
0–9, plus (+), minus (-), and period (.). String fields begin and end with quote marks and contain standard ASCII characters. Hexadecimal numbers are contained in string fields.
The checksum consists of four ASCII characters that are the hexadecimal representation of the two-byte binary checksum. The checksum value is the sum of the first byte on a line (first byte following <STX>, <CR>, or
<CR><LF>) through the comma preceding the checksum.
If you request data with a Compressed ASCII command and these data are not available, (in the case of an empty history buffer or invalid event request), the relay responds with the following Compressed ASCII format message:
<STX>“No Data Available”,“0668”<CR><ETX> where:
No Data Available
0668 is a text string field.
is the checksum field, which is a hexadecimal number represented by a character string.
Table 2.4 lists the Compressed ASCII commands and contents of the
command responses. The Compressed ASCII commands are described in
Section 15: ASCII Command Reference in the Protection Manual.
Table 2.4
Compressed ASCII Commands
Command Response
BNAME
CASCII
ASCII names of Fast Meter status bits
Configuration data of all Compressed ASCII commands available at access levels > 0
CBREAKER
Circuit breaker data
CEVENT
Event report
CHISTORY
CPR
CSER
CSTATUS
List of events
Displays the first 20 rows of the profile report, with the oldest row at the bottom and the latest row at the top
Sequential Events Recorder report
Self-diagnostic status
CSUMMARY
Summary of an event report
DNAME
ASCII names of digital I/O reported in Fast Meter
ID
SNS
Relay identification
ASCII names for SER data reported in Fast Meter
Access Level
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.2.6
SEL Communications Protocols
Protocol Active When Setting PROTO := SEL
NOTE:
Compressed ASCII is self-describing and may vary with the firmware version of your relay. Before you program a master device to send and parse Compressed ASCII commands and responses, you should perform a CASCII command on your relay or contact SEL for more detailed information.
CASCII Configuration Message for Compressed Level 0 ASCII
Commands
The CASCII message provides a block of data for each of the Compressed
ASCII commands supported by an SEL device. The block of data for each command provides message description information to allow automatic data extraction. The relay arranges items in the Compressed ASCII configuration message in a predefined order. For the purpose of improving products and services, SEL sometimes changes the items and item order. The information presented below explains the message and serves as a guide to the items in
Compressed ASCII configuration messages.
A Compressed ASCII command can require multiple header and data configuration lines. The general format of a Compressed ASCII configuration message is the following:
<STX>"CAS",n,"yyyy"<CR><LF>
"COMMAND 1",ll,"yyyy"<CR><LF>
"#H","xxxxx","xxxxx",......,"xxxxx","yyyy"<CR><LF>
"#D","ddd","ddd","ddd","ddd",......,"ddd","yyyy"<CR><LF>
•
•
•
"COMMAND n",ll,"yyyy"<CR><LF>
"#H","xxxxx","xxxxx",......,"xxxxx","yyyy"<CR><LF>
"#D","ddd","ddd","ddd","ddd",......,"ddd","yyyy"<CR><LF><ETX>
Definitions for the items and fields in a Compressed ASCII configuration message are the following:
➤ n is the number of Compressed ASCII command descriptions to follow.
➤
COMMAND
is the ASCII name for the Compressed ASCII command that the requesting device (terminal or external software) sends. The naming convention for the Compressed
ASCII commands is a C character preceding the typical command. For example, CSTATUS, abbreviated to CST, is the
Compressed ASCII STATUS command.
➤
#H
identifies a header line to precede one or more data lines; the
# character represents the number of subsequent ASCII names.
For example, 21H identifies a header line with 21 ASCII labels.
➤ xxxxx
is an ASCII name for corresponding data on following data lines. Maximum ASCII name width is 10 characters.
➤
#
D
identifies a data format line; the # character represents the maximum number of data lines in command response.
➤ ddd
identifies a format field containing one of the following type designators:
➢
➢
➢
I—Integer data
F—Floating point data
zS—String of maximum z characters (for example, enter 10S for a 10-character string)
➤ yyyy
is the 4-byte hex ASCII representation of the checksum.
Every checksum is followed by a new line indication
(<CR><LF>).
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Protocols
Protocol Active When Setting PROTO := SEL
C.2.7
Software Flow Control
Software handshaking is a form of flow control that two serial devices use to prevent input buffer overflow and loss of characters. The relay uses XON and
XOFF control characters to implement software flow control for ASCII commands.
The relay transmits the XOFF character when the input buffer is more than
75 percent full. The connected device should monitor the data it receives for the XOFF character to prevent relay input buffer overflow. The external device should suspend transmission at the end of a message in progress when it receives the XOFF character. When the relay has processed the input buffer so that the buffer is less than 25 percent full, the relay transmits an XON character. The external device should resume normal transmission after receiving the XON character.
The relay also uses XON/XOFF flow control to delay data transmission to avoid overflow of the input buffer in a connected device. When the relay receives an XOFF character during transmission, it pauses transmission at the end of the message in progress. If there is no message in progress when the relay receives the XOFF character, it blocks transmission of any subsequent message. Normal transmission resumes after the relay receives an XON character.
Interleaved ASCII and
Binary Messages
SEL relays have two separate data streams that share the same physical serial port. Human data communications with the relay consist of ASCII character commands and reports that you view using a terminal or terminal emulation package. The binary data streams can interrupt the ASCII data stream to obtain information; the ASCII data stream continues after the interruption.
This mechanism uses a single communications channel for ASCII communication (transmission of an event report, for example) interleaved with short bursts of binary data to support fast acquisition of metering data.
The device connected to the other end of the link requires software that uses the separate data streams to exploit this feature. However, you do not need a device to interleave data streams in order to use the binary or ASCII commands. Note that XON, XOFF, and CAN operations operate on only the
ASCII data stream.
An example of using these interleaved data streams is when the relay communicates with an SEL communications processor. The communications processor performs auto-configuration by using a single data stream and SEL
Compressed ASCII and binary messages. In subsequent operations, the communications processor uses the binary data stream for Fast Meter, Fast
Operate, and Fast SER messages to populate a local database and to perform
SCADA operations. At the same time, you can use the binary data stream to connect transparently to the relay and use the ASCII data stream for commands and responses.
Automatic Messages
If you enable automatic messages, AUTO = Y, the relay issues a message any time the relay turns on, asserts a self-test, changes to another settings group, or triggers an event. For virtual ports, the relay issues automatic messages only if the connection is active. Automatic messages contain the following information:
➤
Power-up: When you turn on the relay, the message provides the terminal ID and the present date and time.
➤
Self-test failure: When the relay detects an internal failure, the automatic message is the same as the relay response to the
STATUS command.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.2.8
SEL Communications Protocols
Protocol Active When Setting PROTO := SEL
Timeout
➤
➤
Group switch: Whenever a settings group change occurs, the message contains the relay ID, terminal ID, present date and time, and the selected settings group.
Events: When the relay triggers an event, the automatic message is the same as the relay response to the SUMMARY command.
Use the TIMEOUT setting to set the idle time for each port. Idle time is the period when no ASCII characters are transmitted and received (interleaved fast messages do not affect the idle time). When the idle time exceeds the
TIMEOUT setting, the following takes place:
➤
➤
The access level changes to Access Level 0.
The front-panel targets reset to TAR 0 if the port had previously remapped the targets.
➤
➤
Virtual connections are disconnected.
The software flow control state changes to XON.
When set to OFF, the port never times out.
SEL Fast Meter, Fast
Operate, Fast SER
Messages, and Fast
Message Data Access
SEL Fast Meter is a binary message that you solicit with binary commands.
Fast Operate is a binary message for control. The relay can also send unsolicited Fast SER messages and unsolicited synchrophasor messages automatically. If the relay is connected to an SEL communications processor, these messages provide the mechanism that the communications processor uses for SCADA or DCS functions that occur simultaneously with ASCII interaction.
This section summarizes the binary commands and messages and includes our recommendation for using Fast Commands and Compressed ASCII configuration information to communicate with the relay. You need this information to develop or specify the software an external device uses to communicate using Fast Messages with the relay. To support this type of development, you will also need to contact SEL for Fast Message protocol details.
Table 2.5 lists the two-byte Fast Commands and the actions the relay takes in
response to each command.
Table 2.5
Fast Commands and Response Descriptions
Command (Hex) Name
A5B9h
A5C0h
A5C1h
A5C2h
A5C3h
A5CEh
A5D1h
A5D2h
A5D3h
Status acknowledge message
Fast Meter data message
Demand Fast Meter data message
Peak demand Fast Meter data message
Description
Clears Fast Meter status byte and sends current status.
Relay Fast Meter definition block Defines available Fast Meter messages and general relay configuration information.
Fast Meter configuration block
Demand Fast Meter configuration block
Defines contents of Fast Meter data message.
Defines contents of demand Fast Meter data message.
Peak demand Fast Meter configuration block Defines contents of peak demand Fast Meter data message.
Fast Operate configuration block Defines available circuit breaker, remote bits, and associated commands.
Defines present values of analog and digital data.
Defines values of most recently completed demand period.
Defines values for peak demands as of end of most recently completed demand periods.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Protocols
Protocol Active When Setting PROTO := SEL
C.2.9
Fast Operate commands use one of the two-byte command types shown in
Table 2.6. Each Fast Operate command also includes additional bytes that
specify a remote bit or circuit breaker bit.
Table 2.6
Fast Operate Command Types
Command (Hex) Name
A5E0h
A5E3h
Fast Operate command for remote bits
Description
Sends command code that will change the state of a remote bit, if setting FASTOP :=Y for this port.
Fast Operate command for circuit breaker bits Sends command code that will change the state of a circuit breaker control bit, if setting FASTOP :=Y for this port.
The Fast Operate messages transfer control commands through the binary data stream. You must enable Fast Operate messages for a port before the relay accepts these messages on that port. In the port settings, when the protocol is set to SEL, the FASTOP setting is visible. Set FASTOP :=Y to enable Fast
Operate commands or to N to disable Fast Operate commands.
General Fast Messages have a two byte identifier (A546h) and a function code. Fast SER messages are general Fast Messages that transport Sequential
Event Recorder report information. The Fast SER messages include function
codes to accomplish different tasks. Table 2.7 lists the Fast SER function
codes and the actions the relay takes in response to each command.
Table 2.7
Fast Message Command Function Codes Used With Fast Messages (A546 Message) and Relay Response Descriptions
Function
Code (Hex)
00h
Function Relay Action
01h
02h
05h
98h
30h
31h
33h
10h
Fast Message definition block request Relay transmits Fast Message definition request acknowledge (Function
Code 80).
Enable unsolicited transfers
Disable unsolicited transfers
Ping; determine channel is operable
Fast SER Message acknowledge
Relay transmits Fast SER command acknowledged message (Function
Code 81) and sets relay element bit FSERx. Relay will transmit subsequent SER events (Unsolicited SER broadcast, Function Code 18).
Relay sends Fast SER command acknowledged message (Function
Code 82) and clears relay element bit FSERx. Relay will not transmit subsequent SER messages.
Relay aborts unsolicited message in progress and transmits ping acknowledge message (Function Code 85).
Relay completes dialog processing for unsolicited message sequence.
Device description request
Data format request
Bit label request
Data request
Relay sends summary of data blocks available (Function Code B0h).
Relay sends description of requested data block, including data labels and types (Function Code B1h).
Relay sends set of bit labels for specific data item (Function Code B3h).
Relay responds with set of requested data (Function Code 90h).
The SEL Fast Message synchrophasor protocol is covered in Section 6:
Recommended Use of Relay Self-Description Messages for Automatic
Configuration
Compressed ASCII and Fast Message commands provide information to allow an external computer-based device to adapt to the special messages for each relay. The SEL communications processors use the self-description messages to configure a database and name the elements in the database.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.2.10
SEL Communications Protocols
SEL M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications
Table 2.8 lists commands and command usage in the recommended order of
execution for automatic configuration.
Table 2.8
Commands in Recommended Sequence for Automatic
Configuration
Command ASCII or hexadecimal (h suffix)
ID
A5C0h
SNS
CASCII
A5CEh
Response
Relay identification
Relay Fast Meter definition block
A5C1h, A5C2h, A5C3h Fast Meter configuration blocks
BNAME
DNAME
Binary names
Digital I/O name
SER names
Compressed ASCII configuration block
Fast Operate configuration block
Usage
ID and FID
Defines available Fast Meter messages and general relay configuration information
Defines contents of Fast Meter data messages
ASCII names of status bits
ASCII names of digital I/O points
ASCII names for SER data points
Configuration data for
Compressed ASCII commands with access levels > 0
Defines available circuit breaker and remote bits, and associated commands, if setting
FASTOP :=Y for this port
SEL M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications
Overview
With SEL-patented M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications protocol, protective relays and other devices can directly exchange information quickly, securely, and with minimal cost. Use M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications for remote control, remote sensing, or communications-assisted protection schemes such as POTT and DCB.
SEL products support several variations of M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications protocols. Through port settings, you can set the relay for compatible operation with SEL-300 series relays, the SEL-2505 or SEL-2506 Remote I/O
Modules, and the SEL-2100 Protection Logic Processors. These devices use
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications to exchange the states of eight logic bits.
You can also use settings to select extensions of the M
IRRORED
B
ITS communications protocols, available only in SEL-400 series relays, to exchange analog values, synchronize clocks, and engage in virtual terminal
dialogs. Table 2.9 summarizes M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications features.
Table 2.9
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications Features (Sheet 1 of 2)
Feature
Transmit and receive logic bits
Transmit and receive analog values
Synchronize time
Compatibility
SEL-300 series relays, SEL-2505,
SEL-2506, SEL-2100, SEL-400 series relays
SEL-400 series relays
SEL-400 series relays
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Communications
Channels and Logical
Data Channels
NOTE:
Complete all of the port settings for a port that you use for
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications before you connect an external M
IRRORED
B
ITS communications device. If you connect a M
IRRORED
B
ITS communications device to a port that is not set for M
IRRORED
B
ITS communications operation, the port will be continuously busy.
SEL Communications Protocols
SEL M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications
C.2.11
Table 2.9
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications Features (Sheet 2 of 2)
Feature
Send and receive virtual serial port characters
Support synchronous communications channel
Compatibility
SEL-400 series relays
SEL-400 series relays
The relay supports two M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications channels, designated
A and B. Use the port setting PROTO to assign one of the M
IRRORED
B
ITS communications channels to a serial port; PROTO := MBA for M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications Channel A or PROTO := MBB for M
IRRORED
B
ITS communications Channel B.
Transmitted bits include TMB1A–TMB8A and TMB1B–TMB8B. The last letter (A or B) designates with which channel the bits are associated. These bits are controlled by SEL
OGIC®
control equations. Received bits include
RMB1A–RMB8A and RMB1B–RMB8B. You can use received bits as arguments in SEL
OGIC
control equations. The channel status bits are ROKA,
RBADA, CBADA, LBOKA, ROKB, RBADB, CBADB, LBOKB, DOKA,
ANOKA, DOKB, and ANOKB. You can also use these bits as arguments in
SEL
OGIC
control equations. Use the COM command for additional channel status information.
Within each M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications message for a given channel (A or B), there are eight logical data channels (1–8). In operation compatible with other SEL products, you can use the eight logical data channels for
TMB1–TMB8. If you use fewer than eight transmit bits, Data Channel 8 is reserved to support data framing and time synchronization features. You can assign the eight logical data channels as follows:
➤
Logic bits: Setting MBNUM controls the number of channels used for logic bits, TMB1–TMB8, inclusive.
➢
If you set MBNUM to 8, then you cannot use channels for any of the following features.
➢
If you set MBNUM to less than 8, you can use the remaining channels (up to a total of eight) for the features listed below.
➤
Message and time synchronization: If MBNUM is less than 8, the relay dedicates a logical data channel to message framing and time synchronization.
➤
Analog channels: Setting MBNUMAN controls the number of analog channels. It is not guaranteed that multiple analog quantities will come from the same relay sampling interval.
➢
If MBNUM := 8, all channels are used for logic bits and
MBNUMAN is forced to 0.
➢
If MBNUM := 7, seven channels are used for logic bits and one channel is used for message and time synchronization.
➢
If MBNUM is less than 7, you can use the remaining channels for analog channels by setting the desired number of channels in MBNUMAN (1 to 7 – MBNUM).
Note: Analog quantities are converted to Integer values for transmission via M
IRRORED
B
ITS
. Because of this, they will lose any fractional value they may have had. To maintain a fixed resolution, multiply the analog quantity by a set value
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.2.12
SEL Communications Protocols
SEL M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications
Operation
➤ before transmission, and divide by the same quantity upon reception. To maintain accuracy, add 0.5 to the analog quantity after any scaling.
Virtual terminal sessions: Setting MBNUMVT controls the number of additional channels available for the virtual terminal session.
➢
If MBNUMVT := OFF, the relay does not dedicate any additional channels to the virtual terminal session.
➢
If there are spare channels
(7 – MBNUM – MBNUMAN > 0), you can use
MBNUMVT to dedicate these additional channels to the virtual terminal session.
The virtual terminal session uses channels differently than other data exchange mechanisms. There can be only one active virtual terminal session across a M
IRRORED
B
ITS
link. One channel, included in the synchronization data, is always dedicated to this virtual terminal session. If you assign additional channels to the virtual terminal session (set MBNUMVT > 0), you will improve the performance of the virtual terminal session. The relay uses the additional channels to exchange data more quickly.
MBG Protocol
The MBG protocol selection allows the user to move the M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Transmit equations to the Group settings for more flexibility in bus transfer schemes. Using MBG will allow the M
IRRORED
B
ITS
settings to transfer with a Group Switch when it occurs.
To enable the MBG protocol, set the Port setting PROTO := MBGA to enable
Channel A M
IRRORED
B
ITS
, or PROTO := MBGB for Channel B M
IRRORED
B
ITS
. Next, the protocol will need to be enabled in the Group settings.
Under Group settings, enable the MGB protocol for Channel A by setting
EMBA := Y. When this setting is enabled, the transmit equation settings
TX_IDA, RX_IDA, and TMBnA will be available in the Group settings and will be hidden from the Port settings.
The MBG protocol can also be enabled for Channel B by setting EMBB := Y.
When this setting is enabled, the transmit equation settings TX_IDB,
RX_IDB, and TMBnB will be available in the Group settings and will be hidden from the Port settings.
87L MBG Protocol
The 87L MBG protocol selection allows the user to move the 87L transmit equations to the Group settings for more flexibility. Using the 87L MBG protocol will allow the 87L transmit equations to transfer with a Group
Settings switch when it occurs.
To enable the 87L MBG protocol, set the 87L Port setting E87PG = G (see
Table 3.130 on page P.3.263) to move the 87L transmit and 87L communication bits to the Group Settings. The transmit and receive address as well as the communication bits will now be available in Group settings.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Protocols
SEL M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications
C.2.13
The 87L MBG protocol is only available for 87L of serial communication.
This protocol is not supported for 87L over Ethernet (E87CH = 2E, 3E, 4E).
MB8
While the relay does not have a setting for the MB8 protocol implemented in some SEL products, you can configure the relay to communicate with devices set to MB8A or MB8B (such as the SEL-351S or SEL-2505). Set the protocol setting PROTO to MBA or MBB. Set the STOPBIT setting to 2. Set all other settings to match those in the other device.
Message Transmission
The relay transmits a M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications message as fast as it can for the configured data rate. At 9600 bps, this is approximately one message every 1/4-cycle. At 19200 bps, it is approximately every 1/8-cycle.
At 38400 bps, it is approximately two every 1/8-cycle. However, if pacing is enabled, it slows to one message every 3 ms at 19200 and 38400 bps (see
Table 2.12). Each message contains the most recent values of the transmit bits.
If you enabled any of the extended features through the settings, note that the relay transmits a portion of the extended data in each message.
If you have specified virtual terminal data channels for this port, the designated data channels are normally idle. If you use the PORT command to open a virtual terminal session for this port and type characters, the relay transmits these characters through the virtual terminal logical data channels.
Message Reception Overview
When the devices are synchronized and the M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications channel is in a normal state, the relay decodes and checks each received message. If the message is valid, the relay performs the following operations:
➤
Sends each received logic bit (RMBn) to the corresponding pickup and dropout security counters, that in turn set or clear the RMBnc relay element bits.
NOTE: c represents the M
IRRORED
B
ITS channel (A or B), n represents the M
IRRORED
B
ITS
data channel data number (1–8).
➤
Accumulates the analog data, and every 18th message, updates the received analog quantities.
➤
Accumulates the virtual terminal information, and every 18th message, makes the received character or characters available to the virtual terminal.
Message Decoding and Integrity Checks
The relay provides indication of the status of each M
IRRORED
B
ITS communications channel, with element bits ROKA and ROKB. During normal operation, the relay sets the ROKc bit. The relay clears the bit upon detecting any of the following conditions:
➤
➤
➤
➤
Parity, framing, or overrun errors
Receive data redundancy error
Receive message identification error
No message received in the time three messages have been sent
The relay will assert ROKc only after successful synchronization as described below and two consecutive messages pass all of the data checks described above. After ROKc is reasserted, received data may be delayed while passing through the security counters described below.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.2.14
SEL Communications Protocols
SEL M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications
While ROKc is not set, the relay does not transfer new RMB data to the pickup-dropout security counters described below. Instead, the relay sends one of the user-definable default values to the security counter inputs. For each
RMBn, specify the default value with setting RMBnFL, as follows:
➤
➤
➤
1
0
P (to use last valid value)
Individual pickup and dropout security counters supervise the movement of each received data bit into the corresponding RMBn element. You can set each pickup/dropout security counter from 1 to 8. A setting of 1 causes a security counter to pass every occurrence, while a setting of 8 causes a counter to wait for eight consecutive occurrences in the received data before updating the data bits. The pickup and dropout security count settings are separate. Control the security count settings with the settings RMBnPU and RMBnDO.
A pickup/dropout security counter operates identically to a pickup/dropout timer, except that the counter uses units of counted received messages instead of time. An SEL relay communicating with another SEL relay typically sends and receives M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications messages eight times per power system cycle. Therefore, a security counter set to two counts will delay
a bit by approximately 1/4 of a power system cycle. Reference Table 2.12 for
the message rates based on the settings. You must consider the impact of the security counter settings in the receiving device to determine the channel timing performance.
Channel Synchronization
When an SEL relay detects a communications error, it deasserts ROKA or
ROKB. The relay transmits an attention message until it receives an attention message that includes a match to the TX_ID setting value. If the attention message is successful, the relay has properly synchronized and data transmission will resume. If the attention message is not successful, the relay will repeat the attention message until it is successful.
Loopback Testing
Use the LOOP command to enable loopback testing. While in loopback mode, ROKc is deasserted, and, LBOKc asserts and deasserts based on the received data checks.
Channel Monitoring
Based on the results of data checks (described above), the relay collects information regarding the 255 most recent communications errors. Each record contains at least the following fields:
➤
➤
➤
➤
Dropout Time/Date
Pickup Time/Date
Time elapsed during dropout
Reason for dropout
Use the COM command to generate a long or summary report of the communications errors.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Protocols
SEL M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications
C.2.15
NOTE:
Combine error conditions including RBADA, RBADB, CBADA, and
CBADB with other alarm conditions using SEL
OGIC
control equations. You can use these alarm conditions to program the relay to take appropriate action when it detects a communications channel failure.
There is a single record for each outage, but an outage can evolve. For example, the initial cause could be a data disagreement, but framing errors can extend the outage. If the channel is presently down, the COMM record will only show the initial cause, but the COMM summary will display the present cause of failure.
When the duration of an outage on Channel A or B exceeds a user-definable threshold, the relay will assert a user-accessible flag, RBADA or RBADB.
When channel unavailability exceeds a user-definable threshold for Channel A or B, the relay asserts a user-accessible flag, CBADA or CBADB.
NOTE:
Use an SEL-C272 or
SEL-C273 cable.
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications Protocol for the Pulsar 9600-BPS Modem
To use a Pulsar MBT modem, set setting MBT:= Y. Setting MBT:= Y hides setting SPEED and forces it to 9600, and hides setting RTSCTS and forces it to a value of N. The relay also injects a delay (idle time) of 3 ms between messages.
NOTE:
You must consider the idle time in calculations of data transfer latency through a Pulsar MBT modem system.
The relay sets RTS to a negative voltage at the EIA-232 connector to signify that M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications matches this specification. Other relays may set RTS to a positive voltage at the EIA-232 connector to signify usage of the R6 version or the R version of M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications.
Settings
The port settings associated with M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications are shown
Set PROTO := MBA to enable the M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications protocol
Channel A on this port. Set PROTO := MBB to enable the M
IRRORED
B
ITS communications protocol Channel B on this port.
Table 2.10
General Port Settings Used With Mirrored Bits Communications
Name Description Range
PROTO
MBT
SPEED
STOPBIT
Protocol
Enable Pulsar 9600 modem
Data speed. Hidden and set to 9600 if
MBT := Y
Stop bits. Hidden and set to 1 if
MBT := Y
None, SEL, DNP,
MBA, MBB, MBGA,
MBGB, RTD, PMU
Y, N
300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, SYNC
1, 2
Default
SEL
N
9600
1
Setting SPEED:= SYNC (available only on the rear-panel serial ports for which PROTO:= MBA or MBB) places the serial port in synchronous (or externally-clocked) mode. The serial port hardware will synchronize transmit and receive data (TX/RX) to a clock signal applied to the Pin 8 input at any effective data rate up to 64000. This setting choice will suit certain synchronous communications networks.
The relay uses the RBADPU setting to determine how long a channel error must persist before the relay asserts RBADA or RBADB. The relay deasserts
RBADA and RBADB immediately when it no longer detects a channel error.
The relay uses the CBADPU setting to determine when to assert CBADA and
CBADB. If the short-term channel down time ratio exceeds CBADPU, the relay asserts the appropriate CBAD bit.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.2.16
SEL Communications Protocols
SEL M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications
NOTE:
You must use paced transmission mode (set TXMODE := P) when connecting to an SEL product that is not an SEL-400 series relay.
The TXMODE setting provides compatibility with SEL devices that are not
SEL-400 series relays. The relay can send messages more quickly than the
SEL-300 series relays and other SEL devices can process these messages.
This could lead to loss of data and a failure to communicate properly. When you set TXMODE to P, the relay sends new M
IRRORED
B
ITS
messages every
3 ms even if the selected data speed (SPEED setting) would allow more frequent messages.
As a function of the settings for SPEED, TXMODE, and MBT, the message
transmission periods are shown in Table 2.12.
Table 2.11
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications Protocol Settings
Name Description Range Default
TX_ID
RX_ID
RBADPU
CBADPU
TXMODE
MBNUM
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications ID of this device
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications ID of device connected to this port
Outage duration to set RBAD
1–4
1–4; must be different than TX_ID
1–10000 seconds
2
1
Number of M
IRRORED
B
ITS communications data channels used for logic bits
10
Channel unavailability to set CBAD 1–100000 parts per million
Transmission mode a
N (normal), P (paced)
20000
N
0–8 8
RMB1 channel fail state
RMB1 pickup message count
0, 1, P
1–8
P
1
RMB1FL b
RMB1PU
RMB1DO
•
•
•
RMB8FL
RMB8PU
RMB8DO
MBTIME
RMB1 dropout message count
•
•
•
RMB8 channel fail state
RMB8 pickup message count
1–8
0, 1, P
1–8
1
P
1
RMB8 dropout message count
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
time synchronize enable
1–8
Y, N
1
N
MBNUMAN Number of analog data channels.
Hidden and set to 0 if MBNUM := 7 or 8.
MBANA1 c
MBANA2
Selection for analog Channel 1
Selection for analog Channel 2
MBANA3
MBANA4
MBANA5
MBANA6
MBANA7
Selection for analog Channel 3
Selection for analog Channel 4
Selection for analog Channel 5
Selection for analog Channel 6
Selection for analog Channel 7
0–n, n=7–MBNUM
Analog quantity label
Analog quantity label
Analog quantity label
Analog quantity label
Analog quantity label
Analog quantity label
Analog quantity label
MBNUMVT Number of virtual terminal channels OFF,0–n, n=7–MBNUM–MBN
UMAN a b c
Must be P for connections to devices that are not SEL-400 series relays.
Hidden based on MBNUM setting.
Hidden based on MBNUMAN setting.
0
LIAFM
LIBFM
LICFM
VAFM
VBFM
VCFM
VABRMS
OFF
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Protocols
SEL Distributed Port Switch Protocol (LMD)
C.2.17
Table 2.12
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications Message Transmission Period
Speed in
Bits per Second
38400
19200
9600
4800
TXMODE := NORMAL
MBT := N
TXMODE := PACED
MBT := N
1.0 ms
2.0 ms
4.0 ms
8.0 ms
3.0 ms
3.0 ms
4.0 ms
8.0 ms
MBT :=Y
N/A
N/A
7.0 ms
N/A
Set the RX_ID of the local relay to match the TX_ID of the remote relay. In a three-terminal case, Relay X transmits to Relay Y, Relay Y transmits to
Relay Z, and Relay Z transmits to Relay X. Table 2.13 lists the M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications ID settings for Relays X, Y, and Z.
Table 2.13
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications ID Settings for Three-Terminal
Application
Relay
X
Y
Z
TX_ID
1
2
3
RX_ID
3
1
2
SEL Distributed Port Switch Protocol (LMD)
SEL Distributed Port Switch Protocol (LMD) permits multiple devices to share a common communications channel. This protocol is appropriate for low-cost, low-speed port switching applications where updating a real-time database is not a requirement. The relay does not have built in LMD protocol, but you can connect this relay to an SEL-2885 EIA-232/485 Protocol
Converter and connect the SEL-2885 to an EIA-485 multidrop network. See the SEL-2885 EIA-232 to EIA-485 Transceiver product flyer for more information on the settings, configuration, and application of the SEL-2885.
(Contact your local technical service center, the SEL factory, or visit our website at www.selinc.com for a copy of the SEL-2885 product flyer.)
Initialization
For the first 30 seconds after applying power to the relay, the SEL-2885 listens for an initialization string from the relay. The initialization string must be enclosed in square brackets ([ ]). The following table describes the initialization string fields. To send this string automatically, set AUTO to Y and append the initialization string to the relay ID setting so that it is included in the relay power-up header.
Table 2.14
SEL-2885 Initialization String [MODE PREFIX ADDR:SPEED]
[
Field
Mode
PREFIX
ADDR
Optional or
Required
Required
Optional
Required
Required
[
Value
Not specified
N
B
Description
Opening bracket is start of string
@, #, $, %, or & Prefix character
01–99
Treat as N, below
Addressing for ASCII device
Addressing for binary devices
Two digit address in the range
01-99
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.2.18
SEL Communications Protocols
SEL-2600A RTD Module Operation
Operation
Table 2.14
SEL-2885 Initialization String [MODE PREFIX ADDR:SPEED]
:
Field
Optional or
Required
Optional; needed if
SPEED is specified
Value
Colon “:”
Description
]
SPEED Optional
Required ]
12
24
48
96
Colon “:”, then one of the following codes to match the port
SPEED setting
1200 bps
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
Closing bracket is end of string
The following steps describe how to use the LMD operation of the SEL-2885:
Step 1. When you send the prefix and address, the SEL-2885 enables echo and message transmission.
You must wait until you receive a prompt before entering commands to avoid losing echoed characters while the external transmitter is warming up.
Step 2. You can use the commands that are available for the protocol setting of the port where the SEL-2885 is installed.
Step 3. If the port PROTO setting is set to SEL, you can use the QUIT command to terminate the connection.
If no data are sent to the relay before the port time-out period, this command automatically terminates the connection.
Step 4. If all relays in the multidrop network do not have the same prefix setting, enter the sequence <Ctrl+X> OR QUIT
<Enter> before entering the prefix character to connect to another device.
SEL-2600A RTD Module Operation
The SEL-2600A RTD Module Protocol (RTD) enables communication with an SEL-2600A via an SEL-2800 (EIA-232 to Fiber-Optic) Transceiver.
RTD
SEL-2600A
RTD Module
SEL-2800 Relay
RTD
Figure 2.1
SEL-2600A RTD Module and the Relay
This protocol supports data acquisition of up to 12 temperature channels and places the results directly into predefined analog quantities (RTD01–RTD12) inside the relay for use in free-form SEL
OGIC
applications. For more information on the SEL-2600A or SEL-2800, contact your local technical service center, the SEL factory, or visit the SEL website (www.selinc.com) for a copy of the SEL-2600A and SEL-2800 product flyers.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Protocols
SEL-2600A RTD Module Operation
C.2.19
Initialization
Perform the following steps to prepare the relay for communicating with an
SEL-2600A RTD module:
Step 1. Set the desired port to RTD protocol.
Step 2. Set the port setting RTDNUM to the number of RTDs attached to the SEL-2600A.
Step 3. Set the RTD type settings (RTDnnTY) to the appropriate RTD type.
Step 4. Connect the SEL-2600A RTD Module to the port via the
SEL-2800 (EIA-232 to Fiber-Optic) Transceiver.
Operational Overview
The SEL-2600A RTD module sends all temperature measurements to the relay every 0.5 seconds. The relay places the received temperature measurements into analog quantities RTD01–RTD12 for use in free-form
SEL
OGIC
applications. The data range is from –50 to +250 °C.
NOTE:
When a channel status bit is not asserted, the data in the respective analog quantity is the last valid temperature, not the current temperature.
If the relay stops receiving valid analog quantities from a certain channel, the temperature stored in the relay freezes at the last received value. Fifteen status
bits help supervise decisions based on temperature measurements. Table 2.15
describes how to interpret the status bits.
Table 2.15
RTD Status Bits
RTD Status Bit Description
RTDFL
RTDCOMF
Asserts if the SEL
-
2600A experiences an internal problem.
Asserts if the relay does not receive a valid measurement from the SEL
-
2600A for 1.25 seconds.
RTD01ST–RTD12ST Assert when an RTD is attached to a channel and the
SEL-2600A is able to read RTD.
RTDIN SEL
-
2600 input status bit. Asserts when the SEL
-
2600 is healthy and the received data indicates the assertion of the input.
To view the temperature measurements received from the SEL-2600A, issue
the MET T command, as depicted in Figure 2.2.
=>>MET T <Enter>
Relay 1 Date: 05/17/2003 Time: 13:42:13.220
Station A Serial Number: 0000000000
RTD Input Temperature Data (deg. C)
RTD 1 = -48
RTD 2 = Channel Failure
RTD 3 = 0
RTD 4 = 24
RTD 5 = Channel Not Used
RTD 6 = 72
RTD 7 = Channel Failure
RTD 8 = 120
RTD 9 = Channel Not Used
RTD 10 = 168
RTD 11 = 192
RTD 12 = 216
Figure 2.2
MET T Command Response
The MET T command displays the following messages:
➤
Channel Failure
: This message is displayed for each channel whose channel status bit is not asserted.
➤
Channel Not Used
: This message is displayed for each channel whose channel type is set to NA.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.2.20
SEL Communications Protocols
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
When there is a status problem with the SEL-2600A RTD module, the MET
T command will respond with an informational message, as shown in
=>>MET T
SEL-2600 Failure
Figure 2.3
MET T Command Response for Status Problem
The four possible messages for status problems, with their interpretation, are
Table 2.16
MET T Command Status Messages
Message
SEL
-
2600 Failure
Communication Failure
No data available
Channel Failure
Interpretation
RTDFL status bit asserted
RTDCOMF status bit asserted
Port Protocol not set to RTD
RTDxxST status bit deasserted
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
When ESNTP is enabled (Port 5 setting ESNTP is not OFF), the relay internal clock conditionally synchronizes to the time of day served by a Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server. The relay uses a simplified version of NTP called the
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). SNTP is not as accurate as IRIG-B
(see Configuring High-Accuracy Timekeeping on page P.13.1). The relay can use SNTP as a less accurate primary time source, or as a backup to the higher accuracy IRIG-B time source.
SNTP As Primary Or
Backup Time Source
If an IRIG-B time source is connected and either Relay Word bits TSOK or
TIRIG assert, then the relay synchronizes the internal time-of-day clock to the incoming IRIG-B time code signal, even if SNTP is configured in the relay and an NTP server is available. If the IRIG-B source is disconnected (TIRIG deassert) then the relay synchronizes the internal time-of-day clock to the
NTP server if available. In this way an NTP server acts as either the primary time source, or as a backup time source to the more accurate IRIG-B time source.
Creating an NTP
Server
Three SEL application notes available from the SEL web site describe how to create an NTP server.
AN2009-10: Using an SEL-2401, SEL-2404, or SEL-2407
®
to Serve NTP
Via the SEL-3530 RTAC
AN2009-38: Using SEL Satellite-Synchronized Clocks With the SEL-3332 or
SEL-3354 to Output NTP
AN2010-03: Using an SEL-2401, SEL-2404, or SEL-2407
®
to Create a
Stratum 1 Linux
®
NTP Server
Configuring SNTP
Client in the Relay
To enable SNTP in the relay make Port 5 setting ESNTP = UNICAST,
MANYCAST, or BROADCAST. Table 2.17 shows each setting associated
with SNTP.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Protocols
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
C.2.21
Table 2.17
Settings Associated With SNTP
Setting Prompt Range Default Description
ESNTP SNTP Enable (OFF,
UNICAST,
MANYCAST,
BROADCAST)
SNTP Request Update
Rate (15–3600 s)
UNICAST,
MANYCAST,
BROADCAST
OFF Selects the mode of operation of SNTP. See
descriptions in SNTP Operation Modes.
SNTPRAT
SNTPTO a
SNTP Timeout (5–20 s)
15–3600 s
5–20 s
60
5
Determines the rate at which the relay asks for updated time from the NTP server when
ESNTP = UNICAST or MANYCAST. Determines the time the relay will wait for an NTP broadcast when ENSTP = BROADCAST.
Determines the time the relay will wait for the NTP master to respond when ENSTP = UNICAST or
MANYCAST
SNTPPIP SNTP Primary Server
IP Address (w.x.y.z) b
Valid IP
Address
192.168.1.110
Selects primary NTP server when
ENSTP = UNICAST, or broadcast address when
ESNTP = MANYCAST or BROADCAST
SNTPBIP SNTP Backup Server IP
Address (w.x.y.z) c
Valid IP
Address
192.168.1.111
Selects backup NTP server when
ESNTP = UNICAST.
SNTPPOR d
SNTP IP Local Port
Number (1–65534)
1–65534 123 Ethernet port used by SNTP. Leave at default value unless otherwise required.
c d a b
This setting is: Hidden if ESNTP = OFF; Hidden and forced to 5 if ESNTP = BROADCAST.
Where: w: 0–126, 128–239, x: 0–255, y: 0–255, z: 0–255.
Where: w: 0–126, 128–223, x: 0–255, y: 0–255, z: 0–255.
This setting is hidden if ESNTP
UNICAST.
SNTP Operation Modes
The following sections explain the setting associated with each SNTP operation mode (UNICAST, MANYCAST, and BROADCAST).
ESNTP = UNICAST
In unicast mode of operation the SNTP client in the relay requests time updates from the primary (IP address setting SNTPPIP) or backup (IP address setting SNTPBIP) NTP server at a rate defined by setting SNTPRAT. If the
NTP server does not respond with the period defined by the sum of setting
SNTPTO and SNTPRAT then the relay tries the other SNTP server. When the relay successfully synchronizes to the primary NTP time server, Relay Word bit TSNTPP asserts. When the relay successfully synchronizes to the backup
NTP time server, Relay Word bit TSNTPB asserts.
ESNTP = MANYCAST
In manycast mode of operation the relay initially sends an NTP request to the broadcast address contained in setting SNTPPIP. The relay continues to broadcast requests at a rate defined by setting SNTPRAT. When a server replies, the relay considers that server to be the primary NTP server, and switches to UNICAST mode, asserts Relay Word bit TSNTPP, and thereafter requests updates from the primary server. If the NTP server stops responding for time SNTPTO, the relay deasserts TSNTPP and begins to request time from the broadcast address again until a server responds.
ESNTP = BROADCAST
Setting SNTPPIP = 0.0.0.0 while ESNTP = BROADCAST, the relay will listen for and synchronize to any broadcasting NTP server. If setting SNTPPIP is set to a specific IP address while setting ESNTP = BROADCAST, then the relay will listen for and synchronize to only NTP server broadcasts from that address. When synchronized the relay asserts Relay Word bit TSNTPP. Relay
Word bit TNSTPP deasserts if the relay does not receive a valid broadcast within the SNTPT0 setting value after the period defined by setting
SNTPRAT.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.2.22
SEL Communications Protocols
Using the Embedded HTTP Server
SNTP Accuracy
Considerations
SNTP time synchronization accuracy is limited by the accuracy of the SNTP
Server and by the networking environment. The highest degree of SNTP time synchronization can be achieved by minimizing the number of switches and routers between the SNTP Server and the relay.
When installed on a network with low burden configured with one Ethernet switch between the relay and the SNTP Server, and when using
ESNTP = UNICAST or MANYCAST, the relay time synchronization error to the SNTP server is typically less than ±5 milliseconds.
Using the Embedded HTTP Server
When Port 5 setting EHTTP = Y, the relay serves read-only web pages displaying certain settings, metering, and status reports. The relay embedded
HTTP server has been optimized and tested to work with the most popular web browsers, but should work with any standard web browser. Up to four users can access the embedded HTTP server simultaneously.
To begin using the embedded read-only HTTP server, launch your web browser, and browse to http://IPADDR:HTTPPOR, where IPADDR is the IP address setting and HTTPPOR is the port number setting
(e.g., http://192.168.1.2:143). The relay responds with a login screen as shown
Figure 2.4
HTTP Server Login Screen
Enter ACC for the Username, and type in the relay Access Level 1 password, then click Submit. The only username allowed is ACC. The relay responds
with the home page shown in Figure 2.5. While you remain logged into the
relay, the web page displays the approximate time as determined by the relay time-of-day clock, and increments the displayed time once per second based on the clock contained in your PC.
Once the user is logged in, the HTTP server displays the Version web page.
This page will refresh every five seconds and includes all version information for the relay.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Protocols
Using the Embedded HTTP Server
C.2.23
Figure 2.5
HTTP Server Home Page and Response to Version Menu Selection
Click on any menu selection from the left pane to navigate through the
available web pages. See Table 2.18 for web page selections.
Table 2.18
Web Pages and Descriptions
Web Page Menu Item Description
History
Sequential Events
Recorder
Self-Test Status
Breaker Monitor
Metering
Show Settings
Communications
Targets
Displays the standard HIS command output. If events are present, selecting an event number will display the corresponding event report.
Displays the standard SER command output on a static (not updating) web page.
Displays the output of the STA A command. This web page refreshes every five seconds.
Shown only if breaker monitoring is available and enabled on the relay. Displays sub-menus linked to breaker monitor reports for breakers with monitoring enabled.
Displays metered values. All available and enabled metering options (Fundamental, RMS, Line Max/Min, etc.) are selectable as menu and sub-menu items. All metering report web pages refresh every five seconds. Selecting the Metering main menu option opens the Metering Fundamental report.
Displays all settings available at the ACC level. Classes and type instances are selectable as menu and sub-menu items. Type instances that can move with the active group (Group,
Protection, etc.) are displayed in red. Selecting the Show
Settings menu option opens the Group 1 settings web page.
Displays communications reports. All available and enabled communications reports (ETH, GOOSE, COM A, RTC, etc.) are selectable as menu and sub-menu items. All communications report web pages refresh every five seconds. Selecting this menu option opens the ETH report web page.
Displays the TARget command web page on a static (not updating) web page. Clicking on an element name (not "*") will display an 8x8 target grid with the selected element's row at the top. This display will refresh every three seconds.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.2.24
SEL Communications Protocols
Using the Embedded HTTP Server
Some menus expand to reveal more sub-menus, such as the Show Settings
Figure 2.6
Web Server Show Settings Screen
The Meter Reports screens update automatically about every five seconds.
To log out, either close the web browser window or click on Logout at the center of the banner bar near the top of the web page. The Web server will also log out the user automatically after HIDLE seconds of inactivity.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Section 3
C.Communications Manual
SEL Communications
Processor Applications
This section describes applications in which the relay is applied in a system integration architecture that includes SEL Communications Processors, the
SEL-2032, SEL-2030, and SEL-2020. This section addresses the following topics:
➤
➤
SEL Communications Processors on page C.3.1
SEL Communications Processor and Relay Architecture on page C.3.3
➤
SEL Communications Processor Example on page C.3.5
For detailed application examples using the SEL-2032, SEL-2030, and
SEL-2020 Communications Processors, see the SEL library of Application
Guides on our website at www.selinc.com.
SEL Communications Processors
NOTE:
The IRIG-B time signal available from SEL communications processors is not suitable for highaccuracy IRIG (HIRIG) timekeeping mode, which is required for synchrophasor functions. See
Configuring High-Accuracy
Timekeeping on page P.13.1 for details.
SEL offers communications processors, the SEL-2032, SEL-2030, and
SEL-2020, powerful tools for system integration and automation. These devices provide a single point of contact for integration networks with a star
topology as shown in Figure 3.1.
Local HMI
To SCADA
To Engineering
Modem
SEL Communications
Processor
SEL IED SEL IED SEL IED Non-SEL IED
Figure 3.1
SEL Communications Processor Star Integration Network
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.3.2
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processors
In the star topology network in Figure 3.1 the SEL Communications Processor
offers the following substation integration functions:
➤
➤
Collection of real-time data from SEL and non-SEL IEDs
Calculation, concentration, and aggregation of real-time IED data into databases for SCADA, HMI, and other data consumers
➤
Access to the IEDs for engineering functions including configuration, report data retrieval, and control through local serial, remote dial-in, and Ethernet network connections
➤
Simultaneous collection of SCADA data and engineering connection to SEL IEDs over a single cable
➤
Distribution of IRIG-B time synchronization signal to IEDs based on external IRIG-B input, internal clock, or protocol interface
➤
Automated dial-out on alarms
The SEL communications processors have 16 serial ports plus a front port.
This port configuration does not limit the size of a substation integration
project, because you can create a multitiered solution as shown in Figure 3.2.
In this multitiered system, the lower-tier SEL communications processors forward data to the upper-tier SEL communications processor that serves as the central point of access to substation data and station IEDs.
Local HMI
To SCADA
To Engineering
Modem
SEL Communications
Processor
SEL Communications
Processor
SEL Communications
Processor
SEL-411L Relay
SEL IED SEL IED SEL IED SEL IED
SEL IED SEL IED Non-SEL IED Non-SEL IED
Figure 3.2
Multitiered SEL Communications Processor Architecture
You can add additional communications processors to provide redundancy and eliminate possible single points of failure. The SEL communications processors provide an integration solution with a reliability comparable to that of SEL relays. In terms of MTBF (mean time between failures), the SEL communications processors are 100–1000 times more reliable than computerbased and industrial technology-based solutions.
Configuration of an SEL communications processor is different from other general-purpose integration platforms. You can configure the SEL communications processors with a system of communication-specific
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor and Relay Architecture
C.3.3
keywords and data movement commands rather than programming in C or another general-purpose computer language. The SEL communications
processors offer the protocol interfaces listed in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
SEL Communications Processors Protocol Interfaces
Protocol Connect to
DNP3 Level 2 Outstation
Modbus
®
RTU
SEL ASCII/Fast Message
Outstation
DNP3 masters (serial)
Modbus masters
SEL protocol masters
SEL ASCII/Fast Message Master SEL protocol slaves including other communications processors and SEL relays
ASCII and Binary auto messaging SEL and non-SEL IED master and outstation devices
Modbus Plus a
Modbus Plus peers with Global data and Modbus
Plus masters
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) b
Telnet
FTP clients
Telnet servers and clients
UCA2 GOOSE
UCA2 protocol masters
UCA2 protocol and peers
DNP3 Level 2 Outstation
(Ethernet)
DNP3 masters (Ethernet) a b
Requires SEL-2711 Modbus Plus protocol card.
Requires Ethernet card.
SEL Communications Processor and Relay
Architecture
You can apply the SEL communications processors and SEL relays in a limitless variety of applications that integrate, automate, and improve station operation. Most of the system integration architectures using SEL communications processors involve either developing a star network or enhancing a multidrop network.
Developing Star
Networks
The simplest architecture using both the relay and an SEL communications
processor is shown in Figure 3.1. In this architecture, the SEL
communications processor collects data from the relay and other station IEDs.
The SEL communications processor acts as a single point of access for local and remote data consumers (local HMI, SCADA, engineers). The communications processor also provides a single point of access for engineering operations including configuration and the collection of reportbased information.
By configuring a data set optimized to each data consumer, you can significantly increase the utilization efficiency on each link. A system that uses the SEL communications processors to provide a protocol interface to an
RTU will have a shorter lag time (data latency); communication overhead is much less for a single data exchange conversation to collect all substation data
(from a communications processor) than for many conversations required to collect data directly from each individual IED. You can further reduce data
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.3.4
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor and Relay Architecture
NOTE:
The communications processor Ethernet card supports components of UCA2 as a subset of
IEC 61850.
Enhancing Multidrop
Networks
To SCADA Control Center,
RTU, or Protocol Gateway latency by connecting the SEL communications processor directly to the
SCADA master and eliminating redundant communication processing in the
RTU.
The SEL communications processor is responsible for the protocol interface, so you can install, test, and even upgrade the system in the future without disturbing protective relays and other station IEDs. This insulation of the protective devices from the communications interface assists greatly in situations where different departments are responsible for SCADA operation, communication, and protection.
You can equip SEL communications processors with an Ethernet card to provide a UCA2 interface to serial IEDs, including the standard relay. The communications processor presents the relay data as models in a virtual device domain similar to the way they would appear if the relay was connected directly to the UCA2 network. The SEL communications processor and the Ethernet card offer a significant cost savings to customers who wish to continue using serial IEDs. For full details on applying the SEL communications processor with an optional Ethernet card, see the SEL-2032 or SEL-2030 Communications Processor Instruction Manual.
The engineering connection can use either an Ethernet network connection through the communications processor Ethernet card or a serial port connection. This versatility will accommodate the channel that is available between the station and the engineering center. SEL software, including the
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet
®
SEL-5030 software program, can use either a serial port connection or an Ethernet network connection from an engineering workstation to the relays in the field.
You can also use the SEL communications processor to enhance a multidrop
architecture similar to the one shown in Figure 3.3. In this example, the SEL
communications processor enhances a system that uses the SEL-2701 with an
Ethernet HMI multidrop network. In the example, there are two Ethernet networks, the SCADA LAN and the Engineering LAN. The SCADA LAN provides real-time data directly to the SCADA Control Center via a protocol gateway and to the HMI (human machine interface).
HMI/Local
Engineering
Access
To Engineering
SCADA
Ethernet LAN
Hub Hub
Engineering
Ethernet LAN
Modem
SEL Communications
Processor
EIA-232
SEL Relay Ethernet IED SEL Relay SEL Relay
Figure 3.3
Enhancing Multidrop Networks With the SEL Communications Processors
Non-SEL IED
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor Example
C.3.5
In this example, the SEL communications processor provides the following enhancements when compared to a system that employs only the multidrop network:
➤
➤
➤
➤
➤
Ethernet access for IEDs with serial ports
Backup engineering access through the dial-in modem
IRIG-B time signal distribution to all station IEDs
Integration of IEDs without Ethernet
Single point of access for real-time data for SCADA, HMI, and other uses
➤
Significant cost savings by use of existing IEDs with serial ports
SEL Communications Processor Example
This example demonstrates the data and control points available in the SEL communications processor when you connect a relay. The physical
configuration used in this example is shown in Figure 3.4.
Personal
Computer
Cable C234A
SEL Communications
Processor
Port 1
Port F
Cable C273
Relay
Figure 3.4
Example SEL Relay and SEL Communications Processors
Configuration
Table 3.2 shows the PORT 1 settings for the SEL communications processor.
Table 3.2
SEL Communications Processors Port 1 Settings
Setting Name Setting Description
DEVICE
CONFIG
PORTID
BAUD
DATABIT
STOPBIT
S Connected device is an SEL device
Y Allow autoconfiguration for this device
“Relay 1” Name of connected relay a
19200
8
Channel speed of 19200 bits per second a
Eight data bits
1 One stop bit
PARITY
RTS_CTS
N
Y
No parity
Hardware flow control enabled
TIMEOUT 5 Idle timeout that terminates transparent connections of 5 minutes a
Automatically collected by the SEL communications processor during autoconfiguration.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.3.6
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor Example
Data Collection
Fast Message Read
Data Access
Table 3.3 lists the automatic messages that are available in the relay.
Table 3.3
SEL Communications Processor Data Collection Automessages
Message
Collection
Mode
20METER
20METER2
20TARGET
Binary
Binary
Binary
20TARGET2
20DEMAND
Binary
Binary
20DEMAND2 Binary
20STATUS ASCII
20STATUS2
20HISTORY
Binary
ASCII
20HISTORY2 Binary
20BREAKER ASCII
20BREAKER2 Binary
20EVENTL ASCII
20LOCAL2
20ANALOGS2
Binary
Binary
Data Collected
Power system metering data
METER database region
Selected Relay Word bit elements
TARGET database region
Demand metering data
DEMAND database region
Relay diagnostics
STATUS database region
Relay event history
HISTORY database region
Circuit breaker monitor data
BREAKER database region
Long (16 samples/cycle) event report stored in a literal format (see the SEL-2030 Instruction Manual)
LOCAL database region
ANALOGS database region
When the port protocol setting is SEL (PROTO n = SEL), you can disable Fast
Message Read messages from the Ethernet card on a per region basis with the
FMRxxx settings. Note that these settings apply only to the Fast Message Read
messages. Fast Message Write messages are unaffected. Table 3.4 shows Fast
Message Read messages settings. After setting the port protocol to SEL, enable the entire Fast Message Read messages function by settings
FMRENAB = Y. If FMRENAB = N, then no FMR settings are available.
Default settings enable the Meter Region, Demand Region, Target Region, and Analog Region. Enable other regions by setting the appropriate region to
Yes (Y).
Table 3.4
Fast Message Read Message Settings
Label
FMRENAB
FMRLCL
FMRMTR
FMRDMND
FMRTAR
FMRHIS
FMRBRKR
FMRSTAT
FMRANA
Prompt
Enable Fast Message Read Data Access (Y/N)
Enable Local Region for Fast Message Access (Y/N)
Enable Meter Region for Fast Message Access (Y/N
Enable Demand Region for Fast Message Access (Y/N)
Enable Target Region for Fast Message Access (Y/N)
Enable History Region for Fast Message Access (Y/N)
Enable Breaker Region for Fast Message Access (Y/N)
Enable Status Region for Fast Message Access (Y/N)
Enable Analog Region for Fast Message Access (Y/N)
Default
Value
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor Example
C.3.7
Data Collection
Example
Table 3.5 shows the automessage (Set A) settings for the SEL
communications processor. In this example, the SEL communications processor is configured to collect metering and target data from the relay via the three automatic messages: 20TARGET, 20METER, and 20DEMAND.
Table 3.5
SEL Communications Processor Port 1 Automatic Messaging Settings
Setting Name
AUTOBUF
STARTUP
SEND_OPER
REC_SER
NOCONN
MSG_CNT
ISSUE1
MESG1
ISSUE2
MESG2
ISSUE3
MESG3
ARCH_EN
USER
Setting
Y
“ACC\nOTTER\n”
Y
N
NA
3
P00:00:01.0
20METER
P00:00:01.0
20TARGET
P00:01:00.0
20DEMAND
N
0
Description
Save unsolicited messages
Automatically log-in at Access Level 1
Send Fast Operate messages for remote bit and breaker bit control
Automatic sequential event recorder data collection disabled
No SEL
OGIC
control equation entered to selectively block connections to this port
Three automessages
Issue Message 1 every second
Collect metering data
Issue Message 2 every second
Collect Relay Word bit data
Issue Message 3 every minute
Collect demand metering data
Archive memory disabled
No USER region registers reserved
NOTE:
Communications processors using 20METER may misinterpret any analog quantities, AMV001–AMV004, that contain a negative number. Use the math functions in your communications processor to handle these instances, or restrict
AMV001–AMV004 to positive values within the relay free-form automation logic.
Table 3.6 shows the map of regions in the SEL communications processor for
data collected from the relay in the example.
Table 3.6
SEL Communications Processor Port 1 Region Map
Region
D1
D2
D3
D4–D8
A1–A3
USER
Data Collection
Message Type
Binary
Binary
Binary n/a n/a n/a
Region Name
METER
TARGET
DEMAND n/a n/a n/a
Description
Relay metering data
Relay Word bit data
Demand metering data
Unused
Unused
Unused
Table 3.7 shows the list of meter data available in the SEL communications
processor and the location and data type for the memory areas within D1
(Data Region 1). The type field indicates the data type and size. The type “int” is a 16-bit integer. The type “float” is a 32-bit IEEE floating point number.
The first four automation math variables (AMV001–AMV004) are reported to the communications processor as part of relay meter data. The communications processor treats these as vector quantities. Consequently, if one of these has a negative value, the communications processor will report the value as its magnitude (its absolute value) at an angle of 180 degrees.
See Application Guide 2002-14: SEL-421 Relay Fast Messages for more information on using the SEL Fast Meter and Fast Message protocols with the relay.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.3.8
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor Example
SEL-411L Relay
Item
AMV001
AMV002
AMV003
AMV004
IAB(A)
IBC(A)
ICA(A)
VAB(V)
IC2
IA3
IB3
IC3
VA
VB
VC
FREQ
VBC(V)
VCA(V)
PA(MW)
QA(MVAR)
PB(MW)
QB(MVAR)
PC(MW)
QC(MVAR)
P(MW)
Q(MVAR)
_YEAR
DAY_OF_YEAR
TIME(ms)
MONTH
DATE
YEAR
HOUR
IB1
IC1
IA2
IB2
MIN
SECONDS
MSEC
IA1
Starting Address
203Fh
2043h
2047h
204Bh
204Fh
2053h
2057h
205Bh
201Fh
2023h
2027h
202Bh
202Fh
2033h
2037h
203Bh
205Fh
2063h
2067h
2069h
206Bh
206Dh
206Fh
2071h
2073h
2075h
2008h
2009h
200Ah
200Bh
200Fh
2013h
2017h
201Bh
2000h
2001h
2002h
2004h
2005h
2006h
2007h
Table 3.7
SEL Communications Processor METER Region Map (Sheet 1 of 2)
Type
float float float float float float int int int[2] char char char char char char
float[2] a float[2] a float[2] a float[2] a float[2] a
float[2] b
int float[2] a
float float
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor Example
C.3.9
Table 3.7
SEL Communications Processor METER Region Map (Sheet 2 of 2)
Item Starting Address Type
I0(A)
I1(A)
I2(A)
2077h
207Bh
207Fh
float[2] a float[2] a float[2] a float[2] a
V0(V) 2083h
V1(V)
V2(V)
2087h
208Bh
a b
The first two addresses contain quantity; the second two addresses contain angle in degrees.
Both values in IEEE 32-bit floating point format.
The first two addresses contain the quantity in IEEE 32-bit floating point format; the second two addresses always contain 0.
Table 3.8 is a sample list of Relay Word bits available in the SEL
communications processor for the memory area within Data Region 2 (D2) depending on the relay options.
Table 3.8
SEL Communications Processor TARGET Region (Sheet 1 of 11)
Address
3012h
3013h
3014h
3015h
3016h
3017h
3018h
3019h
301Ah
301Bh
301Ch
301Dh
3004h
3005h
3006h
3007h
3008h
3009h
300Ah
300Bh
300Ch
300Dh
300Eh
300Fh
3010h
3011h
7
MAG5
XAG1
XAG3
XAG5
SERCAB
X6ABC
OSB2
67QUBF
X6T
DOSB
F32P
MAB1
MAB3
MAB5
XAB2
XAB4
MAG1
MAG3
EN
TLED_1
TLED_9
Z1P
Z1PT
Z1G
Z1GT
Z1T
6
MBG5
XBG1
XBG3
XBG5
SERCBC
X7ABC
OSB3
67QUBR
R6T
*
R32P
MBC1
MBC3
MBC5
XBC2
XBC4
MBG1
MBG3
TRIPLED
TLED_2
TLED_10
Z2P
Z2PT
Z2G
Z2GT
Z2T
5
MCG5
XCG1
XCG3
XCG5
SERCCA
50ABC
OSB4
OOSDET
RR6
*
F32Q
MCA1
MCA3
MCA5
XCA2
XCA4
MCG1
MCG3
*
TLED_3
TLED_11
Z3P
Z3PT
Z3G
Z3GT
Z3T
Relay Word Bits (in Bits 7–0)
4 3
*
*
*
CVTBLH
SERCA
UBOSB
OSB5
*
RL6
*
R32Q
*
*
*
*
M1P
M3P
M5P
*
TLED_4
TLED_12
*
TLED_5
TLED_13
Z4P Z5P
Z4PT Z5PT
Z4G
Z4GT
Z4T
Z5G
Z5GT
Z5T
MAB2
MAB4
XAB1
XAB3
XAB5
MAG2
MAG4
*
XAG2
XAG4
CVTBL
SERCB
OSBA
OSB
SSD
X7T
*
32QF
2
*
XBG2
XBG4
VPOLV
SERCC
OSBB
OSTI
SD
R7T
*
32QR
MBC2
MBC4
XBC1
XBC3
XBC5
MBG2
MBG4
*
TLED_6
TLED_14
M2PT
M5PT
*
*
*
1
*
XCG2
XCG4
*
*
OSBC
OSTO
*
RR7
*
32SPOF
MCA2
MCA4
XCA1
XCA3
XCA5
MCG2
MCG4
*
TLED_7
TLED_15
M1PT
M4PT
*
*
*
0
*
*
*
*
*
OSB1
OST
R1T
RL7
*
32SPOR
*
*
*
*
M2P
M4P
*
*
TLED_8
TLED_16
*
M3PT
*
*
*
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.3.10
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor Example
3032h
3033h
3034h
3035h
3036h
3037h
3038h
3039h
302Bh
302Ch
302Dh
302Eh
302Fh
3030h
3031h
301Eh
301Fh
3020h
3021h
3022h
3023h
3024h
3025h
3026h
3027h
3028h
3029h
302Ah
303Ah
303Bh
303Ch
303Dh
303Eh
303Fh
3040h
3041h
3042h
3043h
3044h
3045h
7
FSB
*
DC1F
PDEM
RXPRM
APS
TPA
TPC1
BK2LO
FOLBK2
BK1CFT
LLDB1
R3PTE2
SPSHOT0
SPOI
SOTFE
ULTRA
PT
WFC
PTRX
Z3RBA
EKEYA
PTA
*
BFI3P1
50QF
F32I
59VP
25A2BK1
25W1BK2
50P1
67P1T
67G1
50Q1
67Q1T
51T08
51S06
*
SPRI
3POBK2
6
BK1CL
NBK0
BK2CFT
LLDB2
BK1RCIP
SPSHOT1
3POI
ILOP
FSC
*
DC1W
QDEM
COMPRM
BPS
TPB
TPA2
ULTRB
Z3RB
KEY1
Z3XT
Z3RBB
EKEYB
PTB
*
BFIA1
50QR
R32I
59VS1
FAST1
25W2BK2
50P2
67P2T
67G2
50Q2
67Q2T
51T07
51S05
*
SPARC
3POLINE
Table 3.8
SEL Communications Processor TARGET Region (Sheet 2 of 11)
Address
5
DFAULT
*
DC1G
GDEM
TRPRM
CPS
TPC
TPB2
BK2CL
NBK1
BK1CLSS
DLLB1
BK2RCIP
SPSHOT2
79STRT
LOP
ULTRC
KEY
KEY3
Z2PGS
Z3RBC
EKEYC
PTC
*
BFIB1
50GF
F32V
25ENBK1
SLOW1
25A1BK2
50P3
67P3T
67G3
50Q3
67Q3T
51T06
51S04
*
SPLSHT
3PLSHT
Relay Word Bits (in Bits 7–0)
4 3 2 1 0
DTA
EKEY
UBB1
67QG2S
KEYA
ECTTA
PTDRX
*
BFIC1
50GR
R32V
SFZBK1
BSYNBK1
25A2BK2
50P4
67P4T
67G4
50Q4
67Q4T
51T05
51S03
*
SPOBK1
BK1RS
67G1T
67Q1
*
51T04
51S02
51S10
SPOBK2
BK2RS
32QE
F32QG
SFBK1
59VS2
FAST2
67P1
50G1
FTSAG
ER
DC1R
*
DTR
3PS
TRIP
TPC2
LEADBK0 LEADBK1 LEADBK2
NBK2 SP1CLS SP2CLS
BK2CLSS
DLLB2
BK1CLST
DLDB1
BK2CLST
DLDB2
SPRCIP
3PSHOT0
TBBK
ZLOAD
3PRCIP
3PSHOT1
BK1EXT
ZLIN
2POBK1
3PSHOT2
BK2EXT
ZLOUT
FTSBG
EAFSRC
DC2F
*
SOTFT
ATPA
3PT
TOP
FTSCG
*
DC2W
*
E3PT
ATPB
SPT
ULTR
DTB
ECTT
PTRX1
DSTRT
KEYB
ECTTB
*
*
BFI3PT1
DTC
27AWI
UBB2
NSTRT
KEYC
ECTTC
*
*
BFIAT1
32QGE
R32QG
32VE
32GF
32IE
32GR
25W1BK1 25W2BK1 25A1BK1
25ENBK2
SLOW2
67P2
50G2
SFZBK2
BSYNBK2
67P3
50G3
SFBK2
*
67P4
50G4
67G2T
67Q2
*
51T03
51S01
51S09
3PRI
79CY1
67G3T
67Q3
*
51T02
51T10
51S08
3PARC
79CY3
67G4T
67Q4
*
51T01
51T09
51S07
3POBK1
BK1LO
FOLBK0
3P1CLS
ULCL1
R3PTE
2POBK2
3PSHOT3
SPOISC
FIDEN
FTSLG
*
DC2G
*
E3PT1
ATPC
TPA1
ULMTR1
*
27BWI
PTRX2
STOP
KEYD
*
*
*
BFIBT1
*
*
*
*
*
27CWI
UBB
BTX
BFICT1
87FIDEN
*
DC2R
*
E3PT2
A3PT
TPB1
ULMTR2
FOLBK1
3P2CLS
ULCL2
R3PTE1
*
3PSHOT4
3POISC
FSA
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor Example
C.3.11
305Ah
305Bh
305Ch
305Dh
305Eh
305Fh
3060h
3061h
3053h
3054h
3055h
3056h
3057h
3058h
3059h
3046h
3047h
3048h
3049h
304Ah
304Bh
304Ch
304Dh
304Eh
304Fh
3050h
3051h
3052h
3062h
3063h
3064h
3065h
3066h
3067h
3068h
3069h
306Ah
306Bh
306Ch
306Dh
Table 3.8
SEL Communications Processor TARGET Region (Sheet 3 of 11)
Address
Relay Word Bits (in Bits 7–0)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
87DDL
87MTR
87HSB
LB08
LB16
LB24
LB32
RB25
RB17
50FA1
RTSA1
50R1
50FOA1
FOC1
BFI3P2
50FA2
RTSA2
50R2
50FOA2
FOC2
*
*
*
B1OPHA
50FB1
RTSB1
BFIN1
50FOB1
FOBF1
BFIA2
50FB2
RTSB2
BFIN2
50FOB2
FOBF2
*
*
*
B1OPHB
50FC1
RTSC1
NBF1
50FOC1
BFTRIP1
BFIB2
50FC2
RTSC2
NBF2
50FOC2
BFTRIP2
*
*
*
B1OPHC
RT3P1
RT1
50LCA1
RTA1
FBFA1
50LCB1
RTB1
FBFB1
50LCC1
BLKFOA1 BLKFOB1 BLKFOC1
BFTR1 BFULTR1 *
BFIC2
RT3P2
BFI3PT2
RTA2
BFIAT2
RTB2
RT2
50LCA2
FBFA2
50LCB2
FBFB2
50LCC2
BLKFOA2 BLKFOB2 BLKFOC2
BFTR2 BFULTR2 *
*
*
*
B2OPHA
*
*
*
B2OPHB
*
*
*
B2OPHC
FBFC2
BFILC2
FOA2
*
*
*
*
LOPHA
RTC1
FBFC1
BFILC1
FOA1
*
BFIBT2
RTC2
LOPHC
27CPO
*
52ACL1
SPOA
*
*
52BCL1
SPOB
*
*
52CCL1
SPOC
*
*
52AAL1
SPO
*
*
52BAL1
3PO
*
*
52CAL1
27APO
*
*
52AA1
27BPO
*
*
52AB1
52AC1
52AA2
*
52AB2
52ACL2
52AC2
52BCL2
*
52CCL2
*
52AAL2
*
52BAL2
*
52CAL2
*
BM1TRPA BM1TRPB BM1TRPC BM1CLSA BM1CLSB BM1CLSC B1BCWAL B1MRTIN
* B1MSOAL B1ESOAL B1PSAL B1PDAL B1BITAL B1MRTAL B1KAIAL
BM2TRPA BM2TRPB BM2TRPC BM2CLSA BM2CLSB BM2CLSC B2BCWAL B2MRTIN
* B2MSOAL B2ESOAL B2PSAL B2PDAL B2BITAL B2MRTAL B2KAIAL
RTD08ST
RTDIN
RTD07ST
RTDCOMF
RTD06ST
RTDFL
RTD05ST
*
RTD04ST
RTD12ST
RTD03ST
RTD11ST
RTD02ST
RTD10ST
RTD01ST
RTD09ST
CC2
ESTUB
87LPSEC
87L50A
OC2
87DTTRX
87LQSEC
87L50B
CC1
87FLSOK
87LGSEC
87L50C
OC1
87LG
87LUC
87L50Q
*
87LQ
87LUB
87L50G
*
87LC
87LUA
87EFDL
*
87LB
87LU
87EFDR
87USAFE
87LA
87DD
87EFD
87DDR
87SLV
87CH1T
LB07
LB15
LB23
LB31
RB26
RB18
87CCC
87LST
87CH2T
LB06
LB14
LB22
LB30
RB27
RB19
87CCB
87CH1OK
87CH3T
LB05
LB13
LB21
LB29
RB28
RB20
87CCD
87CH2OK
87CH1DT
LB04
LB12
LB20
LB28
RB29
RB21
87CCU
87CH3OK
87CH2DT
LB03
LB11
LB19
LB27
RB30
RB22
87CTWL
87SYNH
87CH3DT
LB02
LB10
LB18
LB26
RB31
RB23
87CTXL
87SYNL
87TEST
LB01
LB09
LB17
LB25
RB32
RB24
FBF2
LCBF2
FOB2
*
*
*
*
LOPHB
RTS3P1
FBF1
LCBF1
FOB1
*
BFICT2
RTS3P2
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.3.12
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor Example
3082h
3083h
3084h
3085h
3086h
3087h
3088h
3089h
307Bh
307Ch
307Dh
307Eh
307Fh
3080h
3081h
306Eh
306Fh
3070h
3071h
3072h
3073h
3074h
3075h
3076h
3077h
3078h
3079h
307Ah
308Ah
308Bh
308Ch
308Dh
308Eh
308Fh
3090h
3091h
3092h
3093h
3094h
3095h
Table 3.8
SEL Communications Processor TARGET Region (Sheet 4 of 11)
Address
7 6
PSV16
PSV24
PSV32
PSV40
PSV48
PSV56
PSV64
PLT08
PLT16
RB09
RB01
51TC01
51TC03
51TC05
51TC07
51TC09
87CH1AM 87CH2AM
87CH3NB 87CH1BR
E87DTT
87DTTI
87DTT3
87STAG
87TESTL
87OCTC
87ROCTB
87CH1RQ
87TESTR
87OCT
87ROCTC
87CH2RQ
RB10
RB02
51R01
51R03
51R05
51R07
51R09
IN216
IN224
*
IN308
IN316
IN324
*
PSV08
87ABK2
87HBA
87BBK2
87HBB
PASSDIS BRKENAB
* *
RVRS1
LG_DPFA
PFA_OK
IN208
RVRS2
LG_DPFB
PFB_OK
IN207
IN215
IN223
IN107
IN307
IN315
IN323
*
PSV07
PSV15
PSV23
PSV31
PSV39
PSV47
PSV55
PSV63
PLT07
PLT15
Relay Word Bits (in Bits 7–0)
5 4 3
IN214
IN222
IN106
IN306
IN314
IN322
*
PSV06
87CBK2
87HBC
*
*
RVRS3
LG_DPFC
PFC_OK
IN206
PSV14
PSV22
PSV30
PSV38
PSV46
PSV54
PSV62
PLT06
PLT14
RB11
RB03
51MM01
51MM03
51MM05
51MM07
51MM09
RB12
RB04
51TM01
51TM03
51TM05
51TM07
51TM09
RB13
RB05
51TC02
51TC04
51TC06
51TC08
51TC10
*
87CH2BR
87DTT2
87STBG
87CH1LP
87CH3BR
87DTT1
87STCG
87CH2LP
87CH1AL
E87LPS
87SPTS
ECH1OUT ECH2OUT 87ROCTU
87ROCT 87TST1 87TST2
87TOUT
87CH3RQ
87ALARM
87CH3AC
87ERR1
87CH2AC
87XBK2
87HRA
*
*
RVRS4
LG_DPF3
PF3_OK
IN205
IN213
IN221
IN105
IN305
IN313
IN321
*
PSV05
PSV13
PSV21
PSV29
PSV37
PSV45
PSV53
PSV61
PLT05
PLT13
PSV12
PSV20
PSV28
PSV36
PSV44
PSV52
PSV60
PLT04
PLT12
IN212
IN220
IN104
IN304
IN312
IN320
*
PSV04
87QB
87HRB
*
*
RVRS5
LD_DPFA
DPFA_OK
IN204
2 1 0
PSV11
PSV19
PSV27
PSV35
PSV43
PSV51
PSV59
PLT03
PLT11
87CH3LP
87CH2AL
E87LQS
87CHTRG
RSTOCT
87TST3
87ERR2
87CH1AC
RB14
RB06
51R02
51R04
51R06
51R08
51R10
RB15
RB07
51MM02
51MM04
51MM06
51MM08
51MM10
RB16
RB08
51TM02
51TM04
51TM06
51TM08
51TM10
87CH1NB 87CH2NB
87CH3AL *
E87LGS
87TOK
87LP
87OP
87OCTA 87OCTB
87TMSUP 87ROCTA
87LSP
*
*
87LOOPT
IN211
IN219
IN103
IN303
IN311
IN319
*
PSV03
87ABK5
87HRC
*
*
87BBK5
*
*
*
87CBK5
*
*
*
* * *
LD_DPFB LD_DPFC LD_DPF3
DPFB_OK DPFC_OK DPF3_OK
IN203 IN202 IN201
IN210
IN218
IN102
IN302
IN310
IN318
*
PSV02
IN209
IN217
IN101
IN301
IN309
IN317
*
PSV01
PSV10
PSV18
PSV26
PSV34
PSV42
PSV50
PSV58
PLT02
PLT10
PSV09
PSV17
PSV25
PSV33
PSV41
PSV49
PSV57
PLT01
PLT09
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor Example
C.3.13
30AAh
30ABh
30ACh
30ADh
30AEh
30AFh
30B0h
30B1h
30A3h
30A4h
30A5h
30A6h
30A7h
30A8
30A9h
3096h
3097h
3098h
3099h
309Ah
309Bh
309Ch
309Dh
309Eh
309Fh
30A0h
30A1h
30A2h
30B2h
30B3h
30B4h
30B5h
30B6h
30B7h
30B8h
30B9h
30BAh
30BBh
30BCh
30BDh
7
ASV016
ASV024
ASV032
ASV040
ASV048
ASV056
ASV064
ASV072
PCN16Q
PCN24Q
PCN32Q
PCN08R
PCN16R
PCN24R
PCN32R
ASV008
ASV080
ASV088
ASV096
ASV104
ASV112
ASV120
ASV128
ASV136
ASV144
PLT24
PLT32
PCT08Q
PCT16Q
PCT24Q
PCT32Q
PST08Q
PST16Q
PST24Q
PST32Q
PST08R
PST16R
PST24R
PST32R
PCN08Q
6
ASV015
ASV023
ASV031
ASV039
ASV047
ASV055
ASV063
ASV071
PCN15Q
PCN23Q
PCN31Q
PCN07R
PCN15R
PCN23R
PCN31R
ASV007
ASV079
ASV087
ASV095
ASV103
ASV111
ASV119
ASV127
ASV135
ASV143
PLT23
PLT31
PCT07Q
PCT15Q
PCT23Q
PCT31Q
PST07Q
PST15Q
PST23Q
PST31Q
PST07R
PST15R
PST23R
PST31R
PCN07Q
Table 3.8
SEL Communications Processor TARGET Region (Sheet 5 of 11)
Address
Relay Word Bits (in Bits 7–0)
4
ASV013
ASV021
ASV029
ASV037
ASV045
ASV053
ASV061
ASV069
PCN13Q
PCN21Q
PCN29Q
PCN05R
PCN13R
PCN21R
PCN29R
ASV005
ASV077
ASV085
ASV093
ASV101
ASV109
ASV117
ASV125
ASV133
ASV141
PLT21
PLT29
PCT05Q
PCT13Q
PCT21Q
PCT29Q
PST05Q
PST13Q
PST21Q
PST29Q
PST05R
PST13R
PST21R
PST29R
PCN05Q
3
ASV012
ASV020
ASV028
ASV036
ASV044
ASV052
ASV060
ASV068
PCN12Q
PCN20Q
PCN28Q
PCN04R
PCN12R
PCN20R
PCN28R
ASV004
ASV076
ASV084
ASV092
ASV100
ASV108
ASV116
ASV124
ASV132
ASV140
PLT20
PLT28
PCT04Q
PCT12Q
PCT20Q
PCT28Q
PST04Q
PST12Q
PST20Q
PST28Q
PST04R
PST12R
PST20R
PST28R
PCN04Q
5
ASV014
ASV022
ASV030
ASV038
ASV046
ASV054
ASV062
ASV070
PCN14Q
PCN22Q
PCN30Q
PCN06R
PCN14R
PCN22R
PCN30R
ASV006
ASV078
ASV086
ASV094
ASV102
ASV110
ASV118
ASV126
ASV134
ASV142
PLT22
PLT30
PCT06Q
PCT14Q
PCT22Q
PCT30Q
PST06Q
PST14Q
PST22Q
PST30Q
PST06R
PST14R
PST22R
PST30R
PCN06Q
2
ASV011
ASV019
ASV027
ASV035
ASV043
ASV051
ASV059
ASV067
PCN11Q
PCN19Q
PCN27Q
PCN03R
PCN11R
PCN19R
PCN27R
ASV003
ASV075
ASV083
ASV091
ASV099
ASV107
ASV115
ASV123
ASV131
ASV139
PLT19
PLT27
PCT03Q
PCT11Q
PCT19Q
PCT27Q
PST03Q
PST11Q
PST19Q
PST27Q
PST03R
PST11R
PST19R
PST27R
PCN03Q
0
ASV009
ASV017
ASV025
ASV033
ASV041
ASV049
ASV057
ASV065
PCN09Q
PCN17Q
PCN25Q
PCN01R
PCN09R
PCN17R
PCN25R
ASV001
ASV073
ASV081
ASV089
ASV097
ASV105
ASV113
ASV121
ASV129
ASV137
PLT17
PLT25
PCT01Q
PCT09Q
PCT17Q
PCT25Q
PST01Q
PST09Q
PST17Q
PST25Q
PST01R
PST09R
PST17R
PST25R
PCN01Q
1
ASV010
ASV018
ASV026
ASV034
ASV042
ASV050
ASV058
ASV066
PCN10Q
PCN18Q
PCN26Q
PCN02R
PCN10R
PCN18R
PCN26R
ASV002
ASV074
ASV082
ASV090
ASV098
ASV106
ASV114
ASV122
ASV130
ASV138
PLT18
PLT26
PCT02Q
PCT10Q
PCT18Q
PCT26Q
PST02Q
PST10Q
PST18Q
PST26Q
PST02R
PST10R
PST18R
PST26R
PCN02Q
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.3.14
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor Example
30D2h
30D3h
30D4h
30D5h
30D6h
30D7h
30D8h
30D9h
30CBh
30CCh
30CDh
30CEh
30CFh
30D0h
30D1h
30BEh
30BFh
30C0h
30C1h
30C2h
30C3h
30C4h
30C5h
30C6h
30C7h
30C8h
30C9h
30CAh
30DAh
30DBh
30DCh
30DDh
30DEh
30DFh
30E0h
30E1h
30E2h
30E3h
30E4h
30E5h
7
AST16R
AST24R
AST32R
ACN08Q
ACN16Q
ACN24Q
ACN32Q
ACN08R
ALT16
ALT24
ALT32
AST08Q
AST16Q
AST24Q
AST32Q
AST08R
ACN16R
ACN24R
ACN32R
PUNRLBL
SALARM
ACCESS
27TC1
273P1
275P1T
ASV208
ASV216
ASV224
ASV232
ASV240
ASV248
ASV256
ALT08
ASV152
ASV160
ASV168
ASV176
ASV184
ASV192
ASV200
6
AST15R
AST23R
AST31R
ACN07Q
ACN15Q
ACN23Q
ACN31Q
ACN07R
ALT15
ALT23
ALT31
AST07Q
AST15Q
AST23Q
AST31Q
AST07R
ACN15R
ACN23R
ACN31R
PFRTEX
HALARM
ACCESSP
27TC2
274P1
276P1T
ASV207
ASV215
ASV223
ASV231
ASV239
ASV247
ASV255
ALT07
ASV151
ASV159
ASV167
ASV175
ASV183
ASV191
ASV199
Table 3.8
SEL Communications Processor TARGET Region (Sheet 6 of 11)
Address
Relay Word Bits (in Bits 7–0)
5 4 3 2 1
AST14R
AST22R
AST30R
ACN06Q
ACN14Q
ACN22Q
ACN30Q
ACN06R
ALT14
ALT22
ALT30
AST06Q
AST14Q
AST22Q
AST30Q
AST06R
ASV206
ASV214
ASV222
ASV230
ASV238
ASV246
ASV254
ALT06
ASV150
ASV158
ASV166
ASV174
ASV182
ASV190
ASV198
ASV149
ASV157
ASV165
ASV173
ASV181
ASV189
ASV197
ASV205
ASV213
ASV221
ASV229
ASV237
ASV245
ASV253
ALT05
ALT13
ALT21
ALT29
AST05Q
AST13Q
AST21Q
AST29Q
AST05R
AST13R
AST21R
AST29R
ACN05Q
ACN13Q
ACN21Q
ACN29Q
ACN05R
ASV148
ASV156
ASV164
ASV172
ASV180
ASV188
ASV196
ASV204
ASV212
ASV220
ASV228
ASV236
ASV244
ASV252
ALT04
ALT12
ALT20
ALT28
AST04Q
AST12Q
AST20Q
AST28Q
AST04R
AST12R
AST20R
AST28R
ACN04Q
ACN12Q
ACN20Q
ACN28Q
ACN04R
ASV147
ASV155
ASV163
ASV171
ASV179
ASV187
ASV195
ASV203
ASV211
ASV219
ASV227
ASV235
ASV243
ASV251
ALT03
ALT11
ALT19
ALT27
AST03Q
AST11Q
AST19Q
AST27Q
AST03R
AST11R
AST19R
AST27R
ACN03Q
ACN11Q
ACN19Q
ACN27Q
ACN03R
ACN14R
ACN22R
ACN13R
ACN21R
ACN12R
ACN20R
ACN11R
ACN19R
ACN30R ACN29R ACN28R ACN27R
MATHERR AUNRLBL AFRTEXP AFRTEXA
ACN10R
ACN18R
ACN26R
*
BADPASS HALARML HALARMP HALARMA SETCHG
* * * * *
27TC3
275P1
27TC4
276P1
27TC5
271P1T
27TC6
272P1T
271P1
273P1T
271P2 272P2 273P2 274P2 275P2
ASV202
ASV210
ASV218
ASV226
ASV234
ASV242
ASV250
ALT02
ASV146
ASV154
ASV162
ASV170
ASV178
ASV186
ASV194
AST10R
AST18R
AST26R
ACN02Q
ACN10Q
ACN18Q
ACN26Q
ACN02R
ALT10
ALT18
ALT26
AST02Q
AST10Q
AST18Q
AST26Q
AST02R
0
AST09R
AST17R
AST25R
ACN01Q
ACN09Q
ACN17Q
ACN25Q
ACN01R
ALT09
ALT17
ALT25
AST01Q
AST09Q
AST17Q
AST25Q
AST01R
ACN09R
ACN17R
ACN25R
*
GRPSW
*
272P1
274P1T
276P2
ASV201
ASV209
ASV217
ASV225
ASV233
ASV241
ASV249
ALT01
ASV145
ASV153
ASV161
ASV169
ASV177
ASV185
ASV193
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor Example
C.3.15
30FAh
30FBh
30FCh
30FDh
30FEh
30FFh
3100h
3101h
30F3h
30F4h
30F5h
30F6h
30F7h
30F8h
30F9h
30E6h
30E7h
30E8h
30E9h
30EAh
30EBh
30ECh
30EDh
30EEh
30EFh
30F0h
30F1h
30F2h
3102h
3103h
3104h
3105h
3106h
3107h
3108h
3109h
310Ah
310Bh
310Ch
310Dh
7 6
VB081
VB073
VB065
VB057
VB049
VB041
VB033
VB025
VB017
59TC1
593P1
595P1T
PHASE_A
PB1
OUT108
OUT208
OUT216
OUT308
OUT316
PB1_PUL
*
*
*
PB1_LED
*
*
*
VB121
VB113
VB105
VB097
VB089
RST_DEM RST_PDM
RST_BAT RSTFLOC
RMB8A
TMB8A
RMB7A
TMB7A
RMB8B
TMB8B
ROKA
ROKB
RMB7B
TMB7B
RBADA
RBADB
*
*
*
VB122
VB114
VB106
VB098
VB090
VB082
VB074
VB066
VB058
VB050
VB042
VB034
VB026
VB018
59TC2
594P1
596P1T
PHASE_B
PB2
OUT107
OUT207
OUT215
OUT307
OUT315
PB2_PUL
*
*
*
PB2_LED
Table 3.8
SEL Communications Processor TARGET Region (Sheet 7 of 11)
Address
5
*
*
*
VB123
VB115
VB107
VB099
VB091
RST_ENE
RSTDNPE
RMB6A
TMB6A
RMB6B
TMB6B
CBADA
CBADB
VB083
VB075
VB067
VB059
VB051
VB043
VB035
VB027
VB019
59TC3
595P1
591P2
PHASE_C
PB3
OUT106
OUT206
OUT214
OUT306
OUT314
PB3_PUL
*
*
*
PB3_LED
Relay Word Bits (in Bits 7–0)
4 3 2 1 0
VB084
VB076
VB068
VB060
VB052
VB044
VB036
VB028
VB020
59TC4
596P1
592P2
GROUND
PB4
OUT105
OUT205
OUT213
OUT305
OUT313
PB4_PUL
*
*
*
PB4_LED
59TC5
591P1T
593P2
BK1BFT
PB5
OUT104
OUT204
OUT212
OUT304
OUT312
PB5_PUL
*
*
*
PB5_LED
59TC6
592P1T
594P2
BK2BFT
PB6
OUT103
OUT203
OUT211
OUT303
OUT311
PB6_PUL
*
*
*
PB6_LED
591P1
593P1T
595P2
TRGTR
PB7
OUT102
OUT202
OUT210
OUT302
OUT310
PB7_PUL
*
*
*
PB7_LED
*
*
*
VB124
VB116
VB108
VB100
VB092
RSTMML RSTMMB1 RSTMMB2 RST_BK1 RST_BK2
RST_79C RSTTRGT RST_HAL * *
RMB5A
TMB5A
RMB4A
TMB4A
RMB3A
TMB3A
RMB2A
TMB2A
RMB1A
TMB1A
RMB5B
TMB5B
LBOKA
LBOKB
RMB4B
TMB4B
ANOKA
ANOKB
RMB3B
TMB3B
DOKA
DOKB
RMB2B
TMB2B
*
*
RMB1B
TMB1B
*
*
*
*
*
VB125
VB117
VB109
VB101
VB093
*
*
*
VB126
VB118
VB110
VB102
VB094
*
*
*
VB127
VB119
VB111
VB103
VB095
*
*
*
VB128
VB120
VB112
VB104
VB096
VB085
VB077
VB069
VB061
VB053
VB045
VB037
VB029
VB021
VB086
VB078
VB070
VB062
VB054
VB046
VB038
VB030
VB022
VB087
VB079
VB071
VB063
VB055
VB047
VB039
VB031
VB023
VB088
VB080
VB072
VB064
VB056
VB048
VB040
VB032
VB024
592P1
594P1T
596P2
*
PB8
OUT101
OUT201
OUT209
OUT301
OUT309
PB8_PUL
*
*
*
PB8_LED
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.3.16
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor Example
3122h
3123h
3124h
3125h
3126h
3127h
3128h
3129h
311Bh
311Ch
311Dh
311Eh
311Fh
3120h
3121h
310Eh
310Fh
3110h
3111h
3112h
3113h
3114h
3115h
3116h
3117h
3118h
3119h
311Ah
312Ah
312Bh
312Ch
312Dh
312Eh
312Fh
3130h
3131h
3132h
3133h
3134h
3135h
7
XAB3H
*
PMTRIG
EVELOCK
FSERP5
FSERP1
TESTDB2
FREQOK
LINK5A
P5ASEL
SG6
YEAR80
*
DST
*
TLED_17
PB9
PB9_LED
LB_SP08
LB_SP16
LB_SP24
LB_SP32
LB_DP08
LB_DP16
LB_DP24
XAB3F
XCA4F
*
MBG3H
XAG3H
*
*
MBC3H
VB009
VB001
MBG2F
XAG3F
XCG4F
*
MBC2F
6
XCA2H
*
TREA4
*
RTCDLYB
FSERP2
TESTDB
FREQFZ
LINK5B
P5BSEL
SG5
YEAR40
*
DSTP
*
TLED_18
PB10
PB10LED
LB_SP07
LB_SP15
LB_SP23
LB_SP31
LB_DP07
LB_DP15
LB_DP23
MCA3F
XBC4F
*
MAG3H
XCG2H
*
*
MAB3H
VB010
VB002
MAG2F
MCG3F
XBG4F
*
MAB2F
Table 3.8
SEL Communications Processor TARGET Region (Sheet 8 of 11)
Address
5
XBC2H
*
TREA3
*
RTCDLYA
FSERP3
TESTFM
*
LINK5C
P5CSEL
SG4
YEAR20
TUTCH
LPSEC
*
TLED_19
PB11
PB11LED
LB_SP06
LB_SP14
LB_SP22
LB_SP30
LB_DP06
LB_DP14
LB_DP22
MBC3F
XAB4F
XCA5F
MCG2H
XBG2H
*
*
MCA2H
VB011
VB003
XCG1F
MBG3F
XAG4F
XCG5F
XCA1F
Relay Word Bits (in Bits 7–0)
4
XAB2H
*
TREA2
*
RTCROK
FSERPF
TESTPUL
*
LINK5D
P5DSEL
SG3
YEAR10
TUTC8
LPSECP
LOADTE
TLED_20
PB12
PB12LED
LB_SP05
LB_SP13
LB_SP21
LB_SP29
LB_DP05
LB_DP13
LB_DP21
MAB3F
MCA4F
XBC5F
MBG2H
XAG2H
*
*
MBC2H
VB012
VB004
XBG1F
MAG3F
MCG4F
XBG5F
XBC1F
3 2 1 0
*
PB9_PUL
LB_SP04
LB_SP12
LB_SP20
LB_SP28
LB_DP04
LB_DP12
LB_DP20
XCA2F
MBC4F
XAB5F
MAG2H
XCG1H
*
*
MAB2H
VB013
VB005
XAG1F
XCG2F
MBG4F
XAG5F
XAB1F
XBC2F
MAB4F
MCA5F
MCG1H
XBG1H
*
*
MCA1H
VB014
VB006
MCG1F
XBG2F
MAG4F
MCG5F
MCA1F
XAB2F
XCA3F
MBC5F
MBG1H
XAG1H
XCG3H
*
MBC1H
VB015
VB007
MBG1F
XAG2F
XCG3F
MBG5F
MBC1F
XCA1H
*
TREA1
RTCSEQB
XBC1H
*
XAB1H
XCA3H
MCA3H
XBC3H
FROKPM * *
RTCSEQA RTCCFGB RTCCFGA
RTCROKB RTCROKA
ALTI ALTV
*
*
*
*
RTCENB
ALTS2
*
*
RTCENA
DELAY
SPEN
*
LNKFAIL
*
SG2
YEAR8
TUTC4
TQUAL8
STALLTE
TLED_21
LNKFL2
*
SG1
YEAR4
TUTC2
TQUAL4
PLDTE
TLED_22
*
*
CHSG
YEAR2
TUTC1
TQUAL2
TSNTPP
TLED_23
*
*
*
YEAR1
TUTCS
TQUAL1
TSNTPB
TLED_24
*
PB10PUL
LB_SP03
LB_SP11
LB_SP19
LB_SP27
LB_DP03
LB_DP11
LB_DP19
PB_TRIP
PB11PUL
LB_SP02
LB_SP10
LB_SP18
LB_SP26
LB_DP02
LB_DP10
LB_DP18
PB_CLSE
PB12PUL
LB_SP01
LB_SP09
LB_SP17
LB_SP25
LB_DP01
LB_DP09
LB_DP17
MCA2F
XBC3F
MAB5F
MAG1H
MCG3H
XBG3H
*
MAB1H
VB016
VB008
MAG1F
MCG2F
XBG3F
MAG5F
MAB1F
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor Example
C.3.17
314Ah
314Bh
314Ch
314Dh
314Eh
314Fh
3150h
3151h
3143h
3144h
3145h
3146h
3147h
3148h
3149h
3136h
3137h
3138h
3139h
313Ah
313Bh
313Ch
313Dh
313Eh
313Fh
3140h
3141h
3142h
3152h
3153h
3154h
3155h
3156h
3157h
3158h
3159h
315Ah
315Bh
315Ch
315Dh
7
89AM02
89AM03
89AM04
89AM05
89AM06
89AM07
89AM08
89AM09
FOP2_16
FOP2_24
FOP2_32
FOP3_08
FOP3_16
FOP3_24
FOP3_32
89AM01
89AM10
89CLB01
89CLB09
89OC01
89OC02
89OC03
89OC04
89OC05
89OC06
LB_DP32
*
RTCAD08
RTCAD16
RTCBD08
RTCBD16
FOPF_08
FOPF_16
FOPF_24
FOPF_32
FOP1_08
FOP1_16
FOP1_24
FOP1_32
FOP2_08
6
89BM02
89BM03
89BM04
89BM05
89BM06
89BM07
89BM08
89BM09
FOP2_15
FOP2_23
FOP2_31
FOP3_07
FOP3_15
FOP3_23
FOP3_31
89BM01
89BM10
89CLB02
89CLB10
89CC01
89CC02
89CC03
89CC04
89CC05
89CC06
LB_DP31
*
RTCAD07
RTCAD15
RTCBD07
RTCBD15
FOPF_07
FOPF_15
FOPF_23
FOPF_31
FOP1_07
FOP1_15
FOP1_23
FOP1_31
FOP2_07
Table 3.8
SEL Communications Processor TARGET Region (Sheet 9 of 11)
Address
Relay Word Bits (in Bits 7–0)
4
89OPN02
89OPN03
89OPN04
89OPN05
89OPN06
89OPN07
89OPN08
89OPN09
FOP2_13
FOP2_21
FOP2_29
FOP3_05
FOP3_13
FOP3_21
FOP3_29
89OPN01
89OPN10
89CLB04
*
89CCM01
89CCM02
89CCM03
89CCM04
89CCM05
89CCM06
LB_DP29
*
RTCAD05
RTCAD13
RTCBD05
RTCBD13
FOPF_05
FOPF_13
FOPF_21
FOPF_29
FOP1_05
FOP1_13
FOP1_21
FOP1_29
FOP2_05
3
89OIP02
89OIP03
89OIP04
89OIP05
89OIP06
89OIP07
89OIP08
89OIP09
FOP2_12
FOP2_20
FOP2_28
FOP3_04
FOP3_12
FOP3_20
FOP3_28
89OIP01
89OIP10
89CLB05
*
89OPE01
89OPE02
89OPE03
89OPE04
89OPE05
89OPE06
LB_DP28
*
RTCAD04
RTCAD12
RTCBD04
RTCBD12
FOPF_04
FOPF_12
FOPF_20
FOPF_28
FOP1_04
FOP1_12
FOP1_20
FOP1_28
FOP2_04
5
89CL02
89CL03
89CL04
89CL05
89CL06
89CL07
89CL08
89CL09
FOP2_14
FOP2_22
FOP2_30
FOP3_06
FOP3_14
FOP3_22
FOP3_30
89CL01
89CL10
89CLB03
*
89OCM01
89OCM02
89OCM03
89OCM04
89OCM05
89OCM06
LB_DP30
*
RTCAD06
RTCAD14
RTCBD06
RTCBD14
FOPF_06
FOPF_14
FOPF_22
FOPF_30
FOP1_06
FOP1_14
FOP1_22
FOP1_30
FOP2_06
2 1 0
89AL02
89AL03
89AL04
89AL05
89AL06
89AL07
89AL08
89AL09
FOP2_11
FOP2_19
FOP2_27
FOP3_03
FOP3_11
FOP3_19
FOP3_27
89AL01
89AL10
89CLB06
*
89CLS01
89CLS02
89CLS03
89CLS04
89CLS05
89CLS06
LB_DP27
*
LB_DP26
*
LB_DP25
*
RTCAD03 RTCAD02 RTCAD01
RTCAD11 RTCAD10 RTCAD09
RTCBD03 RTCBD02 RTCBD01
RTCBD11 RTCBD10 RTCBD09
FOPF_03 FOPF_02 FOPF_01
FOPF_11
FOPF_19
FOPF_27
FOP1_03
FOP1_11
FOP1_19
FOP1_27
FOP2_03
FOPF_10
FOPF_18
FOPF_26
FOP1_02
FOP1_10
FOP1_18
FOP1_26
FOP2_02
FOPF_09
FOPF_17
FOPF_25
FOP1_01
FOP1_09
FOP1_17
FOP1_25
FOP2_01
FOP2_10
FOP2_18
FOP2_26
FOP3_02
FOP3_10
FOP3_18
FOP3_26
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
89CLB07
*
89OCN01
89OCN02
89OCN03
89OCN04
89OCN05
89OCN06
*
89CLB08
*
89CCN01
89CCN02
89CCN03
89CCN04
89CCN05
89CCN06
*
*
*
*
89OIP
LOCAL
*
*
FOP2_09
FOP2_17
FOP2_25
FOP3_01
FOP3_09
FOP3_17
FOP3_25
89AL
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.3.18
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor Example
3172h
3173h
3174h
3175h
3176h
3177h
3178h
3179h
316Bh
316Ch
316Dh
316Eh
316Fh
3170h
3171h
315Eh
315Fh
3160h
3161h
3162h
3163h
3164h
3165h
3166h
3167h
3168h
3169h
316Ah
317Ah
317Bh
317Ch
317Dh
317Eh
317Fh
3180h
3181h
3182h
3183h
3184h
3185h
7 6
*
TWRTV
87CH1CL
87CH3FC
87CH2CS
ETL1
87CH2LS
UPD_EN
BNC_RST
89OC07
89OC08
89OC09
89OC10
89CBL01
89OIM01
89CBL02
89OIM02
89CIR03
89CBL04
89OIM04
89CIR05
89CBL06
89OIM06
89CIR07
89CBL08
89OIM08
89CIR09
89CBL10
89OIM10
81D1
81D2
81D4
81D6 81D6T
87T1P1 87T2P1
*
87T08E
*
87T07E
87R08P1
87R08P2
87R08P3
DDTO
87R07P1
87R07P2
87R07P3
FLTINT
89OSI08
89CIM08
89OBL09
89OSI10
89CIM10
81D1T
81D2T
81D4T
*
TWREC
87CH2CL
87CH1TK
87CH3CS
ETL2
87CH3LS
TLOCAL
SER_OK
89CC07
89CC08
89CC09
89CC10
89OSI01
89CIM01
89OSI02
89CIM02
89OBL03
89OSI04
89CIM04
89OBL05
89OSI06
89CIM06
89OBL07
Table 3.8
SEL Communications Processor TARGET Region (Sheet 10 of 11)
Address
5
89CSI08
*
89ORS09
89CSI10
*
81D1OVR
81D2OVR
81D4OVR
81D6OVR
87T3P1
*
87T06E
87R06P1
87R06P2
87R06P3
87DDRD
*
TWWAIT
87CH3CL
87CH2TK
87CH1TS
ETL3
87CH1FB
TPLLEXT
SER_SET
89OCM07
89OCM08
89OCM09
89OCM10
89CSI01
521CLSM
89CSI02
*
89ORS03
89CSI04
*
89ORS05
89CSI06
*
89ORS07
Relay Word Bits (in Bits 7–0)
4
89OIR08
*
89CRS09
89OIR10
*
81D1UDR
81D2UDR
81D4UDR
81D6UDR
87T4P1
*
87T05E
87R05P1
87R05P2
87R05P3
87DDIL
87CH1FO
IXDD
87CH1CH
87CH3TK
87CH2TS
*
87CH2FB
TSSW
SER_RST
89CCM07
89CCM08
89CCM09
89CCM10
89OIR01
521_ALM
89OIR02
*
89CRS03
89OIR04
*
89CRS05
89OIR06
*
89CRS07
3 2
*
87T1P2
*
87T04E
87R04P1
87R04P2
87R04P3
87DDVL
89CIR08
89CBL09
89OIM09
89CIR10
*
27B81
81D3
81D5
89OPE07
89OPE08
89OPE09
89OPE10
89CIR01
522CLSM
89CIR02
89CBL03
89OIM03
89CIR04
89CBL05
89OIM05
89CIR06
89CBL07
89OIM07
87CH2FO
IWDD
87CH2CH
87CH1FT
87CH3FO
*
87CH3CH
87CH2FT
87CH3TS
87CH1HS
87CH1NS
87CH2HS
87CH3FB 87BLK
TGLOBAL SER_BNP
UPD_BLK BNC_BNP
89CLS07
89CLS08
89CLS09
89CLS10
89OBL01
522_ALM
89OBL02
89OSI03
89CIM03
89OBL04
89OSI05
89CIM05
89OBL06
89OSI07
89CIM07
*
87T2P2
*
87T03E
87R03P1
87R03P2
87R03P3
VYDD
89OBL08
89OSI09
89CIM09
89OBL10
*
*
81D3T
81D5T
1 0
*
TWIX
87CH1FC
87CH3FT
87CH2NS
87CH3HS
87BLKL
BNC_OK
TIRIG
89OCN07
89OCN08
89OCN09
89CCN07
89CCN08
89CCN09
89OCN10
89ORS01
89CCN10
89CRS01
523CLSM 523_ALM
89ORS02 89CRS02
89CSI03
*
89ORS04
89CSI05
*
89ORS06
89CSI07
*
89OIR03
*
89CRS04
89OIR05
*
89CRS06
89OIR07
*
*
87T3P2
*
87T02E
87R02P1
87R02P2
87R02P3
VZDD
89ORS08
89CSI09
*
89ORS10
89CRS08
89OIR09
*
89CRS10
*
*
*
*
81D3OVR 81D3UDR
81D5OVR 81D5UDR
*
87T4P2
*
87T01E
87R01P1
87R01P2
87R01P3
87IFDL
87BLOCK
TWALTI
87CH2FC
87CH1CS
87CH3NS
87CH1LS
*
BNC_SET
TUPDH
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor Example
C.3.19
Table 3.8
SEL Communications Processor TARGET Region (Sheet 11 of 11)
Address
3186h
3187h
3188h
3189h
318Ah
318Bh
7
TSYNCA
*
CSV08
CSV16
CSV24
CSV32
6
TSOK
*
CSV07
CSV15
CSV23
CSV31
5
PMDOK
*
CSV06
CSV14
CSV22
CSV30
Relay Word Bits (in Bits 7–0)
4
TSYNC
*
CSV05
CSV13
CSV21
CSV29
3
BNC_TIM
*
CSV04
CSV12
CSV20
CSV28
2
SER_TIM
*
CSV03
CSV11
CSV19
CSV27
1
BLKLPTS
*
CSV02
CSV10
CSV18
CSV26
0
*
*
CSV01
CSV09
CSV17
CSV25
Control Points
The SEL communications processor can automatically pass control messages, called Fast Operate messages, to the relay. You must enable Fast Operate messages using the FASTOP setting in the relay port settings for the port connected to the communications processor. You must also enable Fast
Operate messages in the SEL communications processor by setting the automessage setting SEND_OPER equal to Y.
When you enable Fast Operate functions, the SEL communications processor automatically sends messages to the relay for changes in remote bits
RB1–RB16 or breaker bits BR1 and BR12 on the corresponding communications processor port (where BR1 and BR2 corresponds to breaker operations and BR3–BR12 corresponds to the 10 disconnect controls). In this example, if you set RB1 on Port 1 in the SEL communications processor, it automatically sets RB01 in the relay.
Breaker bits BR1 and BR2 operate differently than remote bits. There are no breaker bits in the relay. For Circuit Breaker 1, when you set BR1, the SEL communications processor sends a message to the relay that asserts the manual OPEN command bit OC1 for one processing interval. If you clear
BR1, the SEL communications processor sends a message to the relay that asserts the CLOSE command bit CC1 for one processing interval. If you are using the default settings, OC1 will open the circuit breaker and CC1 will close the circuit breaker. You can control and condition the effect of OC1 and
CC1 by changing the manual trip and close settings (BK1MTR, BK2MTR,
BK1MCL, BK2MCL) in the relay. Operation for Circuit Breaker 2 with BR2,
OC2, and CC2 is similar.
To control the 10 disconnects, the communications processor uses breaker bits
BR3–BR12. Setting the BR3 bit in the communications processor sends a message to the relay that asserts Relay Word bit 89OC1 for one processing interval. If the LOCAL Relay Word bit is deasserted in the relay, Relay Word bit 89OPEm (m = 01–10) asserts. Clearing the BR3 bit in the communications processor sends a message to the relay that asserts 89CCm for one processing interval. If the LOCAL Relay Word bit is deasserted, Relay Word bit 89CLSm
asserts. Table 3.9 shows the communications processor bits and the
corresponding Relay Word bits for the breaker and disconnect control.
Table 3.9
Communications Processor and Relay Control Bit Correlation
(Sheet 1 of 2)
Communications Processor Bits
BR1
BR2
Relay Word Bits
Set BR1: asserts OC1
Clear BR1: asserts CC1
Set BR1: asserts OC2
Clear BR1: asserts CC2
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.3.20
SEL Communications Processor Applications
SEL Communications Processor Example
Table 3.9
Communications Processor and Relay Control Bit Correlation
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Communications Processor Bits
BR3
BR4
BR5
BR6
BR7
BR8
BR9
BR10
BR11
BR12
Relay Word Bits
Set BR1: asserts 89OC01
Clear BR1: asserts 89CC01
Set BR1: asserts 89OC02
Clear BR1: asserts 89CC02
Set BR1: asserts 89OC03
Clear BR1: asserts 89CC03
Set BR1: asserts 89OC04
Clear BR1: asserts 89CC04
Set BR1: asserts 89OC05
Clear BR1: asserts 89CC05
Set BR1: asserts 89OC06
Clear BR1: asserts 89CC06
Set BR1: asserts 89OC07
Clear BR1: asserts 89CC07
Set BR1: asserts 89OC08
Clear BR1: asserts 89CC08
Set BR1: asserts 89OC09
Clear BR1: asserts 89CC09
Set BR1: asserts 89OC10
Clear BR1: asserts 89CC10
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Section 4
C.Communications Manual
DNP3 Communications
The relay provides a DNP3-2009 Level 2 (Distributed Network Protocol
Version 3.0, 2009 specification) Outstation interface for direct network connections to the relay. This section covers the following topics:
➤
➤
➤
➤
➤
Introduction to DNP3 on page C.4.1
DNP3 in the Relay on page C.4.7
DNP3 Documentation on page C.4.16
DNP Serial Application Example on page C.4.42
DNP3 LAN/WAN Application Example on page C.4.46
Introduction to DNP3
A SCADA (supervisory control and data acquisition) manufacturer developed
DNP3 from the lower layers of IEC 60870-5. Originally designed for use in telecontrol applications, version 3 of the protocol has also become popular for local substation data collection. DNP3 is one of the protocols included in the
IEEE Recommended Practice for Data Communication between remote terminal units (RTUs) and intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) in a substation.
Rather than wiring individual input and output points wired from the station
RTU to the station IEDs, many stations use DNP3 to convey measurement and control data over a single serial or Ethernet cable to the RTU. The RTU then forwards data to the off-site master station. By using a data communications protocol rather than hard wiring, designers have reduced installation, commissioning, and maintenance costs while increasing remote control and monitoring flexibility.
The DNP User’s Group maintains and publishes DNP3 standards. See the
DNP User’s Group web site (www.dnp.org) for more information on DNP3 standards, implementers of DNP3, and tools for working with DNP3.
DNP3 Specifications
DNP3 is a feature-rich protocol with many ways to accomplish tasks. DNP3 is defined in the eight Volume DNP3 specification. The Interoperability specification (Volume 8 of the specification) defines four levels of subsets to
help improve interoperability. The levels are listed in Table 4.1.
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual
C.4.2
DNP3 Communications
Introduction to DNP3
Table 4.1
DNP3 Implementation Levels
Level Description
1
2
3
4
Simple: limited communication requirements
Moderately complex: monitoring and metering devices and multifunction devices that contain more data
Sophisticated: devices with great amounts of data or complex communication requirements
Enhanced: additional data types and functionality for more complex requirements
Equipment Types
Meters, simple IEDs
Protective relays,
RTUs
Large RTUs, SCADA masters
Large RTUs, SCADA masters
Each level is a proper superset of the next lower-numbered level. A higher level device can act as a master to a lower level device, but can only use the data types and functions implemented in the lower level device. For example, a typical SCADA master is a Level 3 device and can use Level 2 (or lower) functions to poll a Level 2 (or lower) device by using only the data types and functions that the lower-level device uses. A lower-level device can also poll a higher-level device, but the lower level device can only access the features and data available to its level.
SEL-411L Relay
Data Handling
Objects
DNP3 uses a system of data references called object types, commonly referred to as objects, defined in Volume 6 of the DNP3 specification. Each subset level specification requires a minimum implementation of objects and also recommends several optional objects. DNP3 objects are specifications for the type of data the object carries. An object can include a single value or more complex data. Some objects serve as shorthand references for collections of data or even all data within the DNP3 device.
Each instance of the object includes an index that makes it unique. For example, each binary status point (Object 1) has an index. If there are 16 binary status points, these points are Object 1, Index 0 through Object 1,
Index 15. Note that index numbers are 0-based.
Each object also includes multiple versions called variations. For example,
Object 1 has three variations: 0, 1, and 2. Variation 0 is used to request all
Object 1 data from a DNP device using its default variation. Variation 1 is used to specify binary input values only and Variation 2 is used to specify binary input values with status information.
Each DNP3 device has both a list of objects and a map of object indices. The list of objects defines the available objects, variations, and qualifier codes. The map defines the indices for objects that have multiple instances and what data or control points correspond with each index.
A master initiates all DNP message exchanges except unsolicited data. DNP3 terminology describes all points from the perspective of the master. Binary points for control that move from the master to the outstation are called binary outputs, while binary status points within the outstation are called binary inputs.
Function Codes
Each DNP3 message includes a function code. Each object has a limited set of function codes that a master may use to manipulate the object. The object listing for the device shows the permitted function codes for each type of
object. The most common DNP3 function codes are listed in Table 4.2.
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
Introduction to DNP3
C.4.3
Table 4.2
Selected DNP3 Function Codes
1
4
5
2
3
6
Function
Code
Function
Read
Write
Select
Execute
Direct operate
Direct operate, no ack.
Description
Request data from the outstation
Send data to the outstation
First part of a select-before-execute operate
Second part of a select-before-execute operate
One-step operation with acknowledgement
One-step operation with no acknowledgement
Access Methods
Qualifier Codes and Ranges
DNP3 masters use qualifier codes and ranges to make requests for specific objects by index. Qualifier codes specify the style of range, and the range specifies the indices of the objects of interest. DNP3 masters use qualifier codes to compose the shortest, most concise message possible when requesting points from a DNP3 remote.
For example, the qualifier code 01 specifies that the request for points will include a start address and a stop address. Each of these two addresses uses two bytes. An example request using qualifier code 01 might have the fourhexadecimal byte range field, 00h 04h 00h 10h, that specifies points in the range 4–16.
DNP3 has many features that help it obtain maximum possible message efficiency. DNP3 Masters send requests with the least number of bytes using special objects, variations, and qualifiers that reduce the message size. Other features eliminate the continual exchange of static (unchanging) data values.
These features optimize use of bandwidth and maximize performance over a connection of any speed.
DNP3 event data collection eliminates the need to use bandwidth to transmit values that have not changed. Event data are time-stamped records that show when observed measurements changed. For binary points, the outstation device logs changes from logical 1 to logical 0 and from logical 0 to logical 1.
For analog points, the remote device logs changes that exceed a dead band.
DNP3 outstation devices collect event data in a buffer that either the master can request or the device can send to the master without a request message.
Data sent from the outstation to the master without a polling request are called unsolicited data.
DNP3 data fit into one of four event classes: 0, 1, 2, or 3. Class 0 is reserved for reading the present value (static data). Classes 1, 2, and 3 are event data classes. The meaning of Classes 1 to 3 is arbitrary and defined by the application at hand. With remotes that contain great amounts of data or in large systems, the three event classes provide a framework for prioritizing different types of data. For example, you can poll once a minute for Class 1 data, once an hour for Class 2 data, and once a day for Class 3 data.
Class 0 polling is also known as static polling, or simple polling of the present value of data points within the outstation. By combining event data polls, unsolicited messaging, and static polling, you can operate your system in one
of the four access methods shown in Table 4.3.
The access methods listed in Table 4.3 are in order of increasing
communication efficiency. With various tradeoffs, each method is less demanding of communication bandwidth than the previous one. For example,
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.4
DNP3 Communications
Introduction to DNP3
unsolicited report-by-exception consumes less communication bandwidth because of the elimination of polling messages from the master required by polled report-by-exception. You must also consider overall system size and the volume of data communication expected in order to properly evaluate which access method provides optimum performance for your application.
Table 4.3
DNP3 Access Methods
Access Method
Polled static
Polled report-byexception
Unsolicited reportby-exception
Quiescent
Description
Master polls for present value (Class 0) data only.
Master polls frequently for event data and occasionally for
Class 0 data.
Remote devices send unsolicited event data to the master, and the master occasionally polls for Class 0 data.
Master never polls and relies on unsolicited reports only.
Binary Control
Operations
DNP3 masters use Object 12 control relay output block to perform binary control operations. The control relay output block has both a trip/close selection and a code selection. The trip/close selection allows a single index to operate two related control points, such as trip and close or raise and lower.
Trip/close pair operation is not recommended for new DNP3 devices, but is often included for interoperability with older DNP3 master implementations.
The control relay output block code selection specifies either a latch or pulse operation on the point. In many cases, DNP3 outstations have only a limited subset of the possible combinations of the code field. Sometimes, DNP3 outstations assign special operation characteristics to the latch and pulse
selections. Table 4.12 describes control point operation for the relay.
Conformance Testing
In addition to the protocol specifications, the DNP User’s Group has approved conformance testing requirements for all levels of outstation devices. Some implementers perform their own conformance specification testing, while some contract with independent companies to perform conformance testing.
Conformance testing does not always guarantee that a master and remote will be fully interoperable (work together properly for all implemented features).
Conformance testing does help to standardize the testing procedure and move the DNP3 implementers toward a higher level of interoperability.
DNP3 Serial Network
Issues
You can build a DNP3 network using either a multidrop or star topology. Each
DNP3 network has one or more DNP3 masters and DNP3 outstations.
Figure 4.1 shows the DNP3 multidrop network topology.
Master
Remote 1 Remote 2
Figure 4.1
DNP3 Multidrop Network Topology
Figure 4.2 shows the DNP3 star network topology.
Remote n
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Data Link Layer
Operation
Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
Introduction to DNP3
C.4.5
Master
Remote 1 Remote 2
Figure 4.2
DNP3 Star Network Topology
Remote n
DNP3 multidrop networks that are used within substations often use an
EIA-485 physical layer. The multidrop network is vulnerable to the failure of a single transmitter. If any one transmitter fails in a state that disrupts signals on the network, the network will fail. The DNP3 star network topology eliminates the network transmitters and other single points of failure related to the physical medium.
If you are planning either a DNP3 star or network topology, you should consider the benefits of including an SEL communications processor such as the SEL-2032 or SEL-3530 RTAC in your design. A network with a
communications processor is shown in Figure 4.3. A DNP3 network that
includes a communications processor has a lower data latency and shorter scan time than comparable networks through two primary mechanisms. First, the communications processor collects data from all remotes in parallel rather than one-by-one. Second, the master can collect all data with one message and response, drastically reducing message overhead.
Master
Communications
Processor
Remote 1 Remote 2 Remote n
Figure 4.3
DNP3 Network With Communications Processor
In the communications processor DNP3 network, you can also collect data from devices that do not support the DNP3 protocol. The communications processor can collect data and present it to the master as DNP3 data regardless of the protocol between the communications processor and the remote device.
DNP3 employs a three-layer version of the seven-layer OSI (open systems interconnect) model called the enhanced performance architecture. The layer definition helps to categorize functions and duties of various software components that make up the protocol. The middle layer, the data link layer, includes several functions for error checking and media access control.
A feature called data link confirmation is a mechanism that provides positive confirmation of message receipt by the receiving DNP device. While this feature helps you recognize a failed device or failed communications link quickly, it also adds significant overhead to the DNP conversation. Consider for your individual application whether you require this link integrity function at the expense of overall system speed and performance.
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.6
DNP3 Communications
Introduction to DNP3
Network Medium
Contention
DNP3 LAN/WAN
Considerations
The DNP3 specification recommends against using data link confirmations because these processes can add to traffic in situations where communications are marginal. The increased traffic will reduce connection throughput further, possibly preventing the system from operating properly.
When more than one device requires access to a single network medium, you must provide a mechanism to resolve the resulting network medium contention. For example, unsolicited reporting results in network medium contention if you do not design your network as a star topology of point-topoint connections or use carrier detection on a multidrop network.
To avoid collisions among devices trying to send messages, DNP3 includes a collision avoidance feature. Before sending a message, a DNP3 device listens for a carrier signal to verify that no other node is transmitting data. The device transmits if there is no carrier or waits for a random time before rechecking for a carrier signal. However, if two nodes both detect a lack of carrier at the same instant, these two nodes could begin simultaneous transmission of data and cause a data collision. If your network allows for spontaneous data transmission including unsolicited event data transmissions, you also must use application confirmation to provide a retry mechanism for messages lost as a result of data collisions.
The main process for carrying DNP3 over an Ethernet network (LAN/WAN) involves encapsulating the DNP3 data link layer data frames within the transport layer frames of the Internet Protocol (IP) suite. This allows the IP stack to deliver the DNP3 data link layer frames to the destination in place of the original DNP3 physical layer.
The DNP User’s Group Technical Committee has recommended the following guidelines for carrying DNP3 over a network:
➤
DNP3 shall use the IP suite to transport messages over a LAN/
WAN
➤
Ethernet is the recommended physical link, though others may be used
➤
➤
➤
TCP must be used for WANs
TCP is strongly recommended for LANs
User Datagram Protocol (UDP) may be used for highly reliable single segment LANs
➤
➤
➤
UDP is necessary if broadcast messages are required
The DNP3 protocol stack shall be retained in full
Link layer confirmations shall be disabled
The Technical Committee has registered a standard port number, 20000, for
DNP3 with the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA). This port is used for either TCP or UDP.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 in the Relay
C.4.7
TCP/UDP Selection
The Committee recommends the selection of TCP or UDP protocol as per the
Table 4.4
TCP/UDP Selection Guidelines
Use in the case of…
Most situations
Non-broadcast or multicast
Mesh Topology WAN
Broadcast
Multicast
High-reliability single-segment LAN
Pay-per-byte, non-mesh WAN, for example, Cellular Digital Packet
Data (CDPD)
Low priority data, for example, data monitor or configuration information
TCP
X
X
X
UDP
X
X
X
X
X
DNP3 in the Relay
The relay is a DNP3-2009 Level 2 outstation device. The relay DNP3
interface has the capabilities summarized in Table 4.5.
Table 4.5
Relay DNP3 Feature Summary (Sheet 1 of 2)
Feature Application
DNP3 event data reporting
Time-tagged events
Control output relay blocks
Write analog set point
Time synchronization
Custom mapping
More efficient polling through event collection or unsolicited data
Time-stamped SER data
Operator-initiated control
Change the active protection settings group
Set the relay time from the master station or automatically request time synchronization from the master
Increase communication efficiency by organizing data and reducing available data to what you need for your application
Modem support Reduce the cost of the communications channel by either master dialing to relay or relay dialing to master
Analog dead-band settings per session Dead bands may be set to different values per session depending on desired application
Virtual Terminal Provides engineering access for configuration, diagnostics, and other tasks over the existing
DNP3 connection.
TEST DB2 command Test DNP3 protocol interface without disturbing protection
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.8
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 in the Relay
SEL-411L Relay
Data Access
NOTE:
Because unsolicited messaging only operates properly in some situations, for maximum performance and minimum risk of configuration problems, SEL recommends the polled report-byexception access method.
NOTE:
The DNP3 LAN/WAN settings have names similar to the serial port settings above, but include the session number n as a suffix ranging from 1 to
6 (for example, CLASSB1, UNSOL1,
PUNSOL1). All settings with the same numerical suffix comprise the complete DNP3 LAN/WAN session configuration.
Collision Avoidance
Table 4.5
Relay DNP3 Feature Summary (Sheet 2 of 2)
Feature Application
Support for Object 0 Device Attributes Provides Device Attributes (Device ID, Number of binary, analog and counter points, Manufacturer information, etc.) for the device specific to the current connected DNP session in use.
XML DNP Device Profile Document The DNP3 Device Profile document contains the complete information on DNP3 Protocol support in the relay. This information is available in XML format.
You can use any of the data access methods listed in Table 4.6. Table 4.6 also
lists the relay DNP3 settings. You must configure the DNP3 master for the data access method you select.
Table 4.6
DNP3 Access Methods
Access Method
Polled static
Polled report-byexception
Unsolicited reportby-exception
Quiescent
Master Polling Relay Settings
Class 0
Class 0 occasionally,
Class 1, 2, 3 frequently
Class 0 occasionally, optional Class 1, 2, 3 less frequently, mainly relies on unsolicited messages
Class 0, 1, 2, 3 never, relies completely on unsolicited messages
Set ECLASSB, ECLASSC,
ECLASSA, ECLASSV to Off,
UNSOL to N.
Set ECLASSB, ECLASSC,
ECLASSA, ECLASSV to the desired event class, UNSOL to N.
Set ECLASSB, ECLASSC,
ECLASSA, ECLASSV to the desired event class, set UNSOL to
Yes and PUNSOL to Y or N.
Set ECLASSB, ECLASSC,
ECLASSA, ECLASSV to the desired event class, set UNSOL and PUNSOL to Y.
In both the unsolicited report-by-exception and quiescent polling methods
shown in Table 4.6, you must make a selection for the PUNSOL setting. This
setting enables or disables unsolicited data reporting when you turn the relay on. If your master can send the DNP3 message to enable unsolicited reporting from the relay, you should set PUNSOL to No.
While automatic unsolicited data transmission on power-up is convenient, problems can result if your master is not prepared to start receiving data immediately when you turn on the relay. If the master does not acknowledge the unsolicited data with an application confirm, the relay will resend the data until it is acknowledged. On a large system, or in systems where the processing power of the master is limited, you may have problems when several relays simultaneously begin sending data and waiting for acknowledgment messages.
If your application requires unsolicited reporting from multiple devices on a single (serial) network medium, you must select a half-duplex medium or a medium that supports carrier detection to avoid data collisions. EIA-485 twowire networks are half-duplex. EIA-485 four-wire networks do not provide carrier detection, while EIA-232 systems can support carrier detection.
The relay uses application confirmation messages to guarantee delivery of unsolicited event data before erasing the local event data buffer. Data collisions are typically resolved when messages are repeated until confirmed.
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Transmission Control
Event Data
NOTE:
Most RTUs that act as substation DNP3 masters perform an event poll that collects event data of all classes simultaneously. Confirm that the polling configuration of your master allows independent polling for each class before implementing separate classes in the relay.
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 in the Relay
C.4.9
The relay pauses for a random delay between the settings MAXDLY and
MINDLY when it detects a carrier through data on the receive line or the CTS pin. If you use the settings of 0.10 seconds for MAXDLY and 0.05 seconds for
MINDLY, the relay will insert a random delay of 50 to 100 ms (milliseconds) between the end of carrier detection and the start of data transmission.
If you use a media transceiver (for example, EIA-232 to EIA-485) or a radio system for your serial DNP3 network, you may need to adjust data transmission properties. Use the PREDLY and POSTDLY settings to provide a delay between RTS signal control and data transmission. For example, an
EIA-485 transceiver typically requires 10–20 ms to change from receive to transmit. If you set the predelay to 30 ms, you will avoid data loss resulting from data transmission beginning at the same time as RTS signal assertion.
DNP3 event data objects contain change-of-state and time-stamp information that the relay collects and stores in a buffer. You can configure the relay to either report the data without a polling request from the master (unsolicited data) or hold the data until the master requests it with an event poll message.
With the event class settings ECLASSB, ECLASSC, ECLASSA, and
ECLASSV you can set the event class for binary, counter, analog, and virtual terminal information. You can use the classes as a simple priority system for collecting event data. The relay does not treat data of different classes differently with respect to unsolicited messages, but the relay does allow the master to perform independent class polls.
For event data collection you must also consider and enter appropriate settings
for dead band and scaling operation on analog points shown in Table 4.16.
You can either set and use default dead band and scaling according to data type or use a custom data map to select dead bands on a point-by-point basis.
See Configurable Data Mapping for a discussion of how to set scaling and
dead-band operation on a point-by-point basis.
The serial port settings ANADBA, ANADBV, and ANADBM (ANADBAn,
ANADBVn and ANADBMn for Ethernet port settings on session n) control default dead-band operation for the specified data type. Because DNP3
Objects 30 and 32 use integer data by default, you can use scaling to send digits after the decimal point and avoid truncating to a simple integer value.
With no scaling, the value of 12.632 would be sent as 12. With a scaling setting of 1, the value transmitted is 126. With a scaling setting of 3, the value transmitted is 12632. You must make certain that the maximum value does not exceed 32767 if you are polling the default 16-bit variations for Objects 30 and 32, but you can send some decimal values using this technique. You must also configure the master to perform the appropriate division on the incoming value to display it properly.
Set the default analog value scaling with the DECPLA, DECPLV, and
DECPLM settings (DECPLAn, DECPLVn and DECPLMn for Ethernet port settings on session n). Application of event reporting dead bands occurs after scaling in the DECPLA, DECPLV, and DECPLM. For example, if you set
DECPLA to 2 and ANADBA to 10, a measured current of 10.14 amps would be scaled to the value 1014 and would have to increase to more than 1024 or decrease to less than 1004 (a dead band of 0.2 amps) for the relay to report a new event value.
The relay uses the NUMEVE and AGEEVE settings (NUMEVEn and
AGEVEn Ethernet port settings for session n) to decide when to send unsolicited data to the master. The relay sends an unsolicited report when the
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.10
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 in the Relay
total number of events accumulated in the event buffer reaches NUMEVE.
The relay also sends an unsolicited report if the age of the oldest event in the buffer exceeds AGEEVE. The relay has the buffer capacities listed in
Table 4.7
Relay Event Buffer Capacity
Type
Binary
Analog
Counters
Virtual Terminal Objects
Maximum Number of Events
1024
One event per analog input in the DNP3 Map
One event per counter input in the DNP3 Map
5
Binary Controls
NOTE:
The port setting DNPCL (or
DNPCLn for DNP3 LAN/WAN session n) must be set to Y to enable binary controls for the DNP3 session.
Binary Output Status requests
(Object 10, Variation 2) and Class 0 requests will have no Binary Outputs in the response unless DNPCL := Y.
The relay provides more than one way to control individual points within the relay. The relay maps incoming control points either to remote bits within the relay or to internal command bits that cause circuit breaker operations.
Table 4.12 lists control points and control methods available in the relay.
A DNP3 technical bulletin (Control Relay Output Block Minimum
Implementation 9701-002)
recommends that you use one point per Object 12, control block output relay. You can use this method to perform pulse on, latch on, and latch off operations on selected remote bits.
If your master does not support the single-point-per-index messages or singleoperation database points, you can use the trip/close operation or use the code
field in the DNP3 message to specify operation of the points shown in Control
Time Synchronization
The accuracy of DNP3 time synchronization is insufficient for most protection and oscillography needs. DNP3 time synchronization provides backup time synchronization in the event the relay loses primary synchronization through the IRIG-B TIME input or some other high accuracy source.
Enable time synchronization with the TIMERQ setting (TIMERQn for DNP3
LAN/WAN Session n) and use Object 50, Variation 1, and Object 52,
Variation 2 (Object 50, Variation 3 for DNP3 LAN/WAN), to set the time via a
DNP3 master.
TIMERQ can be set in one of three ways:
➤
A numeric setting of 1–32767 minutes specifies the rate at which the relay shall request a time synchronization.
➤
A setting of M disables the relay from requesting a time synchronization, but still allows the relay to accept and apply time synchronization messages from the master.
➤
A setting of I disables the relay from requesting a time synchronization, and sets the relay to ignore time synchronization messages from the master.
Effective January 1, 2008, the DNP3 standard requires that DNP3 time correspond to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). To help ease into the transition to this standard, you can use the DNPSRC Global setting to determine whether the relay will use local or UTC time for DNP3.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Modem Support
NOTE:
Contact SEL for information on serial cable configurations and requirements for connecting your relay to other devices.
NOTE:
RTS/CTS hardware flow control is not available for a DNP3 modem connection. You must set the port data speed slower than the effective data rate of the modem.
DNP3 Settings
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 in the Relay
C.4.11
When requesting time synchronization with DNPSRC := UTC, the relay will treat incoming DNP3 time set messages as UTC time. All DNP3 event timestamps (binary input changes with time, analog input changes with time, etc.) will be in UTC time.
When requesting time synchronization with DNPSRC := LOCAL, the relay will treat incoming time set by the DNP3 master as local time. All DNP3 event timestamps will be in local time.
When setting the time with local time, there is an ambiguity during the last hour of daylight-saving time (DST) and with the exception of C37.118, to resolve this ambiguity, if the relay accepts a Time Set request in this hour, it will assume the time is in DST.
The relay DNP3 implementation includes modem support. Your DNP3 master can dial-in to the relay and establish a DNP3 connection. The relay can automatically dial out and deliver unsolicited DNP3 event data. When the relay dials out, it waits for the
CONNECT
message from the local modem and for assertion of the relay CTS line before continuing the DNP3 transaction. This requires a connection from the modem DCD to the relay CTS line.
Either connect the modem to a computer and configure it before connecting it to the relay, or program the appropriate modem setup string in the modem startup string setting MSTR. Use the PH_NUM1 setting to set the phone number that you want the relay to dial. The relay will automatically send the
ATDT modem dial command and then the contents of the PH_NUM1 setting when dialing the modem. PH_NUM1 is a text setting that must conform to the
AT modem command set dialing string standard. Use a comma (,) for a pause of four seconds. You may need to include a nine to reach an outside line or a one if the number requires long distance access. You can also insert other special codes your telephone service provider designates for block call waiting and other telephone line features.
The relay supports backup dial-out to a second phone number. If PH_NUM2 is set, the RETRY1 setting is used to configure the number of times the relay tries to dial PH_NUM1 before dialing PH_NUM2. Similarly, the RETRY2 setting configures the number of times the relay tries to dial PH_NUM2 before trying PH_NUM1. MDTIME sets the length of time from initiating the call to declaring it failed because of no connection, and MDRET sets the time between dial-out attempts.
DNP3 configuration involves both Global (SET G) and Port (SET P) settings.
The Global settings govern behavior for all DNP sessions, serial or LAN/
WAN. The Port settings apply to specific DNP sessions only.
There are two Global settings that directly configure DNP3. These settings,
EVELOCK and DNPSRC, define the behavior of Fault Summary event
retrieval and the DNP session time base. See Reading Relay Event Data for
more information on EVELOCK. The DNPSRC setting can be either LOCAL
or UTC (default). See Time Synchronization for more information on the
DNPSRC setting.
The DNP3 protocol settings are shown in Table 4.8 and Table 4.9. The DNP3
protocol settings are in the port settings for the port that you select for the
DNP3 protocol. You can use DNP3 on any of the serial ports (PORT F and
PORT 1–PORT 3) or Ethernet port (PORT 5), but you can only enable
DNP3 on one serial port at a time. You may enable up to six DNP3 sessions on the Ethernet port, independent of the number of serial DNP3 sessions enabled.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.12
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 in the Relay
Table 4.8
Relay Serial Port DNP3 Protocol Settings (Sheet 1 of 2)
Name Description Range Default
PROTO Communications protocol
DNPADR
DNPID
DNP address
DNP3 ID for Object 0, Variation 246 (20 characters)
DNPMAP DNP3 session map
ECLASSB Class for binary event data
ECLASSC Class for counter event data
ECLASSA Class for analog event data
ECLASSV Class for virtual terminal data
TIMERQ Time-set request interval (I, M, 1–32767 minutes)
DECPLA
DECPLV
Current value scaling (in powers of 10)
Voltage value scaling (in powers of 10)
DECPLM
STIMEO
DRETRY
DTIMEO
Miscellaneous data scaling (in powers of 10)
Select before/operate time-out
Data link retries
Data link time-out; hidden if DRETRY set to Off
SEL, DNP, MBA, MBB,
MBGA, MBGB, RTD,
PMU
0–65519
20 character string
1–5
OFF, 1–3
OFF, 1–3
OFF, 1–3
OFF, 1–3
I, M, 1–32767
0–3
0–3
0–3
0–60 seconds
OFF, 1–15
0–30 seconds
SEL
MINDLY Minimum delay from DCD to TX
MAXDLY Maximum delay from DCD to TX
PREDLY
PSTDLY
Settle time from RTS on to TX; Off disables PSTDLY
Settle time from TX to RTS off; hidden if PREDLY set to Off
DNPCL
AIVAR
Enable DNP3 Controls
Default variation for analog inputs (used directly for DNP3
Object 30; for Object 32, a setting of 3 produces a default variation of 1, and a value of 4 sets the default variation to 2)
ANADBA Analog reporting dead band for current; hidden if ECLASSA set to
Off
ANADBV Analog reporting dead band for voltages; hidden if ECLASSA set to
Off
ANADBM Analog reporting dead band; hidden if ECLASSC and ECLASSA set to Off
ETIMEO
UNSOL
Event message confirm time-out
Enable unsolicited reporting; hidden and set to N if ECLASSB,
ECLASSC, ECLASSA, and ECLASSV set to Off
0.00–1.00 seconds
0.00–1.00 seconds
OFF, 0.00–30.00 seconds 0.00
0.00–30.00 seconds 0.00
Y, N
1–6
0–32767
0–32767
0–32767
1–50 seconds
Y, N
N
2
0.05
0.10
100
100
100
2
N
N
1
PUNSOL
REPADR
Enable unsolicited reporting at power-up; hidden if UNSOL set to N Y, N
DNP3 address to which the relay reports unsolicited data; hidden if
UNSOL set to N
0–65519
1–200 NUMEVE Number of events on which the relay transmits unsolicited data; hidden if UNSOL set to N
AGEEVE Age of oldest event on which the relay transmits unsolicited data; hidden if UNSOL set to N
0–99999 seconds
URETRY Unsolicited message maximum retry attempts 2–10
UTIMEO
MODEM
MSTR
Unsolicited message offline time-out; must be greater than ETIMEO 1–5000
Modem connected to port Y, N
Modem startup string; hidden if MODEM set to N Up to 30 characters
10
2
3
60
N
“E0X0&D0S0=4”
1
1
OFF
1
1
1
I
OFF
0
RELAY1-DNP
1
1
OFF
2
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 in the Relay
C.4.13
Table 4.8
Relay Serial Port DNP3 Protocol Settings (Sheet 2 of 2)
Name Description
PH_NUM1 Phone number for dial-out (30 characters maximum)
PH_NUM2 Backup phone number for dial-out (30 characters maximum)
RETRY1 Retry attempts for Phone 1 dial-out (1–20)
RETRY2
MDTIME
MDRET
Retry Attempts for Phone 2 dial-out (1–20)
Time to attempt dial
Time between dial-out attempts
Range
Up to 30 characters
Up to 30 characters
1–20
1–20
5–300 seconds
5–3600 seconds
Default
“”
“”
5
5
60
120
See Table 4.9 for the DNP3 LAN/WAN port settings.
Table 4.9
Relay Ethernet Port DNP3 Protocol Settings (Sheet 1 of 3)
Name Description Range Default
EDNP Enable number of DNP3 sessions 0–6
DNPADR DNP3 address
DNPPNUM DNP3 IP port number for TCP and UDP
DNPID DNP3 ID for Object 0, Variation 246
DNP3 LAN/WAN Session 1 Settings
0–65519
1025–65534
20 character string
DNPIP1 IP address for Master 1
DNPTR1 Transport protocol (UDP, TCP)
DNPUDP1 UDP response port, hidden if DNPTR1 = TCP.
Must be unique for all active UDP settings (DNPUDP1–6,
PMOUDP1–2) w.x.y.z, where w = 0–223, x = 0–225, y = 0–255, z = 0–255
127.0.0.0 not allowed
UDP, TCP
REQ, 1025,65534
DNPMAP1 DNP3 session map
CLASSB1 Class for binary event data
CLASSC1 Class for counter event data
CLASSA1 Class for analog event data
TIMERQ1 Time-set request interval (I, M, 1–32767 minutes)
DECPLA1 Current value scaling (in powers of 10)
DECPLV1 Voltage value scaling (in powers of 10)
DECPLM1 Miscellaneous data scaling (in powers of 10)
1–5
OFF, 1–3
OFF, 1–3
OFF, 1–3
I, M, 1–32767
0–3
0–3
0–3
STIMEO1
DNPINA1
DRETRY1
DTIMEO1
MINDLY1
MAXDLY1
PREDLY1
PSTDLY1
DNPCL1
AIVAR1
Select before operate time-out
Seconds to send data link heartbeat
Data link retries
Data link time-out; hidden if DRETRY set to Off
Minimum delay from DCD to TX
Maximum delay from DCD to TX
Settle time from RTS on to TX; Off disables PSTDLY
Settle time from TX to RTS off; hidden if PREDLY set to Off
Enable DNP3 controls
Default variation for analog inputs (used directly for DNP3 Object
30; for Object 32, a setting of 3 produces a default variation of 1, and a value of 4 sets the default variation to 2)
0
0
20000
RELAY1-DNP
192.168.1.101
TCP
20000
0–60 seconds
0–7200 seconds
OFF, 1–15
0.0–30.0 seconds
0.00–1.00 seconds
0.00–1.00 seconds
0.05
0.10
OFF, 0.00–30.00 seconds 0.00
0.00–30.00 seconds 0.00
Y, N
1–6
N
2
1
120
OFF
1.0
1
1
I
1
1
1
OFF
2
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.14
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 in the Relay
Table 4.9
Relay Ethernet Port DNP3 Protocol Settings (Sheet 2 of 3)
Name Description Range
ANADBA1 Analog reporting dead band for current; hidden if ECLASSA set to
Off
ANADBV1 Analog reporting dead band for voltages; hidden if ECLASSA set to
Off
ANADBM1 Analog reporting dead band; hidden if ECLASSC and ECLASSA set to Off
0–32767
0–32767
0–32767
ETIMEO1 Event message confirm time-out (1–50 seconds)
UNSOL1 Enable unsolicited reporting; hidden and set to N if ECLASSB,
ECLASSC, ECLASSA, and ECLASSV set to Off
1–50 seconds
Y, N
PUNSOL1 Enable unsolicited reporting at power-up; hidden if UNSOL set to N Y, N
REPADR1 DNP3 address to which the relay reports unsolicited data; hidden if
UNSOL set to N
0–65519
NUMEVE1 Number of events on which the relay transmits unsolicited data; hidden if UNSOL set to N
AGEEVE1 Age of oldest event on which the relay transmits unsolicited data; hidden if UNSOL set to N
1–200
0–99999 seconds
URETRY1 Unsolicited message maximum retry attempts 2–10
UTIMEO1 Unsolicited message offline time-out; must be greater than ETIMEO 1–5000 seconds
DNP3 LAN/WAN Session 2 Settings
DNPIP2
DNPTR2
IP address for Master 2
Transport protocol (UDP, TCP) w.x.y.z, where w = 0–223, x = 0–225, y = 0–255, z = 0–255
127.0.0.0 not allowed
UDP, TCP
DNPUDP2 UDP response port, hidden if DNPTR2 = TCP.
Must be unique for all active UDP settings (DNPUDP1–6,
PMOUDP1–2)
•
•
•
REQ, 1025,65534
URETRY2 Unsolicited message maximum retry attempts 2–10
UTIMEO2 Unsolicited message offline time-out; must be greater than ETIMEO 1–5000 seconds
DNP3 LAN/WAN Session 3 Settings
DNPIP3
DNPTR3
IP address for Master 3
Transport protocol (UDP, TCP) w.x.y.z, where w = 0–223, x = 0–225, y = 0–255, z = 0–255
127.0.0.0 not allowed
UDP, TCP
DNPUDP3 UDP response port, hidden if DNPTR3 = TCP.
Must be unique for all active UDP settings (DNPUDP1–6,
PMOUDP1–2)
•
•
•
REQ, 1025,65534
URETRY3 Unsolicited message maximum retry attempts 2–10
UTIMEO3 Unsolicited message offline time-out; must be greater than ETIMEO 1–5000 seconds
Default
100
100
100
2
N
N
1
10
2
3
60
192.168.1.102
TCP
20000
3
60
192.168.1.103
TCP
20000
3
60
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 in the Relay
C.4.15
Table 4.9
Relay Ethernet Port DNP3 Protocol Settings (Sheet 3 of 3)
Name
DNPIP4
Description
IP address for Master 4
DNP3 LAN/WAN Session 4 Settings
Range
w.x.y.z, where w = 0–223, x = 0–225, y = 0–255, z = 0–255
127.0.0.0 not allowed
DNPTR4 Transport protocol (UDP, TCP)
DNPUDP4 UDP response port, hidden if DNPTR4 = TCP.
Must be unique for all active UDP settings (DNPUDP1–6,
PMOUDP1–2)
•
•
•
URETRY4 Unsolicited message maximum retry attempts
UDP, TCP
REQ, 1025,65534
2–10
UTIMEO4 Unsolicited message offline time-out; must be greater than ETIMEO 1–5000 seconds
DNP3 LAN/WAN Session 5 Settings
DNPIP5 IP address for Master 5 w.x.y.z, where w = 0–223, x = 0–225, y = 0–255, z = 0–255
127.0.0.0 not allowed
DNPTR5 Transport protocol (UDP, TCP)
DNPUDP5 UDP response port, hidden if DNPTR5 = TCP.
Must be unique for all active UDP settings (DNPUDP1–6,
PMOUDP1–2)
•
•
•
URETRY5 Unsolicited message maximum retry attempts
UDP, TCP
REQ, 1025,65534
2–10
UTIMEO5 Unsolicited message offline time-out; must be greater than ETIMEO 1–5000 seconds
DNP3 LAN/WAN Session 6 Settings
DNPIP6 IP address for Master 6 w.x.y.z, where w = 0–223, x = 0–225, y = 0–255, z = 0–255
127.0.0.0 not allowed
DNPTR6 Transport protocol (UDP, TCP)
DNPUDP6 UDP response port, hidden if DNPTR6 = TCP.
Must be unique for all active UDP settings (DNPUDP1–6,
PMOUDP1–2)
•
•
•
URETRY6 Unsolicited message maximum retry attempts
UDP, TCP
REQ, 1025,65534
2–10
UTIMEO6 Unsolicited message offline time-out; must be greater than ETIMEO 1–5000 seconds
Default
192.168.1.104
TCP
20000
3
60
192.168.1.105
TCP
20000
3
60
192.168.1.106
TCP
20000
3
60
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.16
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
Warm Start and
Cold Start
Testing
NOTE:
The TEST DB2 command will override the state of all instances of the forced bit or value for all active
CADI2 protocols. This includes DNP3 serial and LAN/WAN and IEC 61850
GOOSE and MMS. Before using the command, take precautions to ensure against unintended operations from inadvertent messages sent as the result of a TEST DB2 override, for example, a bit used to trip a breaker on a remote relay via IEC 61850
GOOSE.
The DNP3 function codes for warm start and cold start reset the relay serial port. These function codes do not interrupt protection processes within the relay.
Use the TEST DB2 command to test the data mapping from the relay to your
DNP3 master. You can use the TEST DB2 command to force DNP3 values by object type and label. Although the relay reports forced values to the DNP3 host, these values do not affect protection processing within the relay. The
TEST DB2 command operates by object type and label, so it works equally well with custom mapping and the default DNP3 maps. See TEST DB2 on
page P.15.58 for more information.
When you are using the TEST DB2 command to test DNP3 operation, the
Relay Word bit TESTDB2 will be asserted to indicate that test mode is active.
The DNP3 status bit will also show forced status for any object variations that include status.
SEL-411L Relay
DNP3 Documentation
Object List
Table 4.10 lists the objects and variations with supported function codes and
qualifier codes available in the relay. The list of supported objects conforms to the format laid out in the DNP specifications and includes both supported and unsupported objects. Those that are supported include the function and qualifier codes. The objects that are not supported are shown without any corresponding function and qualifier codes.
Table 4.10
Relay
DNP Object List (Sheet 1 of 6)
Request a
Response
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Obj.
Var.
Description
Funct. Codes Qual. Codes Funct. Codes Qual. Codes
211 Device attributes—User-specific sets of attributes
212 Device attributes—Master data set prototypes
213 Device attributes—Outstation data set prototypes
214 Device attributes—Master data sets
215 Device attributes—Outstation data sets
216 Device attributes—Max. binary outputs per request
219 Device attributes—Support for analog output events 1
220 Device attributes—Max. analog output index 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
221 Device attributes—Number of analog outputs
222 Device attributes—Support for binary output events
223 Device attributes—Max. binary output index
224 Device attributes—Number of binary outputs
225 Device attributes—Support for frozen counter events 1
226 Device attributes—Support for frozen counters 1
227 Device attributes—support for counter events
228 Device attributes—Max. counter index
1
1
1
1
1
1
229 Device attributes—Number of counters 1
230 Device attributes—Support for frozen analog inputs 1
231 Device attributes—Support for analog input events 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
C.4.17
Table 4.10
Relay
DNP Object List (Sheet 2 of 6)
Request a
Response a
Obj.
Var.
Description
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
232 Device attributes—Max. analog input index
233 Device attributes—Number of analog inputs
234 Device attributes—Support for double-bit events
235 Device attributes—Max. double-bit binary index
236 Device attributes—Number of double-bit binaries
237 Device attributes—Support for binary input events
238 Device attributes—Max. binary input index
239 Device Attributes—Number of binary inputs
240 Device attributes—Max. transmit fragment size
241 Device attributes—Max. receive fragment size
242 Device attributes—Device manufacturer’s software version
243 Device attributes—Device manufacturer’s hardware version
245 Device attributes—User-assigned location name
246 Device attributes—User assigned ID code/number
1
247 Device attributes—User-assigned device name
248 Device attributes—Device serial number
249 Device attributes—DNP3 subset and conformance
250 Device attributes—Device manufacturer’s product name and model
252 Device attributes—Device manufacturer’s name 1
254 Device attributes—Non-specific all attributes request 1
255 Device attributes—List of attribute variations
0 Binary input—All variations
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Funct. Codes Qual. Codes Funct. Codes Qual. Codes
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
0, 17
1
2
2
2
2
2
10 0
10 1
10 2
12 0
12 1
2
3
0
1
Binary input
Binary input with status
Binary input change—All variations
Binary input change without time
Binary input change with time
Binary input change with relative time
Binary output—All variations
Binary output
Binary output status
Control block—All variations
Control relay output block
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3, 4, 5, 6
0
0, 6
0, 6
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
6, 7, 8
6, 7, 8
6, 7, 8
6, 7, 8
0, 1, 6, 7, 8
0, 1, 6, 7, 8
17, 28
129
129
129
129, 130
129
129
129
0, 1, 17, 28
0, 1, 17, 28
17, 28
17, 28
17, 28
0, 1
12 2 Pattern control block 3, 4, 5, 6 7 129 echo of request echo of request
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.18
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
Table 4.10
Relay
DNP Object List (Sheet 3 of 6)
Obj.
Var.
12 3
20 0
Description
Pattern mask
Binary counter—All variations
20 1
20 2
32-Bit binary counter
16-Bit binary counter
20 3
20 4
20 5
32-Bit delta counter
16-Bit delta counter
32-Bit binary counter without flag
20 6
16-Bit binary counter without flag
20 7
20 8
21 0
21 1
21 2
21 3
32-Bit delta counter without flag
16-Bit delta counter without flag
Frozen counter—All variations
32-Bit frozen counter
16-Bit frozen counter
32-Bit frozen delta counter
21 4
21 5
21 6
21 7
16-Bit frozen delta counter
32-Bit frozen counter with time of freeze
16-Bit frozen counter with time of freeze
32-Bit frozen delta counter with time of freeze
21 8
21 9
16-Bit frozen delta counter with time of freeze
32-Bit frozen counter without flag
21 10 16-Bit frozen counter without flag
21 11 32-Bit frozen delta counter without flag
21 12 16-Bit frozen delta counter without flag
22 0 Counter change event—All variations
22 1
22 2
32-Bit counter change event without time
16-Bit counter change event without time
22 3
22 4
22 5
22 6
32-Bit delta counter change event without time
16-Bit delta counter change event without time
32-Bit counter change event with time
16-Bit counter change event with time
22 7
22 8
23 0
23 1
23 2
23 3
32-Bit delta counter change event with time
16-Bit delta counter change event with time
Frozen counter event—All variations
32-Bit frozen counter event without time
16-Bit frozen counter event without time
32-Bit frozen delta counter event without time
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual
1
1
1
1
1
Request a
Response a
Funct. Codes Qual. Codes Funct. Codes Qual. Codes
3, 4, 5, 6 0, 1 129 echo of request
1, 7, 8, 9, 10 0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 18
1, 7, 8, 9, 10 0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 18
1, 7, 8, 9, 10 0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 18
1, 7, 8, 9, 10 0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 18
1, 7, 8, 9, 10 0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 18
129
129
6, 7, 8
6, 7, 8
6, 7, 8
6, 7, 8
6, 7, 8
129
129, 130
129
129
0, 1, 17, 28
0, 1, 17, 28
17, 28
17, 28
17, 28
17, 28
Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
C.4.19
Table 4.10
Relay
DNP Object List (Sheet 4 of 6)
Obj.
Var.
Description
23 4
23 5
23 6
23 7
23 8
30 0
16-Bit frozen delta counter event without time
32-Bit frozen counter event with time
16-Bit frozen counter event with time
32-Bit frozen delta counter event with time
16-Bit frozen delta counter event with time
Analog input—All variations
30 1 b
32-Bit analog input
30 2
16-Bit analog input
30 3
32-Bit analog input without flag
1
1
1
1
30 4
16-Bit analog input without flag
30 3
32-Bit analog input without flag
1
1
30 5
30 6
Single-precision floating point analog input without flag
1
Double-precision floating point analog input without flag 1
Request a
Response a
Funct. Codes Qual. Codes Funct. Codes Qual. Codes
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
129
129, 130
129
129
129
129
129
0, 1, 7, 8
0, 1, 7, 8
0, 1, 7, 8
0, 1, 7, 8
0, 1, 7, 8
0, 1, 7, 8
0, 1, 7, 8
31 0
31 1
31 2
31 3
31 4
31 5
31 6
32 0
32 1
32 2
32 3
32 4
32 5
32 6
33
33
33
33
33
0
1
2
3
4
Frozen analog input—All variations
32-Bit frozen analog input
16-Bit frozen analog input
32-Bit frozen analog input with time of freeze
16-Bit frozen analog input with time of freeze
32-Bit frozen analog input without flag
16-Bit frozen analog input without flag
Analog change event—All variations
32-Bit analog change event without time
16-Bit analog change event without time
32-Bit analog change event with time
16-Bit analog change event with time
Single-precision floating point analog change event without time
Double-precision floating point analog change event without time
Frozen analog event—All variations
32-Bit frozen analog event without time
16-Bit frozen analog event without time
32-Bit frozen analog event with time
16-Bit frozen analog event with time
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6, 7, 8
6, 7, 8
6, 7, 8
6, 7, 8
6, 7, 8
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
129
129, 130
129
129
129
129
17, 28
17, 28
17, 28
17, 28
0, 1, 7, 8
0, 1, 7, 8
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.20
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
Table 4.10
Relay
DNP Object List (Sheet 5 of 6)
60 0
60 1
60 2
60 3
60 4
70 1
80 1
40 0
40 1
40 2
40 3
40 4
41 0
41 1
Obj.
Var.
34
34
34
34
41
41
41
50
50
50
50
51
51
51
52
0
1
2
3
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
0
52 1
52 2
Request a
Response a
Description
Analog input dead band—All variations
16-Bit analog input dead band
32-Bit analog input dead band
Single-precision floating point analog input dead band
Analog output status—All variations
32-Bit analog output status
1
16-Bit analog output status
Single-precision floating point analog output status
Double-precision floating point analog output status 1
Analog output block—All variations
1
1
32-Bit analog output block
1
1
3, 4, 5, 6
Funct. Codes Qual. Codes Funct. Codes Qual. Codes
1
1
1
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
0, 1, 6, 7, 8,
17, 28
0, 1, 6, 7, 8
0, 1, 6, 7, 8
0, 1, 6, 7, 8
0, 1, 6, 7, 8
0, 1, 6, 7, 8
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
0, 1, 17, 28
0, 1, 17, 28
0, 1, 17, 28
0, 1, 17, 28
0, 1, 17, 28
0, 1, 17, 28
0, 1, 17, 28
17, 28 129
16-Bit analog output block
Single-precision floating point analog output block
Double-precision floating point analog output block
3, 4, 5, 6
3, 4, 5, 6
3, 4, 5, 6
17, 28
17, 28
17, 28
129
129
129 echo of request echo of request echo of request echo of request
Time and date—All variations
Time and date 1, 2 7, 8 index=0
129 07, quantity=1
Time and date with interval
Time and date at last recorded time 2 7 quantity=1
129
Time and date CTO—All variations
Time and date CTO 129
Unsynchronized time and date CTO 129
07, quantity=1
07, quantity=1
Time delay—All variations
Time delay, coarse
Time delay, fine 129 07, quantity=1
All classes of data
Class 0 data
Class 1 data
Class 2 data
Class 3 data
File identifier
Internal indications
1, 20, 21
1
1, 20, 21
1, 20, 21
1, 20, 21
2
6, 7, 8
6, 7, 8
6, 7, 8
6, 7, 8
6, 7, 8
0, 1 index=7
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
C.4.21
Table 4.10
Relay
DNP Object List (Sheet 6 of 6)
Obj.
Var.
Description
Request a
Response a
Funct. Codes Qual. Codes Funct. Codes Qual. Codes
81 1
82 1
83 1
83 2
90 1
100 1
Storage object
Device profile
Private registration object
Private registration object descriptor
Application identifier
Short floating point
100 2
100 3
101 1
101 2
Long floating point
Extended floating point
Small packed binary—Coded decimal
Medium packed binary—Coded decimal
101 3 Large packed binary—Coded decimal
112 All Virtual terminal output block
113 All Virtual terminal event data
N/A No object required for the following function codes:
13 cold start
14 warm start
23 delay measurement a b
Default variation.
Setting AIVAR determines default variation.
2
1
13, 14, 23
6
6 129, 130 17, 28
Device Profile
The DNP3 Device Profile document, available on the supplied CD or as a download from the SEL website, contains the standard device profile information for the relay. This information is also available in XML format.
Please refer to this document for complete information on DNP3 Protocol support in the relay.
Reference Data Map
Table 4.11 shows the relay DNP3 reference data map. The reference data map
contains all of the data available to the DNP3 protocol. You can use the default map or the custom DNP3 mapping functions of the relay to include only the points required by your application.
The entire Relay Word (see Table 16.1) is part of the DNP3 reference map.
You may include any label in the Relay Word as part of a DNP3 custom map.
The relay scales analog values by the indicated settings or fixed scaling.
Analog inputs for event (fault) summary reporting use a default scale factor of
1 and dead band of ANADBM. Per-point scaling and dead band settings specified in a custom DNP3 map will override defaults.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.22
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
Table 4.11
Relay
DNP3 Reference Data Map (Sheet 1 of 6)
Object Label
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
10, 12
10, 12
RLYDIS
STFAIL
STWARN
STSET
UNRDEV
NUNREV
LDATPFW
LDBTPFW
LDCTPFW
LD3TPFW
Relay Word
Description
Binary Inputs
Relay disabled
Relay diagnostic failure
Relay diagnostic warning
Settings change or relay restart
New relay event available
An unread event exists, newer than the event in the event summary AIs
Leading true power factor A-phase, Terminal W (1 if leading, 0 if lagging or zero)
Leading true power factor B-phase, Terminal W (1 if leading, 0 if lagging or zero)
Leading true power factor C-phase, Terminal W (1 if leading, 0 if lagging or zero)
Leading true power factor three-phase, Terminal W (1 if leading, 0 if lagging or zero)
Relay Word bit label (see Section 16: Relay Word Bits in the Protection Manual).
Binary Outputs
Remote bits RB01–RB32
Remote bit pairs RB01–RB32
RB01–RB32
RB01:RB02
RB03:RB04
RB05:RB06
•
•
•
RB29:RB30
RB31:RB32
OC1
CC1
OC1:CC1
OC2
CC2
OC2:CC2
89OC01–89OC10
89CC01–89CC10
89OC01:89CC01
89OC02:89CC02
89OC03:89CC03
•
•
•
89OC09:89CC09
89OC10:89CC10
RST_DEM
RST_PDM
RST_ENE
RSTMML
RSTMMB1
RSTMMB2
RST_BK1
RST_BK2
Pulse open Circuit Breaker 1 command
Pulse close Circuit Breaker 1 command
Open/close pair for Circuit Breaker 1
Pulse open Circuit Breaker 2 command
Pulse close Circuit Breaker 2 command
Open/close pair for Circuit Breaker 2
Open disconnect switch control 1–10
Close Disconnect switch control 1–10
Open/close disconnect switch control pair 1–10
Reset demands
Reset demand peaks
Reset energies
Reset min/max metering data for the line
Reset min/max metering data for Circuit Breaker 1
Reset min/max metering data for Circuit Breaker 2
Reset Breaker 1 monitor data
Reset Breaker 2 monitor data
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
C.4.23
Table 4.11
Relay
DNP3 Reference Data Map (Sheet 2 of 6)
20, 22
20, 22
20, 22
20, 22
20, 22
20,22 a,b
20,22
20,22
20,22
20,22
20,22
20,22
20,22
20,22
20,22
20,22
20,22
20,22
20,22
20,22
20,22
20, 22
20, 22
20, 22
20, 22
20, 22
20, 22
20, 22
20, 22
20, 22
20, 22
Object
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
Label
RST_BAT
RST_79C
RSTFLOC
RSTTRGT
RSTDNPE
NXTEVE
ACTGRP
BKR1OPA
BKR1OPB
BKR1OPC
BKR2OPA
BKR2OPB
BKR2OPC
ACN01CV–ACN32CV
PCN01CV–PCN32CV
87CH1LX
87CH2LX
87CH3LX
87CH1LD
87CH2LD
87CH3LD
KWHAOUT
KWHBOUT
KWHCOUT
KWHAIN
KWHBIN
KWHCIN
3KWHOUT
3KWHIN
MWHAOUT
MWHBOUT
MWHCOUT
MWHAIN
MWHBIN
MWHCIN
3MWHOUT
3MWHIN
Description
Reset battery monitor data
Reset recloser shot counter
Reset fault location data
Reset front-panel targets
Reset (clear) DNP3 event summary AIs
Load next fault event into DNP3 event summary AIs
Binary Counters
Active settings group
Number of breaker operations on Circuit Breaker 1 A-phase
Number of breaker operations on Circuit Breaker 1 B-phase
Number of breaker operations on Circuit Breaker 1 C-phase
Number of breaker operations on Circuit Breaker 2 A-phase
Number of breaker operations on Circuit Breaker 2 B-phase
Number of breaker operations on Circuit Breaker 2 C-phase
Automation SEL
OGIC
counter value 1–32
Protection SEL
OGIC
counter value 1–32
Count of lost 87L communication packets among the last 10,000 scheduled packets for Channel 1
Count of lost 87L communication packets among the last 10,000 scheduled packets for Channel 2
Count of lost 87L communication packets among the last 10,000 scheduled packets for Channel 3
Count of lost 87L communication packets among the last 24 hours for Channel 1
Count of lost 87L communication packets among the last 24 hours for Channel 2
Count of lost 87L communication packets among the last 24 hours for Channel 3
Positive (export) A-phase energy, Kilowatt hours
Positive (export) B-phase energy, Kilowatt hours
Positive (export) C-phase energy, Kilowatt hours
Negative (import) A-phase energy, Kilowatt hours
Negative (import) B-phase energy, Kilowatt hours
Negative (import) C-phase energy, Kilowatt hours
Positive (export) three-phase energy, Kilowatt hours
Negative (import) three-phase energy, Kilowatt hours
Positive A-phase energy (export), MWh
Positive B-phase energy (export), MWh
Positive C-phase energy (export), MWh
Negative A-phase energy (import), MWh
Negative B-phase energy (import), MWh
Negative C-phase energy (import), MWh
Positive three-phase energy (export), MWh
Negative three-phase energy (import), MWh
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.24
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
QA_F
3Q_F
SA_F
SB_F
SC_F
3S_F
DPFA f
DPFB
DPFC
LIAFM, LIAFA c
LI1M, LI1A
B1IAFM, B1IAFA
B2IAFM, B2IAFA
VAFM, VAFA d
VBFM, VBFA
VCFM, VCFA
V1M, V1A
3V2M, 3V2A
3V0M, 3V0A
PA_F e
PB_F
PC_F
3P_F
3DPF
VPMc
DC1 g
IAPKD
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
Table 4.11
Relay
DNP3 Reference Data Map (Sheet 3 of 6)
Object Label Description
Analog Inputs
Line A-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Line B-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Line C-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Line positive-sequence current magnitude (amps) and angle
Line negative-sequence current (3I2) magnitude in amps and angle
Line zero-sequence current (3I0) magnitude in amps and angle
Circuit Breaker 1 A-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Circuit Breaker 1 B-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Circuit Breaker 1 C-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Circuit Breaker 2 A-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Circuit Breaker 2 B-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Circuit Breaker 2 C-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Line A-phase voltage magnitude (kV) and angle
Line B-phase voltage magnitude (kV) and angle
Line C-phase voltage magnitude (kV) and angle
Positive-sequence voltage magnitude (V1) in kV and angle
Negative-sequence voltage magnitude (3V2) in kV and angle
Zero-sequence voltage magnitude (3V0) in kV and angle
A-phase real power in MW
B-phase real power in MW
C-phase real power in MW
Three-phase real power in MW
A-phase reactive power in MVAR
B-phase reactive power in MVAR
C-phase reactive power in MVAR
Three-phase reactive power in MVAR
A-phase apparent power in MVAR
B-phase apparent power in MVAR
C-phase apparent power in MVAR
Three-phase apparent power in MVAR
A-phase power factor
B-phase power factor
C-phase power factor
Power factor
Polarizing voltage magnitude (volts)
Synchronizing Voltage 1 magnitude (volts)
Synchronizing Voltage 2 magnitude (volts)
DC Battery 1 voltage (V)
DC Battery 2 voltage (V)
Peak A-phase demand current (amps)
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Table 4.11
Relay
DNP3 Reference Data Map (Sheet 4 of 6)
Object
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32 h,i
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
Label
QAPKD
3QPKD
3UPKD
IGPKD
PAPKD
PBPKD
PCPKD
3PPKD
IAD
IBD
ICD
IGD
PAD, PBD, PCD
3PD
3QD
UAD, UBD, UCD
3UD
KWHAOUT
KWHBOUT
KWHCOUT
KWHAIN
KWHBIN
KWHCIN
3KWHOUT
3KWHIN
MWHAIN, MWHAOUT
3MWHIN, 3MWHOUT
PMV001–PMV064
AMV001–AMV256
Description
Peak B-phase demand current (amps)
Peak C-phase demand current (amps)
Peak negative-sequence demand current (amps)
Peak zero-sequence demand current (amps)
A-phase peak demand power (MW)
B-phase peak demand power (MW)
C-phase peak demand power (MW)
Three-phase peak demand power (MW)
A-phase peak demand reactive power (MW)
B-phase peak demand reactive power (MW)
C-phase peak demand reactive power (MW)
Three-phase peak reactive power (MW)
A-phase peak demand phase apparent power (MW)
B-phase peak demand phase apparent power (MW)
C-phase peak demand phase apparent power (MW)
Three-phase peak demand apparent power (MW)
A-phase demand current (amps)
B-phase demand current (amps)
C-phase demand current (amps)
Demand negative-sequence current (amps)
Demand zero-sequence current (amps)
A-phase, B-phase, and C-phase demand power (MW)
Three-phase demand power (MW)
A-phase, B-phase, and C-phase demand reactive power (MW)
Three-phase demand reactive power (MW)
A-phase, B-phase, and C-phase demand apparent power (MW)
Three-phase demand apparent power (MW)
Positive (export) A-phase energy, Kilowatt hours
Positive (export) B-phase energy, Kilowatt hours
Positive (export) C-phase energy, Kilowatt hours
Negative (import) A-phase energy, Kilowatt hours
Negative (import) B-phase energy, Kilowatt hours
Negative (import) C-phase energy, Kilowatt hours
Positive (export) three-phase energy, Kilowatt hours
Negative (import) three-phase energy, Kilowatt hours
A-phase total power in and out (MWh)
B-phase total power in and out (MWh)
C-phase total power in and out (MWh)
Three-phase total power in and out (MWh)
Protection SEL
OGIC
math variables
Automation SEL
OGIC
math variables
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
C.4.25
SEL-411L Relay
C.4.26
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
30, 32 j
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
Table 4.11
Relay
DNP3 Reference Data Map (Sheet 5 of 6)
Object
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
Label
B1BCWPA, B1BCWPB,
B1BCWPC
DMON
SPSHOT
SHOT1_1
SHOT1_2
SHOT3_1
SHOT3_2
SHOT3_3
SHOT3_4
FLOC
B2BCWPA, B2BCWPB,
B2BCWPC
FREQ
FREQP
FREQPM
DFDTPM
THR
TMIN
DDOM
FTYPE
FTAR1
FTAR2
FSLOC
FTWLOC
FFROM
FCURR
FFREQ
FGRP
FTIMEH, FTIMEM,
FTIMEL
Description
Circuit Breaker 1 contact wear percentage multiplied by 100
Circuit Breaker 2 contact wear percentage multiplied by 100
Frequency (Hz)
Frequency for under- and overfrequency elements (Hz)
Frequency for synchrophasor data (Hz)
Rate-of-change of frequency for synchrophasor data (Hz)
UTC time of day in milliseconds (0–86400000)
UTC time, hour (0–23)
UTC time, minute (0–59)
UTC time, seconds (0–59)
UTC time, milliseconds (0–999)
Date, day of the month (1–31)
Date, month (1–12)
Date, year (2000–2200)
Present value of single-pole shot counter
Present value of three-pole shot counter
Total number of 1st shot single-pole recloses
Total number of 2nd shot single-pole recloses
Total number of single-pole reclosing shots issued
Total number of 1st shot three-pole recloses
Total number of 2nd shot three-pole recloses
Total number of 3rd shot three-pole recloses
Total number of 4th shot three-pole recloses
Total number of three-pole reclosing shots issued
Location of most recent fault
Relay internal temperature (deg. C)
Event Summary Analog Inputs
Fault type (Table 4.15 and Table 4.16)
Fault targets (upper byte is 1st target row, lower byte is 2nd target row)
Fault targets (upper byte is 3rd target row, lower byte is 0)
Fault summary location
TW fault summary location
Terminal supply fault information
Fault current
Fault frequency (Hz)
Fault settings group
Fault time in DNP3 format (high, middle, and low 16 bits)
Recloser single-pole reclose count
Recloser three-pole reclose count
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
C.4.27
Table 4.11
Relay
DNP3 Reference Data Map (Sheet 6 of 6)
Object
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
Label
FUNR
FTWPMS
Description
Number of unread fault summaries
Traveling Wave arrival time in millisecond digits
Traveling Wave arrival time in microsecond digits
Traveling Wave arrival time in nanosecond digits
Analog Outputs
40, 41
40, 41
ACTGRP0
TECORR k
Active settings group
Time-error preload value
40, 41 RA001–RA256 Remote analogs f g i h j k c d e a b
The counters use 1 as default or per point Counter deadband setting for the actual counter deadband.
Convert the absolute value to force the counter to a positive value.
Default current scaling DECPLA on magnitudes and scale factor of 100 on angles. Dead band ANADBV on magnitudes and ANADBM on angles.
Default voltage scaling DECPLV on magnitudes and scale factor of 100 on angles. Dead band ANADBV on magnitudes and ANADBM on angles.
Default miscellaneous scaling DECPLM and dead band ANADBM.
Default scale factor of 100 and dead band ANADBM.
Default scale factor of 1 and dead band ANADBM.
The counters use 1 as default or per point Counter deadband setting for the actual counter deadband.
Convert the absolute value to force the counter to a positive value.
Event data shall be generated for all event summary analog inputs if any of them change beyond their dead band after scaling.
In milliseconds, –30000
time 30000. Relay Word bit PLDTE asserts for approximately 1.5 cycles after this value is written.
Device Attributes
(Object 0)
Binary Inputs
Binary Outputs
Table 4.10 includes the supported Object 0 device attributes and variations. In
response to Object 0 requests, the relay will send attributes that apply to that particular DNP3 session. Because the relay supports custom DNP3 maps, these values will likely be different for each session.
The relay uses its internal settings for the following variations:
➤
➤
➤
Variation 245—SID Global setting
Variation 246—DNPID port setting
Variation 247—RID Global setting
Binary inputs (Objects 1 and 2) are supported as defined by Table 4.10. The
default variation for both static and event inputs is 2. Only the Read function code (1) is allowed with these objects. The relay will respond to an Object 2,
Variation 3 request, but the response will contain no data.
The relay scans binary inputs approximately twice per second to generate
DNP3 change events. When time is reported with these event objects, it is the time at which the scanner observed the bit change. This may be significantly delayed from when the original source changed and should not be used for sequence-of-events determination. Binary inputs registered with SER are derived from the SER process and carry the time stamp of actual occurrence.
Some additional binary inputs are available to DNP3, most without SER time stamps. For example, RLYDIS is derived from the relay status variable,
STWARN and STFAIL are derived from the diagnostic task data, and
UNRDEV and NUNREV are derived from the event queue. Another binary input, STSET, is derived from the SER and carries the time stamp of actual occurrence.
Binary output status (Object 10, Variation 2) is supported as defined by
Table 4.10. Static reads of points RB01–RB32, OC CC, 89OC01–89OC10,
and 89CC01–89CC10 respond with the online bit set and the state of the
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.28
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
requested bit. Reads from control-only binary output points (such as the data reset controls RSTTRGT and RSTDNPE) respond with the online bit set and a state of 0.
The relay supports control relay output block objects (Object 12, Variation 1).
The control relays correspond to the remote bits and other functions as shown above. Each DNP control message contains a trip/close code (TRIP, CLOSE, or NUL) and an operation type (PULSE ON, LATCH ON, LATCH OFF, or
NUL). The trip/close code works with the operation type to produce set, clear, and pulse operations.
Control operations differ slightly for single-point controls compared to paired outputs. Paired outputs correspond to the complementary two-output model, and single-point controls follow the complementary latch or activation model.
In the complementary two-output model, paired points only support Close or trip operations, which, when issued, will pulse on the first or second point in the pair, respectively. Latch commands and pulse operations without a trip code are not supported. An operation in progress may be canceled by issuing a
NUL trip/close code with a NUL operation type. Single output points support
both pulse and latch operations. See Control Point Operation for details on
control operations.
The status field is used exactly as defined. All other fields are ignored. A pulse operation is asserted for a single processing interval. You should exercise caution if sending multiple remote bit pulses in a single message (i.e., point count > 1), since this may result in some of the pulse commands being ignored and the return of an already active status message. The relay will only honor the first ten points in an Object 12, Variation 1 request. Any additional points in the request will return the DNP3 status code
TOO_MANY_OBJS
.
The relay also supports pattern control blocks (Object 12, Variations 2 and 3) to control multiple binary output points. Variation 2 defines the control type
(trip/close, set/clear, or pulse) and the range of points to operate. Variation 3 provides a pattern mask that indicates which points in that range should be operated. Object 12, Variations 2 and 3 define the entire control command: the
DNP3 master must send both for a successful control. For example, the DNP3 master sends an Object 12, Variation 2 message to request a trip of the range of indices 0–7. The DNP3 master then sends an Object 12, Variation 3 message with a hexadecimal value of “BB” as the pattern mask (converted to binary notation: 10111011). Read right to left in increasing bit order, the pattern block control command will result in a TRIP of indexes 0, 1, 3 to 5, and 7.
Control Point Operation
Use the trip and close, latch on/off and pulse on operations with Object 12 control relay output block command messages to operate the points shown in
Table 4.12. Pulse operations provide a pulse with duration of one protection
processing interval. Cancel an operation in progress by issuing a NUL trip/ close code with a NUL operation type.
Table 4.12
Relay Object 12 Control Operations (Sheet 1 of 3)
Label Close/Any
RB01–RB32 Pulse Remote Bit
RB01–RB32
RBxx: RByy Pulse RByy
RB01–RB32
Trip/Any
Pulse Remote Bit
RB01–RB32
Pulse RBxx
RB01–RB32
NUL/Latch On
Set Remote Bit
RB01–RB32
Pulse RByy
NUL/Latch Off NUL/Pulse On
Clear Remote Bit
RB01–RB32
Pulse RBxx
Pulse Remote Bit
RB01–RB32
Pulse RByy
NUL/Pulse Off
Clear Remote Bit
RB01–RB32
Pulse RBxx
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
C.4.29
Table 4.12
Relay Object 12 Control Operations (Sheet 2 of 3)
Label Close/Any Trip/Any NUL/Latch On
OC1–OC2
CC1–CC2
OCx: CCx
89OC01–
89OC10
89CC01–
89CC10
89OCx:
89CCx
Open circuit breaker 1–2
(Pulse OC1–OC2)
Close circuit breaker 1–2
(Pulse CC1–CC2)
Close circuit breaker x (Pulse
CCx)
Pulse Disconnect open 89OC01–
89OC10
Pulse Disconnect close 89CC01–
89CC10
Pulse 89CCx, Disconnect Close bit
x = 01–10
RST_DEM Reset demand meter data
RST_PDM Reset peak demand meter data
Open circuit breaker 1–2 (Pulse
OC1–OC2
Close circuit breaker 1–2
(Pulse CC1–CC2)
Set OC1–OC2
Set CC1–CC2
Open circuit breaker x (Pulse
OCx)
Pulse Disconnect open 89OC01–
89OC10
Pulse Disconnect close 89CC01–
89CC10
Pulse 89OCx, Disconnect Open bit
x = 01–10
Pulse CCx
Set Disconnect open 89OC01–
89OC10
Set Disconnect close 89CC01–
89CC10
Pulse 89CCx
Reset demand meter data
Reset peak demand meter data
Reset demand meter data
Reset peak demand meter data
NUL/Latch Off NUL/Pulse On
Clear OC1–OC2 Open circuit breaker 1–2
(Pulse OC1–OC2)
Clear CC1–CC2 Close Circuit
Breaker 1–2
(Pulse CC1–CC2)
Pulse OCx Pulse CCx
Clear Disconnect open 89OC01–
89OC10
Clear Disconnect close 89CC01–
89CC10
Pulse 89OCx
No action
No action
Pulse Disconnect open 89OC01–
89OC10
Pulse Disconnect close 89CC01–
89CC10
Pulse 89CCx
RST_ENE
RSTMML
RST_HAL
RSTTRGT
Reset accumulated energy meter data
Reset min/max meter data for the line
RSTMMB1 Reset min/max meter data for
Breaker 1
RSTMMB2 Reset min/max meter data for
Breaker 2
RST_BK1
RST_BK2
Reset breaker
Monitor 1 data
Reset breaker
Monitor 2 data
Reset hardware alarm
Reset front-panel targets
Reset accumulated energy meter data
Reset min/max meter data for line
Reset min/max meter data for
Breaker 1
Reset min/max meter data for
Breaker 2
Reset breaker
Monitor 1 data
Reset breaker
Monitor 2 data
Reset hardware alarm
Reset front-panel targets
Reset accumulated energy meter data
Reset min/max meter data for the line
Reset min/max meter data for
Breaker 1
Reset min/max meter data for
Breaker 2
Reset breaker
Monitor 1 data
Reset breaker
Monitor 2 data
Reset hardware alarm
Reset front-panel targets
No action
No action
No action
No action
No action
No action
RST_BAT
RST_79C
Reset battery monitoring
Reset recloser shot counters
Reset breaker monitoring
Reset recloser shot counters
Reset battery monitoring
Reset recloser shot counters
No action
No action
RSTFLOC Reset fault location Reset fault location Reset fault location No action
No action
No action
NUL/Pulse Off
Clear OC1–OC2
Clear CC1–CC2
Pulse OCx
Clear Disconnect open 89OC01–
89CC10
Clear Disconnect close 89CC01–
89CC10
Pulse 89OCx
Reset demand meter data
Reset peak demand meter data
Reset accumulated energy meter data
Reset min/max meter data for the line
No Action
No Action
No Action
No Action
Reset min/max meter data for breaker 1
Reset min/max meter data for
Breaker 2
Reset breaker
Monitor 1 data
Reset breaker
Monitor 2 data
Reset battery monitoring
Reset recloser shot counters
Reset fault location (Pulse
RSSFLOC)
Reset hardware alarm
Reset front-panel targets
No Action
No Action
No Action
No Action
No Action
No Action
No Action
No Action
No Action
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.30
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
Table 4.12
Relay Object 12 Control Operations (Sheet 3 of 3)
Label Close/Any
RSTDNPE Reset DNP3 event summary
NXTEVE Load oldest relay event (FIFO)
Trip/Any
Reset DNP3 event summary
Load oldest relay event (FIFO)
NUL/Latch On
Reset DNP3 event summary
Load oldest relay event (FIFO)
NUL/Latch Off NUL/Pulse On NUL/Pulse Off
No action
Load newest relay event (LIFO)
Reset DNP3 event summary
Load oldest relay event (FIFO)
No Action
Load newest event summary event
(LIFO)
Analog Inputs
Reading Relay
Event Data
Analog inputs (Objects 30 and 32) are supported as defined by Table 4.10.
The default variation for both static and event inputs is defined by the AIVAR
(AIVARn for DNP3 LAN/WAN session n) setting. Only the Read function code (1) is allowed with these objects.
Unless otherwise indicated, analog values are reported in primary units.
Voltage magnitudes below 0.10 volts and current magnitudes below 5 percent of I
NOM
are forced to 0, as are their corresponding angles. Default scaling is
indicated in Table 4.11, but default scaling can be overridden by per-point
scaling in a custom DNP3 map. The DECPLA, DECPLV, and DECPLM settings are the default scaling factors (in powers of 10) for current magnitudes, voltage magnitudes, and miscellaneous magnitudes, respectively.
See Configurable Data Mapping for more information.
Default dead bands are also indicated in Table 4.11 and may be overridden by
per-point dead-band configuration. In general, the ANADBA, ANADBV, and
ANADBM settings are the default dead bands for current magnitudes, voltage magnitudes, and miscellaneous magnitudes, respectively. Dead bands are applied after any custom or default scaling factors. Events are generated when values exceed dead bands.
The relay provides protective relay event history information in one of two modes: single-event or multi-event access. The default mode is single event. A
DNP3 session will go to multiple-event mode if the session DNP3 master sends a control to the NXTEVE binary output control point. The DNP3 session will revert to the default mode after a power cycle or relay restart.
When a relay event occurs, (TRIP asserts, ER asserts, or TRI asserts) whose fault location is in the range of MINDIST to MAXDIST, the data shall be made available to DNP. If MINDIST is set to OFF, then there is no minimum.
Similarly, if MAXDIST is set to OFF, there is no maximum.
In either mode, DNP3 events for all event summary analog inputs (see
Table 4.11) will be generated if any of them change beyond their dead band
value after scaling (usually whenever a new relay event occurs and is loaded into the event summary analog inputs). Events are detected approximately twice a second by the scanning process.
See Table 4.13 and Table 4.14 for the components of the FTYPE analog input
point. The single bit asserted in the upper byte indicates the event cause
(trigger, trip, or ER element). The bit(s) asserted in the lower byte indicate which phase(s) were affected by the fault. If no bits are asserted in the upper byte, there is no valid fault summary loaded. If no bits are asserted in the lower byte, the affected phase could not be determined.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
C.4.31
Table 4.13
Object 30, 32, FTYPE Upper Byte-Event Cause
Bit Position
7 6 5 4 3 2
X
X
Event Cause
1 0
No fault summary loaded
X Trigger command
Trip element
Event report element
Table 4.14
Object 30, 32, FTYPE Lower Byte-Affected Phase(s)
Bit Position
7 6 5 4 3 2
X
X
Affected Phase
1 0
X
Indeterminate
X A-phase
B-phase
C-phase
Ground
Lower byte bits will be set according to the event’s affected phases. For example, a three-phase fault will set bits 0, 1, and 2, for a decimal value of 7.
If this event caused a trip, the upper byte would also have bit 2 set, for a total decimal value of 1031 (0407 in hexadecimal).
Single-Event Mode
Single-event mode provides the most recent tripping event. When a relay event occurs and FLOC is in range of MINDIST and MAXDIST, these data are copied to the DNP3 fault summary analog inputs, generating appropriate
DNP3 events. The relay shall then ignore any subsequent events for
EVELOCK (Global setting) time. When the EVELOCK setting is zero, single-event mode effectively acts as a zero-buffer FIFO queue. In this mode, relay events are presented to generate DNP3 events for the fault summary analog inputs as they occur. Fault summary analog inputs shall be reset to 0 on a rising edge of RSTDNPE (Global SEL
OGIC
equation result). The relay element EVELOCK shall be set when a relay event is triggered and reset when
EVELOCK time expires.
Multiple-Event Mode
Relay multiple-event summary data can be read in two ways: first in, first out
(FIFO); or last in, first out (LIFO).
See FIFO and LIFO below for procedures to retrieve relay events that occur
when FLOC is in range of MINDIST and MAXDIST. Event retrieval as shown below is a manual monitor, control, and poll process. A DNP3 master can collect relay event summaries using event data rather than the static data polling described below. For best results, the master must control the
NXTEVE binary output no faster than once every two seconds to load a new event into the event summary analog inputs. If the NXTEVE binary output is controlled at a faster rate, some DNP3 events may not be recognized and processed by the DNP3 event scanner.
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.32
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
NOTE:
The relay updates FTWPMS,
FTWPUS, and FTWPNS when TWFLINT and ER or TRIP asserts. FTWPMS,
FTWPUS, and FTWPNS are not updated for events that were generated with the TRIGGER command or if TWFLINT did not assert.
FIFO
Multiple-event FIFO mode shall be initiated if the DNP3 session master operates the NXTEVE (next event) control. The master should monitor the
UNRDEV binary input point, which will be asserted when there is an unread relay event summary. The NUNREV bit will also be asserted as long as there remain any unread events newer than the currently loaded event summary. To read the oldest unread relay event summary, the master should send a close, latch on, or pulse-on control to the NXTEVE binary output point. This will load the relay event summary analogs with information from the oldest relay event summary, discarding the values from the previous load.
After reading the analogs, the master should again check the UNRDEV binary input point, which will be on if there is another unread relay event summary.
The master should continue this process until the UNRDEV binary input point deasserts. If the master attempts to load values by controlling the NXTEVE output point when the UNRDEV binary input point is deasserted, the relay event type analog (FTYPE) will be loaded with zero. With the FIFO method, the relay event summaries will always be collected in chronological order.
LIFO
Multiple-event LIFO mode event summary retrieval is similar to FIFO retrieval, with the following difference: to read the newest unread relay event summary, the master should send a latch off control to the NXTEVE binary output point. As with FIFO retrieval, the master should monitor the UNRDEV binary input to determine if there are any unread events. Users must be aware of one caveat with LIFO retrieval: if an event occurs while in the process of reading the newest event(s) event collection will no longer continue in reverse chronological order. The next event read will be the newest event, and will proceed with the next newest, but any events that have already been read shall be skipped. The NUNREV bit will be asserted if this happens, signifying that the currently loaded event summary is no longer the newest event.
Traveling Wave Fault Location Analog Input (AI) Values
The traveling wave arrival time generally includes information such as date and time of day. For the traveling wave information in DNP format, the arrival time (in nanoseconds) consists of the following three 16-bit analog input (AI) values:
➤
➤
➤
Millisecond digits (FTWPMS)
Microseconds digits (FTWPUS)
Nanoseconds digits (FTWPNS)
Use Equation 1 and the FTWPMS, FTWPUS, and FTWPNS values from
Table 4.11 to calculate the traveling wave arrival time in nanoseconds.
Equation 4.1
You can use this local traveling wave arrival time together with the remote arrival time information to calculate the traveling wave fault location, as shown in Example 8.3 on page P.8.13.
If the event occurred close to the top of a second, it is possible that the time stamps from the two relays will reference two different seconds. In such a case, the nanosecond value is large in the one relay but small in the other relay.
To correct this, add one second to the small value and proceed with the calculation.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
C.4.33
Analog Outputs
Analog outputs (Objects 40 and 41) are supported as defined by Table 4.10.
The default variation for both static and event inputs is Variation 2. If an invalid value is written, the relay will ignore the value without generating an error.
The relay will only honor the first ten points in a request. Any additional points in the request will be ignored without generating an error.
Counters
Counters (Object 20 and 22) are supported as defined by Table 4.10. The
default variation for Object 20 is Variation 6, and Variation 2 is the default for
Object 22. Counters shall only support the Read function code (1). A Read of
Object 21 will receive a Null response. The default dead band is 0, which may be overridden by a per-point dead band in a custom map. Scaling for counters is always 1.
Default Data Map
Table 4.15 shows the relay default DNP3 data map. The default data map is an
automatically generated subset of the reference map. All data maps are initialized to the default values. If the default maps are not appropriate, you can also use the custom DNP mapping commands SET D n and SHOW D n, where n is the map number, to edit or create the map required for your application.
Table 4.15
Relay DNP3 Default Data Map (Sheet 1 of 6)
Object Default Index Label
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
0
3
4
1
2
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
21
22
RLYDIS
TRIPLED
STFAIL
STWARN
STSET
SALARM
HALARM
BADPASS
UNRDEV
SPO
3PO
BK1RS
BK2RS
BK1LO
BK2LO
52AA1
52AB1
52AC1
52AAL1
52BAL1
52CAL1
52AA2
52AB2
Description
Binary Inputs
Relay disabled
Trip LED
Relay diagnostic failure
Relay diagnostic warning
Settings change or relay restart
Software alarm
Hardware alarm
Invalid password attempt alarm
New relay event available
One or two poles open
All three poles open
Circuit Breaker 1 in ready state
Circuit Breaker 2 in ready state
Circuit Breaker 1 in lockout state
Circuit Breaker 2 in lockout state
Circuit Breaker 1, Pole A status
Circuit Breaker 1, Pole B status
Circuit Breaker 1, Pole C status
Circuit Breaker 1, Pole A alarm
Circuit Breaker 1, Pole B alarm
Circuit Breaker 1, Pole C alarm
Circuit Breaker 2, Pole A status
Circuit Breaker 2, Pole B status
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.34
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
Table 4.15
Relay DNP3 Default Data Map (Sheet 2 of 6)
Object
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
Default Index Label
50
51
52
53
45
46
47
48
49
42
43
44
38
39
40
41
58
59
60
61
54
55
56
57
62
63
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
26
27
28
29
23
24
25
TLED_12
TLED_13
TLED_14
TLED_15
TLED_16
LDATPFW
LDBTPFW
LDCTPFW
LD3TPFW
IN201
IN202
IN203
IN204
IN205
IN206
IN207
PSV01
PSV02
PSV03
PSV04
PSV05
PSV06
PSV07
PSV08
ASV001
ASV002
52AC2
52AAL2
52BAL2
52CAL2
TLED_1
TLED_2
TLED_3
TLED_4
TLED_5
TLED_6
TLED_7
TLED_8
TLED_9
TLED_10
TLED_11
Description
Circuit Breaker 2, Pole C status
Circuit Breaker 2, Pole A alarm
Circuit Breaker 2, Pole B alarm
Circuit Breaker 2, Pole C alarm
Front-panel target LED 1
Front-panel target LED 2
Front-panel target LED 3
Front-panel target LED 4
Front-panel target LED 5
Front-panel target LED 6
Front-panel target LED 7
Front-panel target LED 8
Front-panel target LED 9
Front-panel target LED 10
Front-panel target LED 11
Front-panel target LED 12
Front-panel target LED 13
Front-panel target LED 14
Front-panel target LED 15
Front-panel target LED 16
Leading true power factor A-phase Terminal W
Leading true power factor B-phase Terminal W
Leading true power factor C-phase Terminal W
Leading true power factor three-phase Terminal W
I/O Board 2 Input 1
I/O Board 2 Input 2
I/O Board 2 Input 3
I/O Board 2 Input 4
I/O Board 2 Input 5
I/O Board 2 Input 6
I/O Board 2 Input 7
Protection SEL
OGIC
Variable 1
Protection SEL
OGIC
Variable 2
Protection SEL
OGIC
Variable 3
Protection SEL
OGIC
Variable 4
Protection SEL
OGIC
Variable 5
Protection SEL
OGIC
Variable 6
Protection SEL
OGIC
Variable 7
Protection SEL
OGIC
Variable 8
Automation SEL
OGIC
Variable 1
Automation SEL
OGIC
Variable 2
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
Table 4.15
Relay DNP3 Default Data Map (Sheet 3 of 6)
Object
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
01, 02
Default Index Label
71
72
73
74
75
76
67
68
69
70
64
65
66
ASV003
ASV004
ASV005
ASV006
ASV007
ASV008
OUT201
OUT202
OUT203
OUT204
OUT205
OUT206
OUT207
51
52
53
54
47
48
49
50
55
56
57
43
44
45
46
39
40
41
42
35
36
37
38
0–31
32
33
34
RB01–RB32
OC1
CC1
OC2
CC2
89OC01
89CC01
89OC02
89CC02
89OC03
89CC03
89OC04
89CC04
89OC05
89CC05
89OC06
89CC06
89OC07
89CC07
89OC08
89CC08
89OC09
89CC09
89OC10
89CC10
RST_DEM
RST_PDM
Description
Automation SEL
OGIC
Variable 3
Automation SEL
OGIC
Variable 4
Automation SEL
OGIC
Variable 5
Automation SEL
OGIC
Variable 6
Automation SEL
OGIC
Variable 7
Automation SEL
OGIC
Variable 8
I/O Board 2 Output 1
I/O Board 2 Output 2
I/O Board 2 Output 3
I/O Board 2 Output 4
I/O Board 2 Output 5
I/O Board 2 Output 6
I/O Board 2 Output 7
Binary Outputs
Remote bits RB01–RB32
Pulse open Circuit Breaker 1 command
Pulse close Circuit Breaker 1 command
Pulse open Circuit Breaker 2 command
Pulse close Circuit Breaker 2 command
Open disconnect switch control 1
Close disconnect switch control 1
Open disconnect switch control 2
Close disconnect switch control 2
Open disconnect switch control 3
Close disconnect switch control 3
Open disconnect switch control 4
Close disconnect switch control 4
Open disconnect switch control 5
Close disconnect switch control 5
Open disconnect switch control 6
Close disconnect switch control 6
Open disconnect switch control 7
Close disconnect switch control 7
Open disconnect switch control 8
Close disconnect switch control 8
Open disconnect switch control 9
Close disconnect switch control 9
Open disconnect switch control 10
Close disconnect switch control 10
Reset demands
Reset demand peaks
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
C.4.35
SEL-411L Relay
C.4.36
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
Table 4.15
Relay DNP3 Default Data Map (Sheet 4 of 6)
Object
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
10, 12
20, 22
20, 22
20, 22
20, 22
20, 22
20, 22
20, 22
5
6
3
4
0
1
2
26
27, 28
29, 30
31, 32
33, 34
35, 36
37, 38
39
40
41
42
43
12, 13
14, 15
16, 17
18, 19
20, 21
22, 23
24
25
0, 1
2, 3
4, 5
6, 7
8, 9
10, 11
Default Index Label
61
62
63
58
59
60
Description
NVS2M
LIGM, LIGA
LI1M, LI1A
L3I2M, L3I2A
3V0M, 3V0A
V1M, V1A
3V2M, 3V2A
PA_F
PB_F
PC_F
3P_F
QA_F
RST_ENE
RST_BK1
RST_BK2
RSTTRGT
RSTMML
RSTDNPE
ACTGRP
BKR1OPA
BKR1OPB
BKR1OPC
BKR2OPA
BKR2OPB
BKR2OPC
LIAFM, LIAFA
LIBFM, LIBFA
LICFM, LICFA
B1IAFM, B1IAFA
B1IBFM, B1IBFA
B1ICFM, B1ICFA
B2IAFM, B2IAFA
B2IBFM, B2IBFA
B2ICFM, B2ICFA
VAFM, VAFA
VBFM, VBFA
VCFM, VCFA
VPM
NVS1M
Reset energies
Reset Breaker 1 monitor data
Reset Breaker 2 monitor data
Reset front-panel targets
Reset min/max metering data for the line
Reset (clear) DNP3 event summary analog inputs
Binary Counters
Active settings group
Number of breaker operations on Circuit Breaker 1 A-phase
Number of breaker operations on Circuit Breaker 1 B-phase
Number of breaker operations on Circuit Breaker 1 C-phase
Number of breaker operations on Circuit Breaker 2 A-phase
Number of breaker operations on Circuit Breaker 2 B-phase
Number of breaker operations on Circuit Breaker 2 C-phase
Analog Inputs
Line A-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Line B-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Line C-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Circuit Breaker 1 A-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Circuit Breaker 1 B-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Circuit Breaker 1 C-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Circuit Breaker 2 A-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Circuit Breaker 2 B-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Circuit Breaker 2 C-phase current magnitude (amps) and angle
Line A-phase voltage magnitude (kV) and angle
Line B-phase voltage magnitude (kV) and angle
Line C-phase voltage magnitude (kV) and angle
Polarizing voltage magnitude (volts)
Synchronizing voltage 1 magnitude (volts)
Synchronizing voltage 2 magnitude (volts)
Line zero-sequence current (3I0) magnitude in amps and angle
Line positive-sequence current magnitude (amps) and angle
Line negative-sequence current (3I2) magnitude in amps and angle
Zero-sequence voltage magnitude (3V0) in kV and angle
Positive-sequence voltage magnitude (V1) in kV and angle
Negative-sequence voltage magnitude (3V2) in kV and angle
A-phase real power in MW
B-phase real power in MW
C-phase real power in MW
Three-phase real power in MW
A-phase reactive power in MVAR
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
C.4.37
Table 4.15
Relay DNP3 Default Data Map (Sheet 5 of 6)
Object
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
89
90
91
92
86
87
88
Default Index Label
77
78
79
80–82
72
73
74
75
76
63
64
65
66
67–69
70
71
51
52
53
54, 55
56, 57
58, 59
60, 61
62
47
48
49
50
44
45
46
83–85
Description
IBD
ICD
3I2D
IGD
PAD, PBD, PCD
3PD
IAPKD
IBPKD
ICPKD
IGPKD
3I2PKD
PAPKD
PBPKD
PCPKD
3PPKD
B1BCWPA, B1BCWPB,
B1BCWPC
B2BCWPA, B2BCWPB,
B2BCWPC
FTYPE
FTAR1
FTAR2
FSLOC
FCURR
FFREQ
FGRP
QB_F
QC_F
3Q_F
DPFA
DPFB
DPFC
3DPF
B-phase reactive power in MVAR
C-phase reactive power in MVAR
Three-phase reactive power in MVAR
A-phase displacement power factor
B-phase displacement power factor
C-phase displacement power factor
Three-phase displacement power factor
DC1
DC2
DC Battery 1 voltage (V)
DC Battery 2 voltage (V)
FREQ Frequency (Hz)
MWHAIN, MWHAOUT A-phase total power in and out (MWh)
MWHBIN, MWHBOUT B-phase total power in and out (MWh)
MWHCIN, MWHCOUT C-phase total power in and out (MWh)
3MWHIN, 3MWHOUT Three-phase total power in and out (MWh)
IAD A-phase demand current (amps)
B-phase demand current (amps)
C-phase demand current (amps)
Demand negative-sequence current (amps)
Demand zero-sequence current (amps)
A-phase, B-phase, and C-phase demand power (MW)
Three-phase demand power (MW)
Peak A-phase demand current (amps)
Peak B-phase demand current (amps)
Peak C-phase demand current (amps)
Peak zero-sequence demand current (amps)
Peak negative-sequence demand current (amps)
A-phase peak demand power (MW)
B-phase peak demand power (MW)
C-phase peak demand power (MW)
Three-phase peak demand power (MW)
Circuit Breaker 1 contact wear percentage multiplied by 100
Circuit Breaker 2 contact wear percentage multiplied by 100
Fault type (Table 4.13 and Table 4.14)
Fault targets (upper byte is 1st target row, lower byte is 2nd target row)
Fault targets (upper byte is 3rd target row, lower byte is 0)
Fault summary location
Fault current
Fault frequency (Hz)
Fault settings group
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.38
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
Table 4.15
Relay DNP3 Default Data Map (Sheet 6 of 6)
Object
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30. 32
40, 41
Default Index Label
93–95
96
97
98
99
100
0
FTIMEUH, FTIMEUM,
FTIMEUL
FSHOT1
FSHOT2
FUNR
SHOT3_T
RLYTEMP
ACTGRP
Description
Fault time in DNP3 format, UTC base (high, middle, and low 16 bits)
Recloser single-pole reclose count
Recloser three-pole reclose count
Number of unread fault summaries
Total number of three-pole reclosing shots issued
Relay internal temperature (degrees C)
Analog Outputs
Active settings group
Configurable Data
Mapping
Table 4.16
Relay
DNP3 Map Settings (Sheet 1 of 2)
Name Description
DNPBID Default binary input map enable
DNPBOD Default binary output map enable
DNPCOD Default counters map enable
DNPAID Default analog input map enable
DNPAOD Default analog output map enable
MINDIST Minimum fault location to capture, pu
MAXDIST Maximum fault location to capture, pu
Row 1 a
First custom binary input map point
•
•
•
One of the most powerful features of the relay DNP3 implementation is the ability to remap DNP3 data and, for analog and counter inputs, specify perpoint scaling and dead bands. Remapping is the process of selecting data from the default or reference map and organizing it into a dataset optimized for your application. The relay uses point labels rather than point indexes in a reference map to streamline the remapping process. This enables you to quickly create a custom map without having to search for point indexes in a large reference map.
You may use any of the six available DNP3 maps with any DNP3 master. Each map is initially populated with default data points, as described in the Default
DNP3 Map. You may remap the points in a default map to create a custom map with up to:
➤
➤
➤
➤
➤
400 binary inputs
100 binary outputs
20 counters
200 analog inputs
100 analog outputs
Use the settings Class D to access the relay DNP3 map settings shown in
Table 4.16. There are five DNP maps available to customize, or leave as
default.
Range
Y, N
Y, N
Y, N
Y, N
Y, N
OFF, –10000.0–10000.0
OFF, –10000.0–10000.0
Binary input label or 0 or 1 (see Table 4.11).
Default
Y
OFF
OFF
Y
Y
Y
Y
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
C.4.39
Table 4.16
Relay
DNP3 Map Settings (Sheet 2 of 2)
Name
Description
Last custom binary input map point
First custom binary output point
Range
Binary input label or 0 or 1 (see Table 4.11).
Binary output label, pair, or NOOP (see Table 4.11).
•
•
•
Row 70
Last custom binary output point
First custom counter map point, custom counter dead band
Binary output label, pair, or NOOP (see Table 4.11).
Counter label from reference map or 0, 1–32767.
Dead band setting not available for label of 0.
•
•
•
Row 20
Last custom counter map point, custom counter dead band
Counter label from reference map or 0, 1–32767.
Dead band setting not available for label of 0.
First custom analog input map point, custom analog input scaling, custom analog input dead band
Analog input label from reference map,
0.001–1000.000, 1–32767
•
•
•
Last custom analog input map; custom analog input scaling custom analog input dead band
Analog input label from reference map,
0.001–1000.000, 1–32767
First custom analog output map point
Last custom analog output map point a
Free-form setting row hidden if corresponding default map is enabled.
Analog output label from reference map
Analog output label from reference map
Default
The settings shown in Table 4.16 that follow DNPAOD are entered in a line-
based free-form format. An example of these settings is shown in Figure 4.4.
You can program a custom scaling and dead band for each point where indicated. If you do not specify a custom scaling or dead band, the relay will use the default for the type of value you are mapping. For example, if you enter the label 3P_F in Row 1 of the custom analog map with no other parameters, the power in MW will be available as Objects 30 and 32, Index 0 and the relay will use the default scaling DECPLM and default dead band of
You can use the SHOW D x <Enter> command to view the DNP3 data map
settings, where x is the DNP3 map number from 1 to 6. See Figure 4.4 for an
example display of Map 1.
=>>SHO D 1 <Enter>
DNP 1
DNP Object Default Map Enables
DNPBID := N DNPBOD := N DNPCOD := N DNPAID := N
DNPAOD := N MINDIST := OFF MAXDIST := OFF
Binary Input Map
(Binary Input Label)
1: EN_RLY
2: TRIPLED
•
•
•
13: RB04
14: RB05
15: RB06
Binary Output Map
(Binary Output Label)
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.40
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
SEL-411L Relay
•
•
1: RB01
2: RB02
•
5: RB05
6: RB06
Counter Map
(Counter Label, Deadband)
1: ACTGRP
Analog Input Map
(Analog Input Label, Scale Factor, Deadband)
•
•
1: IAWFMC
2: IAWFAC
•
15: 3SWFC
16: VDC1
Analog Output Map
(Analog Output Label)
1: ACTGRP
Figure 4.4
Sample Response to SHO D Command
You can use the SET D x command (where x is the map number), to edit or create custom DNP3 data maps. You can also use the
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet, which is recommended for this purpose.
The following are valid entries if you choose to use the SET D command to create or edit custom maps:
➤
Binary Inputs: Any Relay Word Bit label or additional DNP3
binary input (see Binary Inputs), or the values 0 or 1.
➤
Binary Outputs: Any remote bit label or pair, breaker bit label
or pair, NOOP, or additional DNP3 binary output (see Binary
➤
Analog Inputs: Any analog input quantity (see Analog Inputs)
with scaling and/or dead band value, e.g., IAWFMC:0.1:50 (see below), or the value 0.
➤
Analog Outputs: Any analog output label (see Table 4.11), or
NOOP.
➤
Counter Inputs: Any counter label or the value 0 (see
For the custom map settings shown above, a label of 0 or 1 shall yield the label value when the point is polled. A NOOP can be used as a placeholder for binary or analog outputs-control of a point with this label does not change any relay values nor respond with an error message. Duplicate point labels are not allowed within a map, except for the values 0 or 1 or NOOP.
You can customize the DNP3 analog input map with per-point scaling and dead-band settings. Class scaling (DECPLAn, DECPLVn, and DECPLMn) and dead-band settings (ANADBAn, ANADBVn, and ANADBMn) are applied to indices that do not have per-point entries. Per-point scaling overrides any class scaling and dead-band settings. Unlike per-point scaling, class-level scaling is specified by an integer in the range 0–3 (inclusive), which indicates the number of decimal place shifts. In other words, you should select 0 to multiply by 1, 1 for 10, 2 for 100, or 3 for 1000.
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 Documentation
C.4.41
NOTE:
The settings above contain the DNP3 LAN/WAN session suffix n.
This suffix is not present in serial port
DNP3 settings.
Date Code 20151029
Scaling factors allow you to overcome the limitations imposed, by default, of the integer nature of Objects 30 and 32. For example, DNP3, by default, truncates a value of 11.4 A to 11 A. You may use scaling to include decimal point values by multiplying by a power of 10. For example, if you use 10 as a scaling factor, 11.4 A will be transmitted as 114. You must divide the value by
10 in the master to see the original value including one decimal place.
You can also use scaling to avoid overflowing the 16-bit maximum integer value of 32767. For example, if you have a value that can reach 157834, you cannot send it using DNP3 16-bit analog object variations. You could use a scaling factor of 0.1 so that the maximum value reported is 15783. You can then multiply the value by 10 in the master to see a value of 157830. You will lose some precision as the last digit is dropped in the scaling process, but you can transmit the scaled value using the default variations for DNP3 Objects 30 and 32.
If your DNP3 master has the capability to request floating-point analog input variations, the relay will support them. These floating point variations, 5 and 6 for Object 30 and 5–8 for Object 32, allow the transmission of 16- or 32-bit floating point values to DNP3 masters. When implemented, these variations eliminate the need for scaling and maintain the resolution of the relay analog values. Note that this support is greater than DNP3 Level 4 functionality, so you must confirm that your DNP3 master can work with these variations before you consider using unscaled analog values.
The following example describes how to create a custom DNP3 map by point type. The example demonstrates the SET D command for analog inputs.
Alternately, you can use the
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet software to simplify custom data map creation.
Consider a case where you want to set the analog input points in a map as
Table 4.17
Sample Custom DNP3 Analog Input Map
Point Index Description
4
5
2
3
0
1
6
7
Fundamental IA magnitude
Fundamental IB magnitude
Label
LIAFM
LIBFM
Fundamental IC magnitude
Fundamental IC magnitude
LICFM
LIAFM
Fundamental 3-phase power 3P_F
Fundamental A-phase magnitude VAFM
Fundamental A-phase angle
Frequency
VAFA
FREQ
Scaling
Default
Default
Default
Default
5
Default
1
0.01
Dead band
Default
Default
Default
Default
Default
Default
15
1
To set these points as part of custom map 1, you can use the SET D 1 TERSE
command as shown in Figure 4.5.
=>>SET D 1 TERSE <Enter>
DNP 1
DNP Object Default Map Enables
Use default DNP map for Binary Inputs (Y/N) DNPBID := Y ?<Enter>
Use default DNP map for Binary Outputs (Y/N) DNPBOD := Y ?<Enter>
Use default DNP map for Counters (Y/N) DNPCOD := Y ?<Enter>
Use default DNP map for Analog Inputs (Y/N) DNPAID := Y ?N <Enter>
Use default DNP map for Analog Outputs (Y/N) DNPAOD := Y ?<Enter>
Min Fault Location to Capture (OFF,-10000 - 10000) MINDIST := OFF ?
Max Fault Location to Capture (OFF,-10000 - 10000) MAXDIST := OFF ?
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.42
DNP3 Communications
DNP Serial Application Example
Analog Input Map
(Analog Input Label, Scale Factor, Deadband)
1:
? LIBFM <Enter>
2:
? LICFM <Enter>
3:
? LIAFM <Enter>
4:
? 3P_F,5 <Enter>
5:
? VAFM <Enter>
6:
? VAFA,1,15 <Enter>
7:
? FREQ,.01,1 <Enter>
8:
? END
Save settings (Y,N) ?Y <Enter>
Saving Settings, Please Wait...........
Settings Saved
Figure 4.5
Sample Custom DNP3 Analog Input Map Settings
DNP Serial Application Example
Application
This example uses a relay connected to an RTU over an EIA
-
485 network. The
RTU collects basic metering information from the relay. The network for this
example is shown in Figure 4.6.
RTU Network Switch
SEL-2030
To SCADA
Relay
Non-DNP IED
...
Non-DNP IED
Figure 4.6
DNP3 Application Network Diagram
The metering and status data that the RTU collects from the relay are listed in
Table 4.18
DNP3 Application Example Data Map (Sheet 1 of 2)
Label
EN
TRIPLED
IN201
IN202
IN203
IN204
SALARM
HALARM
TESTDB2
RB01
RB02
Object
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
10, 12
10, 12
Custom
Map Index
7
8
5
6
0
1
0
3
4
1
2
Description
Relay enabled
Circuit breaker tripped
Relay discrete Input 1
Relay discrete Input 2
Relay discrete Input 3
Relay discrete Input 4
Relay software alarm
Relay hardware alarm
Test mode enabled
Remote Bit 1
Remote Bit 2
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Settings
Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP Serial Application Example
C.4.43
Table 4.18
DNP3 Application Example Data Map (Sheet 2 of 2)
Label Object
Custom
Map Index
Description
RB03 10, 12 2 Remote Bit 3
RB04
RB05
10, 12
10, 12
3
4
Remote Bit 4
Remote Bit 5
RB06
VAFM c
VAFA
VBFM
VBFA
VCFM
VCFA
3P_F d
3Q_F
DC1 e
OC1:CC1
LIAFM a
LIAFA b
LIBFM
LIBFA
LICFM
LICFA
ACTGRP
10, 12
10, 12
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
30, 32
40
5
6
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
0
Remote Bit 6
Circuit Breaker 1 trip/close pair
IA magnitude
IA angle
IB magnitude
IB angle
IC magnitude
IC angle
VAY magnitude
VAY angle
VBY magnitude
VBY angle
VCY magnitude
VCY angle
Three-phase real power in MW
Three-phase reactive power in MVAR
DC1 voltage multiplied by 100
Active settings group b c a d e
Assume the largest expected current is 2000 A, scale the analog value by a factor of 10 to provide a resolution of 0.1 A and a maximum current of 3276.7 A. Report change events on a change of 5 A.
Angles are scaled to 1/100 of a degree. Report change events on a change of 2 degrees.
For a nominal voltage of 230 kV, scale the analog value by a factor of 100 to provide a resolution of 10 V and a maximum value of 327.67 kV. Report 1 kV for change event reporting.
For a maximum load of 800 MW (or 800 mVar), scale the power by a factor of 40 to provide a resolution of 0.025 MW, and a maximum value of 819.175 MW. Report 1 MW for change event reporting.
VDC1 is scaled by a factor of 1/100 of a volt. Report change events on a change of 2 V.
the existing maps. Press <Enter> at the line prompt to advance to the next map. For example, press <Enter> at line 10 of the Binary Input Map to advance to the Binary Output Map.
=>>SET D 1 TERSE <Enter>
DNP 1
DNP Object Default Map Enables
Use default DNP map for Binary Inputs (Y/N) DNPBID := Y ?N <Enter>
Use default DNP map for Binary Outputs (Y/N) DNPBOD := Y ?N <Enter>
Use default DNP map for Counters (Y/N) DNPCOD := Y ? <Enter>
Use default DNP map for Analog Inputs (Y/N) DNPAID := Y ?N <Enter>
Use default DNP map for Analog Outputs (Y/N) DNPAOD := Y ? <Enter>
Min Fault Location to Capture (OFF,-10000 - 10000) MINDIST := OFF ?
Max Fault Location to Capture (OFF,-10000 - 10000) MAXDIST := OFF ?
Binary Input Map
(Binary Input Label)
1:
? EN <Enter>
2:
? TRIPLED <Enter>
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.44
DNP3 Communications
DNP Serial Application Example
SEL-411L Relay
3:
? IN201 <Enter>
4:
? IN202 <Enter>
5:
? IN203 <Enter>
6:
? IN204 <Enter>
7:
? SALARM <Enter>
8:
? HALARM <Enter>
9:
? TESTDB2 <Enter>
10:
? <Enter>
Binary Output Map
(Binary Output Label)
1:
? RB01 <Enter>
2:
? RB02 <Enter>
3:
? RB03 <Enter>
4:
? RB04 <Enter>
5:
? RB05 <Enter>
6:
? RB06 <Enter>
7:
? OC1:CC1 <Enter>
8:
? <Enter>
Analog Input Map
(Analog Input Label, Scale Factor, Deadband)
1:
? LIAFM <Enter>
2:
? LIAFA,1,200 <Enter>
3:
? LIBFM <Enter>
4:
? LIBFA,1,200 <Enter>
5:
? LICFM <Enter>
6:
? LICFA,1,200 <Enter>
7:
? VAFM <Enter>
8:
? VAFA,1,200 <Enter>
9:
? VBFM <Enter>
10:
? VBFA,1,200 <Enter>
11:
? VCFM <Enter>
12:
? VCFA,1,200 <Enter>
13:
? 3P_F,40,40 <Enter>
14:
? 3Q_F,40,40 <Enter>
15:
? DC1,,200 <Enter>
16:
? <Enter>
Analog Output Map
(Analog Output Label)
1:
? ACTGRP <Enter>
2:
? <Enter>
Save settings (Y,N) ?Y <Enter>
Saving Settings, Please Wait...........
Settings Saved
=>>
Figure 4.7
Relay Example DNP Map Settings
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP Serial Application Example
C.4.45
Table 4.19 lists the settings for PORT 3 for this example. The physical
connection between the relay and the DNP3 master is an EIA-485 network.
An SEL-2884 interface converter on the relay PORT 3 provides conversion from EIA
-
232 to EIA
-
485. Unsolicited reporting has been disabled because the network is wired as a four-wire connection and does not provide carrier detection or the opportunity to monitor for data traffic on the network.
Table 4.19
Relay
Port 3 Example Settings (Sheet 1 of 2)
STIMEO
DRETRY
MINDLY
MAXDLY
PREDLY
PSTDLY
DNPCL
AIVAR
ANADBA
ANADBV
ANADBM
ETIMEO
Setting Name Setting
EPORT
MAXACC
PROTO
SPEED
PARITY
STOPBIT
TIMEOUT
TERTIM1
TERSTRN
TERTIM2
DNPADR
DNPID
DNPMAP
ECLASSB
ECLASSC
ECLASSA
ECLASSV
TIMERQ
DECPLA
DECPLV
DECPLM
Description
2
2
0.00
Y
2
50
100
100
10
10.0
OFF
0.05
0.10
0.025
1
1
I
OFF
1
Y
2
N
1
DNP
9600
Enable port
Maximum access level for virtual terminal sessions
DNP3 protocol
Data speed
No parity bit
1 stop bit
5
1
“\005”
0
Time-out virtual terminal session after 5 minutes
Check for termination after 1 second idle time
Virtual terminal termination string
No delay before accepting termination string
1
1
101 DNP3 address = 101
“RELAY1-DNP” DNP ID for Object 0 self-description
Use DNP Map 1
Event Class 1 for binary event data
Event Class 1 for counter event data
Event Class 1 for analog event data
Disable virtual terminal event data (this feature is not supported by the DNP3 master)
Ignore time-set request because IRIG-B is used for time synchronization
Scale current, multiplying by 10 to send amps and tenths of an amp. The relay would report a value of 10.4 as 104, which would remain unscaled at the master.
Scale voltage, multiplying by 100 to send kilovolts, tenths, and hundredths of a kilovolt.
Scale miscellaneous analog data, multiplying by 100 to send whole numbers and hundredths.
The relay would report a value of 5.25 as 525, which would remain unscaled at the master.
10 second select before operate time-out
Turn off data link retries
Minimum delay from DCD to TX
Maximum delay from DCD to TX
Settle time from RTS on to TX to allow EIA-485 transceiver to switch to transmit mode
Settle time from TX to RTS off; not required in this application
Enable controls for DNP3
Default AI variation
Analog reporting dead band for currents, 5 A based on DECPLA scaling factor
Analog reporting dead band for voltages, 1 kV based on DECPLV scaling factor
Miscellaneous analog value dead band, based on DECPLM scaling factor
Event message confirm time-out
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.46
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 LAN/WAN Application Example
Table 4.19
Relay
Port 3 Example Settings (Sheet 2 of 2)
Setting Name Setting
UNSOL
MODEM
N
N
Description
Unsolicited reporting disabled (data retrieval method is polled report-by-exception)
No modem connected to port
In this example, the polling method employed by the RTU DNP3 master is polled report-by-exception. The master device normally polls for events only.
Once every 25 event polls, the master polls for Class 0 data (status of all points). This polling method allows the master to collect data efficiently from the IEDs by not continuously polling and receiving data that are not changing.
DNP3 LAN/WAN Application Example
Application
This example uses a relay connected to an RTU over an Ethernet (TCP) network. The RTU collects basic metering information from the relay. The
network for this example is shown in Figure 4.6.
To SCADA RTU Network Switch
Relay
SEL-2030
Non-DNP IED
...
Non-DNP IED
Figure 4.8
DNP3 LAN/WAN Application Example Ethernet Network
The polling method employed by the RTU DNP3 master is polled report-byexception, so it normally only does event polls. Once every 25 event polls, the master polls for Class 0 data (status of all points). This polling method allows the master to collect data efficiently from the IEDs by only polling and receiving data that has changed.
The RTU, which will act as the DNP3 master to the relay outstation, has an IP address of 192.9.0.3 and a DNP3 address of 12. The relay should be assigned an IP address of 192.9.0.2, default router of 192.9.0.1, and DNP3 address of
101.
All event data (analog, binary, counter) should be assigned to CLASS 1.
All binary inputs should have SOE-quality timestamps.
The metering, status data and controls that the RTU will receive and/or send to
the relay are listed in Table 4.20.
The DNP3 data map is shown in Table 4.18.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 LAN/WAN Application Example
C.4.47
Settings
Use
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet software to enter the DNP3 protocol settings and new data map into the relay.
Table 4.20
DNP3 LAN/WAN Application Example Protocol Settings
Setting Name
EPORT
IPADDR
DEFRTR
EDNP
DNPADR
DNPPNUM
DNPID
DNPIP1
DNPTR1
DNPMAP1
CLASSB1
CLASSC1
CLASSA1
TIMERQ1
DECPLA1
DECPLV1
DECPLM1
STIMEO1
DNPINA1
DNPCL1
AIVAR1
ANADBA1
ANADBV1
ANADBM1
ETIMEO1
UNSOL1 a
Default value.
Setting Description
1.0
120
Y
2
200
200
200
2
N
Y Enable Ethernet port
192.9.0.2/16 Relay IP address and network in CIDR notation
192.9.0.1
Default router
1
101
20000 a
Enable DNP3 LAN/WAN Session 1
DNP3 address for relay is 101
DNP3 port number for TCP
RELAY1DNP DNP ID for Object 0 self-description
192.9.0.3
TCP
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
DNP Master (RTU) IP address
Use TCP transport
Use DNP Map 1 for DNP3 LAN/WAN Session 1
Binary event data = Class 1
Counter event data = Class 1
Analog event data = Class 1
Ignore time synch requests from DNP3 master
Scale analog current data, multiplying by 10 to send whole numbers and tenths. The relay would report a value of 5.25 as 525, which would remain unscaled at the master. (10
2
= 100)
Scale analog voltage data, multiplying by 10 to send whole numbers and tenths. The relay would report a value of 5.25 as 525, which would remain unscaled at the master. (10
2
= 100)
Scale analog miscellaneous data, multiplying by 10 to send whole numbers and tenths. The relay would report a value of 5.25 as 525, which would remain unscaled at the master. (10
2
= 100)
1.0 s to select before operate time-out
Wait 120 s to send inactive heartbeat
Allow DNP3 controls for this session
Default AI variation
Analog dead-band counts, set to 2 engineering units, based on DECPLA scaling factor
Analog dead-band counts, set to 2 engineering units, based on DECPLV scaling factor
Analog dead-band counts, set to 2 engineering units, based on DECPLM scaling factor
Event message confirm time-out (1–50 seconds)
Disable unsolicited reporting for Master 1
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.4.48
DNP3 Communications
DNP3 LAN/WAN Application Example
To meet the requirement for SOE-quality timestamps, enter all binary inputs
into the SER report. See Figure 4.9 for a screenshot of the process.
Figure 4.9
Add Binary Inputs to SER Point List
See Table 4.18 for the configuration of the DNP3 data map.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Section 5
C.Communications Manual
IEC 61850 Communications
Features
NOTE:
The relay supports one CID file, which should be transferred only if a change in the relay configuration is required. If an invalid CID file is transferred, the relay will no longer have a valid IEC 61850 configuration, and the protocol will stop operating.
To restart protocol operation, a valid
CID must be transferred to the relay.
The relay supports the following features using Ethernet and IEC 61850.
➤
SCADA—Connect up to seven simultaneous IEC 61850 MMS client sessions. The relay also supports up to seven buffered
and seven unbuffered report control blocks. See Table 5.15 for
logical node mapping that enables SCADA control (including
Setting Group Switch) via a manufacturing messaging specification (MMS) browser. Controls support the Direct
Normal Security and Enhanced Security (Direct or Select
Before Operate) control models.
➤
Peer-to-Peer Real-Time Status and Control—Use GOOSE with as many as 128 incoming (receive) and 8 outgoing
(transmit) messages. Virtual Bits (VB001–VB256) and Remote
Analogs (RA001–RA256) can be mapped from incoming
GOOSE messages. Remote Analog Outputs
(RAO001–RAO64) provide peer-to-peer real-time analog data transmission.
➤
➤
Configuration—Use FTP client software or
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect
®
SEL
-
5032 Software to transfer the Substation
Configuration Language (SCL) Configured IED Description
(CID) file to the relay.
Commissioning and Troubleshooting—Use software such as
MMS Object Explorer and AX
-
S4 MMS from Sisco, Inc., to browse the relay logical nodes and verify functionality.
This section presents the information you need to use the IEC 61850 features of the relay.
➤
➤
➤
➤
➤
Introduction to IEC 61850 on page C.5.2
IEC 61850 Operation on page C.5.3
IEC 61850 Configuration on page C.5.12
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement: SEL-400
➤
ACSI Conformance Statements on page C.5.46
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.2
IEC 61850 Communications
Introduction to IEC 61850
Introduction to IEC 61850
In the early 1990s, the Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) and the
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) began to define a
Utility Communications Architecture (UCA). They initially focused on inter-control center and substation-to-control center communications and produced the Inter-Control Center Communications Protocol (ICCP) specification. This specification, later adopted by the IEC as 60870
-
6 TASE.2, became the standard protocol for real-time exchange of data between databases.
In 1994, EPRI and IEEE began work on UCA 2.0 for Field Devices (simply referred to as UCA2). In 1997, they combined efforts with Technical
Committee 57 of the IEC to create a common international standard. Their joint efforts created the current IEC 61850 standard.
The IEC 61850 standard, a superset of UCA2, contains most of the UCA2 specification, plus additional functionality. The standard describes client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration, testing, and project standards.
The IEC 61850 standard consists of the parts listed in Table 5.1.
Table 5.1
IEC 61850 Document Set
IEC 61850 Sections
IEC 61850-1
IEC 61850-2
IEC 61850-3
IEC 61850-4
IEC 61850-5
IEC 61850-6
IEC 61850-7-1
IEC 61850-7-2
IEC 61850-7-3
IEC 61850-7-4
IEC 61850-8-1
IEC 61850-9-1
IEC 61850-9-2
IEC 61850-10
Definitions
Introduction and overview
Glossary
General requirements
System and project management
Communication requirements
Configuration description language for substation IEDs
Basic communication structure for substations and feeder equipment—Principles and models
Basic communication structure for substations and feeder equipment—Abstract communication service interface
(ACSI)
Basic communication structure for substations and feeder equipment—Common data classes
Basic communication structure for substations and feeder equipment—
Compatible logical node (LN) classes and data classes
SCSM—Mapping to Manufacturing
Messaging Specification (MMS)
(ISO/IEC 9506-1 and ISO/IEC 9506-2 over ISO/IEC 8802-3)
SCSM—Sampled values over serial multidrop point-to-point link
SCSM—Sampled values over ISO/IEC 8802-3
Conformance testing
The IEC 61850 document set, available directly from the IEC at http://www.iec.ch, contains information necessary for successful implementation of this protocol. SEL strongly recommends that anyone involved with the design, installation, configuration, or maintenance of
IEC 61850 systems be familiar with the appropriate sections of this standard.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
IEC 61850 Operation
C.5.3
IEC 61850 Operation
Ethernet Networking
IEC 61850 and Ethernet networking model options are available when ordering a new relay and may also be available as field upgrades to relays equipped with the Ethernet card. In addition to IEC 61850, the Ethernet card provides support protocols and data exchange, including FTP and Telnet, to
SEL devices. Access the relay Port 5 settings to configure all of the Ethernet settings, including IEC 61850 network settings.
The relay supports IEC 61850 services, including transport of logical node objects, over TCP/IP. The relay can coordinate a maximum of seven concurrent IEC 61850 MMS sessions.
Object Models
The IEC 61850 standard relies heavily on the Abstract Communication
Service Interface (ACSI) models to define a set of services and the responses to those services. In terms of network behavior, abstract modeling enables all
IEDs to act identically. These abstract models are used to create objects (data items) and services that exist independently of any underlying protocols.
These objects are in conformance with the common data class (CDC) specification IEC 61850
-
7
-
3, which describes the type and structure of each element within a logical node. CDCs for status, measurements, controllable analogs and statuses, and settings all have unique CDC attributes. Each CDC attribute belongs to a set of functional constraints that groups the attributes into specific categories such as status (ST), description (DC), and substituted value (SV). Functional constraints, CDCs, and CDC attributes are used as building blocks for defining logical nodes.
UCA2 used GOMSFE (Generic Object Models for Substation and Feeder
Equipment) to present data from station IEDs as a series of objects called models or bricks. The IEC working group has incorporated GOMSFE concepts into the standard, with some modifications to terminology; one change was the renaming of bricks to logical nodes. Each logical node represents a group of data (controls, status, measurements, etc.) associated with a particular function. For example, the MMXU logical node (polyphase measurement unit) contains measurement data and other points associated with three-phase metering including voltages and currents. Each IED may contain many functions such as protection, metering, and control. Multiple logical nodes represent the functions in multifunction devices.
Logical nodes can be organized into logical devices that are similar to directories on a computer disk. As represented in the IEC 61850 network, each physical device can contain many logical devices and each logical device can contain many logical nodes. Many relays, meters, and other IEC 61850 devices contain one primary logical device where all models are organized.
IEC 61850 devices are capable of self-description. You do not need to refer to the specifications for the logical nodes, measurements, and other components to request data from another IEC 61850 device. IEC 61850 clients can request and display a list and description of the data available in an IEC 61850 server device. This process is similar to the autoconfiguration process used within
SEL communications processors (SEL-2032 and SEL-2030). Simply run an
MMS browser to query devices on an IEC 61850 network and discover what data are available. Self-description also permits extensions to both standard and custom data models. Instead of having to look up data in a profile stored in its database, an IEC 61850 client can simply query an IEC 61850 device and receive a description of all logical devices, logical nodes, and available data.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.4
IEC 61850 Communications
IEC 61850 Operation
SEL-411L Relay
Data Mapping
MMS
Unlike other supervisory control and data acquisition protocols (SCADA) that present data as a list of addresses or indices, IEC 61850 presents data with
descriptors in a composite notation made up of components. Table 5.2 shows
how the A-phase current expressed as MMXU$A$phsA$cVal is broken down into its component parts.
Table 5.2
Example IEC 61850 Descriptor Components
Component
MMXU
A
PhsA
CVal
Logical Node
Data Object
Sub-Data Object
Data Attribute
Description
Polyphase measurement unit
Phase-to-ground amperes
A-phase
Complex value
Device data are mapped to IEC 61850 logical nodes (LN) according to rules defined by SEL. Refer to IEC 61850-5:2003(E) and IEC 61850-7-4:2003(E) for the mandatory content and usage of these LNs. The relay logical nodes are grouped under Logical Devices for organization based on function. See
Table 5.3 for descriptions of the logical devices in a relay. See Logical Nodes
for a description of the LNs that make up these logical devices.
Table 5.3
Relay Logical Devices
Logical Device
CFG
PRO
MET
CON
ANN
Description
Configuration elements—datasets and report control blocks
Protection elements—protection functions and breaker control
Metering or Measurement elements—currents, voltages, power, etc.
Control elements—remote bits
Annunciator elements—alarms, status values
Manufacturing messaging specification (MMS) provides services for the application-layer transfer of real-time data within a substation LAN. MMS was developed as a network independent data exchange protocol for industrial networks in the 1980s and standardized as ISO 9506.
In theory, you can map IEC 61850 to any protocol. However, it can become unwieldy and quite complicated to map objects and services to a protocol that only provides access to simple data points via registers or index numbers.
MMS supports complex named objects and flexible services that enable mapping to IEC 61850 in a straightforward manner. This was why the UCA users group used MMS for UCA from the start, and why the IEC chose to keep it for IEC 61850.
If MMS authentication is enabled, the device will authenticate each MMS association by requiring the client to provide the password authentication parameter with a value that is equal to the 2AC password of the SEL-411L.
➤
If the correct password authentication parameter value is not received, the device will return a not authenticated error code.
➤
If the correct password authentication parameter value is received, the device will provide a successful association response. The device will allow access to all supported MMS services for that association.
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
IEC 61850 Operation
C.5.5
Group Switch Via MMS
The Group Switch feature in IEC 61850 is primarily a convenience feature for users so that they can institute a settings group switch from an IEC 61850 client without having to revert to the command line or some other tool.
However, this has great potential for integration with IEC 61850 SCADA systems which would be able to control setting groups through IEC 61850
MMS.
The IEC 61850 specification outlines a method for switching the current settings group to another preconfigured settings group. The setting group control block, or SGCB, contains the SettingControl element which enables settings group control. An SEL 400-series CID file that supports group switch functionality will only contain one SGCB. The SGCB contains the number of settings groups in the relay and may also contain the current active setting group, ActSG. Note that if the CID file contains a value for ActSG, it will be ignored and the relay will use the actual active setting group value for ActSG at the time of CID file download.
When the relay’s IEC 61850 functions are enabled, the selectActiveSG service allows an MMS client to request that the relay change the active setting group.
The MMS client can request a group switch by writing a valid setting group number to ActSG. If the value written to ActSG is valid and not the current active group, no group switch is in progress, and the setting of the active group was successful, the relay will update ActSG. Note that if the value written to
ActSG is the same as the current group, the relay will not attempt to switch settings groups. Please refer to Multiple Setting Groups on page P.14.8 for more information on group settings.
GOOSE
The Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) object within
IEC 61850 is for high-speed control messaging. IEC 61850 GOOSE automatically broadcasts messages containing status, controls, and measured values onto the network for use by other devices. IEC 61850 GOOSE sends the message several times, increasing the likelihood that other devices receive the messages.
IEC 61850 GOOSE objects can quickly and conveniently transfer status, controls, and measured values between peers on an IEC 61850 network.
Configure SEL devices to respond to GOOSE messages from other network devices with
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect. Also, configure outgoing GOOSE messages for SEL devices in
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect. See the acSELerator
Architect instruction manual or online help for more information.
Each IEC 61850 GOOSE sender includes a text identification string (GOOSE
Control Block Reference) in each outgoing message and an Ethernet multicast group address. Devices that receive GOOSE messages use the text identification and multicast group to identify and filter incoming GOOSE messages.
Virtual bits (VB001–VB256) are control inputs that you can map to values from incoming GOOSE messages using the
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect
software. See the VBnnn bits in Table 5.15 for details on which logical nodes
and names are used for these bits. This information can be useful when searching through device data with MMS browsers. If you intend to use any relay Virtual bits for controls, you must create SEL
OGIC®
equations to define these operations. The relay is capable of receiving and sending analog values via peer-to-peer GOOSE messages. Remote Analogs (RA001–RA256) are analog inputs that you can map to values from incoming GOOSE messages.
Remote Analog Outputs (RAO01–RAO64) can be used to transmit analog values via GOOSE messages. You must create SEL
OGIC
control equations to assign internal relay values to RAO points in order to transmit them via GOOSE.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.6
IEC 61850 Communications
IEC 61850 Operation
File Services
SCL Files
Reports
The Ethernet file system allows reading or writing data as files. The file system supports FTP and MMS file transfer. The file system provides:
➤
➤
A means for the device to transfer data as files.
A hierarchal file structure for the device data.
The SEL-411L supports MMS file transfer with or without authentication.
Note that the MMS File Transfer service will still be supported even if the relay contains an invalid CID file. The service is intended to support:
➤
➤
➤
Settings file download and upload
CID file download and upload
Event report retrieval
The SEL-411L supports MMS File transfer with or without authentication.
The service is intended to support:
➤
➤
➤
Settings file download and upload
CID file download and upload
Event report retrieval (from the COMTRADE directory)
MMS File Services is enabled or disabled via Port 5 settings, EMMSFS.
Permissions for the 2AC level apply to MMS File Services requests. All files and directories that are available at the 2AC access level via any supported file transfer mechanism (FTP, file read/write, etc) are also available for transfer via MMS File Services.
Substation Configuration Language (SCL) is an XML-based configuration language used to support the exchange of database configuration data between different tools, which may come from different manufacturers. There are four types of SCL files:
➤
➤
➤
➤
IED Capability Description file (.ICD)
System Specification Description (.SSD) file
Substation Configuration Description file (.SCD)
Configured IED Description file (.CID)
The ICD file describes the capabilities of an IED, including information on
LN and GOOSE support. The SSD file describes the single-line diagram of the substation and the required LNs. The SCD file contains information on all
IEDs, communications configuration data, and a substation description. The
CID file, of which there may be several, describes a single instantiated IED within the project, and includes address information.
The relay supports buffered and unbuffered report control blocks in the report model as defined in IEC 61850-8-1:2004(E). The predefined reports shown in
Figure 5.1 are available by default via IEC 61850.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
IEC 61850 Operation
C.5.7
Date Code 20151029
Figure 5.1
Relay Predefined Reports
There are fourteen report control blocks (seven each of buffered and unbuffered reports). For each report control block, there can be just one client association, i.e., only one client can be associated to a report control block
(BRCB or URCB) at any given time. The number of reports (14) and the type of reports (buffered or unbuffered) cannot be changed. However, by using
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect, you can reallocate data within each report dataset to present different data attributes for each report beyond the predefined datasets.
For buffered reports, connected clients may edit the report parameters shown
Table 5.4
Buffered Report Control Block Client Access
RCB Attribute
User Changeable
(Report Disabled)
User Changeable
(Report Enabled)
Default Values
RptId
RptEna
Resv
OptFlds
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DSet07–DSet12
FALSE
FALSE segNum timeStamp
BufTm YES dataSet reasonCode confRev
250
TrgOp YES dchg qchg
IntgPd
GI
YES
YES a,b
0
0
PurgeBuf FALSE
EntryId YES 0 a b
Exhibits a pulse behavior. Write a one to issue the command. Once command is accepted will return to zero. Always read as zero.
When disabled, a GI will be processed and the report buffered if a buffer has been previously established. A buffer is established when the report is enabled for the first time.
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.8
IEC 61850 Communications
IEC 61850 Operation
Similarly, for unbuffered reports, connected clients may edit the report
parameters shown in Table 5.5.
Table 5.5
Unbuffered Report Control Block Client Access
RCB Attribute
User Changeable
(Report Disabled)
User Changeable
(Report Enabled)
Default Values
RptId
RptEna
Resv
OptFlds
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DSet07–DSet12
FALSE
FALSE segNum timeStamp dataSet reasonCode confRev
BufTm
TrgOps
YES
YES
250 dchg qchg
IntgPd YES 0
GI YES a
FALSE a
Exhibits a pulse behavior. Write a one to issue the command. Once command is accepted will return to zero. Always read as zero.
For buffered reports, only one client can enable the RptEna attribute of the
BRCB at a time resulting in a client association for that BRCB. Once enabled, the associated client has exclusive access to the BRCB until the connection is closed or the client disables the RptEna attribute. Once enabled, all unassociated clients have read only access to the BRCB.
For unbuffered reports, up to seven clients can enable the RptEna attribute of an URCB at a time resulting in multiple client associations for that URCB.
Once enabled, each client has independent access to a copy of that URCB.
The Resv attribute is writable, however, the relay does not support reservations. Writing any field of the URCB causes the client to obtain their own copy of the URCB-in essence, acquiring a reservation.
Reports are serviced at a 2 Hz rate. The client can set the IntgPd to any value with a resolution of 1 ms. However, the integrity report is only sent when the period has been detected as having expired. The report service rate of 2 Hz results in a report being sent within 500 ms of expiration of the IntgPd. The new IntgPd will begin at the time that the current report is serviced.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Datasets
IEC 61850 Communications
IEC 61850 Operation
C.5.9
The list of datasets in Figure 5.2 are the defaults for a relay device.
NOTE:
Do not edit the dataset names used in reports. Changing or deleting any of those dataset names will cause a failure in generating the corresponding report.
Supplemental
Software
Time Stamps and
Quality
Figure 5.2
Relay Datasets
Within
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect, IEC 61850 datasets have two main purposes:
➤
GOOSE: You can use predefined or edited datasets, or create new datasets for outgoing GOOSE transmission.
➤
Reports: Fourteen predefined datasets (DSet01–DSet14) correspond to the default seven buffered and seven unbuffered reports. Note that you cannot change the number (14) or type of reports (buffered or unbuffered) within
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect. However, you can alter the data attributes that a dataset contains and so define what data an IEC 61850 client receives with a report.
Examine the data structure and values of the supported IEC 61850 LNs with an MMS browser such as MMS Object Explorer and AX-S4 MMS from
Sisco, Inc.
The settings needed to browse the relay with an MMS browser are shown below.
OSI
-
PSEL (Presentation Selector)
OSI
-
SSEL (Session Selector)
OSI
-
TSEL (Transport Selector)
00000001
0001
0001
In addition to the various data values, the two attributes quality and t (time stamp) are available at any time. The time stamp is determined when data or quality change is detected. A change in the quality attribute can also be used to issue an internal event.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.10
IEC 61850 Communications
IEC 61850 Operation
The time stamp is applied to all data and quality attributes (Boolean, Bstrings,
Analogs, etc.) in the same fashion when a data or quality change is detected.
However, there is a difference in how the change is detected between the different attribute types. For points that are assigned as SER points, i.e., listed in the SER dataset, the change is detected as the receipt of an SER record
(which contains the SER time stamp) from the relay to the card. For all other
Booleans or Bstrings, the change is detected via the scanner, which compares the last state against the previous state to detect the change. For analogs, the scanner looks at the amount of change relative to the dead band configured for the point to indicate a change and apply the time stamp. In all cases, these timestamps are used for the reporting model.
LN data attributes listed in the SER will have SER timestamps of 1 ms accuracy for data change events. All other LN data attributes are scanned on a
1/2-second interval for data change and have 1/2-second timestamp accuracy.
The relay uses GOOSE quality attributes to indicate the quality of the data in its transmitted GOOSE messages. Under normal conditions, all attributes are
zero, indicating good quality data. Figure 5.3 shows the GOOSE quality
attributes available to devices that subscribe to GOOSE messages from relay datasets that contain them. Internal status indicators provide the information necessary for the device to set these attributes. For example, if the device becomes disabled, as shown via status indications (e.g., an internal self-test failure), the relay will set the Validity attribute to INVALID and the Failure attribute to TRUE. Note that the relay does not set any of the other quality attributes. These attributes will always indicate FALSE (0). See the
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect online help for additional information on GOOSE
Quality attributes.
SEL-411L Relay
GOOSE Processing
Figure 5.3
GOOSE Quality Attributes
SEL devices support GOOSE processing as defined by
IEC 61850-7-1:2003(E), IEC 61850-7-2:2003(E), and
IEC 61850-8-1:2004(E) via the installed Ethernet card.
Outgoing GOOSE messages are processed in accordance with the following constraints.
➤
The user can define up to eight outgoing GOOSE messages consisting of any data attribute (DA) from any logical node. A single DA can be mapped to one or more outgoing GOOSE, or one or more times within the same outgoing GOOSE. A user can also map a single GOOSE dataset to multiple GOOSE
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
NOTE:
Network Ports A and B connect the relay to the Process Bus, and only 87L and future Sampled
Value (SV) network traffic are transmitted and received on these ports. Network Ports C and D connect the relay to the Station Bus. IP-based network traffic and GOOSE network traffic are transmitted and received on these ports. Take care not to use the same VLAN tags for outgoing 87L and outgoing GOOSE data to avoid mixing
Process Bus traffic with Station Bus traffic. However, the VLAN IDs of incoming GOOSE data can be the same as outgoing 87L VLAN IDs.
IEC 61850 Communications
IEC 61850 Operation
C.5.11
➤
➤
➤
➤ control blocks. The number of unique Boolean variables is limited to a combined total of 512 digital bits across all eight outgoing messages.
High-speed GOOSE messaging (as defined under GOOSE
Performance) is available for GOOSE messages that contain
either all Digital Data or a combination of Digital Data and remote analog output (RAO01–RAO64) data.
The relay will transmit all configured GOOSE immediately upon successful initialization. If a GOOSE message is not retriggered, then following the initial transmission, the relay shall retransmit that GOOSE based on the min. Time and Max.
Time configured for that GOOSE message. The first transmission shall occur immediately upon triggering of an element within the GOOSE dataset. The second transmission shall occur Min. Time later. The third shall occur Min. Time after the second. The fourth shall occur twice Min. Time after the third. All subsequent transmissions shall occur at the Max
Time interval. For example, a message with a Min. Time of 4 ms and Max. Time of 1000 ms, will be transmitted upon triggering, then retransmitted at intervals of 4 ms, 4 ms, 8 ms, and then at 1000 ms indefinitely or until another change triggers a new GOOSE message (See IEC 61850-8-1, Sec.
18.1).
Each outgoing GOOSE includes communication parameters
(VLAN, Priority, and Multicast Address) and is transmitted entirely in a single network frame.
The relay will maintain the configuration of outgoing GOOSE through a power cycle and device reset.
Incoming GOOSE messages are processed in accordance with the following constraints.
➤
The user can configure the relay to subscribe to as many as 128 incoming GOOSE messages.
➤
➤
➤
Control bits in the relay get data from incoming GOOSE messages which are mapped to VBnnn bits.
The relay will recognize incoming GOOSE messages as valid based on the following content.
➢
➢
➢
➢
Source broadcast MAC address.
Dataset Reference
Application ID
GOOSE Control Reference
Any GOOSE message that fails these checks shall be rejected.
Every received and validated GOOSE message that indicates a data change, by an incremented status number, is evaluated as follows.
➢
Data within the received GOOSE dataset that are mapped to host data bits are identified.
➢
Mapped bits are compared against a local version of the available host data bits.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.12
IEC 61850 Communications
IEC 61850 Configuration
GOOSE Performance
➤
➢
If the state of the received bits is different than the local version,
➣
Update the local version with the new state for that bit;
➣
Pass the new state for the bit to the relay.
Reject all DA contained in an incoming GOOSE based on the accumulation of the following error indications created by inspection of the received GOOSE.
➢
Configuration Mismatch: The configuration number of the incoming GOOSE changes.
➢
Needs Commissioning: This Boolean parameter of the incoming GOOSE is true.
➢
Test Mode: This Boolean parameter of the incoming
GOOSE is true.
➢
Decode Error: The format of the incoming GOOSE is not as configured.
➤
The relay will discard incoming GOOSE under the following conditions.
➢
➢
After a permanent (latching) self-test failure
When EGSE is set to No
Link-layer priority tagging and virtual LAN is supported as described in
Annex C of IEC 61850-8-1:2004(E).
For outgoing high-speed data (as identified under GOOSE Processing),
transmission of GOOSE begins within 2 ms of transition of digital data within the relay. Note that you can include RAO points in outgoing GOOSE for high-speed transmission—only the transition of a digital point will trigger the
transmission within 2 ms. Please refer to Logical Nodes for data attributes that
can trigger high-speed GOOSE, if included in a dataset for outgoing GOOSE transmission. For all other data contained in outgoing GOOSE, transmission of GOOSE begins within 500 ms of transition of data within the relay.
Appropriate control commands are issued to the relay within 2 ms of a
GOOSE reception.
IEC 61850 Configuration
Settings
Table 5.6 lists IEC 61850 settings. These settings are only available if your
device includes the optional IEC 61850 protocol.
Table 5.6
IEC 61850 Settings
Label Description
E61850
EGSE a
IEC 61850 interface enable
Outgoing IEC 61850 GSE message enable
EMMSFS
Enable MMS File Services a
Settings EGSE and EMMSFS are hidden when E61850 is set to N.
Range
Y, N
Y, N
Y, N
Default
N
N
N
Configure all other IEC 61850 settings, including subscriptions to incoming
GOOSE messages, with
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect software.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
IEC 61850 Configuration
C.5.13
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect
The
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect software enables protection and integration engineers to design and commission IEC 61850 substations containing SEL IEDs.
Engineers can use
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect to perform the following configuration tasks.
➤
➤
➤
➤
Organize and configure all SEL IEDs in a substation project.
Configure incoming and outgoing GOOSE messages.
Edit and create GOOSE datasets.
Read non-SEL IED Capability Description (ICD) and
Configured IED Description (CID) files and determine the available IEC 61850 messaging options.
➤
➤
➤
Use or edit preconfigured datasets for reports.
Load device settings and IEC 61850 CID files into SEL IEDs.
Generate ICD files that will provide SEL IED descriptions to other manufacturers’ tools so they can use SEL GOOSE messages and reporting features.
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect provides a graphical user interface (GUI) for engineers to select, edit, and create IEC 61850 GOOSE messages important for substation protection, coordination, and control schemes. Typically, the engineer first places icons representing IEDs in a substation container, then edits the outgoing GOOSE messages or creates new ones for each IED. The engineer may also select incoming GOOSE messages for each IED to receive from any other IEDs in the domain.
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect has the capability to read other manufacturers’ ICD and CID files, enabling the engineer to map the data seamlessly into SEL IED logic. See the
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect online help for more information.
SEL ICD File Versions
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect version 1.1.69.0 and higher supports multiple ICD file versions for each IED in a project. Because relays with different Ethernet card firmware may require different CID file versions, this allows users to manage the CID files of all IEDs within a single project.
Ensure that you work with the appropriate version of
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect relative to your current configuration, existing project files, and ultimate goals. If you desire the best available IEC 61850 functionality for your SEL relay, obtain the latest version of
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect and select the appropriate ICD version(s) for your needs.
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect generates
CID files from ICD files so the ICD file version
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect uses also determines the CID file version generated.
As of this writing,
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect comes with several versions of the SEL-411L ICD file. Select the “411L - Standard R111 or higher” version file to take full advantage of the latest IEC 61850 features in the firmware.
ICD file descriptions in Architect indicate the minimum firmware versions required to use that particular file. Unless otherwise indicated, ICD files will work with firmware higher than the firmware in the description. but not with lower firmware versions.
The SEL-411L and SEL-411L-1 ICD files are listed below in order of release date.
➤
SEL-411L, SEL-411L-1 file version 004 (411L - Standard):
Initial release of the SEL-411L ICD file for firmware R101 or higher.
➤
SEL-411L, SEL-411L-1 file version 004 (411L KEMA
Conformant Standard, firmware R103 or higher): Same as the file above, with minor changes for KEMA conformance.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.14
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
➤
SEL-411L, SEL-411L-1 file version 004 (411L with additional
I/O, firmware R109 or higher): Same as the file above with support for an additional I/O board. Firmware R109 or higher is required.
➤
SEL-411L, SEL-411L-1 file version 005 (411L - Standard, firmware R111 or higher): As above, with support for 128 incoming GOOSE subscriptions, MMS authentication, and user-configurable GOOSE filtering.
SEL-411L Relay
Logical Nodes
Table 5.7–Table 5.11 show the logical nodes (LNs) supported in the relay and
the Relay Word bits or measured values mapped to those LNs.
Table 5.7 shows the LNs associated with protection elements, defined as
Logical Device PRO.
Table 5.7
Logical Device: PRO (Protection) (Sheet 1 of 10)
Data Source Logical Node Attribute
Functional Constraint = CO
BKR1CSWI1
BKR2CSWI2
DC1CSWI1
DC2CSWI2
DC3CSWI3
Pos.Oper.ctlVal
Pos.Oper.ctlVal
Pos.Oper.ctlVal
Pos.Oper.ctlVal
Pos.Oper.ctlVal
DC4CSWI4
DC5CSWI5
DC6CSWI6
DC7CSWI7
Pos.Oper.ctlVal
Pos.Oper.ctlVal
Pos.Oper.ctlVal
Pos.Oper.ctlVal
DC8CSWI8
DC9CSWI9
Pos.Oper.ctlVal
Pos.Oper.ctlVal
DC10CSWI10 Pos.Oper.ctlVal
Functional Constraint = MX
FLTRFLO1 a
A.nseq.instMag.f
A.phsA.instMag.f
A.phsB.instMag.f
A.phsC.instMag.f
A.res.instMag.f
FltDiskm.instMag.f
FltFrom.stVal
FltZ.instCVal.ang.f
FltZ.instCVal.mag.f
A.nseq.instMag.f
A.phsA.instMag.f
A.phsB.instMag.f
A.phsC.instMag.f
CC1:OC1
CC2:OC2
89CC01:89OC01
89CC02:89OC02
89CC03:89OC03
89CC04:89OC04
89CC05:89OC05
89CC06:89OC06
89CC07:89OC07
89CC08:89OC08
89CC09:89OC09
89CC10:89OC10
FLIA
FLIB
FLIC
FLIG
FLIQ
FLDIST
FLFROM
FLZANG
FLZMAG
FLIA
FLIB
FLIC
FLIG
Comment
Breaker 1 Controls
Breaker 2 Controls
ASCII Close Disconnect 2 Command
ASCII Close Disconnect 3 Command
ASCII Close Disconnect 4 Command
ASCII Close Disconnect 5 Command
ASCII Close Disconnect 6 Command
ASCII Close Disconnect 7 Command
ASCII Close Disconnect 8 Command
ASCII Close Disconnect 9 Command
ASCII Close Disconnect 10 Command
ASCII Close Disconnect 1 Command
Phase A fault current in primary amps
Phase B fault current in primary amps
Phase C fault current in primary amps
Ground fault current in primary amps
Negative-sequence fault current in primary amps
Distance-to-fault
Terminal supplying fault information
Impedance-to-fault, angle
Impedance-to-fault, magnitude
Phase A fault current in primary amps
Phase B fault current in primary amps
Phase C fault current in primary amps
Ground fault current in primary amps
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
C.5.15
Table 5.7
Logical Device: PRO (Protection) (Sheet 2 of 10)
Logical Node
Attribute
A.res.instMag.f
FltDiskm.instMag.f
FltZ.instCVal.ang.f
Data Source
FLIQ
FLTWDST
FLTWANG
FLTRFL02
FltZ.instCVal.mag.f
FltTWPNS.stVal
FLTWMAG
FLTWPNS
Functional Constraint = ST
BFR1RBRF1 c
OpIn.general
OpIn.phsA
OpIn.phsB
OpIn.phsC
BFR1RBRF1
BFR1RBRF1
BFR2RBRF2
BFR2RBRF2
BK1BXCBR2
BK1CXCBR3
BK1RSYN1
BK2BXCBR5
BK2CXCBR6
BK2RSYN2
BKR1CSWI1
BKR1CSWI1
BKR1CSWI1
BKR1PTRC2
BKR1PTRC2
BKR1PTRC2
BKR1PTRC2
BKR2CSWI2
BKR2CSWI2
BKR2CSWI2
BKR2PTRC3
BKR2PTRC3
BKR2PTRC3
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
OpIn.general
OpIn.phsA
OpIn.phsB
OpIn.phsC
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Pos.stVal
Pos.stVal
Pos.stVal
Rel.stVal
Pos.stVal
Pos.stVal
Pos.stVal
Rel.stVal
OpCls.general
OpOpn.general
Pos.stVal
Tr.general
Tr.phsA
Tr.phsB
Tr.phsC
OpCls.general
OpOpn.general
Pos.stVal
Tr.general
Tr.phsA
Tr.phsB
52ACL2?1:2
52BCL2?1:2
52CCL2?1:2
CSV22
CC1
OC1
52ACL1?1:2
CSV06
TPA1
TPB1
TPC1
CC2
OC2
52ACL2?1:2
CSV07
TPA2
TPB2
FBF1
FBFA1
FBFB1
FBFC1
CSV02 unknown
FBF2
FBFA2
FBFB2
FBFC2
CSV03 unknown
52ACL1?1:2
52BCL1?1:2
52CCL1?1:2
CSV21
Comment
Negative-sequence fault current in primary amps
Traveling Wave Fault Location
Impedance-to-fault angle using Traveling Wave fault location
Impedance-to-fault magnitude using Traveling Wave fault location
Traveling Wave peak time for fault, Nanosecond offset relative to the top of second
Circuit Breaker 1 circuit breaker failure
Circuit Breaker 1 A-phase circuit breaker failure
Circuit Breaker 1 B-phase circuit breaker failure
Circuit Breaker 1 C-phase circuit breaker failure
BFI3P1 OR BFIA1 OR BFIB1 OR BFIC1
Direction unknown because of settings
Circuit Breaker 2 circuit breaker failure
Circuit Breaker 2 A-phase circuit breaker failure
Circuit Breaker 2 B-phase circuit breaker failure
Circuit Breaker 2 C-phase circuit breaker failure
BFI3P2 OR BFIA2 OR BFIB2 OR BFIC2
Direction unknown because of settings
Circuit Breaker 1, Pole A closed
Circuit Breaker 1, Pole B closed
Circuit Breaker 1, Pole C closed
25A1BK1 OR 25A2BK1
Circuit Breaker 2, Pole A closed
Circuit Breaker 2, Pole B closed
Circuit Breaker 2, Pole C closed
25A1BK2 OR 25A2BK2
Circuit Breaker 1 close command
Circuit Breaker 1 open command
Circuit Breaker 1, Pole A closed
TPA1 OR TPB1 OR TPC1
Circuit Breaker 1 Trip A
Circuit Breaker 1 Trip B
Circuit Breaker 1 Trip C
Circuit Breaker 2 close command
Circuit Breaker 2 open command
Circuit Breaker 2, Pole A closed
TPA2 OR TPB2 OR TPC2
Circuit Breaker 2 Trip A
Circuit Breaker 2 Trip B
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.16
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
Table 5.7
Logical Device: PRO (Protection) (Sheet 3 of 10)
D81PTOF4
D81PTOF4
D81PTOF5
D81PTOF5
D81PTOF6
D81PTOF6
D81PTUF1
D81PTUF1
D81PTUF1
D81PTUF1
D81PTUF2
D81PTUF2
D81PTUF2
D81PTUF2
D81PTUF3
D81PTUF3
D81PTUF3
D81PTUF3
D81PTUF4
D81PTUF4
D81PTUF4
D81PTUF4
Logical Node
BKR2PTRC3
D81PTOF1
D81PTOF1
D81PTOF2
D81PTOF2
D81PTOF3
D81PTOF3
Attribute
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
BlkV.stVal
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
BlkV.stVal
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
BlkV.stVal
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
BlkV.stVal
Op.general
Tr.phsC
BlkV.stVal
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
BlkV.stVal
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
BlkV.stVal
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
BlkV.stVal
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
BlkV.stVal
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
BlkV.stVal
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Data Source
CSV14 unknown
27B81
81D1T
CSV15 unknown
27B81
81D2T
CSV12 unknown
27B81
81D5T
CSV13 unknown
27B81
81D6T
CSV16 unknown
27B81
81D3T
CSV17 unknown
27B81
81D4T
CSV18 unknown
TPC2
27B81
81D1T
CSV09 unknown
27B81
81D2T
CSV10 unknown
27B81
81D3T
CSV11 unknown
27B81
81D4T
Comment
Circuit Breaker 2 Trip C
Undervoltage Supervision for Frequency Elements
Level 1 Definite-time Frequency Element delay
81D1OVR AND 81D1
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Supervision for Frequency Elements
Level 2 Definite-time Frequency Element delay
81D2OVR AND 81D2
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Supervision for Frequency Elements
Level 3 Definite-time Frequency Element delay
81D3OVR AND 81D3
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Supervision for Frequency Elements
Level 4 Definite-time Frequency Element delay
81D4OVR AND 81D4
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Supervision for Frequency Elements
Level 5 Definite-time Frequency Element delay
81D5OVR AND 81D5
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Supervision for Frequency Elements
Level 6 Definite-time Frequency Element delay
81D6OVR AND 81D6
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Supervision for Frequency Elements
Level 1 Definite-time Frequency Element delay
81D1UDR AND 81D1
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Supervision for Frequency Elements
Level 2 Definite-time Frequency Element delay
81D2UDR AND 81D2
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Supervision for Frequency Elements
Level 3 Definite-time Frequency Element delay
81D3UDR AND 81D3
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Supervision for Frequency Elements
Level 4 Definite-time Frequency Element delay
81D4UDR AND 81D4
Direction unknown due to settings
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
C.5.17
Table 5.7
Logical Device: PRO (Protection) (Sheet 4 of 10)
Logical Node
D81PTUF5
D81PTUF5
D81PTUF5
D81PTUF5
D81PTUF6
D81PTUF6
D81PTUF6
D81PTUF6
D87LPDIF1
D87LPDIF1
D87LPDIF1
D87LPDIF1
D87LPDIF1
D87LPDIF1
Attribute
OpOpn.general
Pos.stVal
OpCls.general
OpOpn.general
Pos.stVal
OpCls.general
OpOpn.general
Pos.stVal
OpCls.general
OpOpn.general
Pos.stVal
OpCls.general
OpOpn.general
Pos.stVal
OpCls.general
OpOpn.general
BlkV.stVal
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
BlkV.stVal
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.phsA
Op.phsB
Op.phsC
Op.res
Op.neg
Op.general
OpCls.general
Pos.stVal
OpCls.general
OpOpn.general
Pos.stVal
OpCls.general
OpOpn.general
Pos.stVal
OpCls.general
OpOpn.general
Pos.stVal
Data Source Comment
27B81
81D5T
CSV19 unknown
27B81
81D6T
CSV20 unknown
87LA
87LB
87LC
87LG
87LQ
87OP
89CC01
Undervoltage Supervision for Frequency Elements
Level 5 Definite-time Frequency Element delay
81D5UDR AND 81D5
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Supervision for Frequency Elements
Level 6 Definite-time Frequency Element delay
81D6UDR AND 81D6
Direction unknown due to settings
A-Phase 87L phase element operated
B-Phase 87L phase element operated
C-Phase 87L phase element operated
87L zero-sequence element operated
87L negative-sequence element operated
87LA OR 87LB OR 87LC OR 87LG OR 87LQ
ASCII Close Disconnect 1 Command
89OC01 ASCII Open Disconnect 1 Command
89CL01|89OPN01?0:1:2:3 Disconnect 1 Closed
89CC02
89OC02
ASCII Close Disconnect 2 Command
ASCII Open Disconnect 2 Command
89CL02|89OPN02?0:1:2:3 Disconnect 2 Closed
89CC03 ASCII Close Disconnect 3 Command
89OC03 ASCII Open Disconnect 3 Command
89CL03|89OPN03?0:1:2:3 Disconnect 3 Closed
89CC04
89OC04
ASCII Close Disconnect 4 Command
ASCII Open Disconnect 4 Command
89CL04|89OPN04?0:1:2:3 Disconnect 4 Closed
89CC05 ASCII Close Disconnect 5 Command
89OC05 ASCII Open Disconnect 5 Command
89CL05|89OPN05?0:1:2:3 Disconnect 5 Closed
89CC06
89OC06
ASCII Close Disconnect 6 Command
ASCII Open Disconnect 6 Command
89CL06|89OPN06?0:1:2:3 Disconnect 6 Closed
89CC07 ASCII Close Disconnect 7 Command
89OC07 ASCII Open Disconnect 7 Command
89CL07|89OPN07?0:1:2:3 Disconnect 7 Closed
89CC08
89OC08
ASCII Close Disconnect 8 Command
ASCII Open Disconnect 8 Command
89CL08|89OPN08?0:1:2:3 Disconnect 8 Closed
89CC09 ASCII Close Disconnect 9 Command
89OC09 ASCII Open Disconnect 9 Command
89CL09|89OPN09?0:1:2:3 Disconnect 9 Closed
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.18
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
Table 5.7
Logical Device: PRO (Protection) (Sheet 5 of 10)
DCUBPSCH3
DCUBPSCH3
F32GRDIR1
F32GRDIR1
F32PRDIR5
F32PRDIR5
F32QRDIR3
F32QRDIR3
FLTRDRE1
FLTRDRE1
FLTRFLO1 d
G1PIOC2
G1PTOC2
G2PIOC5
G2PTOC5
G3PIOC8
G3PTOC8
G4PTOC11
G4PTOC11
Logical Node
DC10CSWI10
DCBPSCH2
DCBPSCH2
DCBPSCH2
DCUBPSCH3
DCUBPSCH3
DCUBPSCH3
DCUBPSCH3
DCUBPSCH3
DCUBPSCH3
Attribute
Str.general
WeiOp.general
Dir.dirGeneral
Dir.general
Dir.dirGeneral
Dir.general
Dir.dirGeneral
Dir.general
FltNum.stVal
RcdMade.stVal
FltFrom.stVal
Op.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
OpCls.general
OpOpn.general
Pos.stVal
Op.general
ProRx.stVal
ProTx.stVal
RvABlk.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Echo.general
Op.general
ProRx.stVal
ProTx.stVal
RvABlk.general
Str.dirGeneral
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Data Source Comment
unknown
ECTT
32GF forward
F32P forward
F32Q forward
FLRNUM
FLREP
FLFROM
50G1
67G1T
67G1 unknown
50G2
67G2T
67G2 unknown
50G3
67G3T
67G3 unknown
50G4
67G4T
67G4
89CC10
89OC10
ASCII Close Disconnect 10 Command
ASCII Open Disconnect 10 Command
89CL10|89OPN10?0:1:2:3 Disconnect 10 Closed
RXPRM
BTX
CSV01
Z3RB
Receiver trip permission
Block extension picked up
DSTRT OR NSTRT
Current reversal guard asserted
CSV01 unknown
EKEY
RXPRM
PTRX
KEY
Z3RB
KEY
DSTRT OR NSTRT
Direction unknown due to settings
Echo received permissive trip signal
Receiver trip permission
Permissive trip received Channel 1 and Channel 2
Transmit permissive trip signal
Current reversal guard asserted
Transmit permissive trip signal
Direction unknown due to settings
Echo conversion to trip signal
Forward ground directional element
Always forward
Forward phase directional declaration
Always forward
Forward negative-sequence phase directional declaration
Always forward
Event Number
Event Report present
Terminal supplying fault information
Level 1 residual overcurrent element
Level 1 residual delayed directional overcurrent element
Level 1 residual directional overcurrent element
Direction unknown due to settings
Level 2 residual overcurrent element
Level 2 residual delayed directional overcurrent element
Level 2 residual directional overcurrent element
Direction unknown due to settings
Level 3 residual overcurrent element
Level 3 residual delayed directional overcurrent element
Level 3 residual directional overcurrent element
Direction unknown due to settings
Level 4 residual overcurrent element
Level 4 residual delayed directional overcurrent element
Level 4 residual directional overcurrent element
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
C.5.19
Table 5.7
Logical Device: PRO (Protection) (Sheet 6 of 10)
Logical Node
O5P1PTOV5
O5P2PTOV5
O5P2PTOV5
O5P2PTOV5
O6P1PTOV6
O6P1PTOV6
O6P1PTOV6
O6P2PTOV6
O6P2PTOV6
O6P2PTOV6
OSB1RPSB2
OSB1RPSB2
O3P1PTOV3
O3P2PTOV3
O3P2PTOV3
O3P2PTOV3
O4P1PTOV4
O4P1PTOV4
O4P1PTOV4
O4P2PTOV4
O4P2PTOV4
O4P2PTOV4
O5P1PTOV5
O5P1PTOV5
OSB1RPSB2
OSB2RPSB3
G4PTOC11
O1P1PTOV1
O1P1PTOV1
O1P1PTOV1
O1P2PTOV1
O1P2PTOV1
O1P2PTOV1
O2P1PTOV2
O2P1PTOV2
O2P1PTOV2
O2P2PTOV2
O2P2PTOV2
O2P2PTOV2
O3P1PTOV3
O3P1PTOV3
Attribute
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
BlkZn.stVal
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
BlkZn.stVal
Data Source
594P2 unknown
595P1T
595P1 unknown
595P2
595P2 unknown unknown
593P2
593P2 unknown
594P1T
594P1 unknown
594P2
596P1T
596P1 unknown
596P2
596P2 unknown
OSB1
OSB unknown
OSB2 unknown
591P1T
591P1 unknown
591P2
591P2 unknown
592P1T
592P1 unknown
592P2
592P2 unknown
593P1T
593P1
Comment
Direction unknown due to settings
Overvoltage Element 1 Level 1 timed out
Overvoltage Element 1, Level 1 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Overvoltage Element 1, Level 2 picked up
Overvoltage Element 1, Level 2 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Overvoltage Element 2 Level 1 timed out
Overvoltage Element 2, Level 1 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Overvoltage Element 2, Level 2 picked up
Overvoltage Element 2, Level 2 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Overvoltage Element 3 Level 1 timed out
Overvoltage Element 3, Level 1 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Overvoltage Element 3, Level 2 picked up
Overvoltage Element 3, Level 2 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Overvoltage Element 4 Level 1 timed out
Overvoltage Element 4, Level 1 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Overvoltage Element 4, Level 2 picked up
Overvoltage Element 4, Level 2 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Overvoltage Element 5 Level 1 timed out
Overvoltage Element 5, Level 1 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Overvoltage Element 5, Level 2 picked up
Overvoltage Element 5, Level 2 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Overvoltage Element 6 Level 1 timed out
Overvoltage Element 6, Level 1 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Overvoltage Element 6, Level 2 picked up
Overvoltage Element 6, Level 2 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Block Zone 1 during an out-of-step condition
Out-of-step block
Direction unknown due to settings
Block Zone 2 during an out-of-step condition
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.20
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
Table 5.7
Logical Device: PRO (Protection) (Sheet 7 of 10)
P1PTOC1
P2PIOC4
P2PTOC4
P3PIOC7
P3PTOC7
P4PTOC10
P4PTOC10
P4PTOC10
POTTPSCH1
POTTPSCH1
POTTPSCH1
POTTPSCH1
POTTPSCH1
POTTPSCH1
POTTPSCH1
POTTPSCH1
Q1PIOC3
Logical Node
OSB2RPSB3
OSB2RPSB3
OSB3RPSB4
OSB3RPSB4
OSB3RPSB4
OSB4RPSB5
OSB4RPSB5
OSB4RPSB5
OSB5RPSB6
OSB5RPSB6
OSB5RPSB6
OSTRPSB1
P1PIOC1
Attribute
Str.general
Op.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Echo.general
Op.general
ProRx.stVal
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
BlkZn.stVal
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
BlkZn.stVal
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
BlkZn.stVal
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Op.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
ProTx.stVal
RvABlk.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
WeiOp.general
Op.general
Op.general
Data Source
unknown
50P4
67P4T
67P4 unknown
EKEY
RXPRM
PTRX unknown
50P2
67P2T
67P2 unknown
50P3
67P3T
67P3
OSB unknown
OSB3
OSB unknown
OSB4
OSB unknown
OSB5
OSB unknown
OST
50P1
67P1T
67P1
KEY
Z3RB
KEY unknown
ECTT
50Q1
67Q1T
Q1PTOC3
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
67Q1 unknown
Comment
Out-of-step block
Direction unknown due to settings
Block Zone 3 during an out-of-step condition
Out-of-step block
Direction unknown due to settings
Block Zone 4 during an out-of-step condition
Out-of-step block
Direction unknown due to settings
Block Zone 5 during an out-of-step condition
Out-of-step block
Direction unknown due to settings
Out-of-step tripping
Level 1 phase overcurrent element
Level 1 phase-delayed directional overcurrent element
Level 1 phase directional overcurrent element
Direction unknown due to settings
Level 2 phase overcurrent element
Level 2 phase-delayed directional overcurrent element
Level 2 phase directional overcurrent element
Direction unknown due to settings
Level 3 phase overcurrent element
Level 3 phase-delayed directional overcurrent element
Level 3 phase directional overcurrent element
Direction unknown due to settings
Level 4 phase overcurrent element
Level 4 phase-delayed directional overcurrent element
Level 4 phase directional overcurrent element
Direction unknown due to settings
Echo received permissive trip signal
Receiver trip permission
Permissive trip received Channel 1 and Channel 2
Transmit permissive trip signal
Current reversal guard asserted
Transmit permissive trip signal
Direction unknown due to settings
Echo conversion to trip signal
Level 1 negative-sequence overcurrent element
Level 1 negative-sequence delayed directional overcurrent element
Level 1 negative-sequence directional overcurrent element
Direction unknown due to settings
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
C.5.21
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Dir.dirGeneral
Dir.general
Dir.dirGeneral
Dir.general
Dir.dirGeneral
Dir.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Table 5.7
Logical Device: PRO (Protection) (Sheet 8 of 10)
Logical Node
Q2PIOC6
Attribute
Op.general
Op.general
Data Source
50Q2
67Q2T
Q2PTOC6
Q3PIOC9
Q3PTOC9
Q4PTOC12
S1PTOC1
S2PTOC2
S3PTOC3
S4PTOC4
S5PTOC5
S6PTOC6
Q4PTOC12
Q4PTOC12
R32GRDIR2
R32PRDIR6
R32QRDIR4
S10PTOC10
S10PTOC10
S10PTOC10
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Op.general
67Q2 unknown
50Q3
67Q3T
67Q3 unknown
50Q4
67Q4T
51S04 unknown
51T05
51S05 unknown
51T06
51S06 unknown unknown
51T02
51S02 unknown
51T03
51S03 unknown
51T04
67Q4 unknown
32GR backward backward
R32P backward
R32Q
51T10
51S10 unknown
51T01
51S01
Comment
Level 2 negative-sequence overcurrent element
Level 2 negative-sequence delayed directional overcurrent element
Level 2 negative-sequence directional overcurrent element
Direction unknown due to settings
Level 3 negative-sequence overcurrent element
Level 3 negative-sequence delayed directional overcurrent element
Level 3 negative-sequence directional overcurrent element
Direction unknown due to settings
Level 4 negative-sequence overcurrent element
Level 4 negative-sequence delayed directional overcurrent element
Level 4 negative-sequence directional overcurrent element
Direction unknown due to settings
Reverse ground directional element
Reverse
Reverse
Reverse phase directional declaration
Reverse
Reverse negative-sequence phase directional declaration
Inverse-time element 10 timed out
Inverse-time element 10 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Inverse-time element 01 timed out
Inverse-time element 01 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Inverse-time element 02 timed out
Inverse-time element 02 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Inverse-time element 03 timed out
Inverse-time element 03 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Inverse-time element 04 timed out
Inverse-time element 04 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Inverse-time element 05 timed out
Inverse-time element 05 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Inverse-time element 06 timed out
Inverse-time element 06 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.22
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
Table 5.7
Logical Device: PRO (Protection) (Sheet 9 of 10)
U1P1PTUV1
U1P2PTUV1
U1P2PTUV1
U1P2PTUV1
U2P1PTUV2
U2P1PTUV2
U2P1PTUV2
U2P2PTUV2
U2P2PTUV2
U2P2PTUV2
U3P1PTUV3
U3P1PTUV3
Logical Node
S7PTOC7
S8PTOC8
S9PTOC9
TRIPPTRC1
TRIPPTRC1
TRIPPTRC1
TRIPPTRC1
U1P1PTUV1
U1P1PTUV1
U3P1PTUV3
U3P2PTUV3
U3P2PTUV3
U3P2PTUV3
U4P1PTUV4
U4P1PTUV4
U4P1PTUV4
U4P2PTUV4
U4P2PTUV4
U4P2PTUV4
U5P1PTUV5
U5P1PTUV5
U5P1PTUV5
U5P2PTUV5
Attribute
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Tr.phsA
Tr.phsB
Tr.phsC
Tr.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Data Source
272P2 unknown
273P1T
273P1 unknown
273P2
273P2 unknown unknown
271P2
271P2 unknown
272P1T
272P1 unknown
272P2
274P1T
274P1 unknown
274P2
274P2 unknown
275P1T
275P1 unknown
275P2
51T07
51S07 unknown
51T08
51S08 unknown
51T09
51S09 unknown
TPA
TPB
TPC
TRIP
271P1T
271P1
Comment
Inverse-time element 07 timed out
Inverse-time element 07 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Inverse-time element 08 timed out
Inverse-time element 08 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Inverse-time element 09 timed out
Inverse-time element 09 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Trip A
Trip B
Trip C
Trip A or Trip B or Trip C
Undervoltage Element 1 Level 1 timed out
Undervoltage Element 1, Level 1 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Element 1, Level 2 picked up
Undervoltage Element 1, Level 2 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Element 2 Level 1 timed out
Undervoltage Element 2, Level 1 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Element 2, Level 2 picked up
Undervoltage Element 2, Level 2 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Element 3 Level 1 timed out
Undervoltage Element 3, Level 1 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Element 3, Level 2 picked up
Undervoltage Element 3, Level 2 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Element 4 Level 1 timed out
Undervoltage Element 4, Level 1 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Element 4, Level 2 picked up
Undervoltage Element 4, Level 2 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Element 5 Level 1 timed out
Undervoltage Element 5, Level 1 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Element 5, Level 2 picked up
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
C.5.23
Table 5.7
Logical Device: PRO (Protection) (Sheet 10 of 10)
Logical Node
U5P2PTUV5
U5P2PTUV5
U6P1PTUV6
U6P1PTUV6
U6P1PTUV6
U6P2PTUV6
U6P2PTUV6
U6P2PTUV6
Z1GPDIS2
Z1PPDIS1
Attribute
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Data Source
275P2 unknown
276P1T
276P1 unknown
276P2
276P2 unknown
Z1GT forward
Z1G
Z1PT forward
Z1P
Z2GT
Comment
Undervoltage Element 5, Level 2 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Element 6 Level 1 timed out
Undervoltage Element 6, Level 1 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Undervoltage Element 6, Level 2 picked up
Undervoltage Element 6, Level 2 picked up
Direction unknown due to settings
Zone 1 ground distance, time-delayed
Direction unknown due to settings
Zone 1 ground distance element
Zone 1 phase distance, time-delayed
Always forward
Zone 1 phase distance element
Zone 2 ground distance, time-delayed
Z2GPDIS4
Z2PPDIS3
Z3GPDIS6
Z3PPDIS5
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
forward
Z2G
Z2PT forward
Z2P
Z3GT
RVRS3?1:2
Z3G
Always forward
Zone 2 ground distance element
Zone 2 phase distance, time-delayed
Always forward
Zone 2 phase distance element
Zone 3 ground distance, time-delayed
Asserts when Global Setting DIR3=R
Zone 3 ground distance element
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Z3PT
RVRS3?1:2
Z3P
Z4GT
Zone 3 phase distance, time-delayed
Asserts when Global Setting DIR3=R
Zone 3 phase distance element
Zone 4 ground distance, time-delayed
Z4GPDIS8
Z4PPDIS7
Z5GPDIS10
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
Op.general
Str.dirGeneral
RVRS4?1:2
Z4G
Z4PT
RVRS4?1:2
Asserts when Global Setting DIR4=R
Zone 4 ground distance element
Zone 4 phase distance, time-delayed
Asserts when Global Setting DIR4=R
Str.general
Op.general
Z4P
Z5GT
Zone 4 phase distance element
Zone 5 ground distance, time-delayed
Z5GPDIS10
Z5GPDIS10
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
RVRS5?1:2
Z5G
Asserts when Global Setting DIR5=R
Zone 5 ground distance element
Op.general
Z5PT Zone 5 phase distance, time-delayed
Z5PPDIS9
Str.dirGeneral
Str.general
RVRS5?1:2
Z5P
Asserts when Global Setting DIR5=R
Zone 5 phase distance element c d a b
RFLO logical nodes include fault current data from the event summary even if the fault location is invalid.
Fault location units will match line length units (not necessarily km). Value will be –999.99 if fault location is invalid.
High-speed GOOSE data if included in an outgoing GOOSE dataset.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.24
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
Table 5.8
Descriptions of FLFROM Values
From: Value From Event Summary
Local
Remote 1
Remote 2
Remote 3
TAP
FLFROM Integer Value
0
1
2
3
4
Table 5.9 shows the LNs associated with measuring elements, defined as
Logical Device MET.
Table 5.9
Logical Device: MET (Metering) (Sheet 1 of 6)
Logical Node Attribute
DMDMDST1
DMDMDST1
DMDMDST1
DMDMDST1
DMDMDST1
DMDMDST1
METMDST1
METMDST1
METMDST1
METMDST1
METMDST1
METMDST1
METMDST1
METMDST1
METMDST1
METMDST1
METMDST1
Functional Constraint = MX
DCZBAT1 Vol.instMag.f
DCZBAT2
DMDMDST1
DMDMDST1
DMDMDST1
Vol.instMag.f
A.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
A.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
A.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
DMDMDST1
DMDMDST1
DMDMDST1
DMDMDST1
DMDMDST1
DMDMDST1
DMDMDST1
DMDMDST1
SeqA.c2.instMag.f
SeqA.c3.instMag.f
TotVA.instMag.f
TotVAr.instMag.f
TotW.instMag.f
VA.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
VA.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
VA.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
VAr.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
VAr.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
VAr.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
W.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
W.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
W.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
A.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
A.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
A.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
DmdWh.instMag.f
SeqA.c2.instMag.f
SeqA.c3.instMag.f
SupWh.instMag.f
TotVA.instMag.f
TotVAr.instMag.f
TotW.instMag.f
VA.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
Data Source Comment
3I2D
IGD
3UD
3QD
3PD
UAD
UBD
UCD
DC1
DC2
IAD
IBD
ICD
Filtered station batt. DC Voltage 1
Filtered station batt. DC Voltage 2
Demand Phase A current
Demand Phase B current
Demand Phase C current
Demand negative-sequence current
Demand zero-sequence current
Demand three-phase apparent power
Demand three-phase reactive power
Demand three-phase real power
Demand Phase A apparent power
Demand Phase B apparent power
Demand Phase C apparent power
QAD
QBD
QCD
PAD
PBD
PCD
IAD
IBD
Demand Phase A reactive power
Demand Phase B reactive power
Demand Phase C reactive power
Demand Phase A real power
Demand Phase B real power
Demand Phase C real power
Demand Phase A current
Demand Phase B current
ICD
3MWHIN
3I2D
Demand Phase C current
Negative (import) 3-phase energy, megawatthrs
Demand negative-sequence current
IGD Demand zero-sequence current
3MWHOUT Positive (export) 3-phase energy, megawatthrs
3UD
3QD
3PD
Demand 3-phase apparent power
Demand 3-phase reactive power
Demand 3-phase real power
UAD Demand Phase A apparent power
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
C.5.25
Table 5.9
Logical Device: MET (Metering) (Sheet 2 of 6)
Logical Node
METMDST1
METMDST1
METMDST1
METMDST1
METMDST1
METMDST1
METMDST1
METMDST1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
Attribute
VA.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
VA.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
VAr.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
VAr.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
VAr.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
W.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
W.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
W.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
Dif.neg.instCVal.ang.f
Dif.neg.instCVal.mag.f
Dif.phsA.instCVal.ang.f
Dif.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
Dif.phsB.instCVal.ang.f
Dif.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
Dif.phsC.instCVal.ang.f
Dif.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
Dif.res.instCVal.ang.f
Dif.res.instCVal.mag.f
Local.neg.instCVal.ang.f
Local.neg.instCVal.mag.f
Local.phsA.instCVal.ang.f
Local.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
Local.phsB.instCVal.ang.f
Local.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
Local.phsC.instCVal.ang.f
Local.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
Local.ps.instCVal.ang.f
Local.ps.instCVal.mag.f
Local.res.instCVal.ang.f
Local.res.instCVal.mag.f
Remote1.neg.instCVal.ang.f
Remote1.neg.instCVal.mag.f
Remote1.phsA.instCVal.ang.f
Remote1.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
Data Source Comment
UBD
UCD
QAD
QBD
QCD
PAD
PBD
PCD
87IADA
87IADM
87IBDA
87IBDM
87ICDA
87ICDM
87IGDA
87IGDM
87IQDA
87IQDM
87I1LA
87I1LM
87IALA
87IALM
87IBLA
87IBLM
87ICLA
87ICLM
87IGLA
87IGLM
87IQLA
87IQLM
87I1R1A
87I1R1M
87IAR1A
87IAR1M
Demand Phase B apparent power
Demand Phase C apparent power
Demand Phase A reactive power
Demand Phase B reactive power
Demand Phase C reactive power
Demand Phase A real power
Demand Phase B real power
Demand Phase C real power
10-Cycle averaged, differential current, Phase A angle
10-Cycle averaged, differential current, Phase A magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, differential current, Phase B angle
10-Cycle averaged, differential current, Phase B magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, differential current, Phase C angle
10-Cycle averaged, differential current, Phase C magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, differential residual current angle
10-Cycle averaged, differential residual current magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, differential negative-sequence current angle
10-Cycle averaged, differential negative-sequence current magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned local positive-sequence current angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned local positive-sequence current magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned local current Phase A angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned local current Phase A magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned local current Phase B angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned local current Phase B magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned local current Phase C angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned local current Phase C magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned local residual-sequence current angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned local residual-sequence current magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned local negative-sequence current angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned local negative-sequence current magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 1 positive-sequence current angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 1 positive-sequence current magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 1 current Phase A angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 1 current Phase A magnitude
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.26
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
Table 5.9
Logical Device: MET (Metering) (Sheet 3 of 6)
Logical Node
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
Attribute
Remote1.ps.instCVal.ang.f
Data Source Comment
Remote1.phsB.instCVal.ang.f
87IBR1A
Remote1.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
87IBR1M
Remote1.phsC.instCVal.ang.f
Remote1.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
87ICR1M
Remote1.ps.instCVal.mag.f
Remote1.res.instCVal.ang.f
Remote1.res.instCVal.mag.f
Remote2.neg.instCVal.ang.f
Remote2.neg.instCVal.mag.f
Remote2.phsA.instCVal.ang.f
Remote2.ps.instCVal.mag.f
Remote2.res.instCVal.ang.f
Remote2.res.instCVal.mag.f
Remote3.neg.instCVal.ang.f
Remote3.neg.instCVal.mag.f
Remote3.phsA.instCVal.ang.f
Remote3.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
Remote3.phsB.instCVal.ang.f
Remote3.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
Remote3.phsC.instCVal.ang.f
Remote3.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
Remote3.ps.instCVal.ang.f
87ICR1A
87IGR1A
87IGR1M
87IQR1A
87IQR1M
87I1R2A
87I1R2M
87IAR2A
Remote2.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
87IAR2M
Remote2.phsB.instCVal.ang.f
87IBR2A
Remote2.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
87IBR2M
Remote2.phsC.instCVal.ang.f
87ICR2A
Remote2.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
87ICR2M
Remote2.ps.instCVal.ang.f
87IGR2A
87IGR2M
87IQR2A
87IQR2M
87I1R3A
87I1R3M
87IAR3A
87IAR3M
87IBR3A
87IBR3M
87ICR3A
87ICR3M
87IGR3A
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 1 current Phase B angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 1 current Phase B magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 1 current, Phase C angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 1 current, Phase C magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 1 residual-sequence current angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 1 residual-sequence current magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 1 negative-sequence current angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 1 negative-sequence current magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 2 positive-sequence current angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 2 positive-sequence current magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 2 current, Phase A angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 2 current, Phase A magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 2 current, Phase B angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 2 current, Phase B magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 2 current, Phase C angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 2 current, Phase C magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 2 residual-sequence current angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 2 residual-sequence current magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 2 negative-sequence current angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 2 negative-sequence current magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 3 positive-sequence current angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 3 positive-sequence current magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 3 current, Phase A angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 3 current, Phase A magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 3 current, Phase B angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 3 current, Phase B magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 3 current, Phase C angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote 3 current, Phase C magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 3 residual-sequence current angle
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
C.5.27
Table 5.9
Logical Device: MET (Metering) (Sheet 4 of 6)
Logical Node
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMDF1
METMMTR1
METMMTR1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
Attribute
Remote3.ps.instCVal.mag.f
Remote3.res.instCVal.ang.f
Remote3.res.instCVal.mag.f
DmdWhactVal
SupWhactVal
A1.phsA.instCVal.ang.f
A1.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
A1.phsB.instCVal.ang.f
A1.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
A1.phsC.instCVal.ang.f
A1.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
A2.phsA.instCVal.ang.f
A2.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
A2.phsB.instCVal.ang.f
A2.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
A2.phsC.instCVal.ang.f
A2.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
A3.phsA.instCVal.ang.f
A3.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
A3.phsB.instCVal.ang.f
A3.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
A3.phsC.instCVal.ang.f
A3.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
Hz.instMag.f
PF.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
PF.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
PF.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
PhV.phsA.instCVal.ang.f
PhV.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
PhV.phsB.instCVal.ang.f
Data Source Comment
FREQ
DPFA
DPFB
DPFC
VAFA
VAFM
87IGR3M
87IQR3A
87IQR3M
3MWHIN Negative (Import) 3-phase energy, megawatthrs
3MWHOUT Positive (Export) 3-phase energy, megawatthrs
LIAFA
LIAFM
10-Cycle average fundamental Phase A current (ang)
Filtered instantaneous Phase A current (mag)
LIBFA
LIBFM
LICFA
LICFM
B1IAFA
10-Cycle average fundamental Phase B current (ang)
Filtered instantaneous Phase B current (mag)
10-Cycle average fundamental Phase C current (ang)
Filtered instantaneous Phase C current (mag)
B1IAFM
B1IBFA
B1IBFM
A-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental Phase A current angle
(Breaker 1)
A-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental Phase A current magnitude (Breaker 1)
A-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental Phase B current angle
(Breaker 1)
A-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental Phase B current magnitude (Breaker 1)
B1ICFA
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 3 residual-sequence current magnitude
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 3 negative-sequence current angle
10-Cycle averaged, aligned remote terminal 3 negative-sequence current magnitude
B1ICFM
B2IAFA
B2IAFM
B2IBFA
B2IBFM
B2ICFA
B2ICFM
A-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental Phase C current angle
(Breaker 1)
A-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental Phase C current magnitude (Breaker 1)
A-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental Phase A current angle
(Breaker 2)
A-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental Phase A current magnitude (Breaker 2)
A-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental Phase B current angle
(Breaker 2)
A-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental Phase B current magnitude (Breaker 2)
A-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental Phase C current angle
(Breaker 2)
A-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental Phase C current magnitude (Breaker 2)
VBFA
Tracking frequency
A-Phase displacement power factor
B-Phase displacement power factor
C-Phase displacement power factor
A-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental phase voltage angle
A-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental phase voltage magnitude
B-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental phase voltage angle
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.28
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
TotPF.instMag.f
TotVA.instMag.f
TotVAr.instMag.f
TotW.instMag.f
VAr.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
VAr.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
VAr.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
W.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
W.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
W.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
PKDMDMDST1 A.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
PKDMDMDST1 A.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
PKDMDMDST1 A.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
PKDMDMDST1 SeqA.c2.instMag.f
PKDMDMDST1 SeqA.c3.instMag.f
PKDMDMDST1 TotVA.instMag.f
PKDMDMDST1 TotVAr.instMag.f
PKDMDMDST1 TotW.instMag.f
PKDMDMDST1 VA.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
PKDMDMDST1 VA.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
PKDMDMDST1 VA.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
PKDMDMDST1 VAr.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
PKDMDMDST1 VAr.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
PKDMDMDST1 VAr.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
PKDMDMDST1 W.phsA.instCVal.mag.f
PKDMDMDST1 W.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
PKDMDMDST1 W.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
SEQMSQI1
SEQMSQI1
SEQMSQI1
SEQMSQI1
SEQMSQI1
SeqA.c1.instCVal.ang.f
SeqA.c1.instCVal.mag.f
SeqA.c2.instCVal.ang.f
SeqA.c2.instCVal.mag.f
SeqA.c3.instCVal.ang.f
SEQMSQI1
SEQMSQI1
SEQMSQI1
SEQMSQI1
SEQMSQI1
SeqA.c3.instCVal.mag.f
SeqV.c1.instCVal.ang.f
SeqV.c1.instCVal.mag.f
SeqV.c2.instCVal.ang.f
SeqV.c2.instCVal.mag.f
Table 5.9
Logical Device: MET (Metering) (Sheet 5 of 6)
Logical Node
METMMXU1
Attribute
PhV.phsB.instCVal.mag.f
METMMXU1
METMMXU1
PhV.phsC.instCVal.ang.f
PhV.phsC.instCVal.mag.f
PAPKD
PBPKD
PCPKD
L3I2A
L3I2M
LI1A
LI1M
LIGA
3QPKD
3PPKD
UAPKD
UBPKD
UCPKD
QAPKD
QBPKD
QCPKD
PB_F
PC_F
IAPKD
IBPKD
ICPKD
3I2PKD
IGPKD
3UPKD
3DPF
3S_F
3Q_F
3P_F
QA_F
QB_F
QC_F
PA_F
LIGM
3V0A
3V0M
3V2A
3V2M
Data Source Comment
VBFM
VCFA
VCFM
B-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental phase voltage magnitude
C-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental phase voltage angle
C-Phase 10-cycle average fundamental phase voltage magnitude
3-Phase displacement power factor
Fundamental apparent 3-phase power
Fundamental reactive 3-phase power
Fundamental real 3-phase power
A-Phase fundamental reactive power
B-Phase fundamental reactive power
C-Phase fundamental reactive power
A-Phase fundamental real power
B-Phase fundamental real power
C-Phase fundamental real power
Peak demand A-phase current
Peak demand B-phase current
Peak demand C-phase current
Peak demand negative-sequence current
Peak demand zero-sequence current
Peak demand 3-Phase apparent power
Peak demand 3-Phase reactive power
Peak demand 3-Phase real power
Peak demand A-phase apparent power
Peak demand B-phase apparent power
Peak demand C-phase apparent power
Peak demand A-phase reactive power
Peak demand B-phase reactive power
Peak demand C-phase reactive power
Peak demand A-phase real power
Peak demand B-phase real power
Peak demand C-phase real power
10-Cycle average negative-sequence current (ang)
10-Cycle average negative-sequence current (mag)
10-Cycle average positive-sequence current (ang)
10-Cycle average positive-sequence current (mag)
10-Cycle average zero-sequence current (ang)
10-Cycle average zero-sequence current (mag)
10-Cycle average zero-sequence voltage (ang)
10-Cycle average zero-sequence voltage (mag)
10-Cycle average negative-sequence voltage (ang)
10-Cycle average negative-sequence voltage (mag)
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
C.5.29
Table 5.9
Logical Device: MET (Metering) (Sheet 6 of 6)
Logical Node Attribute
SEQMSQI1
SEQMSQI1
SeqV.c3.instCVal.ang.f
SeqV.c3.instCVal.mag.f
THERMMTHR1 Tmp01.instMag.f
THERMMTHR1 Tmp02.instMag.f
THERMMTHR1 Tmp03.instMag.f
THERMMTHR1 Tmp04.instMag.f
THERMMTHR1 Tmp05.instMag.f
THERMMTHR1 Tmp06.instMag.f
THERMMTHR1 Tmp07.instMag.f
THERMMTHR1 Tmp08.instMag.f
THERMMTHR1 Tmp09.instMag.f
THERMMTHR1 Tmp10.instMag.f
THERMMTHR1 Tmp11.instMag.f
THERMMTHR1 Tmp12.instMag.f
Data Source Comment
V1A
V1M
RTD01TV
RTD02TV
RTD03TV
RTD04TV
RTD05TV
RTD06TV
RTD07TV
RTD08TV
RTD09TV
RTD10TV
RTD11TV
RTD12TV
10-Cycle average positive-sequence voltage (ang)
10-Cycle average positive-sequence voltage (mag)
RTD temperature value in °C, RTD01
RTD temperature value in °C, RTD02
RTD temperature value in °C, RTD03
RTD temperature value in °C, RTD04
RTD temperature value in °C, RTD05
RTD temperature value in °C, RTD06
RTD temperature value in °C, RTD07
RTD temperature value in °C, RTD08
RTD temperature value in °C, RTD09
RTD temperature value in °C, RTD10
RTD temperature value in °C, RTD11
RTD temperature value in °C, RTD12
Table 5.10 shows the LNs associated with control elements, defined as
Logical Device CON.
Table 5.10
Logical Device: CON (Remote Control) (Sheet 1 of 3)
Logical Node Attribute
RBGGIO2
RBGGIO2
RBGGIO2
RBGGIO2
RBGGIO3
RBGGIO3
RBGGIO3
RBGGIO3
RBGGIO3
Functional Constraint = CO
RBGGIO1
RBGGIO1
RBGGIO1
RBGGIO1
SPCSO01.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO02.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO03.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO04.Oper.ctlVal
RBGGIO1
RBGGIO1
RBGGIO1
RBGGIO1
RBGGIO2
RBGGIO2
RBGGIO2
RBGGIO2
SPCSO05.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO06.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO07.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO08.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO09.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO10.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO11.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO12.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO13.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO14.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO15.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO16.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO17.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO18.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO19.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO20.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO21.Oper.ctlVal
Data Source
RB09
RB10
RB11
RB12
RB13
RB14
RB15
RB16
RB01
RB02
RB03
RB04
RB05
RB06
RB07
RB08
RB17
RB18
RB19
RB20
RB21
Comment
Remote Bit 1
Remote Bit 2
Remote Bit 3
Remote Bit 4
Remote Bit 5
Remote Bit 6
Remote Bit 7
Remote Bit 8
Remote Bit 9
Remote Bit 10
Remote Bit 11
Remote Bit 12
Remote Bit 13
Remote Bit 14
Remote Bit 15
Remote Bit 16
Remote Bit 17
Remote Bit 18
Remote Bit 19
Remote Bit 20
Remote Bit 21
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.30
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
SEL-411L Relay
Table 5.10
Logical Device: CON (Remote Control) (Sheet 2 of 3)
Logical Node Attribute
RBGGIO3
RBGGIO3
RBGGIO3
RBGGIO4
RBGGIO4
RBGGIO4
RBGGIO4
SPCSO22.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO23.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO24.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO25.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO26.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO27.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO28.Oper.ctlVal
RBGGIO4
RBGGIO4
RBGGIO4
RBGGIO4
SPCSO29.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO30.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO31.Oper.ctlVal
SPCSO32.Oper.ctlVal
Functional Constraint = ST
RBGGIO1 a
SPCSO01.stVal
SPCSO02.stVal
SPCSO03.stVal
SPCSO04.stVal
SPCSO05.stVal
SPCSO06.stVal
SPCSO07.stVal
SPCSO08.stVal
SPCSO09.stVal
SPCSO10.stVal
SPCSO11.stVal
SPCSO12.stVal
SPCSO13.stVal
SPCSO14.stVal
SPCSO15.stVal
SPCSO16.stVal
SPCSO17.stVal
SPCSO18.stVal
SPCSO19.stVal
SPCSO20.stVal
SPCSO21.stVal
SPCSO22.stVal
SPCSO23.stVal
SPCSO24.stVal
SPCSO25.stVal
SPCSO26.stVal
SPCSO27.stVal
SPCSO28.stVal
SPCSO29.stVal
Data Source
RB23
RB24
RB25
RB26
RB27
RB28
RB29
RB15
RB16
RB17
RB18
RB19
RB20
RB21
RB22
RB07
RB08
RB09
RB10
RB11
RB12
RB13
RB14
RB01
RB02
RB03
RB04
RB05
RB06
RB22
RB23
RB24
RB25
RB26
RB27
RB28
RB29
RB30
RB31
RB32
Remote Bit 15
Remote Bit 16
Remote Bit 17
Remote Bit 18
Remote Bit 19
Remote Bit 20
Remote Bit 21
Remote Bit 22
Remote Bit 23
Remote Bit 24
Remote Bit 25
Remote Bit 26
Remote Bit 27
Remote Bit 28
Remote Bit 29
Remote Bit 1
Remote Bit 2
Remote Bit 3
Remote Bit 4
Remote Bit 5
Remote Bit 6
Remote Bit 7
Remote Bit 8
Remote Bit 9
Remote Bit 10
Remote Bit 11
Remote Bit 12
Remote Bit 13
Remote Bit 14
Comment
Remote Bit 22
Remote Bit 23
Remote Bit 24
Remote Bit 25
Remote Bit 26
Remote Bit 27
Remote Bit 28
Remote Bit 29
Remote Bit 30
Remote Bit 31
Remote Bit 32
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
C.5.31
Table 5.10
Logical Device: CON (Remote Control) (Sheet 3 of 3)
Logical Node Attribute Data Source
SPCSO30.stVal
SPCSO31.stVal
SPCSO32.stVal
RB30
RB31
RB32 a
High-speed GOOSE data if included in an outgoing GOOSE dataset.
Comment
Remote Bit 30
Remote Bit 31
Remote Bit 32
Table 5.11 shows the LNs associated with the annunciation element, defined
as Logical Device ANN.
Table 5.11
Logical Device: ANN (Annunciation) (Sheet 1 of 10)
Logical Node Attribute Data Source Comment
•
•
•
Functional Constraint = MX
ACNGGIO2
ACNGGIO2
AnIn001.instMag.f
AnIn002.instMag.f
ACN01CV
ACN02CV
•
•
•
ACNGGIO2
ACNGGIO2
ACNGGIO2
ACNGGIO2
AMVGGIO1
AMVGGIO1
AMVGGIO1
•
•
•
AMVGGIO1
AMVGGIO1
AMVGGIO1
AMVGGIO2
AMVGGIO2
•
•
•
AMVGGIO2
AMVGGIO2
AnIn003.instMag.f
ACN03CV
AnIn014.instMag.f
AnIn015.instMag.f
AnIn016.instMag.f
AnIn001.instMag.f
AMV001
AnIn002.instMag.f
AMV002
AnIn003.instMag.f
AMV003
AnIn062.instMag.f
AnIn063.instMag.f
AnIn064.instMag.f
ACN14CV
ACN15CV
ACN16CV
AMV062
AMV063
AMV064
AnIn065.instMag.f
AMV065
AnIn066.instMag.f
AMV066
AnIn067.instMag.f
AMV067
AMVGGIO2
AMVGGIO2
PCNGGIO1
PCNGGIO1
PCNGGIO1
AnIn126.instMag.f
AMV126
AnIn127.instMag.f
AMV127
AnIn128.instMag.f
AMV128
AnIn001.instMag.f
PCN01CV
AnIn002.instMag.f
PCN02CV
AnIn003.instMag.f
PCN03CV
Automation SEL
Automation SEL
Automation SEL
Automation SEL
Automation SEL
Automation SEL
Automation SEL
OGIC
OGIC
OGIC
OGIC
OGIC
OGIC
OGIC
Counter 01 Current Value
Counter 02 Current Value
Counter 03 Current Value
Counter 14 Current Value
Counter 15 Current Value
Counter 16 Current Value
Automation SEL
OGIC
Math Variable 001
Automation SEL
OGIC
Math Variable 002
Automation SEL
Automation SEL
Automation SEL
Automation SEL
Automation SEL
OGIC
Math Variable 065
Automation SEL
OGIC
Math Variable 066
Automation SEL
OGIC
OGIC
OGIC
OGIC
OGIC
Math Variable 003
Math Variable 062
Math Variable 063
Math Variable 064
Math Variable 067
Math Variable 126
Automation SEL
OGIC
Math Variable 127
Automation SEL
OGIC
Math Variable 128
Protection SEL
OGIC
Counter 01 Current Value
Protection SEL
OGIC
Counter 02 Current Value
Protection SEL
OGIC
Counter 03 Current Value
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.32
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
Table 5.11
Logical Device: ANN (Annunciation) (Sheet 2 of 10)
Logical Node
RAGGIO1
RAGGIO1
•
•
•
RAGGIO1
RAGGIO1
RAGGIO1
RAGGIO2
RAGGIO2
PCNGGIO1
PCNGGIO1
PCNGGIO1
PMVGGIO3
PMVGGIO3
•
•
•
PMVGGIO3
PMVGGIO3
PMVGGIO3
PMVGGIO3
RAGGIO1
•
•
•
RAGGIO2
RAGGIO2
RAGGIO2
RAGGIO2
RAGGIO3
RAGGIO3
RAGGIO3
•
•
•
RAGGIO3
RAGGIO3
RAGGIO3
RAGGIO4
RAGGIO4
RAGGIO4
Attribute Data Source Comment
AnIn014.instMag.f
PCN14CV
AnIn015.instMag.f
PCN15CV
AnIn016.instMag.f
PCN16CV
AnIn01.instMag.f
PMV01
AnIn02.instMag.f
PMV02
AnIn03.instMag.f
PMV03
Protection SEL
Protection SEL
Protection SEL
OGIC
OGIC
OGIC
Counter 01 Current Value
Counter 02 Current Value
Counter 03 Current Value
Protection SEL
OGIC
Math Variable 01
Protection SEL
OGIC
Math Variable 02
Protection SEL
OGIC
Math Variable 03
AnIn62.instMag.f
AnIn63.instMag.f
AnIn64.instMag.f
Ra001.instMag.f
Ra002.instMag.f
Ra003.instMag.f
Ra030.instMag.f
Ra031.instMag.f
Ra032.instMag.f
Ra033.instMag.f
Ra034.instMag.f
Ra035.instMag.f
Ra062.instMag.f
Ra063.instMag.f
Ra064.instMag.f
Ra065.instMag.f
Ra066.instMag.f
Ra067.instMag.f
Ra094.instMag.f
Ra095.instMag.f
Ra096.instMag.f
Ra097.instMag.f
Ra098.instMag.f
Ra099.instMag.f
PMV62
PMV63
PMV64
RA001
RA002
RA003
RA030
RA031
RA032
RA033
RA034
RA035
RA062
RA063
RA064
RA065
RA066
RA067
RA094
RA095
RA096
RA097
RA098
RA099
Protection SEL
Protection SEL
Protection SEL
OGIC
OGIC
OGIC
Remote Analog 001
Remote Analog 002
Remote Analog 003
Remote Analog 030
Remote Analog 031
Remote Analog 032
Remote Analog 033
Remote Analog 034
Remote Analog 035
Remote Analog 062
Remote Analog 063
Remote Analog 064
Remote Analog 065
Remote Analog 066
Remote Analog 067
Remote Analog 094
Remote Analog 095
Remote Analog 096
Remote Analog 097
Remote Analog 098
Remote Analog 099
Math Variable 62
Math Variable 63
Math Variable 64
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Table 5.11
Logical Device: ANN (Annunciation) (Sheet 3 of 10)
Attribute Data Source Comment Logical Node
RAGGIO7
RAGGIO7
•
•
•
RAGGIO7
RAGGIO7
RAGGIO7
RAGGIO8
RAGGIO8
•
•
•
RAGGIO8
RAGGIO8
RAGGIO8
RAGGIO8
RAOGGIO1
•
•
•
RAGGIO5
RAGGIO5
RAGGIO5
RAGGIO6
RAGGIO6
•
•
•
RAGGIO6
RAGGIO6
RAGGIO6
RAGGIO6
RAGGIO7
•
•
•
RAGGIO4
RAGGIO4
RAGGIO4
RAGGIO5
RAGGIO5
RAGGIO5
Ra126.instMag.f
Ra127.instMag.f
Ra128.instMag.f
Ra129.instMag.f
Ra130.instMag.f
Ra131.instMag.f
Ra158.instMag.f
Ra159.instMag.f
Ra160.instMag.f
Ra161.instMag.f
Ra162.instMag.f
Ra163.instMag.f
Ra190.instMag.f
Ra191.instMag.f
Ra192.instMag.f
Ra193.instMag.f
Ra194.instMag.f
Ra195.instMag.f
Ra222.instMag.f
Ra223.instMag.f
Ra224.instMag.f
Ra225.instMag.f
Ra226.instMag.f
Ra227.instMag.f
Ra254.instMag.f
Ra255.instMag.f
Ra256.instMag.f
Rao01.instMag.f
RA126
RA127
RA128
RA129
RA130
RA131
RA158
RA159
RA160
RA161
RA162
RA163
RA190
RA191
RA192
RA193
RA194
RA195
RA222
RA223
RA224
RA225
RA226
RA227
RA254
RA255
RA256
RAO01
Remote Analog 126
Remote Analog 127
Remote Analog 128
Remote Analog 129
Remote Analog 130
Remote Analog 131
Remote Analog 158
Remote Analog 159
Remote Analog 160
Remote Analog 161
Remote Analog 162
Remote Analog 163
Remote Analog 190
Remote Analog 191
Remote Analog 192
Remote Analog 193
Remote Analog 194
Remote Analog 195
Remote Analog 222
Remote Analog 223
Remote Analog 224
Remote Analog 225
Remote Analog 226
Remote Analog 227
Remote Analog 254
Remote Analog 255
Remote Analog 256
Remote Analog Output 01
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
C.5.33
SEL-411L Relay
C.5.34
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
Table 5.11
Logical Device: ANN (Annunciation) (Sheet 4 of 10)
Logical Node Attribute
•
•
•
RAOGGIO1
RAOGGIO1
RAOGGIO1
RAOGGIO1
RAOGGIO1
RAOGGIO2
Rao02.instMag.f
Rao03.instMag.f
Rao30.instMag.f
Rao31.instMag.f
Rao32.instMag.f
Rao33.instMag.f
RAOGGIO2
RAOGGIO2
•
•
•
RAOGGIO2
Rao34.instMag.f
Rao35.instMag.f
Rao62.instMag.f
RAOGGIO2 Rao63.instMag.f
RAOGGIO2 Rao64.instMag.f
Functional Constraint = ST a
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
ALTGGIO5
ALTGGIO5
•
•
•
ALTGGIO5
ALTGGIO5
ALTGGIO5
ALTGGIO5
ASVGGIO4
Ind30.stVal
Ind31.stVal
Ind32.stVal
Ind001.stVal
Ind002.stVal
Ind003.stVal
ASVGGIO4
ASVGGIO4
•
•
•
ASVGGIO4
ASVGGIO4
ASVGGIO4
ETHGGIO1
ETHGGIO1
ETHGGIO1
ETHGGIO1
ETHGGIO1
ETHGGIO1
ETHGGIO1
Ind126.stVal
Ind127.stVal
Ind128.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind04.stVal
Ind05.stVal
Ind06.stVal
Ind07.stVal
Data Source Comment
RAO02
RAO03
Remote Analog Output 02
Remote Analog Output 03
RAO30
RAO31
RAO32
RAO33
RAO34
RAO35
RAO62
RAO63
RAO64
ALT01
ALT02
ALT03
ALT30
ALT31
ALT32
ASV001
ASV002
ASV003
ASV126
ASV127
ASV128
P5ASEL
LINK5A
P5BSEL
LINK5B
P5CSEL
LINK5C
P5DSEL
Remote Analog Output 30
Remote Analog Output 31
Remote Analog Output 32
Remote Analog Output 33
Remote Analog Output 34
Remote Analog Output 35
Remote Analog Output 62
Remote Analog Output 63
Remote Analog Output 64
Automation Latch 1
Automation Latch 2
Automation Latch 3
Automation Latch 30
Automation Latch 31
Automation Latch 32
Automation SEL
Automation SEL
Automation SEL
Automation SEL
OGIC
OGIC
OGIC
OGIC
Variable 1
Variable 2
Variable 3
Variable 126
Automation SEL
OGIC
Variable 127
Automation SEL
OGIC
Variable 128
Port 5A active/inactive
Link status of port 5A connection
Port 5B active/inactive
Link status of port 5B connection
Port 5C active/inactive
Link status of port 5C connection
Port 5D active/inactive
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
C.5.35
Table 5.11
Logical Device: ANN (Annunciation) (Sheet 5 of 10)
Logical Node
•
•
•
IN3GGIO15
IN3GGIO15
IN3GGIO15
IN3GGIO15
IN4GGIO18
IN4GGIO18
IN4GGIO18
•
•
•
IN4GGIO18
IN4GGIO18
IN4GGIO18
ETHGGIO1
ETHGGIO1
IN2GGIO14
IN2GGIO14
IN2GGIO14
•
•
•
IN2GGIO14
IN2GGIO14
IN2GGIO14
IN3GGIO15
IN3GGIO15
LBGGIO1
LBGGIO1
•
•
•
LBGGIO1
LBGGIO1
LBGGIO1
LBGGIO1
MBOKGGIO13
MBOKGGIO13
MBOKGGIO13
Attribute
Ind08.stVal
Ind09.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind22.stVal
Ind23.stVal
Ind24.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind22.stVal
Ind23.stVal
Ind24.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind22.stVal
Ind23.stVal
Ind24.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind30.stVal
Ind31.stVal
Ind32.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Data Source Comment
LINK5D
LNKFAIL
IN201
IN202
IN203
IN222
IN223
IN224
IN301
IN302
IN303
IN322
IN323
IN324
IN401
IN402
IN403
IN422
IN423
IN424
LB01
LB02
LB03
LB30
LB31
LB32
ROKA
RBADA
CBADA
Link status of port 5D connection
Link status of the active port
First Optional I/O Board Input 1 (if installed)
First Optional I/O Board Input 2 (if installed)
First Optional I/O Board Input 3 (if installed)
First Optional I/O Board Input 22 (if installed)
First Optional I/O Board Input 23 (if installed)
First Optional I/O Board Input 24 (if installed)
Second Optional I/O Board Input 1 (if installed)
Second Optional I/O Board Input 2 (if installed)
Second Optional I/O Board Input 3 (if installed)
Second Optional I/O Board Input 22 (if installed)
Second Optional I/O Board Input 23 (if installed)
Second Optional I/O Board Input 24 (if installed)
Third Optional I/O Board Input 1 (if installed)
Third Optional I/O Board Input 2 (if installed)
Third Optional I/O Board Input 3 (if installed)
Third Optional I/O Board Input 22 (if installed)
Third Optional I/O Board Input 23 (if installed)
Third Optional I/O Board Input 24 (if installed)
Local Bit 1
Local Bit 2
Local Bit 3
Local Bit 30
Local Bit 31
Local Bit 32
Normal Mirrored Bits communications Channel A status while not in loopback mode
Outage too long on Mirrored Bits communications Channel A
Unavailability threshold exceeded for Mirrored Bits communications
Channel A
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.36
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
MBOKGGIO13
MBOKGGIO13
OUT2GGIO16
OUT2GGIO16
•
•
•
OUT2GGIO16
OUT2GGIO16
OUT2GGIO16
OUT2GGIO16
OUT3GGIO17
OUT3GGIO17
OUT3GGIO17
•
•
•
OUT3GGIO17
OUT3GGIO17
OUT3GGIO17
OUT4GGIO19
OUT4GGIO19
OUT4GGIO19
•
•
•
OUT4GGIO19
OUT4GGIO19
OUT4GGIO19
PBLEDGGIO8
PBLEDGGIO8
PBLEDGGIO8
PBLEDGGIO8
Table 5.11
Logical Device: ANN (Annunciation) (Sheet 6 of 10)
Logical Node
MBOKGGIO13
MBOKGGIO13
MBOKGGIO13
MBOKGGIO13
MBOKGGIO13
MBOKGGIO13
MBOKGGIO13
Attribute
Ind04.stVal
Ind05.stVal
Ind06.stVal
Ind07.stVal
Ind08.stVal
Ind09.stVal
Ind10.stVal
Ind11.stVal
Ind12.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Data Source Comment
LBOKA
ANOKA
DOKA
ROKB
RBADB
CBADB
LBOKB
ANOKB
DOKB
OUT201
OUT202
OUT203
Normal Mirrored Bits communications Channel A status while in loopback mode
Analog transfer OK on Mirrored Bits communications Channel A
Normal Mirrored Bits communications Channel A status
Normal Mirrored Bits communications Channel B status while not in loopback mode
Outage too long on Mirrored Bits communications Channel B
Unavailability threshold exceeded for Mirrored Bits communications
Channel B
Normal Mirrored Bits communications Channel B status while in loopback mode
Analog transfer OK on Mirrored Bits communications Channel B
Normal Mirrored Bits communications Channel B status
Optional I/O Board 1 Output 1
Optional I/O Board 1 Output 2
Optional I/O Board 1 Output 3
Ind14.stVal
Ind15.stVal
Ind16.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind14.stVal
Ind15.stVal
Ind16.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind14.stVal
Ind15.stVal
Ind16.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind04.stVal
OUT214
OUT215
OUT216
OUT301
OUT302
OUT303
OUT314
OUT315
OUT316
OUT401
OUT402
OUT403
OUT414
OUT415
OUT416
PB1_LED
PB2_LED
PB3_LED
PB4_LED
Optional I/O Board 1 Output 14
Optional I/O Board 1 Output 15
Optional I/O Board 1 Output 16
Optional I/O Board 2 Output 1
Optional I/O Board 2 Output 2
Optional I/O Board 2 Output 3
Optional I/O Board 2 Output 14
Optional I/O Board 2 Output 15
Optional I/O Board 2 Output 16
Optional I/O Board 3 Output 1
Optional I/O Board 3 Output 2
Optional I/O Board 3 Output 3
Optional I/O Board 3 Output 14
Optional I/O Board 3 Output 15
Optional I/O Board 3 Output 16
Pushbutton 1 LED
Pushbutton 2 LED
Pushbutton 3 LED
Pushbutton 4 LED
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Logical Node
PSVGGIO1
PSVGGIO1
PSVGGIO1
RMBAGGIO9
RMBAGGIO9
RMBAGGIO9
RMBAGGIO9
RMBAGGIO9
RMBAGGIO9
RMBAGGIO9
RMBAGGIO9
RMBBGGIO11
RMBBGGIO11
RMBBGGIO11
RMBBGGIO11
RMBBGGIO11
RMBBGGIO11
RMBBGGIO11
RMBBGGIO11
PBLEDGGIO8
PBLEDGGIO8
PBLEDGGIO8
PBLEDGGIO8
PBLEDGGIO8
PBLEDGGIO8
PBLEDGGIO8
PBLEDGGIO8
PLTGGIO2
PLTGGIO2
PLTGGIO2
•
•
•
PLTGGIO2
PLTGGIO2
PLTGGIO2
PSVGGIO1
PSVGGIO1
•
•
•
PSVGGIO1
Table 5.11
Logical Device: ANN (Annunciation) (Sheet 7 of 10)
Attribute
Ind05.stVal
Ind06.stVal
Ind07.stVal
Ind08.stVal
Ind09.stVal
Ind10.stVal
Ind11.stVal
Ind12.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Data Source Comment
PB5_LED
PB6_LED
PB7_LED
PB8_LED
PB9_LED
PB10LED
PB11LED
PB12LED
PLT01
PLT02
PLT03
Pushbutton 5 LED
Pushbutton 6 LED
Pushbutton 7 LED
Pushbutton 8 LED
Pushbutton 9 LED
Pushbutton 10 LED
Pushbutton 11 LED
Pushbutton 12 LED
Protection Latch 1
Protection Latch 2
Protection Latch 3
Ind30.stVal
Ind31.stVal
Ind32.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind62.stVal
Ind63.stVal
Ind64.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind04.stVal
Ind05.stVal
Ind06.stVal
Ind07.stVal
Ind08.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind04.stVal
Ind05.stVal
Ind06.stVal
Ind07.stVal
Ind08.stVal
PLT30
PLT31
PLT32
PSV01
PSV02
PSV03
PSV62
PSV63
PSV64
RMB1A
RMB2A
RMB3A
RMB4A
RMB5A
RMB6A
RMB7A
RMB8A
RMB1B
RMB2B
RMB3B
RMB4B
RMB5B
RMB6B
RMB7B
RMB8B
Protection Latch 30
Protection Latch 31
Protection Latch 32
Protection SEL
OGIC
Variable 1
Protection SEL
OGIC
Variable 2
Protection SEL
OGIC
Variable 3
Protection SEL
OGIC
Variable 62
Protection SEL
OGIC
Variable 63
Protection SEL
OGIC
Variable 64
Channel A Receive Mirrored Bit 1
Channel A Receive Mirrored Bit 2
Channel A Receive Mirrored Bit 3
Channel A Receive Mirrored Bit 4
Channel A Receive Mirrored Bit 5
Channel A Receive Mirrored Bit 6
Channel A Receive Mirrored Bit 7
Channel A Receive Mirrored Bit 8
Channel B Receive Mirrored Bit 1
Channel B Receive Mirrored Bit 2
Channel B Receive Mirrored Bit 3
Channel B Receive Mirrored Bit 4
Channel B Receive Mirrored Bit 5
Channel B Receive Mirrored Bit 6
Channel B Receive Mirrored Bit 7
Channel B Receive Mirrored Bit 8
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
C.5.37
SEL-411L Relay
C.5.38
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
Table 5.11
Logical Device: ANN (Annunciation) (Sheet 8 of 10)
Logical Node
RTCBGGIO2
RTCBGGIO2
RTCBGGIO2
RTDHGGIO1
RTDHGGIO1
RTDHGGIO1
RTDHGGIO1
RTDHGGIO1
RTDHGGIO1
RTDHGGIO1
RTDHGGIO1
RTDHGGIO1
RTDHGGIO1
RTDHGGIO1
RTDHGGIO1
SGGGIO1
RTCAGGIO1
RTCAGGIO1
RTCAGGIO1
•
•
•
RTCAGGIO1
RTCAGGIO1
RTCAGGIO1
RTCBGGIO2
RTCBGGIO2
•
•
•
RTCBGGIO2
SGGGIO1
SGGGIO1
SGGGIO1
SGGGIO1
SGGGIO1
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
Attribute
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind14.stVal
Ind15.stVal
Ind16.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind04.stVal
Ind05.stVal
Ind06.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind04.stVal
Ind05.stVal
Ind06.stVal
Ind14.stVal
Ind15.stVal
Ind16.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind04.stVal
Ind05.stVal
Ind06.stVal
Ind07.stVal
Ind08.stVal
Ind09.stVal
Ind10.stVal
Ind11.stVal
Ind12.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Data Source Comment
RTCAD01
RTCAD02
RTCAD03
RTCAD14
RTCAD15
RTCAD16
RTCBD01
RTCBD02
RTCBD03
RTCBD14
RTCBD15
RTCBD16
RTD01ST
RTD02ST
RTD03ST
RTD04ST
RTD05ST
RTD06ST
RTD07ST
RTD08ST
RTD09ST
RTD10ST
RTD11ST
RTD12ST
SG1
SG2
SG3
SG4
SG5
SG6
EN
TRIPLED
TLED_1
TLED_2
TLED_3
TLED_4
RTC Remote Data Bits, Channel A, bit 1
RTC Remote Data Bits, Channel A, bit 2
RTC Remote Data Bits, Channel A, bit 3
RTC Remote Data Bits, Channel A, bit 14
RTC Remote Data Bits, Channel A, bit 15
RTC Remote Data Bits, Channel A, bit 16
RTC Remote Data Bits, Channel B, bit 1
RTC Remote Data Bits, Channel B, bit 2
RTC Remote Data Bits, Channel B, bit 3
RTC Remote Data Bits, Channel B, bit 14
RTC Remote Data Bits, Channel B, bit 15
RTC Remote Data Bits, Channel B, bit 16
RTD Status for Channel 1
RTD Status for Channel 2
RTD Status for Channel 3
RTD Status for Channel 4
RTD Status for Channel 5
RTD Status for Channel 6
RTD Status for Channel 7
RTD Status for Channel 8
RTD Status for Channel 9
RTD Status for Channel 10
RTD Status for Channel 11
RTD Status for Channel 12
Settings Group 1 active
Settings Group 2 active
Settings Group 3 active
Settings Group 4 active
Settings Group 5 active
Settings Group 6 active
Relay Enabled
Trip LED
Target LED 1
Target LED 2
Target LED 3
Target LED 4
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Table 5.11
Logical Device: ANN (Annunciation) (Sheet 9 of 10)
Logical Node
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TMBAGGIO10
TMBAGGIO10
TMBAGGIO10
TMBAGGIO10
TMBAGGIO10
TMBAGGIO10
TMBAGGIO10
TMBAGGIO10
TMBBGGIO12
TMBBGGIO12
TMBBGGIO12
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TLEDGGIO7
TMBBGGIO12
TMBBGGIO12
TMBBGGIO12
TMBBGGIO12
TMBBGGIO12
VBGGIO1
VBGGIO1
VBGGIO1
VBGGIO1
VBGGIO1
Attribute
Ind22.stVal
Ind23.stVal
Ind24.stVal
Ind25.stVal
Ind26.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind04.stVal
Ind05.stVal
Ind06.stVal
Ind07.stVal
Ind08.stVal
Ind01.stVal
Ind02.stVal
Ind03.stVal
Ind04.stVal
Ind05.stVal
Ind06.stVal
Ind07.stVal
Ind08.stVal
Ind001.stVal
Ind002.stVal
Ind003.stVal
Ind126.stVal
Ind127.stVal
Ind07.stVal
Ind08.stVal
Ind09.stVal
Ind10.stVal
Ind11.stVal
Ind12.stVal
Ind13.stVal
Ind14.stVal
Ind15.stVal
Ind16.stVal
Ind17.stVal
Ind18.stVal
Ind19.stVal
Ind20.stVal
Ind21.stVal
Data Source Comment
TMB3A
TMB4A
TMB5A
TMB6A
TMB7A
TMB8A
TMB1B
TMB2B
TMB3B
TLED_20
TLED_21
TLED_22
TLED_23
TLED_24
TMB1A
TMB2A
TMB4B
TMB5B
TMB6B
TMB7B
TMB8B
VB001
VB002
VB003
VB126
VB127
TLED_5
TLED_6
TLED_7
TLED_8
TLED_9
TLED_10
TLED_11
TLED_12
TLED_13
TLED_14
TLED_15
TLED_16
TLED_17
TLED_18
TLED_19
Target LED 5
Target LED 6
Target LED 7
Target LED 8
Target LED 9
Target LED 10
Target LED 11
Target LED 12
Target LED 13
Target LED 14
Target LED 15
Target LED 16
Target LED 17
Target LED 18
Target LED 19
Target LED 20
Target LED 21
Target LED 22
Target LED 23
Target LED 24
Channel A Transmit Mirrored Bit 1
Channel A Transmit Mirrored Bit 2
Channel A Transmit Mirrored Bit 3
Channel A Transmit Mirrored Bit 4
Channel A Transmit Mirrored Bit 5
Channel A Transmit Mirrored Bit 6
Channel A Transmit Mirrored Bit 7
Channel A Transmit Mirrored Bit 8
Channel B Transmit Mirrored Bit 1
Channel B Transmit Mirrored Bit 2
Channel B Transmit Mirrored Bit 3
Channel B Transmit Mirrored Bit 4
Channel B Transmit Mirrored Bit 5
Channel B Transmit Mirrored Bit 6
Channel B Transmit Mirrored Bit 7
Channel B Transmit Mirrored Bit 8
Virtual Bit 001
Virtual Bit 002
Virtual Bit 003
Virtual Bit 126
Virtual Bit 127
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual
IEC 61850 Communications
Logical Nodes
C.5.39
SEL-411L Relay
C.5.40
IEC 61850 Communications
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement: SEL-400 Series Devices
Table 5.11
Logical Device: ANN (Annunciation) (Sheet 10 of 10)
Logical Node Attribute Data Source Comment
VBGGIO1
VBGGIO2
VBGGIO2
Ind128.stVal
Ind129.stVal
Ind130.stVal
VB128
VB129
VB130
Virtual Bit 128
Virtual Bit 129
Virtual Bit 130
VBGGIO2
VBGGIO2
VBGGIO2
VBGGIO2
Ind131.stVal
Ind254.stVal
Ind255.stVal
Ind256.stVal
VB131
VB254
VB255
VB256
Virtual Bit 131
Virtual Bit 254
Virtual Bit 255
Virtual Bit 256 a
Data attributes in the ST FC will provide high-speed GOOSE data if included in an outgoing GOOSE dataset.
SEL Nameplate Data
The CID file contains information that describes the physical device attributes according to IEC 61850 standards. The LN0 logical node of each logical device contains the Nameplate DOI (instantiated data object) with the following data.
Table 5.12
SEL Nameplate Data
Data Attribute
vendor swRev d configRev
1dNs
Value
“SEL”
Contents of FID string from ID command
Value of RID Global setting for CFG LD, otherwise, description of LD
Always 0
“IEC61850
-
8
-
4:2003”
Note that if the RID Global setting is changed, the “d” data attribute will only be updated if the relay power is cycled or if Port 5 settings are changed.
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement:
SEL-400 Series Devices
The tables below are as shown in the IEC 61850 standard, Part 8-1,
Section 24. Note that since the standard explicitly dictates which services and functions must be implemented to achieve conformance, only the optional services and functions are listed.
Table 5.13
PICS for A-Profile Support
A1
A2
Profile
Client/Server
GOOSE/GSE management
Client
N
Y
Server
Y
Y
Value/Comment
Only GOOSE, not GSSE management
A3
A4
GSSE
Time Sync
N
N
N
N
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement: SEL-400 Series Devices
C.5.41
Table 5.14
PICS for T-Profile Support
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
Profile
TCP/IP
OSI
GOOSE/GSE
GSSE
Time Sync
Client
N
N
Y
N
N
Server
Y
N
Y
N
N
Value/Comment
Only GOOSE, not GSSE
Refer to the ACSI Conformance Statements for information on the supported
services.
MMS Conformance
The manufacturing message specification (MMS) stack provides the basis for
many IEC 61850 protocol services. Table 5.15 defines the service support
requirement and restrictions of the MMS services in the SEL-400 series devices. Generally, only those services whose implementation is not mandatory are shown. Refer to the IEC 61850 standard Part 8-1 for more information.
Table 5.15
MMS Service Supported Conformance (Sheet 1 of 3)
MMS Service Supported CBB
Client-CR
Supported
Server-CR
Supported
Y
Y
Y status getNameList identify rename read write getVariableAccessAttributes defineNamedVariable defineScatteredAccess getScatteredAccessAttributes deleteVariableAccess defineNamedVariableList getNamedVariableListAttributes deleteNamedVariableList defineNamedType getNamedTypeAttributes deleteNamedType input output takeControl relinquishControl defineSemaphore deleteSemaphore
Y
Y
Y
Y
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.42
IEC 61850 Communications
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement: SEL-400 Series Devices
Table 5.15
MMS Service Supported Conformance (Sheet 2 of 3)
MMS Service Supported CBB
Client-CR
Supported
Server-CR
Supported
reportPoolSemaphoreStatus reportSemaphoreStatus initiateDownloadSequence downloadSegment terminateDownloadSequence initiateUploadSequence uploadSegment terminateUploadSequence requestDomainDownload requestDomainUpload loadDomainContent storeDomainContent deleteDomain getDomainAttributes createProgramInvocation deleteProgramInvocation start stop resume reset kill getProgramInvocationAttributes obtainFile defineEventCondition deleteEventCondition getEventConditionAttributes reportEventConditionStatus alterEventConditionMonitoring triggerEvent defineEventAction deleteEventAction alterEventEnrollment reportEventEnrollmentStatus getEventEnrollmentAttributes acknowledgeEventNotification getAlarmSummary getAlarmEnrollmentSummary readJournal writeJournal initializeJournal
Y
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement: SEL-400 Series Devices
C.5.43
Table 5.15
MMS Service Supported Conformance (Sheet 3 of 3)
MMS Service Supported CBB
Client-CR
Supported
Server-CR
Supported
reportJournalStatus createJournal deleteJournal fileOpen fileRead fileClose fileRename fileDelete fileDirectory unsolicitedStatus informationReport eventNotification attachToEventCondition attachToSemaphore conclude cancel getDataExchangeAttributes exchangeData defineAccessControlList getAccessControlListAttributes reportAccessControlledObjects deleteAccessControlList alterAccessControl reconfigureProgramInvocation
Y
Y
Y
Table 5.16 lists specific settings for the MMS parameter conformance
building block (CBB).
Table 5.16
MMS Parameter CBB
MMS Parameter CBB
STR1
STR2
VNAM
VADR
VALT
TPY
VLIS
CEI
Client-CR
Supported
Server-CR
Supported
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.44
IEC 61850 Communications
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement: SEL-400 Series Devices
The following variable access conformance statements are listed in the order specified in the IEC 61850 standard, Part 8-1. Generally, only those services whose implementation is not mandatory are shown. Refer to the IEC 61850 standard Part 8-1 for more information.
Table 5.17
AlternateAccessSelection Conformance Statement
AlternateAccessSelection
Client-CR
Supported
Server-CR
Supported
Y
Y accessSelection component index indexRange allElements alternateAccess selectAccess component index indexRange allElements
Y
Y
Y
Table 5.18
VariableAccessSpecification Conformance Statement
VariableAccessSpecification
Client-CR
Supported
listOfVariable variableSpecification alternateAccess variableListName
Server-CR
Supported
Y
Y
Y
Y
Table 5.19
VariableSpecification Conformance Statement
VariableSpecification
Client-CR
Supported
name address variableDescription scatteredAccessDescription invalidated
Server-CR
Supported
Y
Table 5.20
Read Conformance Statement (Sheet 1 of 2)
Read
Client-CR
Supported
Request specificationWithResult variableAccessSpecification
Server-CR
Supported
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement: SEL-400 Series Devices
C.5.45
Table 5.20
Read Conformance Statement (Sheet 2 of 2)
Read
Client-CR
Supported
Response variableAccessSpecification listOfAccessResult
Server-CR
Supported
Y
Y
Table 5.21
GetVariableAccessAttributes Conformance Statement
GetVariableAccessAttributes
Client-CR
Supported
Server-CR
Supported
Request name address
Response mmsDeletable address typeSpecification
Table 5.22
DefineNamedVariableList Conformance Statement
DefineVariableAccessAttributes
Client-CR
Supported
Server-CR
Supported
Request variableListName listOfVariable variableSpecification alternateAccess
Response
Table 5.23
GetNamedVariableListAttributes Conformance Statement
GetNamedVariableListAttributes
Client-CR
Supported
Server-CR
Supported
Request
ObjectName
Response mmsDeletable listOfVariable variableSpecification alternateAccess
Y
Y
Y
Y
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.46
IEC 61850 Communications
ACSI Conformance Statements
GOOSE Services
Conformance
Statement
Table 5.24
DeleteNamedVariableList Conformance Statement
DeleteNamedVariableList
Client-CR
Supported
Server-CR
Supported
Request
Scope listOfVariableListName domainName
Response numberMatched numberDeleted
DeleteNamedVariableList-Error
Table 5.25
GOOSE Conformance
GOOSE Services
SendGOOSEMessage
GetGoReference
GetGOOSEElementNumber
GetGoCBValues
SetGoCBValues
GSENotSupported
GOOSE Control Block (GoCB)
Subscriber Publisher Value/Comment
Y Y
Y
Y
Y
ACSI Conformance Statements
Table 5.26
Basic Conformance Statement (Sheet 1 of 2)
Services
Client/
Subscriber
Client-Server Roles
B11 Server side (of TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
B12 Client side (of TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
SCSMs Supported
B21 SCSM: IEC 6185-8-1 used
B22 SCSM: IEC 6185-9-1 used
B23 SCSM: IEC 6185-9-2 used
B24 SCSM: other
Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side
B32 Subscriber side Y
Server/
Publisher
Value/
Comments
Y
Y
Y
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
IEC 61850 Communications
ACSI Conformance Statements
C.5.47
Table 5.26
Basic Conformance Statement (Sheet 2 of 2)
Services
Client/
Subscriber
Transmission of Sampled Value Model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side
B42 Subscriber side
Table 5.27
ACSI Models Conformance Statement (Sheet 1 of 2)
If Server side (B11) Supported
Client/
Subscriber
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
Logical device
Logical node
Data
Data set
Substitution
Setting group control
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control
M7–1 sequence-number
M7–2 report-time-stamp
M7–3 reason-for-inclusion
M7–4 data-set-name
M7–5 data-reference
M7–6 buffer-overflow
M7–7 entryID
M7–8 BufTim
M7–9 IntgPd
M7–10 GI
M7–11 conf-revision
M8 Unbuffered report control
M8–1 sequence-number
M8–2 report-time-stamp
M8–3 reason-for-inclusion
M8–4 data-set-name
M8–5 data-reference
M8–6 BufTim
M8–7 IntgPd
M8–8 GI
M8–9 conf-revision
Logging
M9
M9–1
Log control
IntgPd
Server/
Publisher
Value/
Comments
Server/
Publisher
Value/
Comments
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.48
IEC 61850 Communications
ACSI Conformance Statements
Table 5.27
ACSI Models Conformance Statement (Sheet 2 of 2)
Client/
Subscriber
M10
M11
Log
Control
If GSE (B31/32) is Supported
M12
M13
GOOSE
GSSE
If SVC (41/42) is Supported
M14
M15
Multicast SVC
Unicast SVC
If Server or Client Side (B11/12) Supported
M16
M17
Time
File Transfer
Table 5.28
ACSI Service Conformance Statement (Sheet 1 of 3)
Services
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
S19
ServerDirectory
Associate
Abort
Release
LogicalDeviceDirectory
LogicalNodeDirectory
GetAllDataValues
GetDataValues
SetDataValues
GetDataDirectory
GetDataDefinition
GetDataSetValues
SetDataSetValues
CreateDataSet
DeleteDataSet
GetDataSetDirectory
SetDataValues
SelectActiveSG
SelectEditSG
AA: TP/MC Client (C)
Server
TP --
Application Association
--
--
TP
TP
TP
TP
--
Logical Device
TP --
Logical Node
TP
TP
--
--
Data
--
--
--
--
Data Set
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
Substitution
--
TP --
Setting Group Control
TP
TP
--
--
--
--
--
--
Server (S)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
Server/
Publisher
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Value/
Comments
Comments
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Table 5.28
ACSI Service Conformance Statement (Sheet 2 of 3)
Services AA: TP/MC Client (C)
S40
S41
S42
S43
S44
S35
S36
S37
S38
S39
S20
S21
S22
S23
S24
S24–1
S24–2
SetSGValues
ConfirmEditSGValues
TP
TP
GetSGValues TP
GetSGCBValues
Report data-change (dchg) qchg-change (qchg)
--
--
--
TP --
Reporting
Buffered Report Control Block (BRCB)
TP --
--
--
S24–3 data-update (dupd)
S25 GetBRCBValues
S26 SetBRCBValues
S27
S27–1
S27–2
S29
S30
S31
Report data-change (dchg) qchg-change (qchg)
S27–3 data-update (dup)
S28 GetURCBValues
SetURCBValues
GetLCBValues
SetLCBValues
TP
TP
--
--
--
Unbuffered Report Control Block (URCB)
TP --
--
--
TP
TP
Logging
Log Control Block
TP --
TP --
Log
--
--
--
S32
S33
S34
QueryLogByTime TP
QueryLogByEntry
GetLogStatusValues
TP
TP
--
--
--
Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
SendGOOSEMessage
GetReference
GetGOOSEElementNumber
GetGoCBValues
SetGoCBValues
MC
TP
TP
TP
TP
--
--
--
--
--
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
SendGSSEMessage
GetReference
GetGSSEElementNumber
GetGsCBValues
SetGsCBValues
MC
TP
TP
TP
TP
--
--
--
--
--
Server (S)
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
IEC 61850 Communications
ACSI Conformance Statements
C.5.49
Comments
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.5.50
IEC 61850 Communications
ACSI Conformance Statements
Table 5.28
ACSI Service Conformance Statement (Sheet 3 of 3)
S45
S46
S47
S48
S49
S50
S51
S52
S53
S54
S55
S56
S57
S58
S59
S60
T1
T2
T3
Services
SendMSVMessage
GetMSVCBValues
SetMSVCBValues
AA: TP/MC Client (C) Server (S)
Transmission of Sampled Value Model (SVC)
Multicast SVC
MC
TP
TP
Unicast SVC
--
--
--
N
N
N
--
--
--
N
N
N
SendUSVMessage
GetUSVCBValues
SetUSVCBValues
TP
TP
TP
Control
Select
SelectWithValue TP
Cancel TP
Operate
Command-Termination
TP
TP
TimeActivated-Operate
GetFile
TP
File Transfer
TP
--
--
--
--
--
--
-Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
SetFile
DeleteFile
GetFileAttributeValues
TP
TP
TP
--
--
--
Y
Y
Y
Comments
DeleteFile is supported, however, there are no files that can be deleted as of this writing.
DeleteFile is supported, however, there are no files that can be deleted as of this writing.
DeleteFile is supported, however, there are no files that can be deleted as of this writing.
DeleteFile is supported, however, there are no files that can be deleted as of this writing.
Time
Time resolution of internal clock
Time accuracy of internal clock
Supported TimeStamp resolution n = 10 n = 18 n = 18
T2
T3
T4
T5 nearest negative power of 2 in seconds
T0
T1
Nearest negative power of 2 in seconds
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Section 6
C.Communications Manual
Synchrophasors
Overview
The relay provides phasor measurement unit (PMU) capabilities when connected to a suitable IRIG
-
B time source. Synchrophasor is used as a general term that can refer to data or protocols.
This section covers:
➤
➤
➤
➤
➤
➤
Synchrophasor Measurement on page C.6.3
Settings for Synchrophasors on page C.6.6
Synchrophasor Relay Word Bits on page C.6.23
Synchrophasor Analog Quantities on page C.6.25
View Synchrophasors by Using the MET PM Command on page C.6.27
➤
➤
➤
➤
C37.118 Synchrophasor Protocol on page C.6.28
Real-Time Control Example on page C.6.34
SEL Fast Message Synchrophasor Protocol on page C.6.37
Synchrophasor Protocols and SEL Fast Operate Commands on page C.6.42
See Relay Configuration for High-Accuracy Timekeeping on page P.13.1 for the requirements of the IRIG
-
B time source. Synchrophasors are still measured if the high-accuracy time source is not connected, however, the data are not time-synchronized to any external reference, as indicated by Relay
Word bit TSOK = logical 0.
Introduction
Date Code 20151029
The word synchrophasor is derived from synchronized phasor. Synchrophasor measurement refers to the concept of providing measurements taken on a synchronized schedule in multiple locations. A high-accuracy clock, commonly a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver such as the
SEL-2407
®
Satellite-Synchronized Clock, makes synchrophasor measurement possible.
The availability of an accurate time reference over a large geographic area allows multiple devices, such as a number of relays, to synchronize the gathering of power system data. The accurate clock allows precise event report triggering and other off-line analysis functions.
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.2
Synchrophasors
Introduction
SEL-411L Relay
The Global settings class contains the synchrophasor settings, including the choice of synchrophasor protocol and the synchrophasor data set the relay will transmit. The Port settings class selects which serial port(s) are reserved for synchrophasor protocol use.
The high-accuracy timekeeping function generates status Relay Word bits and time-quality information that is important for synchrophasor measurement.
Some protection SEL
OGIC
variables, and programmable digital trigger information (C37.118 protocol only) is also added to the Relay Word bits for
synchrophasors (see Synchrophasor Relay Word Bits).
When synchrophasor measurement is enabled, the relay creates the synchrophasor data set at a rate of either 50 or 60 times per second, depending on the nominal system frequency (Global setting NFREQ). This dataset, including time-of-sample, is available in analog quantities in the relay (see
Synchrophasor Analog Quantities). You can view synchrophasor data over a
serial port set to PROTO := SEL (see View Synchrophasors by Using the MET
The value of synchrophasor data increases greatly when the data can be shared over a communications network in real time. Two synchrophasor protocols are available in the relay that allow for a centralized device to collect data efficiently from several phasor measurement units (PMUs). Some possible uses of a system-wide synchrophasor system include the following:
➤
➤
➤
➤
Power-system state measurement
Wide-area network protection and control schemes
Small-signal analysis
Power-system disturbance analysis
The SEL
-
3306 Synchrophasor Processor is a PC-based communications processor specifically designed to interface with PMUs. The SEL
-
3306 has two primary functions. The first is to collect and correlate synchrophasor data from multiple PMUs. The second is to then compact and transmit synchrophasor data either to a data historian for post-analysis or to visualization software for real-time viewing of a power system.
The SEL
-
3378 Synchrophasor Vector Processor (SVP) is a real-time synchrophasor programmable logic controller. Use the SVP to collect synchrophasor messages from relays and phasor measurement units (PMUs).
The SVP time-aligns incoming messages, processes these messages with an internal logic engine, and sends control command to external devices to perform user-defined actions. Additionally, the SVP can send calculated or derived data to devices such as other SVPs, phasor data concentrators (PDCs), and monitoring systems.
In any installation, the relay can use only one of the synchrophasor message formats, SEL Fast Message Synchrophasor, or C37.118, as selected by Global setting MFRMT. However, the chosen format is available on multiple serial ports when port setting(s) PROTO := PMU.
With either the SEL Fast Message or C37.118 synchrophasor format, the relay can receive control operation commands over the same channel used for synchrophasor data transmission. These commands are SEL Fast Operate
messages, which are described in SEL Fast Meter, Fast Operate, Fast SER
Messages, and Fast Message Data Access on page C.2.8.
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Recording Files
Real-Time Control
Synchrophasors
Synchrophasor Measurement
C.6.3
After enabling the data recording function with the Global EPMDR settings, record synchrophasor data using the PMTRIG setting. When PMTRIG asserts, the relay records synchrophasor data in binary format (IEEE C37.118 data format compliant) for the duration specified with the PMLER setting.
The relay stores these files in the synchrophasor subdirectory in the relay. Use
FILE READ or FTP to retrieve the stored data files.
You can configure the relay to receive C37.118 protocol synchrophasor data.
The relay receives the data over a serial connection and stores these data in
Analog Quantities. Time-alignment is automatic. Use the local phasor data and as many as two remote sets of phasor data in SEL
OGIC
equations.
Synchrophasor Measurement
NOTE:
The synchrophasor data stream is separate from the other protection and metering functions.
The phasor measurement unit in the relay measures four three-phase signals on a constant-time basis. The three-phase signals can be any combination of voltage or current inputs available in the relay. The samples are synchronized to the high-accuracy IRIG time source, and occur at a fixed frequency of either
60 Hz or 50 Hz, depending on Global setting NFREQ. The relay then filters the measurement samples according to Global setting PMAPP := F, N, or 1
(see PMAPP). The phase angle is measured relative to an absolute time
reference, which is represented by a cosine function in Figure 6.1. The time-
of-day is shown for the two time marks.
10:00:00.000000
10:00:00.016667
Date Code 20151029 t
Figure 6.1
High-Accuracy Clock Controls Reference Signal (60 Hz System)
The instrumentation transformers (PTs or CTs) and the interconnecting cables may introduce a time shift in the measured signal. Global settings VkCOMP
(k = Y, Z) and InCOMP (n = W, X), entered in degrees, are added to the measured phasor angles to create the corrected phasor angles, as shown in
Figure 6.2, Figure 6.3, and Equation 6.1. The VkCOMP and InCOMP settings
may be positive or negative values.
V
A
(t)
94.851
Δt pt
0 t
–94.851
Measured
Waveform
Actual
Waveform
Figure 6.2
Waveform at Relay Terminals May Have a Phase Shift
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.4
Synchrophasors
Synchrophasor Measurement
Compensation Angle
=
=
t
----------------------------------
360
• freq nominal
t pt freq nominal
360
Equation 6.1
If the time shift on the PT measurement path frequency, freq angle: nominal
t pt
= 0.784 ms and the nominal
= 60 Hz, use Equation 6.2 to obtain the correction
0.784 10
–
3 s 60s
–
1
360
=
16.934
.
Equation 6.2
Imaginary
M
M
V
A corrected
Real
Compensation Angle
V
A measured
Figure 6.3
Correction of Measured Phase Angle
For a sinusoidal signal, the phasor magnitude is calculated as shown in
Equation 6.3. The phasors are rms values scaled in primary units, as
determined by Group settings PTRY or PTRZ (for the presently selected voltage source, Y or Z, respectively), CRTW, and CTRX (for the presently selected current source W or X, respectively).
Magnitude M
=
V
---------
2
•
PTR setting
Equation 6.3
With PTRY = 2000 and the signal in Figure 6.2 (with peak voltage
V pk
= 94.851 V), use Equation 6.4 to obtain the magnitude, VAYPMM.
VAYPMM
=
=
=
94.851
2000
2
•
134140 V
134.140 kV
Equation 6.4
Finally, the magnitude and angle pair for each synchrophasor is converted to a
real and imaginary pair using Equation 6.5 and Equation 6.6. For example,
analog quantities VAYPMM and VAYPMA are converted to VAYPMI and
VAYPMR. An example phasor with an angle measurement of 104.400° is
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
Synchrophasor Measurement
C.6.5
Accuracy
NOTE:
When the relay is in the fast response mode (Global setting
PMAPP := F), the TVE is within specified limits only when the out of band interfering signals influence quantity is not included.
VAYPMR = —33.359 kV
Imaginary
VAYPMI =
129.926 kV
VAYPMM =
134.140 kV
VAYPMA =
104.400°
Real
Figure 6.4
Example Calculation of Real and Imaginary Components of
Synchrophasor
Real part
=
M
• cos (angle)
Equation 6.5
Imaginary part
=
M
• sin (angle)
Equation 6.6
Using the magnitude M from Equation 6.4, the real part is given in
VAYPMR
=
134.140 kV cos 104.400
=
–33.359 kV
Equation 6.7
Similarly, the imaginary part is calculated in Equation 6.8
VAYPMI
=
134.140 kV
• sin 104.400
=
129.926 kV
Equation 6.8
Because the sampling reference is based on the GPS clock (IRIG
-
B signal) and not synchronized to the power system, an examination of successive synchrophasor data sets will almost always show some angular change between samples of the same signal. This is not a malfunction of the relay or the power system, but is merely a result of viewing data from one system with an instrument with an independent time base. In other words, a power system has a nominal frequency of either 50 or 60 Hz, but on closer examination, it is usually running a little faster or slower than the precise 50 or 60 Hz reference.
The listed relay phasor measurement accuracy is valid when frequency-based phasor compensation is enabled (Global setting PHCOMP := Y), and when the phasor measurement application setting is in the narrow bandwidth mode
(Global setting PMAPP := N).
See IEEE C37.118 for an explanation of total vector error and for accuracy definitions and conditions.
The relay synchrophasor measurement accuracy is TVE (total vector error)
1% for one or more of the following influence quantities:
➤
➤
➤
➤
➤
➤
Signal Frequency Range: ±5 Hz of nominal (50 Hz or 60 Hz)
Voltage Magnitude Range: 30 V – 150 V
Current Magnitude Range: (0.1 – 2) • INOM, (INOM = 1 A or 5 A)
Phase Angle Range: –179.99° to 180°
Harmonic distortion
10% (any harmonic)
Out of band interfering signals
10%
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.6
Synchrophasors
Settings for Synchrophasors
The out-of-band interfering signal frequency (f i
) must satisfy:
| f i
– NFREQ | > MRATE/2, where NFREQ is nominal system frequency and MRATE is the message rate, as defined in IEEE C37.118.
Settings for Synchrophasors
Synchrophasor settings are found within Global settings as well as specific port settings.
Global Settings
The phasor measurement unit (PMU) settings are listed in Table 6.1. Make
these settings when you want to use the C37.118 synchrophasor protocol, or if you want to use synchrophasor analog quantities.
All 12 channels are available for current and/or voltage collection. From these
12 channels, the relay calculates up to 20 phasor values: three phase quantities and the positive-sequence value for the particular three phase quantities.
Furthermore, at least one winding (group of three channels) must be a voltage winding (Y or Z), and one other winding must be a current winding (W, X, S).
S represents the combined terminal (W + X) winding. The remaining channels can be any combination of voltage or current.
The Global enable setting EPMU must be set to Y before the remaining synchrophasor settings are available. No synchrophasor data collection can take place when EPMU := N.
When the Global setting MFRMT := C37.118, the Global setting IRIGC,
shown in Table 6.2, is forced to C37.118.
The Global settings for the SEL Fast Message synchrophasor protocol are a
subset of the Table 6.1 settings and are listed separately (see SEL Fast
Message Synchrophasor Protocol).
Table 6.1
PMU Settings in the Relay for C37.118 Protocol in Global Settings (Sheet 1 of 2)
Setting Description
EPMU
MFRMT
Enable Synchronized Phasor Measurement (Y, N)
Message Format (C37.118, FM) b
MRATE
PMAPP
Messages per Second
(1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30, or 60)
PMU Application (F = Fast Response, N = Narrow Bandwidth, 1 = Extra Narrow
PMLEGCY Synchrophasor Legacy Settings (Y, N) c
)
PHCOMP Frequency-Based Phasor Compensation (Y, N)
PMSTN
PMID
PHVOLT
PHDATAV
Station Name (16 characters)
PMU Hardware ID (1–65534)
Include Voltage Terminal d
Phasor Data Set, Voltages (V1, PH, ALL, NA)
PMFRQST PMU Primary Frequency Source Terminal (Y, Z)
PMFRQA
VkCOMP e
PHCURR
Frequency Application (F = Fast, S = Smooth)
Voltage Angle Compensation Factor (–179.99 to 180 degrees)
Include Current Terminal f
Default
N a
C37.118
2
Y
S
0.00
W
N
Y
Y
STATION A
1
Y
V1
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
Settings for Synchrophasors
C.6.7
Table 6.1
PMU Settings in the Relay for C37.118 Protocol in Global Settings (Sheet 2 of 2)
Setting Description
PHDATAI
InCOMP g
PHNR h
FNR
NUMANA
Phasor Data Set, Currents (I1, PH, ALL, NA)
Current Angle Compensation Factor (–179.99 to 180 degrees)
Phasor Numeric Representation (I = Integer, F = Floating point)
Phasor Format (R = Rectangular coordinates, P = Polar coordinates)
Frequency Numeric Representation (I = Integer, F = Float)
Number of Analog Values (0–16)
NUMDSW Number of 16-bit Digital Status Words (0, 1, 2, 3, 4)
TREA1 Trigger Reason Bit 1 (SEL
OGIC
Control Equation)
TREA2
TREA3
Trigger Reason Bit 2 (SEL
Trigger Reason Bit 3 (SEL
OGIC
OGIC
Control Equation)
Control Equation)
TREA4
PMTRIG
PMTEST
EPMDR
CONAM i
PMPRE
RTCRATE
Trigger Reason Bit 4 (SEL
OGIC
Control Equation)
Trigger (SEL
OGIC
Control Equation)
PMU in Test Mode (SEL
OGIC
Equation)
Enable PMU Data Recording (Y,N)
Company Name (3 characters)
Length of PMU Triggered Data (2–120 s)
Length of PMU Pretriggered Data (1–20 s)
Remote Messages per Second
(1, 2, 5, 10, or 50 when NFREQ := 50)
(1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30, or 60 when NFREQ := 60)
MRTCDLY Maximum RTC Synchrophasor Packet Delay (20–10000 ms) d e f g i h a b c
Set EPMU := Y to access the remaining settings.
C37.118 = IEEE C37.118 Standard; FM := SEL Fast Message.
Option 1 is available only if MRATE = 60.
Any combination of Y, Z.
k = Y, Z.
Any combination of W, X, S.
n = W, X.
Setting hidden when PHDATAV := NA and PHDATAI := NA.
Setting hidden when EPMDR = N.
500
Table 6.2
Time and Date Management in Global Settings
Label Prompt
IRIGC a
IRIG-B Control Bits Definition (None, C37.118) a
When MFRMT := C37.118, IRIGC is forced to C37.118.
Default
None
Certain settings in Table 6.1 are hidden, depending on the status of other
settings. For example, PHDATAV := NA and PHDATAI := NA, the PHNR and
PHFMT settings are hidden to limit the number of settings for your synchrophasor application.
Descriptions of Global Synchrophasor Settings
Definitions for some of the settings in Table 6.1 are as follows.
MFRMT
Selects the message format for synchrophasor data streaming on serial ports.
SEL recommends the use of MFRMT := C37.118 for any new PMU applications because of increased setting flexibility and the expected
Default
NA
NA
NA
N
1
NA
NA
NA
5
2 abc
30
I
0
I
R
NA
0.00
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.8
Synchrophasors
Settings for Synchrophasors
availability of software for synchrophasor processors. The relay still includes the MFRMT := FM setting choice to maintain compatibility in any systems presently using SEL Fast Message synchrophasors.
MRATE
Selects the message rate in messages per second for synchrophasor data streaming on serial ports.
Choose the MRATE setting that suits the needs of your PMU application. This setting is one of ten settings that determine the minimum port SPEED necessary to support the synchrophasor data packet rate and size (see
Communications Bandwidth for detailed information).
PMAPP
Selects the type of digital filters used in the synchrophasor algorithm:
➤
The Narrow Bandwidth setting (N) represents filters with a cutoff frequency approximately 1/4 of MRATE. The response in the frequency domain is narrower, and response in the time domain is slower. This method results in synchrophasor data that are free of aliasing signals and well suited for postdisturbance analysis.
➤
The Fast Response setting (F) represents filters with a higher cutoff frequency. The response in the frequency domain is wider and the response in the time domain is faster. This method results in synchrophasor data that can be used in synchrophasor applications requiring more speed in tracing system parameters.
➤
The Filter One setting (1) represents filters that have a response much narrower than the narrow bandwidth filters. This method has a better step response with overshoot within 7.5 percent.
This filter is available only for MRATE = 60.
PMLEGCY
This setting is provided for supporting legacy synchrophasor settings. SEL
recommends setting this to N to access the latest features. See Synchrophasor
Legacy Settings = N, for more details.
PHCOMP
Enables or disables frequency-based compensation for synchrophasors.
For most applications, set PHCOMP := Y to activate the algorithm that compensates for the magnitude and angle errors of synchrophasors for frequencies that are off nominal. Use PHCOMP := N if you are concentrating the relay synchrophasor data with other PMU data that do not employ frequency compensation.
For PMAPP = F or N, the PMU only compensates if the estimated frequency is ±5 Hz of nominal frequency. For PMAPP = 1 the PMU compensates if the frequency is ±2 Hz of nominal frequency.
NOTE:
The PMSTN setting is not the same as the Global setting SID
(Station Identifier) for the relay, even though they share the same factory default value.
PMSTN and PMID
Defines the name and number of the PMU.
The PMSTN setting is an ASCII string with as many as 16 characters. The
PMID setting is a numeric value. Use your utility or synchrophasor data concentrator naming convention to determine these settings.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
Settings for Synchrophasors
C.6.9
PHVOLT, PHDATAV, and VkCOMP
PHDATAV and PHVOLT select which voltage synchrophasors to include in the data packet. Consider the burden on your synchrophasor processor and offline storage requirements when deciding how much data to transmit. These are two of eight settings that determine the minimum port SPEED necessary
to support the synchrophasor data packet rate and size (see Communications
Bandwidth for detailed information).
➤
➤
➤
➤
PHDATAV := V1 will transmit only positive-sequence voltage,
V
1
PHDATAV = PH will transmit phase voltages only (V
A
V
C
)
, V
B
,
PHDATAV := ALL will transmit V
1
, V
A
, V
B
, and V
C
PHDATAV := NA will not transmit any voltages
PHVOLT selects the voltage sources for the synchrophasor data selected by
PHDATAV.
➤
PHVOLT := Y uses the voltage measured on the VAY, VBY,
VCY inputs
➤
PHVOLT := Z uses the voltage measured on the VAZ, VBZ,
VCZ inputs
➤
PHVOLT := Y, Z uses the voltage measured on the Y and Z three-phase voltage inputs to the relay
Table 6.3 describes the order of synchrophasors inside the data packet.
The VkCOMP (k = any combination of Y, Z voltage terminals) setting allows correction for any steady-state voltage phase errors (from the potential
transformers or wiring characteristics). See Synchrophasor Measurement for
details on this setting.
PHCURR, PHDATAI, and InCOMP
PHDATAI and PHCURR select which current synchrophasors to include in the data packet. Consider the burden on your synchrophasor processor and offline storage requirements when deciding how much data to transmit. These settings are two of the eight settings that determine the minimum port SPEED necessary to support the synchrophasor data packet rate and size (see
Communications Bandwidth for detailed information).
➤
➤
➤
➤
PHDATAI := I1 will transmit only positive-sequence current, I
1
PHDATAI := PH transmits phase currents (I
A
, I
B
, I
C
)
PHDATAI := ALL will transmit I
1
, I
A
, I
B
, and I
C
PHDATAI := NA will not transmit any currents
PHCURR selects the source current(s) for the synchrophasor data selected by
PHDATAI. Use the PHCURR setting to select any combination of current
Terminals W and X. For example:
➤
PHCURR := W uses the currents measured on the W terminal current inputs (IAW, IBW, ICW)
➤
PHCURR := W, X uses the currents measured on the W, X terminal current inputs (IAW, IBW, ICW, IAX, IBX, ICX)
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.10
Synchrophasors
Settings for Synchrophasors
SEL-411L Relay
➤
PHCURR = W, X, S uses the currents measured on the W, X terminal inputs and also includes the combined terminal
(W+X) current. (IAW, IBW, ICW, IAX, IBX, ICX, IAS, IBS,
ICS)
Table 6.3 describes the order of synchrophasors inside the data packet.
The InCOMP (n = any combination of W, X current terminals) settings allow correction for any steady-state phase errors (from the current transformers or
wiring characteristics). See Synchrophasor Measurement for details on these
settings.
Table 6.3
Synchrophasor Order in Data Stream (Voltages and Currents)
Synchrophasors a
(Analog Quantity Names)
Polar b
Rectangular c
Included When Global
Settings Are as Follows:
Magnitude
V1mPMM d
Angle
V1mPMA
Real
V1mPMR
Imaginary
V1mPMI
PHDATAV := V1 or ALL
VAmPMM
VBmPMM
VAmPMA
VBmPMA
VAmPMR
VBmPMR
VAmPMI
VBmPMI PHDATAV := PH or ALL
VCmPMM
I1nPMM
IAnPMM
IBnPMM
ICnPMM e
VCmPMA
I1nPMA
IAnPMA
IBnPMA
ICnPMA
VCmPMR
I1nPMR
IAnPMR
IBnPMR
ICnPMR
VCmPMI
I1nPMI
IAnPMI
IBnPMI
ICnPMI
PHDATAI := I1 or ALL
PHDATAI := PH or ALL b c d a e
Synchrophasors are included in the order shown (i.e., voltages, if selected, will always precede currents).
Polar coordinate values are sent when PHFMT := P.
Rectangular (real and imaginary) values are sent when PHFMT := R.
Where: m = Y if PHVOLT includes Y m = Z if PHVOLT includes Z.
Where: n = W if PHCURR includes W n = X if PHCURR includes X n = S if PHCURR includes S.
PMFRQST
Selects the voltage terminal (Y or Z) that will be the primary source of the system frequency for the PMU calculations. For example, if PMFRQST = Y, then the Y PT terminal is the source for frequency estimation. Similarly, if
PMFRQST = Z, then the Z PT terminal is the source for frequency estimation.
PMFRQA
Selects the PMU frequency application. A setting of S sets a smooth frequency application. A setting of F selects a fast frequency application.
The frequency application is used in the calculation of the rate of change of frequency for a given analog signal. A smooth frequency application setting
(PMFRQA = S) uses 9 cycles of data for the rate of change calculation. A fast frequency application setting (PMFRQS = F) uses 3 cycles of data for the rate of change calculation.
The fast frequency application will detect rapid changes in frequency faster, but will also contain more low-level oscillations. The slow frequency application will provide a rate of change profile that is smoother, but slower to respond to rapid frequency fluctuations.
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
Settings for Synchrophasors
C.6.11
PHNR
Selects the numeric representation of voltage and current phasor data in the synchrophasor data stream.
This setting is one of eight settings that determine the minimum port SPEED necessary to support the synchrophasor data packet rate and size (see
Communications Bandwidth for detailed information).
The choices for this setting depend on synchrophasor processor requirements.
Setting PHNR := I sends each voltage and/or current synchrophasor as
2 two-byte integer values. In this representation, synchrophasor current measurements have an upper limit of 7 • I
NOM depending on the current input rating.
, where I
NOM
= 1 A or 5 A,
Setting PHNR := F sends each voltage and/or current synchrophasor as
2 four-byte floating-point values.
The PHFMT setting determines the format of the data.
PHFMT
Selects the phasor representation of voltage and current phasor data in the synchrophasor data stream.
The choices for this setting depend on synchrophasor processor requirements.
Setting PHFMT := R (rectangular) sends each voltage and/or current synchrophasor as a pair of signed real and imaginary values.
Setting PHFMT := P (polar) sends each voltage and/or current synchrophasor as a magnitude and angle pair. The angle is in radians when PHNR := F, and in radians • 10
4
when PHNR := I. The range is as follows:
–
< angle .
In both the rectangular and polar representations, the values are scaled in rms
(root mean square) units. For example, a synchrophasor with a magnitude of
1.0 at an angle of –30 degrees will have a real component of 0.866, and an
imaginary component of –0.500. See Synchrophasor Measurement for a
sample conversion between polar and rectangular coordinates.
FNR
Selects the numeric representation of the two frequency values in the synchrophasor data stream.
This setting is one of eight settings that determine the minimum port SPEED necessary to support the synchrophasor data packet rate and size (see
Communications Bandwidth for detailed information).
The choices for this setting depend on synchrophasor processor requirements.
Setting FNR := I sends the frequency data as a difference from nominal frequency, NFREQ, with the following formula:
(FREQ measured
– NFREQ) • 1000 represented as a signed, two-byte value.
Setting FNR := I also sends the rate-of-change of frequency data with scaling.
DFDT measured
• 100 represented as a signed, two-byte value.
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.12
Synchrophasors
Settings for Synchrophasors
Setting FNR := F sends the measured frequency data and rate-of-change-offrequency as two four-byte, floating point values.
Phasor Aliases in Data Configuration q
Phasor Name, Alias Name
This is a free-form setting category with two arguments. Specify the phasor name and a 16-character alias name to be included in the synchrophasor data
stream q. See Table 6.11 and Table 6.12 for a list of default phasor names that
the PMU supports. The PMU can be configured for as many as 32 unique phasors for each PMU data configuration.
Analog Quantities in Data Configuration q
Analog Quantity Name, Alias Name
This is a free-form setting category with two arguments. Specify the analog quantity name and an optional 16-character alias to be included in the synchrophasor data stream q. See Section 17: Analog Quantities for a list of analog quantities that the PMU supports. The PMU can be configured for as many as 16 unique analog quantities for each data configuration q. The analog quantities are floating point values, so each analog quantity the PMU includes will take four bytes.
NUMANA Setting
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
8
NUMANA
Selects the number of user-definable analog values to be included in the synchrophasor data stream.
This setting is one of eight settings that determine the minimum port SPEED necessary to support the synchrophasor data packet rate and size (see
Communications Bandwidth for detailed information).
The choices for this setting depend on the synchrophasor system design.
Setting NUMANA := 0 sends no user-definable analog values.
Setting NUMANA := 1–16 sends the user-definable analog values, as
The format of the user-defined analog data is always floating point, and each value occupies four bytes.
Table 6.4
User-Defined Analog Values Selected by the NUMANA Setting (Sheet 1 of 2)
Analog Quantities Sent
None
PMV64
Above, plus PMV63
Above, plus PMV62
Above, plus PMV61
Above, plus PMV60
Above, plus PMV59
Above, plus PMV58
Above, plus PMV57
Total Number of Bytes
Used for Analog Values
16
20
24
28
0
4
8
12
32
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
Settings for Synchrophasors
C.6.13
Table 6.4
User-Defined Analog Values Selected by the NUMANA Setting
NUMANA Setting
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Analog Quantities Sent
Above, plus PMV55
Above, plus PMV54
Above, plus PMV53
Above, plus PMV52
Above, plus PMV51
Above, plus PMV50
Above, plus PMV49
Total Number of Bytes
Used for Analog Values
40
44
48
52
56
60
64
NUMDSW
Selects the number of user-definable digital status words to be included in the synchrophasor data stream.
This setting is one of eight settings that determine the minimum port SPEED necessary to support the synchrophasor data packet rate and size (see
Communications Bandwidth for detailed information).
The choices for this setting depend on the synchrophasor system design. The inclusion of binary data can help indicate breaker status or other operational
data to the synchrophasor processor. See PMU Setting Example for a
suggested use of the digital status word fields.
Setting NUMDSW := 0 sends no user-definable binary status words.
Setting NUMDSW := 1, 2, 3, or 4 sends the user-definable binary status
words, as listed in Table 6.5.
Table 6.5
User-Defined Digital Status Words Selected by the NUMDSW Setting
NUMDSW Setting Digital Status Words Sent
0
1
2
Total Number of Bytes
Used for Digital Values
0
2
4
3
4
None
[PSV64, PSV63 … PSV49]
[PSV64, PSV63 … PSV49]
[PSV48, PSV47 … PSV33]
[PSV64, PSV63 … PSV49]
[PSV48, PSV47 … PSV33]
[PSV32, PSV31 … PSV17]
[PSV64, PSV63 … PSV49]
[PSV48, PSV47 … PSV33]
[PSV32, PSV31 … PSV17]
[PSV16, PSV15 … PSV01]
6
8
NOTE:
The PM Trigger function is not associated with the Event
Report Trigger ER for the relay, a
SEL
OGIC
control equation in the
Group settings class.
TREA1, TREA2, TREA3, TREA4, and PMTRIG
Defines the programmable trigger bits as allowed by IEEE C37.118.
Each of the four Trigger Reason settings, TREA1–TREA4, and the PMU
Trigger setting, PMTRIG, are SEL
OGIC
control equations in the Global settings class. The relay evaluates these equations and places the results in
Relay Word bits with the same names: TREA1–TREA4 and PMTRIG.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.14
Synchrophasors
Settings for Synchrophasors
NOTE:
Select PMTRIG trigger conditions to assert PMTRIG only once during a four-hour period.
The trigger reason equations represent the Trigger Reason bits in the STAT field of the data packet. After the trigger reason bits are set to convey a message, the PMTRIG equation should be asserted for a reasonable amount of time, to allow the synchrophasor processor to read the TREA1–TREA4 fields.
The IEEE C37.118 standard defines the first eight of 16 binary combinations of these trigger reason bits (bits 0–3).
The remaining eight binary combinations are available for user definition.
Table 6.6
PM Trigger Reason Bits—IEEE C37.118 Assignments
TREA4
(bit 3)
TREA3
(bit 2)
TREA2
(bit 1)
TREA1
(bit 0) Hexadecimal
Meaning a
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0A
0x0B
0x0C
0x0D
0x0E
Digital
User
User
User
User
User
User
User
1 1 1 1 0x0F a
When PMTRIG is asserted. The terminology comes from IEEE C37.118.
User
Manual
Magnitude Low
Magnitude High
Phase Angle Diff.
Frequency High/Low df/dt High
Reserved
The relay does not automatically set the TREA1–TREA4 or PMTRIG Relay
Word bits—these bits must be programmed.
These bits may be used to send various messages at a low bandwidth via the synchrophasor message stream. Digital Status Words may also be used to send binary information directly, without the need to manage the coding of the trigger reason messages in SEL
OGIC
.
Use these Trigger Reason bits if your synchrophasor system design requires these bits. The synchrophasor processing and protocol transmission are not affected by the status of these bits.
EPMDR
Use the EPMDR setting to enable phasor measurement unit (PMU) data recording. When EPMDR = Y, phasor measurement data recording will begin on the rising edge of PMTRIG. Any subsequent PMTRIG assertions during the allotted recording period (PMLER) will not result in another PMU data recording being started. The relay will store synchrophasor measurement data as a C37.118 binary format file that can be retrieved from the relay using File
Transfer Protocol. Synchrophasor data are recorded into a file with extension
*.PMU.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
Settings for Synchrophasors
C.6.15
CONAM
The CONAM setting provides a means for inserting a text field into the captured phasor file name. The CONAM setting is three characters long. The settings allows all printable characters except “ / \ < > * | : ; [ ] $ % { }. The name of the *.PMU file will be as follows: yymmdd,hhmmss,0,aaa,bbbb,ccc.PMU
where ccc is the CONAM setting.
PMLER
PMLER sets the total length of the phasor measurement recording, in seconds.
The PMLER time includes the PMPRE time. For example, if PMLER is set for 30 seconds of PMU recorded data, and PMPRE is set for 10 seconds of pretrigger data, the final recording will contain 10 seconds of pretrigger data and 20 seconds of triggered data for a total report time of 30 seconds.
PMPRE
The PMPRE setting sets the length of the pretrigger data within the phasor measurement recording. The PMPRE data begins at the PMTRIG point of the recording, and extends back in time (previous time to the trigger event) for the designated amount of time.
NOTE:
The maximum channel delay is available in the COM RTC command.
MRTCDLY
Selects the maximum acceptable delay for received synchrophasor messages.
When the relay is operating as a synchrophasor client (PMUMODE set to
CLIENTA or CLIENTB), it only accepts incoming messages that are not older than allowed by this setting. When determining an appropriate value for this setting, consider the channel delay, the transfer time at the selected data rate, plus add some margin for internal delays in both the remote and local relay.
RTCRATE
Rate at which to expect messages from the remote synchrophasor device.
When the relay is operating as a synchrophasor client (PMUMODE set to
CLIENTA or CLIENTB), the relay will only accept incoming messages at this rate. Make sure the remote synchrophasor source(s) is configured to send messages at this same rate.
PMUMODE
Selects whether the port is operating as a synchrophasor server (source of data) or a client (consumer of data).
When the port is intended to be a source of synchrophasor data, set this setting to SERVER. The Global setting MFRMT determines the format of the transmitted data.
When using the port to receive synchrophasor data from another device, set this setting to either CLIENTA or CLIENTB. Only two ports may be configured as client ports and they must be uniquely configured for channel A or channel B. When a port is configured to receive synchrophasor data, the port will only receive data using the C37.118 format, regardless of the
MFRMT setting.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.16
Synchrophasors
Settings for Synchrophasors
Port Settings
RTCID
Expected synchrophasor ID from remote relay.
When the relay is operating as a synchrophasor client (PMUMODE set to
CLIENTA or CLIENTB), it will only accept incoming messages that contain this ID. Make sure this ID matches the ID configured in the remote relay.
The port settings found in Table 6.7 are used to send synchrophasor data over
a serial port. Note that relay's synchrophasor data can be viewed from any serial port when issuing the MET PM ASCII command even if that port hasn't been configured to send synchrophasor data (PROTO is not set to PMU), as long as synchrophasors have been enabled with the Global setting
EPMU := Y.
Table 6.7
Serial Port Settings for Synchrophasors
Setting
PROTO
SPEED
STOPBIT
RTSCTS
Description
Protocol (SEL, DNP3, MBA, MBB,
MBGA, MBGB, RTD, PMU) a,b
Data Speed (300 to 57600)
Stop Bits (1, 2)
Enable Hardware Handshaking (Y, N)
Default
SEL
9600
1
N c
FASTOP
PMUMODE c
Enable Fast Operate Messages (Y, N)
PMU Mode (CLIENTA, CLIENTB,
SERVER)
N
SERVER
RTCID d
Remote PMU Hardware ID (1–65534) 1 a b c d
Some of the other PROTO setting choices may not be available.
Setting choice PMU is not available on PORT 5.
Set PROTO := PMU to enable (on this port) the synchrophasor protocol selected by Global setting MFRMT.
Setting hidden when PMUMODE := SERVER.
The Port settings for PROTO := PMU, shown in Table 6.7, do not include the
settings DATABIT and PARITY—these two settings are internally fixed as
DATABIT := 8, PARITY := N (None).
The settings found in Table 6.8 pertain to sending synchrophasor data over
Ethernet.
Table 6.8
Ethernet Port Settings for Synchrophasors (Sheet 1 of 2)
Setting
EPMIP
Description
Enable PMU Processing (Y,N) a
PMOTS1 PMU Output 1 Transport Scheme (OFF, TCP, UDP_S,
UDP_T, UDP_U)
PMOIPA1 PMU Output 1 Client IP (Remote) Address (w.x.y.z) b
PMOTCP1 PMU Output 1TCP/IP (Local) Port Number
(1–65534)
PMOUDP1 PMU Output 1 UDP/IP Data (Remote) Port Number
(1–65534)
PMOTS2 PMU Output 2 Transport Scheme (OFF, TCP, UDP_S,
UDP_T, UDP_U)
PMOIPA2 PMU Output 2 Client IP (Remote) Address (w.x.y.z) g
Default
N
OFF
192.168.1.3
4712
4713
OFF
192.168.1.4
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
Settings for Synchrophasors
C.6.17
Table 6.8
Ethernet Port Settings for Synchrophasors (Sheet 2 of 2)
Setting Description Default
PMOTCP2 PMU Output 2 TCP/IP (Local) Port Number
(1–65534)
PMOUDP2 PMU Output 2 UDP/IP Data (Remote) Port Number
(1–65534)
4722
4713 i g h c d a b e f
Set EPMIP := Y to access remaining settings.
Setting hidden when PMOTS1 := OFF.
Setting hidden when PMOTSI := UDP_S.
Port # must be unique compared to TPORT and DNPPNUM.
Setting hidden when PMOTS1 := TCP.
Port numbers must be unique for PMOUDP1, PMOUDP2, and DNPUDP1–6 if active.
Setting hidden when PMOTS2 := OFF.
Setting hidden when PMOTS2 := UDP_S.
Setting hidden when PMOTS2 := TCP.
Descriptions of Ethernet Synchrophasor Settings
Definitions for some of the settings in Table 6.8 are as follows.
PMOTS1 and PMOTS2
Selects the PMU Output transport scheme for session 1 and 2, respectively.
➤
PMOTSn := TCP establishes a single, persistent TCP socket for transmitting and receiving synchrophasor messages (both
commands and data), as illustrated in Figure 6.5.
SEL Relay
TCP Socket
(Persistent)
C37.118
- Synchrophasor Command Start Request
- Synchrophasor Command Stop Request
- Synchrophasor Command Configuration Request 1
- Synchrophasor Command Configuration Request 2
- Synchrophasor Command Header Frame Request
- Synchrophasor Command Extended Frame
C37.118
- Synchrophasor Measurement
- Synchrophasor Configuration Response 1
- Synchrophasor Configuration Response 2
- Synchrophasor Header Frame
Figure 6.5
TCP Connection
➤
➤
PMOTSn := UDP_T establishes two socket connections. A non-persistent TCP connection is used for receiving synchrophasor command messages as well as synchrophasor configuration and header response messages. A persistent UDP connection is used to transmit synchrophasor data messages.
Figure 6.6 depicts the UDP_T connection.
PMOTSn := UDP_U uses the same connection scheme as the
UDP_T except the synchrophasor configuration and header response messages are sent over the UDP connection, as shown
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.18
Synchrophasors
Settings for Synchrophasors
SEL Relay
TCP Socket
(Persistent)
C37.118
- Synchrophasor Command Start Request
- Synchrophasor Command Stop Request
- Synchrophasor Command Configuration Request 1
- Synchrophasor Command Configuration Request 2
- Synchrophasor Command Header Frame Request
- Synchrophasor Command Extended Frame
If PMOTSx is UDP_T
- Synchrophasor Configuration Response 1
- Synchrophasor Configuration Response 2
- Synchrophasor Header Frame Response
C37.118
- Synchrophasor Measurement
If PMOTSx is UDP_U
- Synchrophasor Configuration Response 1
- Synchrophasor Configuration Response 2
- Synchrophasor Header Frame Response
UDP Socket
(Persistent)
Figure 6.6
UDP_T and UDP_U Connections
➤
PMOTSn := UDP_S establishes a single persistent UDP socket to transmit synchrophasor messages. Synchrophasor data are transmitted whenever new data are read. With this communication scheme, the relay sends a “Synchrophasor
Configuration Response 2” once every minute, as shown in
SEL Relay
TCP Socket
C37.118
- Synchrophasor Measurement
- Synchrophasor Configuration Response 2
(Sent once per minute)
(Persistent)
Figure 6.7
UDP_S Connection
PMOIPA1 and PMOIPA2
Defines the PMU Output Client IP address for Session 1 and 2, respectively.
PMOTCP1 and PMOTCP2
Defines the TCP/IP (Local) port number for Session 1 and 2, respectively.
These port numbers, as well as the Telnet port setting, TPORT, and the DNP3
TCP and UDP port setting, DNPPNUM, if used, must all be unique.
PMOUDP1 and PMOUDP2
Defines the UDP/IP (Remote) port number for Session 1 and 2, respectively.
EPMU := N Supersedes Synchrophasor Port Settings
The PROTO := PMU settings choice in Table 6.7 can be made even when
Global setting EPMU := N. However, in this situation, the serial port will not respond to any commands or requests. Either enable synchrophasors by
making the Table 6.1 settings, or change the port PROTO setting to SEL.
If you use a computer terminal session or
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet
®
SEL-5030 Software connected to a serial port, and then set that same serial port PROTO setting to PMU, you will lose the ability to communicate with the relay through ASCII commands or virtual file interface commands. If this happens, either connect via another serial port (that has PROTO := SEL) or use the front-panel
HMI SET/SHOW
screen to change the disabled port PROTO setting back to SEL.
Additionally, the EPMIP := Y settings choice in Table 6.4 can be made when
Global setting EPMU := N. This setting combination will result in the relay ignoring any incoming synchrophasor requests regardless of whether the
Ethernet port settings in Table 6.4 are correct or not.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
Synchrophasor Legacy Settings = N
C.6.19
Synchrophasor Legacy Settings = N
Global Settings
If the setting Global PMLEGCY = N, the following section and settings applies to the relay. The PMU has 6 current channels and 6 voltage channels.
Current Terminals W and X and Voltage Terminals Y and Z are three-phase channels. The PMU combines Channels W and X to create a pseudo
Terminal S.
From these 12 channels, the PMU can measure as many as 20 synchrophasors;
15 phase synchrophasors, and 5 positive-sequence synchrophasors.
Synchrophasors are always in primary, so set the CT and PT ratios in the group settings appropriately. Note that CTRW applies to all the channels in
Terminal S.
The Global enable setting EPMU must be set to Y before the remaining synchrophasor settings are available. The PMU is disabled when EPMU := N.
Table 6.9
Global Settings for Configuring the PMU (1 of 2)
Setting Setting Prompt
EPMU
MFRMT
MRATE
PMAPP
Synchronized Phasor Measurement (Y, N)
Message Format (C37.118, FM)
Messages per Second (1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30, 60) a
PMU Application (F, N, 1) b
PMLEGCY Synchrophasor Legacy Settings (Y, N)
NUMPHDC Number of Data Configurations (1–5)
PMSTNq c
Station Name (16 characters)
PMU Hardware ID (1–65534) a b c
If NFREQ = 50 then the range is 1, 2, 5, 10, 25, 50.
Option 1 is available only if MRATE = 60.
q = 1–NUMPHDC.
Default
N
1
2
N
N
C37.118
STATION A
1
Descriptions for some of the settings in Table 6.9 are as follows.
MFRMT.
Selects the message format for synchrophasor data streaming on serial ports.
SEL recommends the use of MFRMT := C37.118 for any new PMU applications because of increased setting flexibility and the expected availability of software for synchrophasor processors. The PMU still includes the MFRMT := FM setting choice to maintain compatibility in any systems presently using SEL Fast Message synchrophasors.
MRATE.
Selects the message rate in messages per second for synchrophasor data.
Choose the MRATE setting that suits the needs of your PMU application. The
PMU supports as many as 60 messages per second if NFREQ = 60 and 50 messages per second if NFREQ = 50.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.20
Synchrophasors
Synchrophasor Legacy Settings = N
PMAPP.
Selects the type of digital filters used in the synchrophasor measurement.
➤
The Narrow Bandwidth setting (N) represents filters with a cutoff frequency approximately 1/4 of MRATE. The response in the frequency domain is narrower, and response in the time domain is slower. This method results in synchrophasor data that are free of aliasing signals and well suited for postdisturbance analysis.
➤
The Fast Response setting (F) represents filters with a higher cutoff frequency. The response in the frequency domain is wider and the response in the time domain is faster. This method results in synchrophasor data that can be used in synchrophasor applications requiring more speed in tracing system parameters.
➤
The Filter One setting (1) represents filters that have a response much narrower than the narrow bandwidth filters. This method has a better step response with overshoot within 7.5 percent.
This filter is available only for MRATE = 60.
PMLEGCY.
This setting is provided for supporting legacy synchrophasor settings. SEL recommends setting this to N to access the latest features. See
Synchrophasor Legacy Settings = N for more details.
NUMPHDC.
Enables as many as five unique synchrophasor data configurations.
The four serial ports (Port 1, 2, 3, and F) and two Ethernet ports (TCP/UDP
Port 1 and 2) can be mapped to any of these five data configurations. In other words each port can be configured to send unique synchrophasor data streams.
PMSTNq and PMIDq.
Defines the station name and number of the PMU for data configuration q.
The PMSTNq setting is an ASCII string with as many as 16 characters. The
PMIDq setting is a numeric value. Use your utility or synchrophasor data concentrator naming convention to determine these settings. PMSTNq allows all printable characters except “ / \ < > * | : ; [ ] $ % { }.
Phasors Included in the Data q
Terminal Name, Relay Word Bit, Alternate Terminal Name.
Specify the terminal for Synchrophasor measurement and transmission in the synchrophasor data stream q.
This is a free-form setting category for enabling the terminals for synchrophasor measurement and transmission. This free-form setting has three arguments. Specify the terminal name (any one of W, X, S, Y, or Z) for the first argument. Specify any Relay Word bit for the second argument.
Specify the alternate terminal name (any one of W, X, S, Y, or Z) for the third argument.
The second and third arguments are optional unless switching between terminals is required. Whenever the Relay Word bit in the second argument is asserted the terminal synchrophasor data are replaced by the alternate terminal data.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
Synchrophasor Legacy Settings = N
C.6.21
Table 6.10
Global Settings for Configuring the PMU (2 of 2)
Setting Setting Prompt Default
PHDVq a
PHFMTq
Phasor Data Set, Voltages (V1, PH, ALL)
Phasor Data Set, Currents (I1, PH, ALL)
Phasor Num. Representation (I = Integer, F = Float)
Phasor Format (R = Rectangular, P = Polar)
a q = 1–NUMPHDC.
Freq. Num. Representation (I = Integer, F = Float)
I
I
V1
ALL
R
PHDVq.
Selects the type of voltages to be included in the synchrophasor data stream q.
This setting affects the synchrophasor data packet size.
➤
PHDVq := V1, sends only positive-sequence voltage synchrophasors of selected terminals.
➤
PHDVq := PH, sends only phase voltage synchrophasors of selected terminals.
➤
PHDVq := ALL, sends only phase and positive-sequence voltage synchrophasors of selected terminals.
Table 6.11 shows the voltage synchrophasor name, enable conditions and the
PT ratio used to scale to the Primary values.
Table 6.11
Voltage Synchrophasor Names
Phasor Name Phasor Enable Conditions
V1YPM
VAYPM
VBYPM
VCYPM
V1ZPM
VAZPM
VBZPM
VCZPM
PHDVq = V1 or ALL AND Terminal Y included
PHDVq = PH or ALL AND Terminal Y included
PHDVq = PH or ALL AND Terminal Y included
PHDVq = PH or ALL AND Terminal Y included
PHDVq = V1 or ALL AND Terminal Z included
PHDVq = PH or ALL AND Terminal Z included
PHDVq = PH or ALL AND Terminal Z included
PHDVq = PH or ALL AND Terminal Z included
PT Ratio
PTRY
PTRY
PTRY
PTRY
PTRZ
PTRZ
PTRZ
PTRZ
PHDIq.
Selects the type of currents to be included in the synchrophasor data stream q.
This setting affects the synchrophasor data packet size.
➤
PHDIq := I1, sends only positive-sequence current synchrophasors of selected terminals.
➤
PHDIq := PH, sends only phase current synchrophasors of selected terminals.
➤
PHDIq := ALL, sends only phase and positive-sequence current synchrophasors of selected terminals.
Table 6.12 shows the current synchrophasor names, enable conditions, and the
CT ratio used to scale to the Primary values.
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.22
Synchrophasors
Synchrophasor Legacy Settings = N
SEL-411L Relay
Table 6.12
Current Synchrophasor Names
Phasor
Name
I1SPM
IASPM
IBSPM
ICSPM
I1WPM
IAWPM
IBWPM
ICWPM
I1XPM
IAXPM
IBXPM
ICXPM
Phasor Enable Conditions
PHDIq = I1 or ALL AND Terminal S included
PHDIq = PH or ALL AND Terminal S included
PHDIq = PH or ALL AND Terminal S included
PHDIq = PH or ALL AND Terminal S included
PHDIq = I1 or ALL AND Terminal W included
PHDIq = PH or ALL AND Terminal W included
PHDIq = PH or ALL AND Terminal W included
PHDIq = PH or ALL AND Terminal W included
PHDIq = I1 or ALL AND Terminal X included
PHDIq = PH or ALL AND Terminal X included
PHDIq = PH or ALL AND Terminal X included
PHDIq = PH or ALL AND Terminal X included
PHNRq.
Selects the numeric representation of voltage and current phasor data in the synchrophasor data stream q.
This setting affects the synchrophasor data packet size.
➤
➤
PHNRq := I sends each voltage and/or current synchrophasor as 2 two-byte integer values. The PMU uses ((7 • I
NOM
• CT
Ratio) / 32768) • 100000 for the current phasor scaling factor and uses ((150 • TR) / 32768) • 100000 for the voltage phasor scaling factor. CT Ratio and PT Ratio is as specified in
NOM
is 1 A or 5 A.
PHNRq := F sends each voltage and/or current synchrophasor as 2 four-byte floating-point values.
PHFMTq.
Selects the phasor representation of voltage and current phasor data in the synchrophasor data stream q.
➤
PHFMTq := R (rectangular) sends each voltage and/or current synchrophasor as a pair of signed real and imaginary values.
➤
PHFMTq := P (polar) sends each voltage and/or current synchrophasor as a magnitude and angle pair. The angle is in radians when PHNRq := F, and in radians • 10
4
when
PHNRq := I. The range is –
< angle .
In both the rectangular and polar representations, the values are scaled in root-mean-square (rms) units. For example, a synchrophasor with a magnitude of 1.0 at an angle of –30 degrees will have a real component of 0.866, and an imaginary component of –0.500.
FNRq.
Selects the numeric representation of the two frequency values in the synchrophasor data stream q.
This setting affects the synchrophasor data packet size.
➤
FNRq := I sends the frequency data as a difference from nominal frequency, NFREQ, with the following formula.
(FREQ measured
– NFREQ) • 1000, represented as a signed, two-byte value.
CT Ratio
CTRW
CTRW
CTRW
CTRW
CTRW
CTRW
CTRW
CTRW
CTRX
CTRX
CTRX
CTRX
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
Synchrophasor Relay Word Bits
C.6.23
➤
FNRq := I also sends the rate-of-change of frequency data with scaling.
DFDT measured
• 100, represented as a signed, two-byte value.
➤
FNR := F sends the measured frequency data and rate-ofchange-of-frequency as two four-byte, floating point values.
Table 6.13
Global Settings for Configuring the PMU
Setting
TREA[4]
PMTRIG
PMTEST
Vk a
COMP
In b
COMP
PMFRQST
PMFRQA
PHCOMP a b k = Y and Z.
n = W, X, S.
Setting Prompt
Trigger Reason Bit [4] (SEL
OGIC
Equation)
Trigger (SEL
OGIC
Equation)
PMU in Test Mode (SEL
OGIC
Equation)
Comp. Angle Terminal k (–179.99° to 180°)
Comp. Angle Terminal n (–179.99° to 180°)
PMU Primary Frequency Source Terminal (Y, Z)
PMU Frequency Application (F, S)
Freq. Based Phasor Compensation (Y, N)
Default
S
Y
0.00
Y
NA
NA
NA
0.00
Synchrophasor Relay Word Bits
Table 6.14 and Table 6.15 list the Relay Word bits that are related to
synchrophasor measurement.
The Synchrophasor Trigger Relay Word bits in Table 6.14 follow the state of
the SEL
OGIC
control equations of the same name, listed at the bottom of
Table 6.1. These Relay Word bits are included in the IEEE C37.118
synchrophasor data frame STAT field. See Table 6.5 for standard definitions
for these settings.
Table 6.14
Synchrophasor Trigger Relay Word Bits
Name
PMTRIG
TREA4
TREA3
TREA2
TREA1
Description
Trigger (SEL
OGIC
control equation).
Trigger Reason Bit 4 (SEL
OGIC
control equation)
Trigger Reason Bit 3 (SEL
OGIC
control equation)
Trigger Reason Bit 2 (SEL
OGIC
control equation)
Trigger Reason Bit 1 (SEL
OGIC
control equation)
The Time-Synchronization Relay Word bits in Table 6.15 indicate the present
status of the high-accuracy timekeeping function of the relay.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.24
Synchrophasors
Synchrophasor Relay Word Bits
SEL-411L Relay
Table 6.15
Time-Synchronization Relay Word Bits
Name Description
TIRIG
TSOK
Asserts while relay time is based on IRIG-B time source.
Time synchronization OK. Asserts while time is based on high-accuracy
IRIG-B time source (HIRIG mode) of sufficient accuracy for synchrophasor measurement.
PMDOK Phasor measurement data OK. Asserts when the relay is enabled and synchrophasors are enabled (Global setting EPMU := Y).
When using the relay as a synchrophasor client, the Relay Word bits in
Table 6.16 indicate the state of the synchronization.
Table 6.16
Synchrophasor Client Status Bits
Name Description
RTCENA
RTCENB
Asserts for one processing interval when a valid message is received on
Channel A
Asserts for one processing interval when a valid message is received on
Channel B
RTCROKA Asserts for one processing interval when data are aligned for Channel A.
Use this bit to condition usage of the Channel A data.
RTCROKB Asserts for one processing interval when data are aligned for Channel B.
Use this bit to condition usage of the Channel B data.
RTCROK
RTCDLYA
RTCDLYB
RTCSEQA
Asserts for one processing interval when data for all enabled channels are aligned. Use this bit to condition general usage of the aligned synchrophasor data.
This bit is asserted when the last received valid message on Channel A is older than MRTCDLY.
This bit is asserted when the last received valid message on Channel B is older than MRTCDLY.
This bit is asserted when the processed received message on Channel A is the expected next-in-sequence. It is deasserted if it is not. The deassertion implies that one or more packets of information were lost. Use this bit to condition usage of channel A data in applications where sequential data are required.
RTCSEQB This bit is asserted when the processed received message on Channel B is the expected next-in-sequence. It is deasserted if it is not. The deassertion implies that one or more packets of information were lost. Use this bit to condition usage of channel B data in applications where sequential data are required.
RTCCFGA Indicates Channel A is successfully configured.
RTCCFGB Indicates Channel B is successfully configured.
When received, synchrophasor messages contain digital data. These data are
stored in the Remote Synchrophasor Relay Word bits in Table 6.17.
Table 6.17
Remote Synchrophasor Data Bits
Name Description
RTCAD01–RTCAD16 First sixteen digitals received in synchrophasor message on channel A. Only valid when RTCROKA is asserted.
RTCBD01–RTCBD16 First sixteen digitals received in synchrophasor message on channel B. Only valid when RTCROKB is asserted.
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
Synchrophasor Analog Quantities
C.6.25
Synchrophasor Analog Quantities
The synchrophasor measurements in Table 6.18 are available whenever
Global setting EPMU := Y. When EPMU := N, these analog quantities are set to 0.0000.
It is important to note that the synchrophasors are only valid when the relay is in HIRIG timekeeping mode, which can be verified by monitoring the TSOK
Relay Word bit. When TSOK = logical 1, the relay timekeeping is synchronized to the high-accuracy IRIG
-
B signal, and the synchrophasor data are precisely time-stamped.
Table 6.18
Synchrophasor Analog Quantities
Name Description Units
Frequency
FREQPM
DFDTPM
Measured system frequency a
Rate-of-change of frequency, df/dt
Synchrophasor Measurements
VkmPMM,
VkmPMA,
VkmPMR,
VkmPMI b,c
V1mPMM,
V1mPMA,
V1mPMR,
V1mPMI
Phase k synchrophasor voltage (M-magnitude, A-Angle,
R-Real, I-Imaginary) Terminal m
Positive-sequence synchrophasor voltage (M-magnitude,
A-Angle, R-Real, I-Imaginary) Terminal m
Hz
Hz/s kV Primary, degrees, kV Primary, kV Primary kV Primary, degrees, kV Primary, kV Primary
IknPMM,
IknPMA,
IknPMR,
IknPMI d
I1nPMM,
I1nPMA,
I1nPMR,
I1nPMI
Phase k synchrophasor current (M-magnitude, A-Angle,
R-Real, I-Imaginary) Terminal n
Positive-sequence synchrophasor current (M-magnitude,
A-Angle, R-Real, I-Imaginary) Terminal n
SODPM
FOSPM
Second of the day of the PM data
Fraction of the second of the PM data s s b c d a
Measured value if the voltages are valid and EMPU = Y, otherwise FREQPM = nominal frequency setting NFREQ, and DFDT is zero.
k = A, B, or C.
m = Y or Z.
n = W, X, or S.
A Primary, degrees,
A Primary,
A Primary
A Primary, degrees,
A Primary,
A Primary
When using the relay for synchrophasor acquisition, the delayed and aligned
analog quantities listed in Table 6.19 are available. Be aware that these
quantities are only valid when RTCROK is asserted and only for the enabled channels. The specific channel quantities are also valid whenever their respective RTCROKc Relay Word bit is set.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.26
Synchrophasors
Synchrophasor Analog Quantities
VkmPMM,
VkmPMA,
VkmPMR,
VkmPMI a,b
V1mPMM,
V1mPMA,
V1mPMR,
V1mPMI b
IknPMMD,
IknPMAD,
IknPMRD,
IknPMID a,c
I1nPMMD,
I1nPMAD,
I1nPMRD,
I1nPMID c
SODPMD
FOSPMD
FREQPMD
DFDTD a b c k = A, B, or C.
m = Y or Z.
n = W, X, or S.
Table 6.19
Synchrophasor Aligned Analog Quantities
Name
RTCAP01–RTCAP32
RTCBP01–RTCBP32
RTCAA01–RTCAA08
RTCBA01–RTCBA08
RTCFA
RTCFB
RTCDFA
RTCDFB
Description Units
Remote phasor pairs for channel A. Only those channels provided by the remote are valid to use. Use the RTC command to confirm interpretation of these quantities.
Remote phasor pairs for channel B. Only those channels provided by the remote are valid to use. Use the RTC command to confirm interpretation of these quantities.
Remote analogs for channel A. Only those channels provided by the remote are valid to use. Use the RTC command to confirm interpretation of these quantities.
Remote analogs for channel B. Only those channels provided by the remote are valid to use. Use the RTC command to confirm interpretation of these quantities.
Remote frequency for channel A
Remote frequency for channel B
Remote frequency rate-of-change for channel A
Remote frequency rate-of-change for channel B
Aligned phase k synchrophasor voltage
(M-magnitude, A-Angle, R-Real, I-Imaginary)
Terminal m
Hz
Hz
Hz/s
Hz/s
Aligned positive-sequence synchrophasor voltage (M-magnitude, A-Angle, R-Real,
I-Imaginary) Terminal m
Aligned phase k synchrophasor current
(M-magnitude, A-Angle, R-Real, I-Imaginary)
Terminal n
Aligned positive-sequence synchrophasor current (M-magnitude, A-Angle, R-Real,
I-Imaginary) Terminal n
Second-of-day for all aligned data
Fraction-of-second for all aligned data
Aligned local system frequency
Aligned local rate-of-change of frequency kV Primary, degrees, kV Primary, kV Primary kV Primary, degrees, kV Primary, kV Primary
A Primary, degrees,
A Primary,
A Primary
A Primary, degrees,
A Primary,
A Primary
Seconds
Seconds
Hz
Hz/s
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
View Synchrophasors by Using the MET PM Command
C.6.27
View Synchrophasors by Using the MET PM Command
Date Code 20151029
The MET PM serial port ASCII command may be used to view the relay synchrophasor measurements.
There are multiple ways to use the MET PM command:
➤
➤
As a test tool, to verify connections, phase rotation, and scaling
As an analytical tool, to capture synchrophasor data at an exact time, in order to compare it with similar data captured in other phasor measurement unit(s) at the same time
➤
As a method of periodically gathering synchrophasor data through a communications processor
The MET PM command displays the same set of analog synchrophasor information, regardless of the Global settings MFRMT, PHDATAV,
PHDATAI, and PHCURR. The MET PM command can function even when no serial ports are sending synchrophasor data—it is unaffected by serial port setting PROTO.
The MET PM command will only operate when the relay is in the HIRIG timekeeping mode, as indicated by Relay Word bit TSOK = logical 1.
Figure 6.8 shows a sample MET PM command response. The synchrophasor
data are also available via the HMI > Meter & Control menu in
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet, and has a similar format to Figure 6.8.
The MET PM time command can be used to direct the relay to display the synchrophasor for an exact specified time, in 24-hour format. For example, entering the command MET PM 14:14:12 will result in a response similar to
Figure 6.8 occurring just after 14:14:12, with the time stamp
14:14:12.000000.
This method of data capture will always report from the exact second, even if the time parameter is entered with fractional seconds. For example, entering
MET PM 14:14:12.200 will result in the same data capture as MET PM
14:14:12, because the relay ignores the fractional seconds.
See Metering on page P.9.25 for complete command options, and error messages.
=>>MET PM <Enter>
Relay 1 Date: 02/07/2012 Time: 11:22:13.000
Station A Serial Number: 1111310375
Time Quality Maximum time synchronization error: 0.000 (ms) TSOK = 1
Serial Port Configuration Error: N PMU in TEST MODE = N
Synchrophasors
VY Phase Voltages VY Pos. Sequence Voltage
VA VB VC V1
MAG (kV) 134.022 134.038 134.060 134.040
ANG (DEG) -71.505 168.492 48.488 -71.507
VZ Phase Voltages VZ Pos. Sequence Voltage
VA VB VC V1
MAG (kV) 134.055 134.048 134.035 134.046
ANG (DEG) -71.491 168.498 48.500 -71.496
IW Phase Currents IW Pos. Sequence Current
IA IB IC I1W
MAG (A) 600.383 600.314 600.451 600.383
ANG (DEG) -71.669 168.297 48.348 -71.673
IX Phase Currents IX Pos. Sequence Current
IA IB IC I1X
MAG (A) 600.489 600.426 600.358 600.424
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.28
Synchrophasors
C37.118 Synchrophasor Protocol
ANG (DEG) -71.639 168.309 48.322 -71.668
IS Phase Currents IS Pos. Sequence Current
IA IB IC I1S
MAG (A) 1200.872 1200.740 1200.809 1200.807
ANG (DEG) -71.654 168.303 48.335 -71.670
FREQ (Hz) 60.000 Frequency Tracking = Y
Rate-of-change of FREQ (Hz/s) 0.00
Digitals
PSV08 PSV07 PSV06 PSV05 PSV04 PSV03 PSV02 PSV01
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PSV16 PSV15 PSV14 PSV13 PSV12 PSV11 PSV10 PSV09
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PSV24 PSV23 PSV22 PSV21 PSV20 PSV19 PSV18 PSV17
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PSV32 PSV31 PSV30 PSV29 PSV28 PSV27 PSV26 PSV25
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PSV40 PSV39 PSV38 PSV37 PSV36 PSV35 PSV34 PSV33
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PSV48 PSV47 PSV46 PSV45 PSV44 PSV43 PSV42 PSV41
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PSV56 PSV55 PSV54 PSV53 PSV52 PSV51 PSV50 PSV49
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PSV64 PSV63 PSV62 PSV61 PSV60 PSV59 PSV58 PSV57
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Analogs
PMV49 0.000 PMV50 0.000 PMV51 0.000 PMV52 0.000
PMV53 0.000 PMV54 0.000 PMV55 0.000 PMV56 0.000
PMV57 0.000 PMV58 0.000 PMV59 0.000 PMV60 0.000
PMV61 0.000 PMV62 0.000 PMV63 0.000 PMV64 0.000
=>>
Figure 6.8
Sample MET PM Command Response
C37.118 Synchrophasor Protocol
The relay complies with IEEE C37.118, Standard for Synchrophasors for
Power Systems, when Global setting MFRMT := C37.118.
The protocol is available on Serial Ports 1, 2, 3, and F by setting the corresponding Port setting PROTO := PMU.
The protocol is available on the Ethernet port when EPMIP := Y.
This subsection does not cover the details of the protocol, but highlights some of the important features and options that are available.
Settings Affect
Message Contents
The relay allows several options for transmitting synchrophasor data. These
are controlled by Global settings described in Settings for Synchrophasors.
You can select how often to transmit the synchrophasor messages (MRATE), which synchrophasors to transmit (PHDATAV, PHDATAI, and PHCURR), which numeric representation to use (PHNR), and which coordinate system to use (PHFMT).
The relay automatically includes the frequency and rate-of-change-offrequency in the synchrophasor messages. Global setting FNR selects the numeric format to use for these two quantities.
The relay can include up to sixteen user-programmable analog values in the synchrophasor message, as controlled by Global setting NUMANA, and 0, 16,
32, 48, or 64 digital status values, as controlled by Global setting NUMDSW.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
C37.118 Synchrophasor Protocol
C.6.29
The relay always includes the results of four synchrophasor trigger reason
SEL
OGIC
equations TREA1, TREA2, TREA3, and TREA4, and the trigger
SEL
OGIC
control equation result PMTRIG, in the synchrophasor message.
Communications
Bandwidth
A phasor measurement unit (PMU) that is configured to transmit a single synchrophasor (positive-sequence voltage, for example) at a message rate of once per second places little burden on the communications channel. As more synchrophasors, analog values, or digital status words are added, or if the message rate is increased, some communications channel restrictions come into play.
If the SPEED setting on any serial port set with PROTO := PMU is insufficient for the PMU Global settings, the relay or
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet will display an error message and fail to save settings until the error is corrected.
The C37.118 synchrophasor message format always includes 16 bytes for the message header and terminal ID, time information, and status bits. The selection of synchrophasor data, numeric format, programmable analog, and
programmable digital data will add to the byte requirements. Table 6.20 can
be used to calculate the number of bytes in a synchrophasor message.
Table 6.20
Size of a C37.118 Synchrophasor Message
Item
Fixed
Synchrophasors
Possible number of quantities
0, 1, 2…20
Bytes per quantity
Minimum number of bytes
18
0
Maximum number of bytes
18
160
Frequency 2 (fixed)
Analog Values
Digital Status Words
0 – 16
0 – 4
Total (Minimum and Maximum)
4 (PHNR := I)
8 (PHNR := F)
4
2
2 (FNR := I)
4 (FNR := F)
4
0
0
22
8
64
8
258
Table 6.21 lists the bps settings available on any relay serial port (setting
SPEED), and the maximum message size that can fit within the port bandwidth. Blank entries indicate bandwidths of less than 20 bytes.
Table 6.21
Serial Port Bandwidth for Synchrophasors (in Bytes) (Sheet 1 of 2)
Global Setting
MRATE
Port Setting SPEED
300
21
600
42
21
1
2
4 (60 Hz only)
5
10
12 (60 Hz only)
15 (60 Hz only)
20 (60 Hz only)
25 (50 Hz only)
30 (60 Hz only)
1200
85
42
21
2400
170
85
42
34
4800
68
34
28
21
340
170
85
9600
680
340
170
136
68
56
45
34
27
22
19200
1360
680
340
272
136
113
90
68
54
45
38400
2720
1360
680
544
272
226
181
136
108
90
57600
4080
2040
1020
816
408
340
272
204
163
136
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.30
Synchrophasors
C37.118 Synchrophasor Protocol
Table 6.21
Serial Port Bandwidth for Synchrophasors (in Bytes) (Sheet 2 of 2)
Global Setting
MRATE
Port Setting SPEED
300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600
50 (50 Hz only)
60 (60 Hz only)
19200
27
22
38400
54
45
57600
81
68
Referring to Table 6.20 and Table 6.21, it is clear that the lower SPEED
settings are very restrictive.
The smallest practical synchrophasor message would be comprised of one synchrophasor and one digital status word, and this message would consume between 26 and 34 bytes, depending on the numeric format settings. This type of message could be sent at any message rate (MRATE) when
SPEED := 38400 or 57600, up to MRATE := 50 or 30 when SPEED := 19200, and up to MRATE := 25 or 20 when SPEED := 9600.
Another example application has messages comprised of eight synchrophasors, one digital status word, and two analog values. This type of message would consume between 62 and 98 bytes, depending on the numeric format settings. The 62-byte version, using integer numeric representation, could be sent at any message rate (MRATE) when SPEED := 57600. The
98-byte version, using floating-point numeric representation, could be sent at up to MRATE := 30 when SPEED := 57600, up to MRATE := 25 when
SPEED := 38400, and up to MRATE := 12 when SPEED := 19200.
Protocol Operation
The relay will only transmit synchrophasor messages over serial ports that have setting PROTO := PMU. The connected device will typically be a synchrophasor processor, such as the SEL
-
3306. The synchrophasor processor controls the PMU functions of the relay, with IEEE C37.118 commands, including commands to start and stop synchrophasor data transmission, and commands to request a configuration block from the relay, so the synchrophasor processor can automatically build a database structure.
Transmit Mode Control
The relay will not begin transmitting synchrophasors until an enable message is received from the synchrophasor processor. The relay will stop synchrophasor transmission when the appropriate command is received from the synchrophasor processor. The relay can also indicate when a configuration change occurs, so the synchrophasor processor can request a new configuration block and keep its database up-to-date.
The relay will only respond to configuration block request messages when it is in the non-transmitting mode.
Independent Ports
Each serial port with the PROTO := PMU setting is independently configured and enabled for synchrophasor and Fast Operate commands. For example, if there are two serial ports set to PROTO := PMU, the status of one port has no effect on the other port. One port might be commanded to start transmitting synchrophasor messages, while the other port is idle, responding to a configuration block or Fast Operate request, or transmitting synchrophasors.
The ports are not required to have the same SPEED setting, although the slowest SPEED setting on a PROTO := PMU port will affect the maximum
Global MRATE setting that can be used.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
C37.118 Synchrophasor Protocol
C.6.31
Ethernet Operation
C37.118 Synchrophasors may be used over Ethernet if an Ethernet card is installed in the relay. Four transport methods are supported: UDP, UDP_S,
UDP_T, and TCP.
UDP, UDP_S, UDP_T
UDP stands for User Datagram Protocol and is a network protocol used for the internet. UDP uses a simple transmission model without implicit handshaking interchanges for guaranteeing reliability, ordering, or data integrity.
As such, UDP minimizes additional overhead needed to send messages. Timesensitive applications often use UDP because dropping packets is preferable to waiting for delayed packets, which may not be an option in a real-time system.
UDP_S is a version of UDP that only sends data; no reverse messaging is used, thus providing streaming data in one direction only. UDP_T uses a TCP socket to command and configure PMU measurements, and then uses a UDP socket for sending data out. A user may choose to use UDP to minimize the additional overhead bits added and thus minimize the communications bandwidth needed to send PMU information out of a substation. UDP_S uses the least amount of overhead (and provides some additional security as the
PMU or PDC using this method is only sending data and ignores any messages coming in).
TCP
TCP stands for Transmission Control Protocol and is a connection-oriented protocol, which means that it requires handshaking to set up end-to-end communications. Once a connection is set up, user data may be sent bidirectionally over the connection. TCP manages message acknowledgment, retransmission, and timeouts. With TCP, there are no lost data; the server will request the lost portion to be resent. Additionally, TCP ensures that the messages are received in the order sent. TCP provides the most robust connection, but it also adds additional overhead bits to any message data.
PMU Setting Example
A power utility is upgrading the line protection on its 230 kV system to use the relay as main protection. The grid operator also wants the utility to install phasor measurement units (PMUs) in each 230 kV substation to collect data for a new remedial action scheme, and to eventually replace their present state-estimation system.
The PMU data collection requirements call for the following data, collected at
10 messages per second:
➤
➤
➤
Frequency
Positive-sequence voltage from the bus in each substation
Three-phase and positive-sequence current for each line terminal
➤
➤
Indication when the line breaker is open
Indication when the voltage or frequency information is unusable
➤
➤
➤
Ambient temperature (one reading per station)
Station battery voltage
No relay control from the PMU communications port, for the initial stage of the project
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.32
Synchrophasors
C37.118 Synchrophasor Protocol
SEL-411L Relay
The utility is able to meet the grid operator requirements with the relay, an
SEL
-
2600A RTD Module, an SEL
-
2407 Satellite-Synchronized Clock, and an
SEL
-
3306 Synchrophasor Processor in each substation.
This example will cover the PMU settings in one of the relays.
Some system details:
➤
➤
The nominal frequency is 60 Hz.
The line is protected by a breaker-and-a-half scheme (similar to
Figure 3.66).
➤
The station ambient temperature is collected by an SEL
Channel RTD01.
-
2600A,
➤
The line pts and wiring have a phase error of 4.20 degrees
(lagging) at 60 Hz.
➤
The Breaker 1 cts and wiring have a phase error of 3.50 degrees
(lagging) at 60 Hz.
➤
The Breaker 2 cts and wiring have a phase error of 5.50 degrees
(lagging) at 60 Hz.
➤
The synchrophasor data will be using Port 3, and the maximum bps allowed is 19200.
➤
The system designer specified floating point numeric representation for the synchrophasor data, and rectangular coordinates.
➤
The system designer specified integer numeric representation for the frequency data.
➤
The system designer specified fast synchrophasor response, because the data are being used for system monitoring.
The protection settings and RTD serial port settings will not be shown.
Determining Settings
The protection engineer performs a bandwidth check, using Table 6.20, and
determines the required message size. The system requirements, in order of
appearance in Table 6.20, are as follows.
➤
➤
➤
➤
5 Synchrophasors, in floating point representation
Integer representation for the frequency data
2 analog values
3 digital status bits, which require one status word
The message size is 16 + 5 • 8 + 2 • 2 + 2 • 4 + 1 • 2 = 70 bytes. Using
Table 6.21, the engineer verifies that the port bps of 19200 is adequate for the
message, at 10 messages per second.
Protection Math Variables PMV64 and PMV63 will be used to transmit the
RTD01 ambient temperature data and the station battery voltage DC1, respectively.
The Protection SEL
OGIC
Variables PSV64, PSV63, and PSV62 will be used to transmit the breaker status, loss-of-potential alarm, and frequency measurement status, respectively.
The Port 3 FASTOP setting will be set to N, to disable any control attempts from the PMU port.
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
C37.118 Synchrophasor Protocol
C.6.33
Make the Global settings as shown in Table 6.22.
Table 6.22
Example Synchrophasor Global Settings
Setting Description Value
NFREQ
NUMBK
EPMU
MFRMT
MRATE
PMAPP
PHCOMP
PMSTN
PMID
PHVOLT
PHDATAV
VYCOMP
PHCURR
Nominal System Frequency (50, 60 Hz)
Number of Breakers in Scheme (1, 2)
Enable Synchronized Phasor Measurement (Y, N)
Message Format (C37.118, FM)
Messages per Second (1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30, 60)
PMU Application (F = Fast Response, N = Narrow
Bandwidth, 1 = Extra Narrow a
)
Frequency-Based Phasor Compensation (Y, N)
Station Name (16 characters)
PMU Hardware ID (1–65534)
Voltage Source (combination of Y, Z)
Phasor Data Set, Voltages (V1, PH, ALL, NA)
Voltage Angle Compensation Factor (–179.99 to 180 degrees)
Current Source (combination of W, X, S)
60
2
Y
C37.118
10
F
PHDATAI
IWCOMP
IXCOMP
PHNR
PHFMT
FNR
NUMANA
NUMDSW
TREA1
TREA2
TREA3
TREA4
Phasor Data Set, Currents (I1, ALL, NA)
IW Angle Compensation Factor (–179.99 to 180 degrees)
ALL
3.50
IX Angle Compensation Factor (–179.99 to 180 degrees) 5.50
Phasor Numeric Representation (I = Integer, F = Floating point) F
Phasor Format (R = Rectangular coordinates, P = Polar coordinates)
Frequency Numeric Representation (I = Integer, F = Float) I
Number of Analog Values (0–16)
Number of 16-bit Digital Status Words (0, 1, 2, 3, 4)
Trigger Reason Bit 1 (SEL
Trigger Reason Bit 2 (SEL
Trigger Reason Bit 3 (SEL
Trigger Reason Bit 4 (SEL
OGIC
OGIC
OGIC
OGIC
PMTRIG Trigger (SEL
OGIC
Equation)
EPMDR Enable PMU Data Recording a
Option 1 is available only if MRATE = 60.
Equation)
Equation)
Equation)
Equation)
R
2
1
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
N
Y
SAMPLE1
14
Y
V1
4.20
S
The two analog quantities and three Relay Word bits required in this example must be placed in certain protection math variables and protection SEL
OGIC
variables. Make the Protection Free-Form logic settings in Table 6.23 in all six
settings groups.
Table 6.23
Example Synchrophasor Protection Free-Form Logic Settings
Setting
PSV64
PSV63
PMV62
PMV63
Value
NOT (3PO OR SPO) # Line breaker status
LOP # Loss-of-Potential
RTD01 # Ambient Temperature
DC1 # Station Battery Voltage
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.34
Synchrophasors
Real-Time Control Example
Make the Table 6.24 settings for Serial Port 3, using the SET P 3 command.
Table 6.24
Example Synchrophasor Port Settings
Setting Description Value
PROTO Protocol (SEL, DNP3, MBA, MBB, MBGA, MBGB, RTD,
PMU)
PMU
SPEED
STOPBIT
RTSCTS
FASTOP
Data Speed (300 to 57600)
Stop Bits (1, 2 bits)
Enable Hardware Handshaking (Y, N)
Enable Fast Operate Messages (Y, N)
PMU MODE PMU Mode (CLIENTA, CLIENTB, SERVER)
N
N
19200
1
SERVER
The sample MET PM capture in Figure 6.8 shows data that could be
measured by this system, including the digital and analog data near the bottom
of the figure, that represent the protection free-form logic from Table 6.23.
Real-Time Control Example
Figure 6.9 shows an application example. In this example, Area 2 supplies
power to Area 1 and Area 3. An important contingency is loss of both Link 1 and Link 2. In such a case, the generators in Area 2 accelerate. Alternate paths between Area 2 and Area 1 can also become stressed beyond their design limits. A simple solution is to measure the phase angle between Area 1 and
Area 2. When the angle exceeds a predetermined limit, control the generation to avoid exceeding system limits.
Area 1
Heavy Load
Link 1
Link 2
Area 2
SEL-
411L
Synchrophasors
Area 3
Light Load
SEL-
411L
Control
Generation
Figure 6.9
Real-Time Control Application
OGIC
for the relay controlling the generator (called the local relay in this example). Lines 1 and 2 store phasor data into PMV53 and PMV54 so they can be viewed through use of the MET PMV command.
Line 3 computes the angle difference between the local and remote relays.
Lines 4–10 unwrap the phase angle when the difference exceeds ±180 degrees.
Line 11 calculates a qualification signal consisting of the local and remote quality indicators. RTCROKA is the local indicator. RTCAD16 is the remote
quality indicator. Figure 6.11 shows its construction at the remote relay.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
Real-Time Control Example
C.6.35
Line 12 computes absolute value of the angle. Line 13 checks the angle against the reference value. In this case, the reference value is 6 degrees. Lines
14 and 15 build a timer that operates after two successive messages in excess of the threshold. On line 15, the value PSV05 tracks the last result of the angle difference check.
The final result, PSV04, asserts when the relay receives two successive synchrophasor messages with angle difference exceeding 6 degrees.
Protection 1
1: PMV53 := V1YPMAD
2: PMV54 := RTCAP02
3: PMV55 := V1YPMAD - RTCAP01
4: PSV01 := PMV55 >= 180.000000
5: PMV01 := -180.000000
6: PSV02 := PMV55 <= PMV01
7: PMV01 := PMV55 + 360.000000
8: PMV02 := PMV55 - 360.000000
9: PMV55 :=NOT PSV01*PMV55+PSV01*PMV02
10: PMV55 :=NOT PSV02*PMV55+PSV02*PMV01
11: PSV01 := RTCROKA AND RTCAD01
12: PMV56 := ABS(PMV55)
13: PSV03 :=(PMV56 > 10.000000) AND PSV01
14: PSV04 := PSV01 AND PSV03 AND PSV05
15: PSV05 := (NOT PSV01 AND PSV05 OR PSV01 AND PSV03)
Figure 6.10
Local Relay SEL
OGIC
Settings
OGIC
settings for the remote relay. Set PSV64 to indicate that the sending data are correct. These data are sent with the synchrophasor data in the C37.118 data packet and are received by the local relay as RTCAD16. The RTCAD16 qualification on line 11 of the local relay
(see Figure 6.10) contains this remote data quality indicator. A local relay
quality indicator also qualifies line 11.
1: PSV64 := TSOK AND PMDOK
Figure 6.11
Remote Relay SEL
OGIC
Settings
Set the remote relay Global settings according to Figure 6.12. Set the number
of digitals (NUMDSW) to one. In this case, the relay sends SEL
OGIC
values
PSV49–PSV64 in the C37.118 data packet. This is how the remote TSOK
AND PMDOK qualification maps to the local RTCAD16 Relay Word bit. Set the PMU application (PMAPP) to fast, because this is a protection application.
Therefore, you must choose a filter for faster response. Also set the synchrophasor enable Global setting to yes (EPMU = Y). The MRTCDLY and
RTCRATE settings are set but not used by the remote relay.
Synchronized Phasor Measurement Settings
MFRMT := C37.118 MRATE := 60 PMAPP := F PHCOMP := Y
PMSTN := "REMOTE RTC"
PMID := 8
PHDATAV := V1 VCOMP := 0.00 PHDATAI := NA IWCOMP := 0.00
IXCOMP := 0.00 PHNR := F PHFMT := P FNR := F
NUMANA := 0 NUMDSW := 1
TREA1 := NA
TREA2 := NA
TREA3 := NA
TREA4 := NA
PMTRIG := NA
MRTCDLY := 100
RTCRATE := 60
Time and Date Management
IRIGC := C37.118
Figure 6.12
Remote Relay Global Settings
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.36
Synchrophasors
Real-Time Control Example
SEL-411L Relay
Set the local relay Global settings according to Figure 6.13. It is important for
synchrophasors to be enabled (EPMU = Y), the application to be fast
(PMAPP = F), the compensation settings to be set correctly (VYCOMP,
VZCOMP, IWCOMP, and IXCOMP), and for IRIGC = C37.118.
Set MRTCDLY for the maximum expected communication channel delay in milliseconds. Any data arriving later than this time are rejected. The
RTCDLYA Relay Word bit indicates this condition. Use the MRTCDLY to constrain the maximum longest operating time of the system. Set the
RTCRATE to the rate of synchrophasor data being sent by remote relay. This is the MRATE setting on the remote relay.
The other Global settings are not relevant to this application.
Synchronized Phasor Measurement Settings
MFRMT := C37.118 MRATE := 60 PMAPP := F PHCOMP := Y
PMSTN := "LOCAL RTC"
PMID := 4
PHDATAV := V1 VCOMP := 0.00 PHDATAI := NA IWCOMP := 0.00
IXCOMP := 0.00 PHNR := F PHFMT := P FNR := F
NUMANA := 0 NUMDSW := 0
TREA1 := NA
TREA2 := NA
TREA3 := NA
TREA4 := NA
PMTRIG := NA
MRTCDLY := 100
RTCRATE := 60
Time and Date Management
IRIGC := C37.118
Figure 6.13
Local Relay Global Settings
Set the port settings for the port that sends the synchrophasor data on the
remote relay, according to Figure 6.14.
Protocol Selection
PROTO := PMU
Communications Settings
SPEED := 57600 STOPBIT := 1 RTSCTS := N
SEL Protocol Settings
FASTOP := N
PMUMODE := SERVER
Figure 6.14
Remote Relay Port Settings
Set the port settings for the port that receives the synchrophasor data on the
local relay, according to Figure 6.15. Notice that the RTCID setting must
match the PMID setting of the remote relay.
Protocol Selection
PROTO := PMU
Communications Settings
SPEED := 57600 STOPBIT := 1 RTSCTS := N
SEL Protocol Settings
FASTOP := N
PMUMODE := CLIENTA
RTCID := 8
Figure 6.15
Local Relay Port Settings
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
SEL Fast Message Synchrophasor Protocol
C.6.37
Several Relay Word bits are useful for monitoring system status. Add
RTCCFGA and RTCDLYA to the SER.
The RTCCFGA Relay Word bit is asserted after the two relays have communicated configuration data successfully. RTCCFGA deassertion indicates that the system has changed, perhaps because of a setting change in one of the relays.
If the RTCCFGA Relay Word bit indicates a new configuration, you can issue the RTC command to ensure that the data being received have not changed.
The RTC command displays a description of the synchrophasor data being received. Use this command to ensure that the remote value that you chose for the SEL
OGIC
equation (for example, RTCAP01 in Figure 6.10) is the correct
value to compare with the local synchrophasor value.
The RTCDLYA bit asserts when synchrophasor data have not been received within the window you set with the local MRTCDLY setting (100 ms in this example). If the RTCDLYA asserts, consider three options. First, the
MRTCDLY setting can be increased. However, the MRTCDLY setting is your way of guaranteeing operation within a certain time. Increasing MRTCDLY allows for communication channels with longer transmission delay, but at the cost of increasing the maximum time of operation. A second option is to improve the communication channel so that it operates within the required
MRTCDLY setting time. A final option is available if the assertion of
RTCDLY results from a temporary communication channel disruption. In this case, putting RTCDLYA in the SER provides warning.
The COM RTC command also provides information for monitoring system
status. Figure 6.16 shows a COM RTC command response. Use the
maximum packet delay field to monitor the communication channel delay.
This information can help you choose an appropriate value for the MRTCDLY setting.
Summary for RTC channel A
Port: 2
ID: 8
Present Status: Receiving
Max Packet Delay: 50 msec
Message Rate: 60 msgs/sec
Summary for RTC channel B
Port: 1
ID: 9
Present Status: Receiving
Max Packet Delay: 40 msec
Message Rate: 60 msgs/sec
Figure 6.16
Example COM RTC Command Response
SEL Fast Message Synchrophasor Protocol
SEL Fast Message Unsolicited Write (synchrophasor) messages are general
Fast Messages (A546h) that transport measured synchrophasor information.
The relay can send unsolicited write messages as fast as every 50 ms on a
60 Hz system, and 100 ms on a 50 Hz system. Use Global settings PHDATAV,
PHDATAI, PHVOLT, and PHCURR to select the voltage and current data to
include in the Fast Message. Table 6.27 and Table 6.28 list analog quantities
included in the Fast Message for various Global settings (frequency is included in all messages). Not all messages are supported at all data speeds. If the selected data rate is not sufficient for the given message length, the relay responds with an error message.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.38
Synchrophasors
SEL Fast Message Synchrophasor Protocol
SEL-411L Relay
Table 6.25 lists the Synchrophasor Fast Message Write function codes and the
actions the relay takes in response to each command.
Table 6.25
Fast Message Command Function Codes for Synchrophasor Fast Write
Function
Code (Hex)
00h
01h
Function Relay Action
02h
05h
Fast message definition block request Relay transmits Fast Message definition request acknowledge (Function Code 80)
Enable unsolicited transfer Relay transmits Fast Message command acknowledged message (Function
Code 81). Relay transmits Synchrophasor Measured Quantities (function to enable: Unsolicited Write broadcast, Function Code 20)
Disable unsolicited transfer Relay sends Fast Message command acknowledge message (Function
Code 82) and discontinues transferring unsolicited synchrophasor messages
(function to disable: Unsolicited Write broadcast, Function Code 20)
Ping: determine if channel is operable Relay aborts unsolicited message in progress and transmits ping acknowledge message (Function Code 85)
See SEL Application Guide AG2002-08 for more information on the SEL Fast
Message Synchrophasor protocol.
Fast Message
Synchrophasor
Settings
The settings for SEL Fast Message synchrophasors are listed in Table 6.26.
Many of these settings are identical to the settings for the C37.118 format (see
Table 6.26
PMU Settings in the Relay for SEL Fast Message Protocol
(in Global Settings)
Setting
EPMU
MFRMT
Description
Enable Synchronized Phasor Measurement (Y, N)
Message Format (C37.118, FM) b
PMAPP PMU Application (F = Fast Response, N = Narrow Bandwidth,
1 = Extra Narrow c
)
PHCOMP Frequency-Based Phasor Compensation (Y, N)
PMID PMU Hardware ID (0x00000000–0xFFFFFFFF)
PHVOLT Include Voltage Terminal (range)
Default
N a
FM
N
Y
0x00000001
Y
PHDATAV Phasor Data Set, Voltages (V1, ALL)
VkCOMP d
Vk Voltage Angle Compensation Factor (–179.99 to +180 degrees)
V1
0.00
PHCURR e
PHDATAI f
Current Source (W, X, S)
Phasor Data Set, Currents (ALL, NA)
W
NA
InCOMP g
In Angle Compensation Factor (–179.99 to +180 degrees) 0.00
e f g c d a b
Set EPMU := Y to access the remaining settings.
C37.118 = IEEE C37.118 Standard—see Table 6.1; FM := SEL Fast Message. Set MFRMT := FM to
enter the Fast Message settings.
Option 1 is available only if MRATE =60.
K = Y, Z.
Setting hidden when PHDATAI := NA.
When PHDATAV := V1, this setting is forced to NA and cannot be changed.
n = W, X.
Certain settings in Table 6.26 are hidden, depending on the status of other
settings. For example, if PHDATAI := NA, the PHCURR setting is hidden to limit the number of settings for your synchrophasor application.
Descriptions of Fast Message Synchrophasor Settings
The SEL Fast Message synchrophasor settings are a subset of the C37.118
settings. See Descriptions of Global Synchrophasor Settings for details on
Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
SEL Fast Message Synchrophasor Protocol
C.6.39
settings PMAPP, PHCOMP, VkCOMP where k = any combination of Y, Z, and InCOMP where n = any combination of W, X. For the remaining settings, the differences are explained in the following pages.
PMID
Defines the number of the PMU.
The PMID setting is a 32-bit numeric value. Use your utility or synchrophasor data concentrator labeling convention to determine this setting.
PHVOLT, PHDATAV, PHCURR, and PHDATAI
These settings define the synchrophasors to be included in the data stream.
There are fewer combinations of synchrophasor data available in the SEL Fast
Message synchrophasor format. For example, it is not possible to send only current synchrophasors. You must also send voltages.
See Table 6.27 for a list of synchrophasors that can be sent in SEL Fast
Message format, and the order.
Table 6.27
SEL Fast Message Voltage and Current Selections Based on PHDATAV and PHDATAI
Global Settings
Number of
Synchrophasor
Magnitude and Angle
Pairs Transmitted
PHDATAV := V1
PHDATAI := NA
PHDATAV := ALL
PHDATAI := NA
1
4
PHDATAV := ALL
PHDATAI := ALL
8 a
The voltages and currents are defined in Table 6.28.
Synchrophasor Magnitude and Angle Pairs to
Transmit, and the
Transmit Order a
V
1
V
A
, V
B
, V
C
, V
1
V
A
, V
B
, V
C
, V
1
, I
A
, I
B
, I
C
, I
1
Table 6.28
SEL Fast Message Voltage and Current Synchrophasor Sources
Synchrophasor Labels
V
V
A
B
V
C
V
1
I
A
I
B
I
C
I
1 a b
Where: m = Y if PHVOLT := Y m = Z if PHVOLT := Z.
Where: n = W if PHCURR := W n = X if PHCURR := X n = S if PHCURR := S.
Synchrophasor Magnitude and Angle Pair Definition
(Analog Quantities)
Magnitude
VAmPMM a
VBmPMM
VCmPMM
V1mPMM
IAnPMM b
IBnPMM
ICnPMM
I1nPMM
Angle
VAmPMA
VBmPMA
VCmPMA
IBnPMA
ICnPMA
I1nPMA
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.40
Synchrophasors
SEL Fast Message Synchrophasor Protocol
Other Settings Not Present
The SEL Fast Message format does not require the following settings: PHNR,
PHFMT, FNR, NUMANA, NUMDSW, TREA1–TREA4, PMTRIG, EPMDR,
CONAM, PMLER, and PMPRE.
The SEL Fast Message synchrophasor protocol always includes the frequency information in floating-point representation, and fourteen user-programmable
SEL
OGIC
variables PSV49–PSV64. There are no user-programmable analog quantities in the SEL Fast Message synchrophasor protocol.
Communications
Bandwidth
A phasor measurement unit (PMU) that is configured to transmit a single synchrophasor (positive-sequence voltage, for example) at a message period of one second places little burden on the communications channel. As more synchrophasors are added, or if the message rate is increased, some communications channel restrictions come into play.
In the SEL Fast Message synchrophasor protocol, the master device determines the message period (the time among successive synchrophasor message time-stamps) in the enable request. If the relay can support the requested message period on that serial port, the relay acknowledges the request (if an acknowledge was requested) and commences synchrophasor data transmission. If the relay cannot support the requested message period, the relay responds with a response code indicating bad data (if an acknowledge was requested).
The SPEED setting on any serial port set with PROTO := PMU should be set as high as possible, to allow for the largest number of possible message period requests to be successful.
The relay Fast Message synchrophasor format always includes 32 bytes for the message header and terminal ID, time information, frequency, and status bits. The selection of synchrophasor data will add to the byte requirements.
Table 6.29 can be used to calculate the number of bytes in a synchrophasor
message.
Table 6.29
Size of an SEL Fast Message Synchrophasor Message
Item
Possible
Number of
Quantities
Fixed
Synchrophasors
Total (Minimum, Median, and Maximum)
1, 4, or 8
Bytes per
Quantity
8
Minimum
Number of
Bytes
32
8
40
Median
Number of
Bytes
32
32
64
Maximum
Number of
Bytes
32
64
96
Table 6.30 lists the bps settings available on any relay serial port (setting
SPEED), and the maximum message size that can fit within the port bandwidth. Blank entries indicate bandwidths of less than 40 bytes.
Table 6.30
Serial Port Bandwidth for Synchrophasors (in Bytes) (Sheet 1 of 2)
Requested
Message Period
(ms)
Equivalent
Message Rate
(messages per second)
Port Setting SPEED
300 600 1200
1000
500
250 (60 Hz only)
200
4
5
1
2
41 83
41
2400
166
83
41
4800
333
166
83
66
9600 19200 38400 57600
666
333
166
133
1332
666
333
266
2665
1332
666
533
3998
1999
999
799
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
SEL Fast Message Synchrophasor Protocol
C.6.41
Table 6.30
Serial Port Bandwidth for Synchrophasors (in Bytes) (Sheet 2 of 2)
Requested
Message Period
(ms)
Equivalent
Message Rate
(messages per second)
Port Setting SPEED
300 600 1200
100
50 (60 Hz only)
10
20
2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600
66 133
66
266
133
399
199
Referring to Table 6.29 and Table 6.30, it is clear that the lower SPEED
settings are very restrictive.
Some observations from Table 6.30 follow.
➤
A serial port set with SPEED := 38400 or 57600 can handle any size message at any data rate.
➤
A serial port set with SPEED := 19200 can handle a singlesynchrophasor or four-synchrophasor message at any data rate, and any size message up to 10 messages per second.
➤
A serial port set with SPEED := 9600 can handle a singlesynchrophasor message at any data rate, a four-synchrophasor message at up to 10 messages per second, and any size message at up to 5 messages per second.
➤
A serial port set with SPEED := 300 cannot be used for Fast
Message synchrophasors.
Protocol Operation
The relay will only transmit synchrophasor messages over serial ports that have setting PROTO := PMU. The connected device will typically be a synchrophasor processor, such as the SEL
-
3306. The synchrophasor processor controls the PMU functions of the relay, with SEL Fast Message commands, including commands to start and stop synchrophasor data transmission, and commands to request a configuration block from the relay, so the synchrophasor processor determine the correct configuration for storing the synchrophasor data.
Transmit Mode Control
The relay will not begin transmitting synchrophasors until an enable message is received from the synchrophasor processor. The relay will stop synchrophasor transmission on a particular serial port when the disable command is received from the synchrophasor processor, or when the relay settings for that port are changed. The relay will stop synchrophasor transmission on all serial ports when any Global or Group settings change is made.
The relay will respond to configuration block request messages regardless of the present transmit status, waiting only as long as it takes for any partiallysent messages to be completely transmitted.
The relay will respond to a ping request immediately upon receipt, terminating any partially sent messages.
Independent Ports
Each serial port with the PROTO := PMU setting is independently configured and enabled for synchrophasor and Fast Operate commands. For example, if there are two serial ports set to PROTO := PMU, the status of one port has no effect on the other port. One port might be commanded to start transmitting synchrophasor messages, while the other port is idle, responding to a
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.42
Synchrophasors
Synchrophasor Protocols and SEL Fast Operate Commands
configuration block or Fast Operate request, or transmitting synchrophasors.
The ports are not required to have the same SPEED setting, although the
SPEED setting on each PROTO := PMU port will affect the minimum synchrophasor message data period that can be used on that port.
Synchrophasor Protocols and SEL Fast Operate
Commands
The relay can be configured to process SEL Fast Operate commands received on serial ports that have Port setting PROTO := PMU, when the Port setting
FASTOP := Y, and Global settings EPMU := Y and PMAPP := F.
This functionality can allow a remote device (Client) to initiate control actions in a serially-connected PMU without the need for a separate communications interface. The client should enable Fast Operate Transmit on the serial port connected to the PMU. This can be accomplished with Global setting
EPMU := Y, Port settings PROTO := PMU, FASTOP := Y, and PMUMODE set to either CLIENTA or CLIENTB.
The Client can request a Fast Operate Configuration Block when the relay is in the nontransmitting mode, and the relay will respond with a message, which includes codes that define the circuit breaker and remote bit control points that are available via Fast Operate commands.
Once the control points are identified, the Fast Operate Output (FOP) control bits can be assigned to SEL
OGIC
equations in the Client's SEL
OGIC
free-form protection logic settings. Fast Operate Output control bits take the form
FOPp_n, where p is the serial port (F, 1, 2, or 3) and n is the bit number from
01–32. The bit number can correspond to a circuit breaker or Remote Bit (RB) control in the local relay, identified in the Fast Operate Configuration Block.
A change to any FOPp_n value will cause the Client to transmit a Fast Operate
Remote bit control message on Port p. If the FOP control bit asserts, the message will contain the opcode to set the corresponding control bit in the
PMU. If it deasserts, the message will contain the opcode to clear the control bit. The remote device will send a Fast Operate message no later than 20 ms after it detects a change in the FOP bit.
If port setting FASTOP := Y on a serial port set to PROTO := PMU, the relay will provide Fast Operate support. The host device can request a Fast Operate
Configuration Block when the relay is in the nontransmitting mode, and the relay will respond with the message, which includes codes that define the circuit breaker and remote bit control points that are available via Fast Operate commands.
The relay will process Fast Operate requests regardless of whether synchrophasors are being transmitted, as long as serial port setting
FASTOP := Y. When FASTOP := N, the relay will ignore Fast Operate commands. Use the FASTOP := N option to lockout any control actions from that serial port if required by your company operating practices.
The relay does not acknowledge received Fast Operate commands, however, it is easy to program one or more Relay Word bits in the digital status word to observe the controlled function. For example, a Fast Operate Circuit Breaker 1 close command could be confirmed by monitoring the breaker status bit 52AA1 by assigning SELogic free-form protection logic setting PMV64 := 52AA1.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Synchrophasors
Ethernet Interface
C.6.43
SEL Fast Operate commands are discussed in SEL Fast Meter, Fast Operate,
Fast SER Messages, and Fast Message Data Access on page C.2.8. Note that
only the Fast Operate function is available on ports set to PROTO := PMU.
The protocols SEL Fast Meter and SEL Fast SER are unavailable on
PROTO := PMU ports.
Ethernet Interface
Fast operate commands can be issued from a host device to control the function of remote bits and breaker operation in the relay. When coupled with synchrophasor measurements, Fast Operate commands can provide control to system events when using an SEL-3378.
A new implementation using the extended frame in the C37.118 synchrophasor packet now makes it possible to send Fast Operate commands and synchrophasor data over the same Ethernet session. The Fast Operate command is embedded in the extended frame of the C37.118 command frame.
Previous implementations required that two Ethernet sessions be created; one for synchrophasors and another for the control. See the following example for configuration and setup of the C37.118 extended frame implementation.
EXAMPLE 6.1
Table 6.22 shows an example of a PMU communications network with
a synchrophasor vector processor (SVP) collecting and analyzing synchrophasor data in the network based on a programmed power flow and voltage regulation scheme. Each of the depicted PMU/IEDs are connected to a load, feeder line or generation facility streaming synchrophasors to the SVP.
Relay
PMU/IED
PMU/IED
Date Code 20151029
PMU/IED
SEL–3378
SVP
PMU/IED
PMU/IED PMU/IED
Relay
Figure 6.17
Synchrophasor Control Application
Should you need to change the relay protection scheme because of system configuration or to shed bus load to maintain voltage quality, you can use the
SEL-3378 to send control commands to the relay according to a programmed
Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.6.44
Synchrophasors
Ethernet Interface
algorithm. You can set a remote bit in the relay to change the group settings for an alternate protection scheme or send a PULSE command to the circuit breaker to disconnect load from the system.
To set the relay for such a control scenario, first configure synchrophasors for
the C37.118 protocol. Figure 6.18 depicts one way to configure synchrophasors
for transport. In this example all of the phase currents and voltages along with the positive sequence values are being transmitted in polar floating point format at a message rate of 60 messages per second. The filter settings are configured for a fast response with phase compensation.
Synchronized Phasor Measurement Settings
MFRMT := C37.118 MRATE := 60 PMAPP := F PHCOMP := Y
PMSTN := "Synchrophasor Control"
PMID := 1
PHVOLT := "Y" PHDATAV := ALL PMFRQA := S VYCOMP := 0.00
PHCURR := "W" PHDATAI := ALL IWCOMP := 0.00 PHNR := F
PHFMT := P FNR := F NUMANA := 0 NUMDSW := 0
TREA1 := 0
TREA2 := 0
TREA3 := 0
TREA4 := 0
PMTRIG := 0
EPMDR := N RTCRATE := 2 MRTCDLY := 500
Figure 6.18
PMU Global Settings
Next, configure the Ethernet port to transmit synchrophasor data and accept
Fast Operate commands. To enable an Ethernet port to accept Fast Operate commands, simply set FASTOP := Y.
SEL Protocol Settings
AUTO := Y FASTOP := Y TERTIM1 := 1
TERSTRN := "\005"
TERTIM2 := 0
Figure 6.19
Enabling Fast Operate Messages on Port 5
Using the C37.118 extended frame option to transport Fast Operate commands
it is necessary to setup only one TCP/UDP session (see Figure 6.20).
Phasor Measurement Configuration
EPMIP := Y PMOTS1 := UDP_T
PMOIPA1 := "192.168.1.3"
PMOTCP1 := 4712 PMOUDP1 := 4713 PMOTS2 := OFF
Figure 6.20
Ethernet Port 5 Settings for Communications Using C37.118
Extended Fame
The relay is now ready to start transmitting synchrophasors and receive Fast
Operate commands from the SVP. See Synchrophasor Protocols and SEL Fast
Operate Commands for a list of commands the relay will accept and how it
will operate.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Section 7
C.Communications Manual
Cybersecurity Features
The relay contains a number of features to assist users with meeting their cybersecurity design requirements.
Access Control
Physical Port
Controls
The relay has a number of mechanisms for managing electronic access. These include ways to limit access, provide user authentication, and monitor electronic and physical access.
Each physical serial port and the Ethernet port can be individually disabled using the EPORT setting. By default, all of the ports are enabled. It is good security practice to disable the ports not being used.
IP Ports
When using Ethernet, there are a number of possible IP ports available within the relay. Many of these IP port numbers are configurable. All IP ports can be
disabled and are disabled by default. Table 7.1 describes each of these.
21
23
80
102
123
4712/
4713
4722/
4713
20000
Table 7.1
IP Port Numbers
IP Port
Default
Port
Selection
Setting
Network
Protocol
Default
Port
State
--
TPORT
HTTPPOR
--
SNTPPOR
PMOTCP1/
PMOUDP1
PMOTCP2/
PMOUDP2
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
UDP
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
TCP/UDP Disabled
TCP/UDP Disabled
DNPPNUM TCP/UDP Disabled
Port
Enable
Setting
Purpose
FTPSERV FTP protocol access for file transfer of settings and reports
ETELNET Telnet access for general engineering terminal access
EHTTP Web server access to read various relay information
E61850
ESNTP
PMOTS1
IEC 61850 MMS for SCADA functionality
SNTP time synchronization
Synchrophasor data output, session 1
PMOTS2
EDNP
Synchrophasor data output, session 2
DNP for SCADA functionality
See Ethernet Communications on page C.1.5 for more information on these settings.
Segregating Ethernet
Ports
In most modes, the enabled Ethernet ports support both IP traffic and layer 2 protocols (i.e. IEC 61850 GOOSE). If NETMODE = ISOLATEIP, then one port only permits GOOSE traffic. This allows this port to be routed outside of a security perimeter while retaining the ability to do basic monitoring and
control. See Using Redundant Ethernet Ports on page C.1.8 for more
information on this mode.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.7.2
Cybersecurity Features
Access Control
Authentication and
Authorization
Monitoring and
Logging
Physical Access
Security
The relay supports eight levels of access, as described in the Access Levels on
page P.10.6. Refer to this section to learn how each level is accessed and what the default passwords of are. It is good security practice to change the default passwords of each access level and to use a unique password for each level.
The relay has the capability to limit the level of access on a port basis. The
MAXACC setting may be used on each port to restrict these authorization levels. This permits you to operate under the principle of “least privilege,” restricting ports to the levels need for the functions performed on those ports.
The relay supports strong passwords of up to 12 characters, using any printable character, allowing users to select complex passwords if they so choose. SEL recommends that passwords contain a minimum of 8 characters containing at least one of each of the following: lower-case letter, upper-case letter, number, and special character.
The relay provides some Relay Word bits that are useful for monitoring relay access:
➤
BADPASS—Pulses for one second if a user enters three successive bad passwords.
➤
ACCESS—Set while any user is logged into Access Level B or higher.
➤
ACCESSP—Pulses for one second whenever a user gains access to an Access Level of B or higher.
➤
➤
➤
PASSDIS—Set if the password disable jumper is installed.
BRKENAB—Set if the breaker control enable jumper is installed.
LINK5A, LINK5B, LINK5C, LINK5D—Set while the link is active on the respective Ethernet port. Loss of link can be an indication that an Ethernet cable has been disconnected.
➤
➤
LINKFAIL—Set if link is lost on any active IP port (Ports C and D).
LNKFL2—Set if link is lost on active 87L port (Port A or B).
These bits can be mapped for SCADA monitoring via DNP3, IEC 61850, or
SEL Fast Message. They may be added to the SER log for later analysis. They may also be assigned to output contacts for alarm purposes.
The SER log is a useful tool for capturing a variety of relay events. In addition to capturing state changes of user selected Relay Word bits, it captures all power-ups, settings changes, and group switches. See Sequential Events
Recorder (SER) on page P.8.31 for more information about SER.
Physical security of cybersecurity assets is a common concern. Typically, relays are installed within a control enclosure that provides physical security.
Other times, they are installed in boxes within the switch yard. The relay provides some tools that may be useful to help manage physical security, especially when the unit is installed in the switch yard.
You can monitor physical ingress by wiring a door sensor to one of the relay contact inputs. This input can then be mapped for SCADA monitoring or added to the SER log so that you can monitor when physical access to the relay occurs.
It is also possible to wire an electronic latch to an relay contact output. You could then map this input for SCADA control.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Cybersecurity Features
Configuration Management
C.7.3
Configuration Management
Many users are concerned about managing the configuration of their relays.
The relay provides some mechanisms to help users manage this.
As mentioned earlier, all settings changes are logged to the SER log. Analysis of this log will let you determine if any unauthorized settings changes occurred.
The relay also stores a hash code for each settings class in the CFG.TXT file.
After configuring the device, you can read the CFG.TXT file and store it for future reference. You can then periodically read this file from the relay and compare it to the stored reference. If any of the hash codes have changed, then you know that settings class has been modified.
Firmware Hash Verification
SEL provides firmware hashes as an additional tool to verify the integrity of
SEL firmware upgrade files. This helps ensure that the firmware received from the factory is complete and unaltered prior to sending the firmware to the SEL device. Verify that the firmware file in your possession is a known good SEL firmware release by comparing the calculated hash value of the firmware in your possession with the hash value provided at http://www.selinc.com/ firmwarehash/.
Malware Protection
The relay has inherent and continuous monitoring for malware. For a full description of this, see http://www.selinc.com/mitigate_malware.
Security Vulnerabilities
If SEL finds a security vulnerability with the relay, it will be disclosed using our standard security notification process. For a full description of this process, see http://www.selinc.com/mitigate_malware.
Settings Erasure
IMPORTANT:
Do not do this when sending in the relay for service at the factory. SEL needs to be able to see how the relay was configured in order to properly diagnose any problems.
It is often desirable to erase the settings from the relay when it is removed from service. You can completely erase all the configuration settings from the relay using this procedure.
Step 1. Go to Access Level 2.
Step 2. Execute the R_S command.
Step 3. Allow the relay to restart.
Date Code 20151029 Communications Manual SEL-411L Relay
C.7.4
Cybersecurity Features
Settings Erasure
Step 4. Go to Access Level 2.
Step 5. Execute the R_S command.
Step 6. Allow the relay to restart.
Once this procedure is complete, all internal instances of all user settings and passwords will be erased. Do not do this when sending in the relay for service at the factory. SEL needs to be able to see how the relay was configured in order to properly diagnose many problems.
SEL-411L Relay Communications Manual Date Code 20151029
Glossary
a Contact a Output b Contact b Output c Contact c Output
4U, 5U, 6U
A
ABS Operator
AC Ripple
Acceptance Testing
Access Level
Access Level 0
Access Level 1
Access Level 2
Access Level A
A breaker auxiliary contact (ANSI Standard Device Number 52A) that closes when the breaker is closed and opens when the breaker is open.
A relay control output that closes when the output relay asserts.
A breaker auxiliary contact (ANSI Standard Device Number 52B) that opens when the breaker is closed and closes when the breaker is open.
A relay control output that opens when the output relay asserts.
A breaker auxiliary contact that can be set to serve either as an “a” contact or as a “b” contact.
An output with both an “a” output and “b” output sharing a common post.
The designation of the vertical height of a device in rack units. One rack unit,
U, is approximately 1.75 inches or 44.45 mm.
Abbreviation for amps or amperes; unit of electrical current flow.
An operator in math SEL
OGIC
®
control equations that provides absolute value.
The peak-to-peak ac component of a signal or waveform. In the station dc battery system, monitoring ac ripple provides an indication of whether the substation battery charger has failed.
Testing that confirms that the relay meets published critical performance specifications and requirements of the intended application. Such testing involves testing protection elements and logic functions when qualifying a relay model for use on the utility system.
A relay command level with a specified set of relay information and commands. Except for Access Level 0, you must have the correct password to enter an access level.
The least secure and most limited access level. No password protects this level. From this level, you must enter a password to go to a higher level.
A relay command level you use to monitor (view) relay information. The default access level for the relay front panel.
The most secure access level where you have total relay functionality and control of all settings types.
A relay command level you use to access all Access Level 1 and Access Level
B (Breaker) functions plus Automation, Alias, Global, Front Panel, Report,
Port, and DNP settings.
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
GL.2
Glossary
Access Level B—ANSI Standard Device Numbers
Access Level B
Access Level O
Access Level P
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet
Architect
®
SEL-5032
Software
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet
®
SEL-5030 Software
ACSI
Active Settings Group
Admittance
Advanced Settings
Analog Quantities
AND Operator
ANSI Standard
Device Numbers
A relay command level you use for Access Level 1 functions plus circuit breaker control and data.
A relay command level you use to access all Access Level 1 and Access Level
B (Breaker) functions plus Output, Alias, Global, Front Panel, Report, Port, and DNP settings.
A relay command level you use to access all Access Level 1 and Access Level
B (Breaker) functions plus Protection, SEL
OGIC
, Alias, Global, Group,
Breaker Monitor, Front Panel, Report, Port, and DNP settings.
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet Architect is an add-on to the
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet Suite that uses the IEC 61850 Substation Configuration Language to configure SEL IEDs.
A Windows
®
-based program that simplifies settings and provides analysis support.
Abstract Communications Service Interface for the IEC 61850 protocol.
Defines a set of objects, a set of services to manipulate and access those objects, and a base set of data types for describing objects.
The settings group that the relay is presently using from among six settings groups available in the relay.
The reciprocal of impedance; I/V.
Settings for customizing protection functions; these settings are hidden unless you set EADVS := Y and EGADVS := Y.
Variables represented by such fluctuating measurable quantities as temperature, frequency, current, and voltage.
Logical AND. An operator in Boolean SEL
OGIC
control equations that requires fulfillment of conditions on both sides of the operator before the equation is true.
A list of standard numbers used to represent electrical protection and control relays. The standard device numbers used in this instruction manual include the following:
21 Distance element
25 Synchronism-check element
27 Undervoltage Element
32 Directional Elements
50 Overcurrent Element
51 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Element
52 AC Circuit Breaker
59 Overvoltage Element
67 Definite Time Overcurrent
79 Recloser
86 Breaker Failure Lockout
89 Disconnect
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
Anti-Aliasing Filter
Apparent Power, S
Arcing Resistance
ASCII
ASCII Terminal
Date Code 20151029
Assert
AT Modem Command Set
Dialing String Standard
Autoconfiguration
Automatic Messages
Automatic Reclose
Automation Variables
Autoreclose-
Drive-to-Lockout
Autotransformer
AX-S4 MMS
Glossary
Anti-Aliasing Filter—AX-S4 MMS
GL.3
These numbers are frequently used within a suffix letter to further designate their application. The suffix letters used in this instruction manual include the following:
P Phase Element
G Residual/Ground Element
N Neutral/Ground Element
Q Negative-Sequence (3I2) Element
A low pass filter that blocks frequencies too high for the given sampling rate to accurately reproduce.
Complex power expressed in units of volt-amps (VA), kilovolt-amps (kVA), or megavolt-amps (MVA). Accounts for both real (P) and reactive (Q) power dissipated in a circuit: S = P + jQ. This is power at the fundamental frequency only; no harmonics are included in this quantity.
The resistance in the arc resulting from a power line fault.
Abbreviation for American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
Defines a standard set of text characters. The relay uses ASCII text characters to communicate using front-panel and rear-panel EIA-232 serial ports on the relay and through virtual serial ports.
A terminal without built-in logic or local processing capability that can only send and receive information.
To activate. To fulfill the logic or electrical requirements needed to operate a device. To set a logic condition to the true state (logical 1) of that condition.
To apply a closed contact to a relay input. To close a normally open output contact. To open a normally closed output contact.
The command language standard that Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc. developed to control auto-dial modems from an ASCII terminal (usually
EIA-232 connected) or a PC (personal computer) containing software allowing emulation of such a terminal.
The ability to determine relay type, model number, metering capability, port
ID, data rate, passwords, relay elements, and other information that an IED
(an SEL-2020/2030 communications processor) needs to automatically communicate with relays.
Messages including status failure and status warning messages that the relay generates at the serial ports and displays automatically on the front-panel
LCD.
Automatic closing of a circuit breaker after a breaker trip by a protective relay.
Variables that you include in automation SEL
OGIC
control equations.
A logical condition that drives the autoreclose function out of service with respect to a specific circuit breaker.
A transformer with at least two common windings.
“Access for MMS” is an IEC 61850, UCA2, and MMS client application produced by SISCO, Inc., for real-time data integration in Microsoft
Windows-based systems supporting OPC and DDE. Included with AX-S4
SEL-411L Relay
GL.4
Glossary
Bandpass Filter—CID
Bandpass Filter
MMS is the interactive MMS Object Explorer for browser-like access to
IEC 61850 / UCA2 and MMS device objects.
A filter that passes frequencies within a certain range and blocks all frequencies outside this range.
An SEL logic that determines the directional element that the relay uses for ground faults.
Best Choice Ground
Directional Supervision™ logic
Bit Label
Bit Value
Block Trip Extension
Blocking Signal Extension
Bolted Fault
Boolean Logic Statements
Breaker Auxiliary Contact
Breaker-and-a-half
Configuration
Buffered Report
C37.118
Category
CCVT
Checksum
CID
The identifier for a particular bit.
Logical 0 or logical 1.
Continuing the blocking signal at the receiving relay by delaying the dropout of Relay Word bit BT.
The blocking signal for the DCB (directional comparison blocking) trip scheme is extended by a time delay on dropout timer to prevent unwanted tripping following current reversals.
A fault with essentially zero impedance or resistance between the shorted conductors.
Statements consisting of variables that behave according to Boolean logic operators such as AND, NOT, and OR.
An electrical contact associated with a circuit breaker that opens or closes to indicate the breaker position. A form-a breaker auxiliary contact (ANSI
Standard Device Number 52A) closes when the breaker is closed and opens when the breaker is open. A form-b breaker auxiliary contact (ANSI Standard
Device Number 52B) opens when the breaker is closed and closes when the breaker is open.
A switching station arrangement of three circuit breakers per two circuits; the two circuits share one of the circuit breakers.
IEC 61850 IEDs can issue buffered reports of internal events (caused by trigger options data-change, quality-change, and data-update). These event reports can be sent immediately or buffered (to some practical limit) for transmission, such that values of data are not lost because of transport flow control constraints or loss of connection. Buffered reporting provides sequence-of-events (SOE) functionality.
IEEE C37.118, Standard for Synchrophasors for Power Systems
A collection of similar relay settings.
Coupling-capacitor voltage transformer that uses a capacitive voltage divider to reduce transmission voltage to a level safe for metering and relaying devices. See CVT.
A method for checking the accuracy of data transmission involving summation of a group of digits and comparison of this sum to a previously calculated value.
Checksum identification of the firmware.
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
CID File
Circuit Breaker
Failure Logic
Circuit Breaker
History Report
Circuit Breaker Report
Class
Cold Start
Commissioning Testing
Glossary
CID File—COMTRADE
GL.5
IEC 61850 Configured IED Description file. XML file that contains the configuration for a specific IED.
This logic within the relay detects and warns of failure or incomplete operation of a circuit breaker in clearing a fault or in performing a trip or close sequence.
A concise circuit breaker event history that contains as many as 128 events.
This breaker history report includes circuit breaker mechanical operation times, electrical operation times, interrupted currents, and dc battery monitor voltages.
A full report of breaker parameters for the most recent operation. These parameters include interrupted currents, number of operations, and mechanical and electrical operating times among many parameters.
The first level of the relay settings structure including Global, Group, Breaker
Monitor, Port, Report, Front Panel, DNP settings, Protection SEL
OGIC
control equations, Automation SEL
OGIC
control equations, and Output SEL
OGIC control equations.
Turning a system on without carryover of previous system activities.
Testing that serves to validate all system ac and dc connections and confirm that the relay, auxiliary equipment, and SCADA interface all function as intended with your settings. Perform such testing when installing a new protection system.
Composite data objects that contain instances of UCA standard data types.
Common
Class Components
Common Data Class
Common Inputs
Common Time Delay
Common Zone Timing
Communications Protocol
Communications-Assisted
Tripping
Comparison
COMTRADE
IEC 61850 grouping of data objects that model substation functions. Common
Data Classes include Status information, Measured information, Controllable status, Controllable analog, Status settings, Analog settings, and Description information.
Relay control inputs that share a common terminal.
Both ground and phase distance protection follow a common time delay on pickup.
Both ground and phase distance protection follow a common time delay on pickup.
A language for communication between devices.
Circuit breaker tripping resulting from the transmission of a control signal over a communications medium.
Boolean SEL
OGIC
control equation operation that compares two numerical values. Compares floating-point values such as currents, total counts, and other measured and calculated quantities.
Abbreviation for Common Format for Transient Data Exchange. The relay supports the IEEE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange
(COMTRADE) for Power Systems, IEEE C37.111–1999.
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
GL.6
Glossary
Conditioning Timers—Data Attribute
Conditioning Timers
Contact Input
Contact Output
Coordination Timer
Control Input
Control Output
COS Operator
Counter
Cross-country fault
CT
CT Subsidence Current
CTR
Current
Reversal Guard Logic
Current
Transformer Saturation
CVT
CVT Transient Blocking
CVT Transient
Detection Logic
Data Attribute
Timers for conditioning Boolean values. Conditioning timers either stretch incoming pulses or allow you to require that an input take a state for a certain period before reacting to the new state.
See Control input.
See Control output.
A timer that delays an overreaching element so that a downstream device has time to operate.
Relay inputs for monitoring the state of external circuits. Connect auxiliary relay and circuit breaker contacts to the control inputs.
Relay outputs that affect the state of other equipment. Connect control outputs to circuit breaker trip and close coils, breaker failure auxiliary relays, communications-assisted tripping circuits, and SCADA systems.
Operator in math SEL
OGIC
control equations that provides the cosine function.
Variable or device such as a register or storage location that either records or represents the number of times an event occurs.
A cross-country fault consists of simultaneous separate single phase-toground faults on parallel lines.
Current transformer.
Subsidence current appears as a small exponentially decaying dc current with a long time constant. This current results from the energy trapped in the CT magnetizing branch after the circuit breaker opens to clear a fault or interrupt load.
Current transformer ratio.
Under this logic, the relay does not key the transmitter and ignores reception of a permissive signal from the remote terminal when a reverse-looking element detects an external fault.
The point of maximum current input to a current transformer; any change of input beyond the saturation point fails to produce any appreciable change in output.
Capacitive voltage transformer that uses a capacitive voltage divider to reduce transmission voltage to a level safe for metering and relaying devices. See
CCVT.
Logic that prevents transient errors on capacitive voltage transformers from causing false operation of Zone 1 mho elements.
Logic that detects transient errors on capacitive voltage transformers.
In the IEC 61850 protocol, the name, format, range of possible values, and representation of values being communicated.
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
Data Bit
Data Class
Data Label
Data Object
DC Offset
DCB (Directional
Comparison Blocking)
DCE Devices
DCUB (Directional
Comparison Unblocking)
Dead Band
Deassert
Debounce Time
Default Data Map
Delta
Demand Meter
Direct Tripping
Directional Start
Directional Supervision
Glossary
Data Bit—Directional Supervision
GL.7
A single unit of information that can assume a value of either logical 0 or logical 1 and can convey control, address, information, or frame check sequence data.
In the IEC 61850 protocol, an aggregation of classes or data attributes.
The identifier for a particular data item.
In the IEC 61850 protocol, part of a logical node representing specific information (status or measurement, for example). From an object-oriented point of view, a data object is an instance of a data class.
A dc component of fault current that results from the physical phenomenon preventing an instantaneous change of current in an inductive circuit.
A communications-assisted protection scheme. A fault occurring behind a sending relay causes the sending relay to transmit a blocking signal to a remote relay; the blocking signal interrupts the tripping circuit of the remote relay and prevents tripping of the protected line.
Data communication equipment devices (modems).
A communications-assisted tripping scheme with logic added to a POTT scheme that allows high-speed tripping of overreaching elements for a brief time during a loss of channel. The logic then blocks trip permission until the communications channel guard returns for a set time.
The range of variation an analog quantity can traverse before causing a response.
To deactivate. To remove the logic or electrical requirements needed to operate a device. To clear a logic condition to its false state (logical 0). To open the circuit or open the contacts across a relay input. To open a normally open output contact. To close a normally closed output contact.
The time that masks the period when relay contacts continue to move after closing; debounce time covers this indeterminate state.
The default map of objects and indices that the relay uses in DNP protocol.
A phase-to-phase series connection of circuit elements, particularly voltage transformers or loads.
A measuring function that calculates a rolling average or thermal average of instantaneous measurements over time.
Local or remote protection elements provide tripping without any additional supervision.
A blocking signal provided by reverse reaching elements to a remote terminal used in DCB communications-assisted tripping schemes. If the fault is internal
(on the protected line), the directional start elements do not see the fault and do not send a blocking signal. If the fault is external (not on the protected line), the directional start elements start sending the block signal.
The relay uses directional elements to determine whether protective elements operate based on the direction of a fault relative to the relay.
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
GL.8
Glossary
Disabling Time Delay—Electrical Operating Time
Disabling Time Delay
Distance
Calculation Smoothness
Distance Protection Zone
DMTC Period
DNP (Distributed
Network Protocol)
Dropout Time
A DCUB scheme timer (UBDURD) that prevents high-speed tripping following a loss-of-channel condition.
A relay algorithm that determines whether the distance-to-fault calculation varies significantly or is constant.
The area of a power system where a fault or other application-specific abnormal condition should cause operation of a protective relay.
The time of the demand meter time constant in demand metering.
Manufacturer-developed, hardware-independent communications protocol.
DTE Devices
DTT (Direct Transfer
Trip)
Dumb Terminal
DUTT
(Direct Underreaching
Transfer Trip)
Echo
Echo Block Time Delay
Echo Duration Time Delay
ECTT
(Echo Conversion to Trip)
EEPROM
EHV
EIA-232
EIA-485
Electrical Operating Time
The time measured from the removal of an input signal until the output signal deasserts. You can set the time, in the case of a logic variable timer, or the dropout time can be a result of the characteristics of an element algorithm, as in the case of an overcurrent element dropout time.
Data terminal equipment (computers, terminals, printers, relays, etc.).
A communications-assisted tripping scheme. A relay at one end of a line sends a tripping signal to the relay at the opposite end of the line.
See ASCII terminal.
A communications-assisted tripping scheme. Detection of a Zone 1 fault at either end of a line causes tripping of the local circuit breaker as well as simultaneous transmission of a tripping signal to the relay at the opposite end of the line. The scheme is said to be underreaching because the Zone 1 relays at both ends of the line reach only 80 percent (typically) of the entire line length.
The action of a local relay returning (echoing) the remote terminal permissive signal to the remote terminal when the local breaker is open or a weak infeed condition exists.
A time delay that blocks the echo logic after dropout of local permissive elements.
A time delay that limits the duration of the echoed permissive signal.
An element that allows a weak terminal, after satisfaction of specific conditions, to trip by converting an echoed permissive signal to a trip signal.
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory. Nonvolatile memory where relay settings, event reports, SER records, and other nonvolatile data are stored.
Extra high voltage. Voltages greater than 230 kV.
Electrical definition for point-to-point serial data communications interfaces, based on the standard EIA/TIA-232. Formerly known as RS-232.
Electrical standard for multidrop serial data communications interfaces, based on the standard EIA/TIA-485. Formerly known as RS-485.
Time between trip or close initiation and an open phase status change.
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
Electromechanical Reset
End-Zone Fault
Energy Metering
Equalize Mode
ESD
(Electrostatic Discharge)
Ethernet
Event History
Event Report
Event Summary
EXP Operator
F_TRIG
Fail-Safe
Falling Edge
Fast Meter
Fast Operate
Fast Message
Fault Type
Identification Selection
Glossary
Electromechanical Reset—Fault Type Identification Selection
GL.9
Setting of the relay to match the reset characteristics of an electromechanical overcurrent relay.
A fault at the farthest end of a zone that a relay is required to protect.
Energy metering provides a look at imported power, exported power, and net usage over time; measured in MWh (megawatt hours).
A procedure where substation batteries are overcharged intentionally for a preselected time in order to bring all cells to a uniform output.
The sudden transfer of charge between objects at different potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.
A network physical and data link layer defined by IEEE 802.2 and IEEE
802.3.
A quick look at recent relay activity that includes a standard report header; event number, date, time, and type; fault location; maximum fault phase current; active group at the trigger instant; and targets.
A text-based collection of data stored by the relay in response to a triggering condition, such as a fault or ASCII TRI command. The data show relay measurements before and after the trigger, in addition to the states of protection elements, relay inputs, and relay outputs each processing interval.
After an electrical system fault, use event reports to analyze relay and system performance.
A shortened version of stored event reports. An event summary includes items such as event date and time, event type, fault location, time source, recloser shot counter, prefault and fault voltages, currents, and sequence current, and
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
®
communications channel status (if enabled).
The relay sends an event report summary (if auto messaging is enabled) to the relay serial port a few seconds after an event.
Math SEL
OGIC
control equation operator that provides exponentiation.
Falling-edge trigger. Boolean SEL
OGIC
control equation operator that triggers an operation upon logic detection of a falling edge.
Refers to an output that is open during normal relay operation and closed when relay power is removed or if the relay fails. Configure alarm outputs for fail-safe operation.
Transition from logical 1 to logical 0.
SEL binary serial port command used to collect metering data with SEL relays.
SEL binary serial port command used to perform control with SEL relays.
SEL binary serial port protocol used for Fast SER, Fast Message
Synchrophasors, and RTD communications.
Logic the relay uses to identify balanced and unbalanced faults (FIDS).
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
GL.10
Glossary
FID—Ground Directional Element Priority
FID
SEL-411L Relay
Firmware
Flash Memory
Flashover
Float High
Float Low
Free-Form Logic
Free-Form
SEL
OGIC
Control Equations
FTP
Function
Function Code
Functional Component
Fundamental Frequency
Global Settings
GOMSFE
GOOSE
GPS
Ground Directional
Element Priority
Relay firmware identification string. Lists the relay model, firmware version and date code, and other information that uniquely identifies the firmware installed in a particular relay.
The nonvolatile program stored in the relay that defines relay operation.
A type of nonvolatile relay memory used for storing large blocks of nonvolatile data.
A disruptive discharge over the surface of a solid dielectric in a gas or liquid.
The highest charging voltage supplied by a battery charger.
The lowest charging voltage supplied by a battery charger.
Custom logic creation and execution order.
Free-form relay programming that includes mathematical operations, custom logic execution order, extended relay customization, and automated operation.
File transfer protocol.
In IEC 61850, task(s) performed by the substation automation system, i.e., by application functions. Generally, functions exchange data with other functions. Details are dependent on the functions involved.
Functions are performed by IEDs (physical devices). A function may be split into parts residing in different IEDs but communicating with each other
(distributed function) and with parts of other functions. These communicating parts are called logical nodes.
A code that defines how you manipulate an object in DNP3 protocol.
Portion of a UCA GOMSFE brick dedicated to a particular function including status, control, and descriptive tags.
The component of the measured electrical signal with a frequency equal to the normal electrical system frequency, usually 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Generally used to differentiate between the normal system frequency and any harmonic frequencies present.
General settings including those for relay and station identifiers, number of breakers, date format, phase rotation, nominal system frequency, enables, station dc monitoring, control inputs, settings group selection, data reset controls, frequency tracking, time and date management, and current and voltage source selection.
Generic Object Model for Substation and Feeder Equipment; a system for presenting and exchanging IED data.
IEC 61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event. GOOSE objects can quickly and conveniently transfer status, controls, and measured values among peers on an IEC 61850 network.
Global Positioning System. Source of position and high-accuracy time information.
The order the relay uses to select directional elements to provide ground directional decisions; relay setting ORDER.
Date Code 20151029
Ground Distance Element
Ground Fault
Loop Impedance
Ground
Overcurrent Elements
Ground Quadrilateral
Distance Protection
Ground Return Resistance
Guard-Present Delay
GUI
Hexadecimal Address
High-Speed,
High-Current
Interrupting
Control Output
High-Resolution
Data Capture
HMI
Homogeneous System
HV
Hybrid Control Output
IA, IB, IC
ICD File
Glossary
Ground Distance Element—ICD File
GL.11
A mho or quadrilateral distance element the relay uses to detect faults involving ground along a transmission line.
The impedance in a fault-caused electric circuit connecting two or more points through ground conduction paths.
Elements that operate by comparing a residual ground calculation of the threephase inputs with the residual overcurrent threshold setting. The relay asserts ground overcurrent elements when a relay residual current calculation exceeds ground current setting thresholds.
Ground distance protection consisting of a four-sided characteristic on an R-X diagram.
Fault resistance that can consist of ground path resistance typically in tower footing resistance and tree resistance.
A timer that determines the minimum time before the relay reinstates permissive tripping following a loss-of-channel condition in the DCUB communications-assisted tripping scheme; relay setting GARD1D.
Graphical user interface.
A register address consisting of a numeral with an “h” suffix or a “0x” prefix.
A control output similar to, but faster than, the hybrid control output. The high-speed, high-current interrupting output uses an insulated gate bipolar junction transistor (IGBT) to interrupt (break) high inductive dc currents and to very rapidly make and hold the current until a metallic contact operates, at which time the IGBT turns off and the metallic contact holds the current.
Unlike the hybrid control output, this output is not polarity sensitive; reversed polarity causes no misoperations.
Reporting of 3 kHz low-pass analog filtered data from the power system at each event trigger or trip at high sample rates of 8000 samples/second, 4000 samples/second, 2000 samples/second, and 1000 samples/second.
Human machine interface.
A power system with nearly the same angle (<5 ° difference) for the impedance angles of the local source, the protected line, and the remote source.
High voltage. System voltage greater than or equal to 100 kV and less than
230 kV.
Contacts that use an insulated gate bipolar junction transistor (IGBT) in parallel with a mechanical contact to interrupt (break) high inductive dc currents. The contacts can carry continuous current, while eliminating the need for heat sinking and providing security against voltage transients. These contacts are polarity dependent and cannot be used to switch ac control signals.
Measured A-phase, B-phase, and C-phase currents.
IEC 61850 IED Capability Description file. XML file that describes IED capabilities, including information on logical node and GOOSE support.
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
GL.12
Glossary
IEC 61850—Load Encroachment
IEC 61850
IED
IEEE
IG
IGBT
Independent Zone Timing
Infinite Bus
Input Conditioning
Instance
Instantaneous Meter
IP Address
IRIG-B
Jitter
L/R
Latch Bits
LED
Left-Side Value
Line Impedance
LMD
LN Operator
Load Encroachment
Internationally standardized method of communications and integration conceived with the goal of supporting systems of multivendor IEDs networked together to perform protection, monitoring, automation, metering, and control.
Intelligent electronic device.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
Residual current, calculated from the sum of the phase currents. In normal, balanced operation, this current is very small or zero.
Insulated gate bipolar junction transistor.
The provision of separate zone timers for phase and ground distance elements.
A constant-voltage bus.
The establishment of debounce time and assertion level.
A subdivision of a relay settings class. Group settings have several subdivisions (Group 1–Group 6), while the Global settings class has one instance.
Type of meter data presented by the relay that includes the present values measured at the relay ac inputs. The word “Instantaneous” is used to differentiate these values from the measurements presented by the demand, thermal, energy, and other meter types.
An identifier for a computer or device on a TCP/IP network. Networks using the TCP/IP protocol route messages based on the IP address of the destination.
The format of an IP address is a 32-bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods. Each number can be zero to 255. For example,
1.160.10.240 could be an IP address.
A time code input that the relay can use to set the internal relay clock.
Time, amplitude, frequency, or phase-related abrupt, spurious variations in duration, magnitude, or frequency.
Circuit inductive/resistive ratio.
Nonvolatile storage locations for binary information.
Light-emitting diode. Used as indicators on the relay front panel.
LVALUE. Result storage location of a SEL
OGIC
control equation.
The phasor sum of resistance and reactance in the form of positive-sequence, negative-sequence, and zero-sequence impedances of the protected line.
SEL distributed port switch protocol.
Math SEL
OGIC
control equation operator that provides natural logarithm.
The load-encroachment feature allows setting of phase overcurrent elements and phase distance elements independent of load levels.
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
Local Bits
Lockout Relay
Logical 0
Logical 1
Logical Node
Loss of Channel
Loss of Guard
Loss of Potential
Low-Level Test Interface
MAC Address
Maintenance Testing
Math Operations
Math Operators
Maximum Dropout Time
Maximum/Minimum
Meter
Mechanical Operating
Time
Mho Characteristic
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
®
Communications
Glossary
Local Bits—M
IRRORED
B
ITS
®
Communications
GL.13
The Relay Word bit outputs of local control switches that you access through the front panel of the relay. Local control switches replace traditional panelmounted control switches.
An auxiliary relay that prevents operation of associated devices until it is reset either electrically or by hand.
A false logic condition, dropped out element, or deasserted control input or control output.
A true logic condition, picked up element, or asserted control input or control output.
In IEC 61850, the smallest part of a function that exchanges data. A logical node (LN) is an object defined by its data and methods. Each logical node represents a group of data (controls, status, measurements, etc.) associated with a particular function.
Loss of guard and no permissive signal from communications gear in a DCUB
(directional comparison unblocking scheme) for either two or three terminal lines.
No guard signal from communications gear.
Loss of one or more phase voltage inputs to the relay secondary inputs.
An interface that provides a means for interrupting the connection between the relay input transformers and the input processing module and allows inserting reduced-scale test quantities for relay testing.
The Media Access Control (hardware) address of a device connected to a shared network medium, most often used with Ethernet networks.
Testing that confirms that the relay is measuring ac quantities accurately and verifies correct functioning of auxiliary equipment, scheme logic, and protection elements.
Calculations for automation or extended protection functions.
Operators that you use in the construction of math SEL
OGIC
control equations to manipulate numerical values and provide a numerical base-10 result.
The maximum time interval following a change of input conditions between the deassertion of the input and the deassertion of the output.
Type of meter data presented by the relay that includes a record of the maximum and minimum of each value, along with the date and time that each maximum and minimum occurred.
Time between trip initiation or close initiation and the change in status of an associated circuit breaker auxiliary 52A normally open contacts.
A directional distance relay characteristic that plots a circle for the basic relay operation characteristic on an R-X diagram.
Patented relay-to-relay communications technique that sends internal logic status, encoded in a digital message, from one relay to the other. Eliminates the need for some communications hardware.
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
GL.14
Glossary
MMS—Nonhomogeneous System
MMS
MOD
Model
Motor Running Time
MOV
Negation Operator
Negative-Sequence
Manufacturing Messaging Specification, a data exchange protocol used by
UCA.
Motor-operated disconnect.
Model of device (or component of a device) including the data, control access, and other features in UCA protocol.
The circuit breaker motor running time. Depending on your particular circuit breaker, you can use the motor running time to monitor the charge time of the circuit breaker springs or the running time of the compressor motor.
Metal-oxide varistor.
A SEL
OGIC
control equation math operator that changes the sign of the argument. The argument of the negation operation is multiplied by –1.
A configuration of three-phase currents and voltages. The currents and voltages have equal magnitude and a phase displacement of 120°, and have clockwise phase rotation with current and voltage maxima that occur differently from that for positive-sequence configuration. If positive-sequence maxima occur as ABC, negative-sequence maxima occur as ACB.
An element allowed to operate only when a negative-sequence current exceeds a threshold.
Negative-Sequence
Current Supervision
Pickup
Negative-Sequence
Directional Element
Negative-Sequence
Impedance
Negative-Sequence
Overcurrent Elements
SEL-411L Relay
Negative-Sequence
Voltage-Polarized
Directional Element
NEMA
Neutral Impedance
No Current/Residual
Current Circuit Breaker
Failure Protection Logic
Nondirectional Start
Nonhomogeneous System
An element that provides directivity by the sign, plus or minus, of the measured negative-sequence impedance.
Impedance of a device or circuit that results in current flow with a balanced negative-sequence set of voltage sources.
Elements that operate by comparing a negative-sequence calculation of the three-phase secondary inputs with negative-sequence overcurrent setting thresholds. The relay asserts these elements when a relay negative-sequence calculation exceeds negative-sequence current setting thresholds.
These directional elements are 32QG and 32Q. 32QG supervises the ground distance elements and residual directional overcurrent elements; 32Q supervises the phase distance elements.
National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association.
An impedance from neutral to ground on a device such as a generator or transformer.
Logic for detecting and initiating circuit breaker failure protection with a logic transition, or when a weak source drives the fault or a high-resistance ground fault occurs.
A blocking signal provided by nondirectional overcurrent elements to a remote terminal used in DCB communications-assisted tripping schemes. The nondirectional start elements start sending the block signal.
A power system with a large angle difference (>5° difference) for the impedance angles of the local source, the protected line, and the remote source.
Date Code 20151029
Nonvolatile Memory
NOT Operator
OR Operator
OSI
Out-of-Step Blocking
Out-of-Step Tripping
Override Values
Parentheses Operator
PC
Peak Demand Metering
Phase Distance Element
Phase Overcurrent
Element
Phase Rotation
Phase Selection
Pickup Time
Pinout
Polarizing Memory
Glossary
Nonvolatile Memory—Polarizing Memory
GL.15
Relay memory that persists over time to maintain the contained data even when the relay is de-energized.
A logical operator that produces the inverse value.
Logical OR. A Boolean SEL
OGIC
control equation operator that compares two
Boolean values and yields either a logical 1 if either compared Boolean value is logical 1 or a logical 0 if both compared Boolean values are logical 0.
Open Systems Interconnect. A model for describing communications protocols. Also an ISO suite of protocols designed to this model.
Blocks the operation of phase distance elements during power swings.
Trips the circuit breaker(s) during power swings.
Test values you enter in Fast Meter, DNP, and communications card database storage.
Math operator. Use paired parentheses to control the execution of operations in a SEL
OGIC
control equation.
Personal computer.
Maximum demand and a time stamp for phase currents, negative-sequence and zero-sequence currents, and powers. The relay stores peak demand values and the date and time these occurred to nonvolatile storage once per day, overwriting the previously stored value if the new value is larger. Should the relay lose control power, the relay restores the peak demand information saved at 23:50 hours on the previous day.
A mho distance element the relay uses to detect phase-to-phase and threephase faults at a set reach along a transmission line.
Elements that operate by comparing the phase current applied to the secondary current inputs with the phase overcurrent setting. The relay asserts these elements when any combination of the phase currents exceeds phase current setting thresholds.
The sequence of voltage or current phasors in a multiphase electrical system.
In an ABC phase rotation system, the B-phase voltage lags the A-phase voltage by 120°, and the C-phase voltage lags B-phase voltage by 120°. In an
ACB phase rotation system, the C-phase voltage lags the A-phase voltage by
120°, and the B-phase voltage lags the C-phase voltage by 120°.
Ability of the relay to determine the faulted phase or phases.
The time measured from the application of an input signal until the output signal asserts. You can set the time, as in the case of a logic variable timer, or the pickup time can be a result of the characteristics of an element algorithm, as in the case of an overcurrent element pickup time.
The definition or assignment of each electrical connection at an interface.
Typically refers to a cable, connector, or jumper.
A circuit that provides a polarizing source for a period after the polarizing quantity has changed or gone to zero.
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
GL.16
Glossary
Pole Discrepancy—Qualifier Code
Pole Discrepancy
Pole-Open Logic
Pole Scatter
Port Settings
Positive-Sequence
Positive-Sequence
Current Restraint
Factor, a2
A difference in the open/closed status of circuit breaker poles. The relay continuously monitors the status of each circuit breaker pole to detect open or close conditions among the three poles.
Logic that determines the conditions that the relay uses to indicate an open circuit breaker pole.
Deviation in operating time between pairs of circuit breaker poles.
Communications port settings such as Data Bits, Speed, and Stop Bits.
A configuration of three-phase currents and voltages. The currents and voltages have equal magnitude and a phase displacement of 120°. With conventional rotation in the counter-clockwise direction, the positivesequence current and voltage maxima occur in ABC order.
This factor compensates for highly unbalanced systems with many untransposed lines and helps prevent misoperation during current transformer saturation. The a2 factor is the ratio of the magnitude of negative-sequence current to the magnitude of positive-sequence current (I2/I1).
An element that operates only when a positive-sequence current exceeds a threshold.
Positive-Sequence
Current Supervision
Pickup
Positive-Sequence
Impedance
POTT (Permissive
Overreaching
Transfer Trip)
Power Factor
PPS
Impedance of a device or circuit that results in current flow with a balanced positive-sequence set of voltage sources.
A communications-assisted line protection scheme. At least two overreaching protective relays must receive a permissive signal from the other terminal(s) before all relays trip and isolate the protected line.
The cosine of the angle by which phase current lags or leads phase voltage in an ac electrical circuit. Power factor equals 1.0 for power flowing to a pure resistive load.
Pulse per second from a GPS receiver. Previous relays had a TIME 1k PPS input.
Segregation of protection and automation processing and settings.
Protection and
Automation Separation
Protection Settings Group
Protection-Disabled State
PT
PTR
Quadrilateral
Characteristic
Qualifier Code
Individual scheme settings for as many as six different schemes (or instances).
Suspension of relay protection element and trip/close logic processing and deenergization of all control outputs.
Potential transformer. Also referred to as a voltage transformer or VT.
Potential transformer ratio.
A distance relay characteristic on an R-X diagram consisting of a directional measurement, reactance measurement, and two resistive measurements.
Specifies type of range for DNP3 objects. With the help of qualifier codes,
DNP master devices can compose the shortest, most concise messages.
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
R_TRIG
RAM
Reactance Reach
Real Power
Reclose
Relay Word Bit
Remapping
Remote Bit
Report Settings
Residual Current
Residual Directional
Overcurrent Element
Residual
Overcurrent Protection
Resistance Blinder
Resistive Reach
Retrip
Reverse Fault
Rising Edge
RMS
Rolling Demand
RTD
Glossary
R_TRIG—RTD
GL.17
Rising-edge trigger. Boolean SEL
OGIC
control equation operator that triggers an operation upon logic detection of a rising edge.
Random Access Memory. Volatile memory where the relay stores intermediate calculation results, Relay Word bits, and other data.
The reach of a distance element in the reactive (X) direction in the R-X plane.
Power that produces actual work. The portion of apparent power that is real, not imaginary.
The act of automatically closing breaker contacts after a protective relay trip has opened the circuit breaker contacts and interrupted current through the breaker.
A single relay element or logic result. A Relay Word bit can equal either logical 1 or logical 0. Logical 1 represents a true logic condition, picked up element, or asserted control input or control output. Logical 0 represents a false logic condition, dropped out element, or deasserted control input or control output. Use Relay Word bits in SEL
OGIC
control equations.
The process of selecting data from the default map and configuring new indices to form a smaller data set optimized to your application.
A Relay Word bit with a state that is controlled by serial port commands, including the CONTROL command, a binary Fast Operate command, DNP binary output operation, or a UCA control operation.
Event report and Sequential Events Recorder settings.
The sum of the measured phase currents. In normal, balanced operation, this current is very small or zero.
A residual overcurrent element allowed to operate in only the forward or reverse direction.
Overcurrent protection that operates at conditions exceeding a threshold of system unbalance (3I
0
= I
A
+ I
B
+ I
C
).
An operate boundary in the resistive direction of a ground quadrilateral distance element.
The reach of a distance element in the resistive (R) direction in the R-X plane.
A subsequent act of attempting to open the contacts of a circuit breaker after the failure of an initial attempt to open these contacts.
A fault operation behind a relay terminal.
Transition from logical 0 to logical 1, or the beginning of an operation.
Root-mean-square. This is the effective value of the current and voltage measured by the relay, accounting for the fundamental frequency and higherorder harmonics in the signal.
A sliding time-window arithmetic average in demand metering.
Resistance Temperature Detector
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
GL.18
Glossary
RTU—Shunt Capacitance
SEL
RTU
RXD
SCADA
SCD File
Self-Description
Self-Test
SEL
SCL
OGIC
Expression Builder
OGIC
Math Variables
SEL
OGIC
Control Equation
Sequencing Timers
Sequential Events
Recorder
SER
Series-Compensated Line
Settle/Settling Time
Shot Counter
Shunt Admittance
Shunt Capacitance
Remote Terminal Unit.
Received data.
Supervisory control and data acquisition.
IEC 61850 Substation Configuration Description file. XML file that contains information on all IEDs within a substation, communications configuration data, and a substation description.
IEC 61850 Substation Configuration Language. An XML-based configuration language that supports the exchange of database configuration data among different software tools that can be from different manufacturers. There are four types of SCL files used within IEC 61850: CID, ICD, SCD, and SSD.
A feature of GOMSFE in the UCA2 protocol. A master device can request a description of all of the GOMSFE models and data within the IED.
A function that verifies the correct operation of a critical device subsystem and indicates detection of an out-of-tolerance condition. The relay has selftests that validate the relay power supply, microprocessor, memory, and other critical systems.
A rules-based editor within the
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet software program for programming SEL
OGIC
control equations.
Math calculation result storage locations.
A relay setting that allows you to control a relay function (such as a control output) using a logical combination of relay element outputs and fixed logic outputs.
Timers designed for sequencing automated operations.
A relay function that stores a record of the date and time of each assertion and deassertion of every Relay Word bit in a list that you set in the relay. SER provides a useful way to determine the order and timing of events of a relay operation.
Sequential Events Recorder or the relay serial port command to request a report of the latest 1000 sequential events.
A power line on which the addition of series capacitance compensates for excessive inductive line impedance.
Time required for an input signal to result in an unvarying output signal within a specified range.
A counter that records the number of times a recloser attempts to close a circuit breaker.
The admittance resulting from the presence of a device in parallel across other devices or apparatus that diverts some current away from these devices or apparatus.
The capacitance between a network connection and any existing ground.
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
Shunt Current
SIN Operator
Single-Pole Trip
SIR
SOTF
(Switch-Onto-Fault
Protection Logic)
Source Impedance
SQRT Operator
SSD File
Stable Power Swing
Status Failure
Status Warning
Strong Password
Subnet Mask
Subsidence Current
Synch Reference
Synchronism-Check
Synchronized Phasor
Telnet
Glossary
Shunt Current—Telnet
GL.19
The current that a parallel-connected high-resistance or high-impedance device diverts away from devices or apparatus.
Operator in math SEL
OGIC
control equations that provides the sine function.
A circuit breaker trip operation that occurs when one pole of the three poles of a circuit breaker opens independently of the other poles.
Source-to-line impedance ratio.
Logic that provides tripping if a circuit breaker closes into a zero voltage bolted fault, such as would happen if protective grounds remained on the line following maintenance.
The impedance of an energy source at the input terminals of a device or network.
Math SEL
OGIC
control equation operator that provides square root.
IEC 61850 System Specification Description file. XML file that describes the single-line diagram of the substation and the required logical nodes.
A change in the electrical angle between power systems. A control action can return the angular separation between systems to less than the critical angle.
A severe out-of-tolerance internal operating condition. The relay issues a status failure message and enters a protection-disabled state.
Out-of-tolerance internal operating conditions that do not compromise relay protection, yet are beyond expected limits. The relay issues a status warning message and continues to operate.
A mix of valid password characters in a six-character combination that does not spell common words in any portion of the password. Valid password characters are numbers, upper- and lower-case alphabetic characters, “.”
(period), and “-” (hyphen).
The subnet mask divides the local node IP address into two parts, a network number and a node address on that network. A subnet mask is four bytes of information and is expressed in the same format as an IP address.
See CT subsidence current.
A phasor the relay uses as a polarizing quantity for synchronism-check calculations.
Verification by the relay that system components operate within a preset frequency difference and within a preset phase angle displacement between voltages.
A phasor calculated from data samples using an absolute time signal as the reference for the sampling process. The phasors from remote sites have a defined common phase relationship. Also known as Synchrophasor.
An Internet protocol for exchanging terminal data that connects a computer to a network server and allows control of that server and communication with other servers on the network.
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
GL.20
Glossary
Terminal Emulation Software—Unbuffered Report
SEL-411L Relay
Terminal
Emulation Software
Thermal Demand
Thermal
Withstand Capability
Three-Phase Fault
Three-Pole Trip
Time Delay on Pickup
Time Dial
Time-Delayed Tripping
Time Error
Time-Overcurrent
Element
Time Quality
Torque Control
Total Clearing Time
Tower Footing Resistance
Transformer Impedance
Tree Resistance
TVE
TXD
UCA2
Unbalanced Fault
Unbuffered Report
Software that can be used to send and receive ASCII text messages and files via a computer serial port.
Thermal demand is a continuous exponentially increasing or decreasing accumulation of metered quantities; used in demand metering.
The capability of equipment to withstand a predetermined temperature value for a specified time.
A fault involving all three phases of a three-phase power system.
A circuit breaker operation that occurs when the circuit breaker opens all three poles at the same time.
The time interval between initiation of a signal at one point and detection of the same signal at another point.
A control that governs the time scale of the time-overcurrent characteristic of a relay. Use the time-dial setting to vary relay operating time.
Tripping that occurs after expiration of a pre-determined time.
A measurement of how much time an ac powered clock would be ahead or behind a reference clock, as determined from system frequency measurements.
An element that operates according to an inverse relationship between input current and time, with higher current causing faster relay operation.
An indication from a GPS clock receiver that specifies the maximum error in the time information. Defined in IEEE C37.118.
A method of using one relay element to supervise the operation of another.
The time interval from the beginning of a fault condition to final interruption of the circuit.
The resistance between true ground and the grounding system of a tower.
The resistive and reactive parameters of a transformer looking in to the transformer primary or secondary windings. Use industry accepted opencircuit and short-circuit tests to determine these transformer equivalent circuit parameters.
Resistance resulting from a tree in contact with a power line.
Total Vector Error. A measurement of accuracy for phasor quantities that combines magnitude and angle errors into one quantity. Defined in IEEE
C37.118.
Transmitted data.
Utility Communications Architecture. A network-independent protocol suite that serves as an interface for individual intelligent electronic devices.
All faults that do not include all three phases of a system.
IEC 61850 IEDs can issue immediate unbuffered reports of internal events
(caused by trigger options data-change, quality-change, and data-update) on a
Date Code 20151029
Unconditional Tripping
Unstable Power Swing
Untransposed Line
User ST
VA, VB, VC
VAB, VBC, VCA
VG
Virtual
Terminal Connection
Volatile Storage
VT
Warm Start
Weak Infeed Logic
Wye
XML
Zero-Sequence
Zero-Sequence
Compensation Factor
Glossary
Unconditional Tripping—Zero-Sequence Compensation Factor
GL.21
“best efforts” basis. If no association exists, or if the transport data flow is not fast enough to support it, events may be lost.
Protection element tripping that occurs apart from conditions such as those involving communication, switch-onto-fault logic, etc.
A change in the electrical angle between power systems for which a control action cannot return the angular separation between systems to an angle less than the critical angle.
A transmission line with phase conductors that are not regularly transposed.
The result is an unbalance in the mutual impedances between phases.
Region in GOOSE for user-specified applications.
Measured A-phase-to-neutral, B-phase-to-neutral, and C-phase-to-neutral voltages.
Measured or calculated phase-to-phase voltages.
Residual voltage calculated from the sum of the three phase-to-neutral voltages, if connected.
A mechanism that uses a virtual serial port to provide the equivalent functions of a dedicated serial port and a terminal.
A storage device that cannot retain data following removal of relay power.
Voltage transformer. Also referred to as a potential transformer or PT.
The reset of a running system without removing and restoring power.
Logic that permits rapid tripping for internal faults when a line terminal has insufficient fault current to operate protective elements.
A phase-to-neutral connection of circuit elements, particularly voltage transformers or loads. To form a wye connection using transformers, connect the nonpolarity side of each of three voltage transformer secondaries in common (the neutral), and take phase to neutral voltages from each of the remaining three leads. When properly phased, these leads represent the Aphase-, B-phase-, and C-phase-to-neutral voltages. This connection is frequently called ‘four-wire wye,’ alluding to the three phase leads plus the neutral lead.
Extensible Markup Language. This specification developed by the W3C
(World Wide Web Consortium) is a pared-down version of SGML designed especially for web documents. It allows designers to create their own customized tags, enabling the definition, transmission, validation, and interpretation of data among applications and organizations.
A configuration of three-phase currents and voltages with currents and voltages that occur simultaneously, are always in phase, and have equal magnitude (3I
0
= I
A
+ I
B
+ I
C
).
A factor based on the zero-sequence and positive-sequence impedance of a line that modifies a ground distance element to have the same reach as a phase distance element.
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
GL.22
Glossary
Zero-Sequence Impedance—Zone Time Delay
Zero-Sequence Impedance
Zero-Sequence
Mutual Coupling
Zero-Sequence
Overcurrent Element
Zero-Sequence
Voltage-Polarized
Directional Element
Z-Number
Impedance of a device or circuit resulting in current flow when a single voltage source is applied to all phases.
Zero-sequence current in an unbalanced circuit in close proximity to a second circuit induces voltage into the second circuit. When not controlled by protection system design and relay settings, this situation can cause improper operation of relays in both systems.
Overcurrent protection that operates at conditions exceeding a threshold of system unbalance.
An element that provides directionality by the sign, plus or minus, of the measured zero-sequence impedance.
Zone Time Delay
That portion of the relay FID string that identifies the proper
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet software relay driver version and HMI driver version when creating or editing relay settings files.
Time delay associated with the forward or reverse step distance and zone protection.
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
Index
Page numbers appearing in bold mark the location of the topic’s primary discussion.
Symbols
*, largest current P.8.18
, P.8.19
>, trigger row P.8.18
,
P.8.19
Numerics
87L active and required channel logic
P.3.282
87L channel configuration P.3.279
87L channel monitoring and alarm logic
P.3.291
asymmetry P.3.293
lost packet count P.3.294
noise burst and channel break
P.3.295
overall channel status P.3.295
round-trip channel delay P.3.292
87L channel synchronization logic and status P.3.284
87L channel time quality assessment
P.3.286
87L Communication
P.3.261
87L Communications
Ethernet Interface
P.3.271
Serial Interfaces
P.3.264
,
P.3.267
,
P.3.267
87L communications report
P.3.308
87L current data alignment
P.3.19
87L data synchronization logic and status P.3.287
87L differential elements
P.3.28
87DTT direct transfer trip P.3.46
87L user-programmable bits P.3.48
87LP, 87LQ, 87LG elements P.3.31
–
P.3.42
stub bus condition P.3.44
time overcurrent differential elements P.3.42
87L enable and blocking logic P.3.280
87L standby channel switchover logic
P.3.297
87L supervisory logic
P.3.53
87L theory of operation
P.3.2
87L time fallback logic
P.3.300
Modes 1-4 P.3.302
–
P.3.305
A
Acceptance Testing P.11.1
See also Testing
ACCESS Command P.10.8
,
P.15.3
Access Control for FTP
Access Levels
P.10.6
–
P.10.8
1, B, P, A, O, 2 levels P.10.8
communications ports P.10.7
front panel P.10.7
Accuracy energy metering P.9.37
instantaneous metering P.9.28
maximum/minimum metering P.9.31
synchrophasor (PMU) P.1.20
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect Software
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet Software P.1.4
,
P.6.1
–
P.6.21
bay control
P.12.27
–
P.12.31
communications configuration
P.6.3
event reports
P.6.15
–
P.6.19
help
P.6.21
HMI
P.6.6
–
P.6.8
settings
P.6.9
–
P.6.14
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet Software terminal
P.6.5
Alarm dc battery system monitor P.9.24
HALARM P.11.38
relay output
P.2.34
SALARM P.2.35
Alarm Points
P.7.6
–
P.7.8
creating, application example P.7.7
Alpha Plane
P.3.6
,
P.3.19
,
P.3.34
,
P.3.66
,
P.3.92
alpha plane 87L elements P.11.20
Also see 87L sing-element test external fault detection
P.3.10
,
P.3.54
generalized alpha plane
P.3.6
Analog Quantities in display points P.5.17
, P.7.10
in SEL
OGIC
control equations
P.14.12
Anonymous User for FTP
ASCII Commands
P.15.1
–
P.15.65
,
See Commands
Automessages P.11.39
,
Autoreclose
P.4.1
–
P.4.40
external recloser P.4.9
, P.4.26
logic diagrams P.4.27
– P.4.40
one circuit breaker
P.4.4
–
P.4.9
single- and three-pole reclose
P.4.7
single-pole reclose P.4.5
– P.4.6
three-pole reclose P.4.6
– P.4.7
trip logic P.4.9
Relay Word bits P.4.47
– P.4.48
settings P.4.45
– P.4.47
states
P.4.2
–
P.4.4
lockout P.4.3
reset P.4.2
single-pole auto-reclose P.4.3
start P.4.2
state diagram P.4.4
three-pole auto-reclose P.4.3
two circuit breakers
P.4.10
–
P.4.26
single- and three-pole reclose
P.4.14
single-pole reclose P.4.10
– P.4.12
three-pole reclose P.4.12
– P.4.14
trip logic P.4.25
– P.4.26
voltage checks
P.4.43
–
P.4.45
B
Battery Monitor
See DC Battery System Monitor
Bay Control
P.12.1
–
P.12.50
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet software
P.12.27
–
P.12.31
circuit breaker and disconnect symbols P.12.14
–
P.12.16
circuit breaker status logic P.12.2
close and open control P.12.2
–
P.12.6
close and open immobility timer
P.12.9
close, open, and undetermined states
P.12.11
–
P.12.12
disconnect logic P.12.2
–
P.12.12
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
IN.2
Index
C–C front-panel operations P.12.13
,
P.12.27
one-line diagrams P.12.37
–
P.12.50
pushbutton navigation P.12.13
status and alarm P.12.8
Best Choice Ground Directional Element
P.1.3
See also Ground Directional
Elements
Boolean Equations P.14.4
See also SEL
OGIC
Control
Equations
Breaker Bit
BREAKER Command P.9.16
,
P.15.4
–
P.15.5
BREAKER CONTROL front panel
P.7.23
–
P.7.24
, P.12.16
–
P.12.17
Breaker Failure Protection
See Circuit Breaker Failure
Breaker History Report
See Circuit Breaker‚ history report
Breaker Monitor
See Circuit Breaker‚ monitor
Breaker Report
See Circuit Breaker‚ breaker report
C
C37.118
See Synchrophasors, protocols
C37.94 fiber-optic interface
P.3.267
Cable
CCVT P.1.3
See also CVT Transient Detection
CEVENT Command P.8.24
–
P.8.25
,
P.15.6
–
P.15.9
See also Event Report
Charging Current Compensation
P.3.13
,
P.3.71
,
P.3.73
,
P.3.75
,
P.3.95
In-line transformers
P.3.16
,
P.11.21
See also line charging compensation
CHISTORY Command P.8.30
,
P.15.10
See also Event History
Circuit Breaker breaker report
P.9.17
Compressed ASCII CBR
P.9.19
contact wear curve
P.9.5
–
P.9.6
choose midpoint P.9.5
creating P.9.5
I
2 t P.9.6
maximum interrupted current limit P.9.6
mechanical circuit breaker service life P.9.5
contact wear monitor
P.9.3
–
P.9.9
loading maintenance data
P.9.3
preload contact wear
P.9.6
history report
P.9.18
maintenance curve
P.9.4
monitor
P.9.1
–
P.9.19
application example P.9.3
–
P.9.16
electrical operating time
P.9.10
application example P.9.11
enabling P.9.2
external trip initiation P.9.7
inactivity time
P.9.15
application example P.9.15
kA interrupt monitor P.9.9
mechanical operating time
P.9.9
application example P.9.9
motor running time
P.9.16
application example P.9.16
pole discrepancy
P.9.14
application example P.9.15
B1PDD time equation P.9.14
pole scatter
P.9.12
application example P.9.13
Circuit Breaker Failure
P.3.247
–
P.3.257
failure to interrupt fault current
Scheme 1 P.3.248
Scheme 2 P.3.249
–
P.3.251
failure to interrupt load current
P.3.252
flashover
P.3.253
logic diagrams P.3.256
–
P.3.257
no current/residual current
P.3.251
retrip single-pole P.3.250
–
P.3.251
three-pole P.3.248
subsidence current P.3.248
types P.3.247
Circuit Breaker Jumper P.2.14
See also Jumpers
Circuit Breaker Monitor
See Circuit Breaker, monitor
Cleaning
P.10.2
Close
CLOSE n Command
P.15.10
manual P.4.40
output P.10.24
–
P.10.27
Commands
P.15.1
–
P.15.65
89CLOSE
P.15.2
89OPEN
P.15.2
ACCESS
P.15.3
ASCII
P.15.1
–
P.15.65
BREAKER
P.9.16
, P.15.4
– P.15.5
CBREAKER P.9.19
CEVENT P.8.24
,
P.15.6
–
P.15.9
CHISTORY P.8.30
,
P.15.10
CLOSE n
P.15.10
COM
P.15.11
–
P.15.13
CSER P.8.32
–
P.8.33
,
P.15.15
–
P.15.16
CSTATUS P.11.40
,
P.15.17
CSUMMARY P.8.28
,
P.15.17
–
P.15.18
EVENT P.8.15
–
P.8.16
,
P.15.20
–
P.15.23
FILE
P.15.24
HELP
P.15.26
HISTORY P.8.29
,
P.8.30
,
P.15.27
–
P.15.28
ID
P.15.28
METER
P.9.25
,
P.15.32
–
P.15.38
OPEN n
P.15.39
PASSWORD
P.15.39
–
P.15.40
PULSE P.11.8
,
P.15.42
–
P.15.43
QUIT
P.15.43
SER P.8.31
–
P.8.32
,
P.15.43
–
P.15.45
SET
P.15.45
–
P.15.49
SHOW
P.15.49
STATUS P.11.39
–
P.11.40
,
P.15.53
–
P.15.54
SUMMARY P.8.27
,
P.15.55
TARGET P.11.8
,
P.15.56
–
P.15.57
TEC P.3.122
–
P.3.123
,
P.15.57
TEST DB P.11.8
,
P.15.57
–
P.15.58
TEST DB2 P.11.8
TEST FM P.11.9
,
P.15.59
–
P.15.61
TIME Q P.13.4
–
P.13.5
,
P.15.62
TRIGGER P.8.5
,
P.15.62
VERSION
P.15.63
–
P.15.64
Commissioning procedure
P.10.27
–
P.10.28
Commissioning Testing P.11.2
See also Testing
Communications
ASCII commands
cable P.2.38
, P.10.5
,
DNP3
EIA-232
hardware flow control
pin functions
EIA-485
IEC 61850
interfaces P.2.10
,
LMD
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications protocol
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
serial
P.2.38
–
P.2.42
,
–
application example P.10.5
–
P.10.6
transparent mode P.15.14
,
P.15.41
virtual serial ports
Communications Card
Communications Processor
application example
Communications-Assisted Tripping
P.3.220
–
P.3.236
See also DCB; DCUB; POTT
DCB P.3.221
–
P.3.224
DCUB P.3.232
–
P.3.236
POTT P.3.224
–
P.3.231
Compressed ASCII
COMTRADE
P.8.8
–
P.8.14
,
P.13.11
See also Event
.CFG file P.8.9
– P.8.10
.DAT file P.8.10
.HDR file P.8.8
Configuration serial number label
P.10.2
Connection
P.2.25
–
P.2.42
ac/dc diagram
P.2.44
–
P.2.46
alarm output
P.2.34
battery monitors
P.2.32
close output P.2.35
communications ports
P.2.37
control inputs
P.2.33
control outputs
P.2.34
grounding
P.2.30
IRIG-B
P.2.36
,
P.13.2
power
P.2.32
,
P.10.3
screw terminal connectors P.2.29
secondary circuits
P.2.33
serial port P.2.38
terminal blocks P.2.33
test connections P.11.11
trip output P.2.35
wire insulation P.2.25
wire size P.2.30
,
P.10.3
Connectors
P.2.2
–
P.2.45
screw terminal connectors
P.2.2
terminal blocks
P.2.2
Contact Card
See SEL Contact Card
Contact Outputs
See Control Outputs
Contact Wear Curve
See Circuit Breaker‚ contact wear curve
Contact Wear Monitor
See Circuit Breaker‚ contact wear monitor
Date Code 20151029
Index
D–D
IN.3
Contrast, LCD P.7.12
Control Inputs
P.2.5
,
P.2.12
,
P.2.33
ac voltages P.2.5
common P.2.5
debounce P.2.5
independent P.2.5
optoisolated P.2.5
,
P.2.12
range P.2.5
sample rate P.2.6
time
COMTRADE report P.8.22
event report P.8.22
Control Outputs
P.2.6
–
P.2.9
,
P.2.12
,
P.2.34
–
P.2.35
close outputs P.10.24
–
P.10.27
connecting P.2.34
Form A P.2.6
,
P.2.7
,
P.2.12
Form C P.2.6
,
P.2.12
high-speed, high-current interrupting
P.2.7
–
P.2.9
diagrams P.2.8
precharging P.2.8
ratings P.2.7
hybrid (high-current interrupting)
P.2.6
–
P.2.7
diagram P.2.7
ratings P.1.13
,
P.2.6
INT2, INT7, INTC, INTD, and
INTE P.2.12
MOV P.2.6
pulsing application example front panel P.10.22
–
P.10.24
terminal P.10.21
–
P.10.22
sample rate P.2.6
standard
P.2.6
diagram P.2.6
ratings P.1.13
trip outputs P.10.24
–
P.10.27
Counters
See SEL
OGIC
Control Equations
Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformer
See CCVT
Cross-Country Faults
P.3.227
See also POTT
CSER Command P.8.32
– P.8.33
,
P.15.15
–
P.15.16
See also SER (Sequential Events
Recorder)
CST Command P.11.40
CSUMMARY Command P.8.28
,
P.15.17
–
P.15.18
See also Event Summary
Current and Voltage Source Selection
P.3.106
–
P.3.118
connections P.3.107
ESS := 1 (single circuit breaker)
P.3.108
,
P.3.112
–
P.3.113
ESS := 2 (single circuit breaker)
P.3.108
,
P.3.113
ESS := 3 (double circuit breaker)
P.3.108
,
P.3.114
ESS := 4 (double circuit breaker)
P.3.108
,
P.3.115
ESS := N (single circuit breaker)
P.3.108
,
P.3.112
ESS := Y P.3.108
–
P.3.110
,
P.3.115
–
P.3.118
current polarizing source
P.3.117
–
P.3.118
voltage source switching P.3.111
–
P.3.112
current transformer open circuit detection P.3.67
CVT Transient Detection
P.3.154
–
P.3.155
logic diagram P.3.155
D
Data filtered data P.8.2
high-resolution raw data P.8.2
DC Battery System Monitor P.1.4
,
P.9.20
–
P.9.24
ac ripple, definition P.9.20
ac ripple, measuring P.9.22
alarm P.9.24
application example P.9.21
–
P.9.24
dc ground detection P.9.23
equalize mode voltage level P.9.21
float high voltage level P.9.21
float low voltage level P.9.21
metering P.9.24
open-circuit voltage level P.9.21
reset metering P.9.24
thresholds, warn and fail P.9.20
trip/close voltage level P.9.21
Vdc1 P.9.20
Vdc2 P.9.20
DCB
P.3.221
–
P.3.224
blocking signal extension P.3.222
–
P.3.223
coordination timers P.3.221
–
P.3.222
logic diagram P.3.224
starting elements P.3.222
stopping elements P.3.223
DCUB
P.3.232
–
P.3.236
logic diagrams P.3.235
– P.3.236
loss-of-guard, LOG P.3.232
permissive trip blocking, UBB
P.3.232
POTT scheme similarities P.3.232
three-terminal lines P.3.233
timers P.3.234
SEL-411L Relay
IN.4
Index
E–F
Demand Metering
P.9.32
–
P.9.36
See also Meter reset P.9.36
Dimensions
P.2.25
rack units, defined P.2.1
Directional Comparison Blocking
See DCB
Directional Comparison Unblocking
See DCUB
Directional Control
P.3.154
See also Ground Directional
Elements; Phase and Negative-
Sequence Directional Elements
Directional Elements
See Ground Directional Elements;
Phase and Negative-Sequence
Directional Elements
Directional Overcurrent Elements
See Overcurrent Elements
Display
See LCD, Front Panel
Display Points
P.7.6
–
P.7.12
creating, application examples
P.7.11
–
P.7.12
Distributed Port Switch
,
DNP3
access method
,
application example
conformance testing
Device Profile document
event data
objects
,
–
polling
settings
testing
User’s Group
E
Earthing
See Grounding
EIA-232
EIA-422 interface
P.3.264
EIA-485
Energy Metering
P.9.36
–
P.9.37
See also Meter accuracy P.9.37
reset P.9.37
EPMU, setting
See Synchrophasors
Ethernet
P.1.4
Ethernet Card
database
settings
Ethernet Card Settings
FTP
Telnet
EVE Command P.8.15
– P.8.16
,
P.15.20
–
P.15.23
See also Event
Event data capture initiate P.8.4
–
P.8.5
data capture time P.8.5
duration P.8.5
–
P.8.7
effective sample rate, SRATE P.8.5
ER equation P.8.4
–
P.8.5
application example P.8.4
–
P.8.5
EVE command P.8.15
–
P.8.16
,
P.15.20
–
P.15.23
initiate, TRI command P.8.5
,
P.15.62
length, LER P.8.5
prefault, PRE P.8.5
storage capability P.8.7
TRIP initiate P.8.4
Event History
P.8.28
–
P.8.31
See also Event
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet software
P.8.30
blank row P.8.29
CHISTORY command P.8.30
,
P.15.10
contents P.8.28
event types P.8.29
HIS command P.8.29
,
P.15.27
–
P.15.28
terminal P.8.29
, P.8.30
Event Report P.1.4
,
P.8.15
–
P.8.25
See also Event
*, largest current P.8.18
, P.8.19
>, trigger row P.8.18
, P.8.19
analog section P.8.17
– P.8.18
Compressed ASCII CEVENT P.8.24
application example P.8.24
currents and voltages P.8.18
digital section P.8.19
– P.8.22
label header P.8.20
– P.8.21
reading, application example
P.8.21
selecting elements P.8.21
header P.8.17
settings section P.8.23
summary section P.8.22
terminal P.8.25
Event Summary
P.8.25
–
P.8.28
See also Event
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet software
P.8.27
contents P.8.26
CSUMMARY command P.8.28
,
P.15.17
–
P.15.18
event types P.8.27
SUM command P.8.27
,
P.15.55
terminal P.8.27
Expression Builder P.13.9
F
Factory Assistance
P.11.46
Fast Message
See SEL Binary Protocols
Fast Meter
Fast Operate
Fast SER
FAULT metering suspend P.9.31
Fault Locator P.1.3
,
P.3.123
–
P.3.133
Fault Type Identification Selection
P.3.141
Fiber Optic
FIDS
See Fault Type Identification
Selection
File
FILE Command
P.15.24
Frequency Elements
P.3.257
Frequency Estimation
P.3.119
Front Panel access level P.7.13
alarm points
P.7.6
–
P.7.8
automatic messages P.7.35
– P.7.36
display points P.5.17
,
P.7.8
–
P.7.12
labels
P.7.36
,
P.7.42
layout
P.7.1
–
P.7.2
LCD
P.7.2
,
P.7.2
contrast P.7.12
pushbuttons P.7.2
– P.7.4
,
P.7.41
–
P.7.43
ROTATING DISPLAY P.7.5
screen scrolling
P.7.4
–
P.7.6
serial port P.7.2
set relay, application example
P.7.28
– P.7.29
setting screen types P.7.30
targets P.7.2
Front-Panel Menus
P.7.12
–
P.7.34
BREAKER MONITOR P.7.21
DISPLAY TEST P.7.33
EDIT ACTIVE GROUP P.7.30
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
Index
G–M
IN.5
EVENTS P.7.18
–
P.7.19
LOCAL CONTROL P.7.23
–
P.7.28
BREAKER CONTROL P.7.23
OUTPUT TESTING P.7.27
MAIN MENU P.7.14
METER P.7.14
–
P.7.17
RELAY ELEMENTS P.7.21
–
P.7.22
RELAY STATUS P.7.32
RESET ACCESS LEVEL P.7.34
SER P.7.19
–
P.7.20
SET/SHOW P.7.28
–
P.7.32
DATE/TIME P.7.31
VIEW CONFIGURATION P.7.32
FTP
Ethernet card
Fuse
P.2.32
size P.2.32
G
G.703 co-directional interface P.3.267
GOOSE
GPS Receiver
See Time Synchronization
Ground Directional Elements
P.3.142
–
P.3.152
32I, zero-sequence current polarized
P.3.142
32QG, negative-sequence polarized
P.3.142
32V, zero-sequence voltage polarized P.3.142
automatic settings calculation
P.3.143
Best Choice Ground Directional logic P.3.148
logic flow chart P.3.148
calculations P.3.151
–
P.3.152
logic diagrams P.3.146
,
P.3.149
–
P.3.150
ORDER P.3.144
Grounding
P.2.30
H
Help
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet software
P.10.5
terminal
P.10.4
High-Speed Elements mho ground distance P.3.178
mho phase distance P.3.186
HIRIG
P.13.2
,
P.13.8
HIS Command P.8.29
,
P.15.27
–
P.15.28
See also Event History
History Report circuit breaker P.9.2
See also Circuit Breaker‚ history report event P.8.28
I
I
2 t application example
P.9.6
fault current arcing time P.9.3
ID Command
P.15.28
codes P.15.28
IEC 61850
AC
SEL
ERATOR
Architect
ACSI Conformance
GOOSE
Logical Nodes
Object Models
Reports
SCL files
Settings
Input Processing
P.8.2
Input/Output
Ethernet card P.2.14
See also Ethernet Card
INT2
P.2.11
–
P.2.14
INT7
P.2.11
–
P.2.14
INTC
P.2.11
–
P.2.14
INTD
P.2.11
–
P.2.14
INTE
P.2.11
–
P.2.14
interface board inputs P.2.12
interface board installation P.2.13
–
P.2.14
interface board jumpers P.2.18
–
P.2.24
See also Jumpers interface board outputs P.2.12
jumpers P.2.18
See also Jumpers P.2.18
Installation
P.2.24
–
P.2.42
dimensions P.2.25
panel mounting P.2.25
physical location P.2.24
rack mounting P.2.24
Instantaneous Metering
P.9.26
–
P.9.30
See also Meter
Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements
See Overcurrent Elements
Interface Boards INT2, INT7, INTC,
INTD, and INTE
P.2.11
–
P.2.14
inputs P.2.12
installation
P.2.13
–
P.2.14
outputs P.2.12
–
P.2.14
IRIG-B P.2.36
,
P.13.1
,
P.13.2
See also Time Synchronization
J
Jumpers
P.2.14
–
P.2.24
circuit breaker jumper P.2.14
interface boards
P.2.18
–
P.2.24
main board
P.2.14
–
P.2.18
serial port P.2.17
– P.2.18
password jumper P.2.14
L
Labels
See Front Panel, labels
Latch Bits
P.14.15
LCD, Front Panel
P.7.2
autoscrolling mode P.7.5
contrast P.7.12
manual-scrolling mode P.7.6
LEDs front panel
P.7.36
–
P.7.43
labels
P.7.36
,
P.7.42
targets
P.7.36
–
P.7.38
Line charging current compensation
Also see In-line transformers P.3.16
,
P.11.21
LMD
Load Encroachment
P.3.156
–
P.3.157
Local Bits
P.7.24
–
P.7.27
See also Local Control application example P.7.27
delete a local bit P.7.27
enter a local bit P.7.26
names P.7.23
, P.7.26
states P.7.25
Local Control
P.7.23
–
P.7.28
See also Breaker Control application examples P.10.21
–
P.10.24
graphic display P.7.25
local bits
P.7.24
–
P.7.27
output testing
P.7.27
–
P.7.28
Loopback testing
P.11.26
LOP
See Loss-of-Potential
Loss-of-Potential P.1.3
,
P.3.137
–
P.3.140
logic diagram P.3.140
logic flow chart P.3.138
Low-Level Test Interface
P.11.9
–
P.11.10
Lugs, Crimp P.2.29
M
Maintenance Curve
See Circuit Breaker‚ maintenance curve
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
IN.6
Index
O–P
Maintenance Data
See also Circuit Breaker, contact wear monitor load circuit breaker
P.9.3
Maintenance Testing P.11.2
–
P.11.3
See also Testing
Manual Trip
See Trip Logic
Maximum/Minimum Metering
P.9.30
–
P.9.32
See also Meter accuracy P.9.31
reset P.9.31
Menus
See Front-Panel Menus;
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet Software
Meter P.1.4
,
P.9.25
–
P.9.37
See also METER command accuracy P.9.28
, P.9.31
, P.9.37
current P.9.26
dc battery monitor
P.9.24
demand
P.9.32
–
P.9.36
rolling P.9.33
– P.9.34
thermal P.9.32
energy
P.9.36
–
P.9.37
error coefficients P.9.28
, P.9.29
frequency P.9.26
fundamental P.9.26
instantaneous
P.9.26
–
P.9.30
maximum/minimum
P.9.30
–
P.9.32
power P.9.27
rms P.9.26
synchrophasors P.15.37
voltage P.9.26
METER Command
P.15.32
–
P.15.38
See also Meter automation math variables P.15.33
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
analog values
P.15.33
Phasor Measurement and Control
Unit P.15.36
protection Math variables P.15.37
RTD temperature P.15.38
synchronism check P.15.38
Metering
See Meter
Mho Ground Distance Elements
P.3.178
–
P.3.182
high-speed elements P.3.178
logic diagrams P.3.180
– P.3.182
zero-sequence compensation P.3.178
Mho Phase Distance Elements
P.3.186
–
P.3.190
high-speed elements P.3.186
logic diagrams P.3.188
–
P.3.190
M
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications P.1.4
,
–
Pulsar modem
virtual terminal P.15.41
Modbus Plus
Modbus RTU
Monitor, Circuit Breaker
See Circuit Breaker‚ monitor
MOV control outputs P.2.6
Multidrop Network
O
OOSB
See Out-of-Step
OOST
See Out-of-Step
OPEN n Command
P.15.39
Open Phase Detection Logic
P.3.134
Operator Control Front Panel pushbuttons
P.7.41
–
P.7.43
Operator Control LEDs
P.7.41
–
P.7.43
See also LEDs factory defaults
P.7.42
–
P.7.43
Operator Control Pushbuttons
P.7.41
–
P.7.43
Oscillography P.1.4
,
P.8.7
–
P.8.14
See also Event
COMTRADE P.8.7
event report P.8.7
,
P.8.14
Out-of-Step
P.3.157
–
P.3.162
blocking, OOSB P.1.3
, P.3.157
logic diagrams P.3.161
– P.3.162
setting rules P.3.158
single pole P.3.158
three-phase fault P.3.158
tripping, OOST P.1.3
, P.3.157
Output SEL
OGIC
Control Equations
P.5.10
,
P.14.3
Output Testing front panel
P.7.27
–
P.7.28
Overcurrent Elements
P.3.200
–
P.3.212
definite-time negative-sequence P.3.201
,
P.3.202
,
P.3.205
phase P.3.200
, P.3.202
,
P.3.203
residual ground P.3.201
, P.3.203
,
P.3.204
direction P.3.200
instantaneous negative-sequence P.3.201
,
P.3.202
,
P.3.205
phase P.3.200
– P.3.202
,
P.3.203
residual ground P.3.201
– P.3.203
,
P.3.204
inverse time curves P.3.207
–
P.3.209
logic diagrams P.3.203
–
P.3.205
torque control P.3.200
Overfrequency Elements
P.3.257
P
Panel Mount
P.2.25
dimensions P.2.25
Password P.1.4
,
P.10.7
–
P.10.10
defaults P.10.7
changing, application example
P.10.9
front-panel screen P.7.13
unauthorized P.10.8
PC Software
See
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet
Software
Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip
See POTT
Phase and Negative-Sequence
Directional Elements
P.3.152
–
P.3.153
32P, phase P.3.152
32Q, negative-sequence voltage polarized P.3.142
,
P.3.152
logic diagrams P.3.153
ZLOAD effect P.3.152
Plug-In Boards
P.2.11
–
P.2.14
See also Input/Output
Ethernet card P.2.14
interface boards P.2.11
–
P.2.14
PMU, Phasor Measurement Unit
Pole-Open Logic
P.3.134
POTT
P.3.224
–
P.3.232
cross-country faults P.3.227
current reversal guard P.3.226
echo P.3.226
logic diagrams P.3.229
–
P.3.232
three-terminal lines P.3.227
weak infeed P.3.226
–
P.3.227
Power Flow power flow convention
P.9.27
Power Supply connections
P.2.32
,
P.10.3
types
P.10.3
voltage ranges
P.2.32
,
P.10.3
PPS
See also Time Synchronization
1k PPS (obsolete)
P.13.2
Protection and Automation Separation
P.14.3
See also SEL
OGIC
Control
Equations
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
Index
Q–S
IN.7
Pulsar Modem
IRRORED
B
ITS
Communications
PULSE Command P.11.8
,
P.15.42
–
P.15.43
application example front panel P.10.22
– P.10.24
terminal P.10.21
– P.10.22
include TESTPUL in ER P.8.5
no event data P.8.4
Pushbuttons front panel
P.7.2
labels
P.7.42
LEDs
See Operator Control LEDs navigation P.7.3
–
P.7.4
operator control
P.7.41
–
P.7.43
programming P.7.41
–
P.7.42
Q
Quadrilateral Ground Distance Elements
P.3.182
–
P.3.186
logic diagrams P.3.185
– P.3.186
polarization P.3.183
Z1ANG P.3.182
zero-sequence compensation P.3.183
Quadrilateral Phase Distance Elements
P.3.191
–
P.3.197
Zone 1 logic diagram P.3.196
Zone 2 logic diagram P.3.196
QUIT Command
P.15.43
R
Rack Mount
P.2.24
–
P.2.25
dimensions P.2.25
Rear Panel alert symbols P.2.28
layout
P.2.26
–
P.2.28
,
P.2.38
–
P.2.42
Recloser
See Autoreclose
RELAY TRIP EVENT front panel P.7.35
Relay Word Bits in display points P.5.17
,
P.7.9
in SEL
OGIC
control equations
P.14.12
Remote Bit P.14.16
,
P.15.13
,
P.15.14
,
Remote Terminal Unit (RTU)
Reset battery monitor metering P.9.24
demand metering P.9.36
energy metering P.9.37
maximum/minimum metering P.9.31
targets
P.7.37
–
P.7.38
Rolling Demand Metering
P.9.33
–
P.9.34
See also Demand Metering
S
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories contact information
P.11.46
Screw Terminal Connectors
P.2.29
–
P.2.30
,
P.2.31
keying P.2.30
receptacle keying P.2.31
removal and insertion P.2.29
tightening torque P.2.29
Scrolling
See Front Panel, screen scrolling
Secondary Connections
P.2.4
,
P.2.33
–
P.2.43
ac/dc connection diagrams P.2.44
levels P.2.4
Security passwords P.2.15
SEL Binary Protocols
Fast Message Synchrophasor
Fast Meter P.15.3
, P.15.19
, P.15.59
–
P.15.61
,
,
Fast Operate
Fast SER P.15.53
,
RTD
SEL Contact Card P.10.1
SEL-2020, SEL-2030, SEL-2032
SEL-3306
SEL-411L Relay features
P.1.1
–
P.1.5
models
P.1.5
options
P.1.5
SEL-5030
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet
Software
See
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet
Software
Self-Tests P.10.10
,
P.11.38
–
P.11.40
See also Testing; Troubleshooting
SEL
OGIC
Control Equations P.1.4
analog quantities
P.14.12
automation P.5.9
, P.14.6
Boolean equations P.14.4
, P.14.5
,
P.14.25
–
P.14.28
capacity
P.14.10
comments
P.14.5
, P.14.34
conditioning timers
P.14.17
convert
P.14.35
counters
P.14.22
fixed result
P.14.4
free-form
P.14.4
LVALUE
P.14.5
math equations P.14.4
–
P.14.6
,
P.14.28
–
P.14.33
math error
P.14.29
math variables
P.14.14
output P.14.6
protection P.5.9
,
P.14.6
Relay Word bits
P.14.12
sequencing timers
P.14.20
time synchronization P.13.9
–
P.13.10
variables
P.14.13
SER (Sequential Events Recorder) P.1.4
,
P.8.31
–
P.8.33
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet software
P.8.32
automatic deletion P.8.33
chattering elements P.8.33
contents P.8.31
CSER command P.8.32
– P.8.33
,
P.15.15
–
P.15.16
front-panel alarm points
P.7.6
–
P.7.8
SER command P.8.31
– P.8.32
,
P.15.43
–
P.15.45
set points and aliases P.8.33
terminal P.8.31
view SER report application example front panel P.7.19
– P.7.20
SER Command
P.15.43
–
P.15.45
Serial Interfaces
EIA-422 interface P.3.264
Serial Number Label
P.10.2
Serial Port
cable
EIA-232
EIA-485
front panel P.7.2
jumper P.2.17
– P.2.18
See also Jumpers
Series-Compensated Line
P.3.155
ground directional element P.3.144
Setting
P.10.13
–
P.10.20
,
P.15.45
–
P.15.49
See also Commands, SET
See also Commands, SHO
ASCII commands P.10.14
class P.10.14
date
P.7.31
,
P.15.18
from front panel P.7.28
–
P.7.32
,
P.10.20
instance P.10.14
–
P.10.15
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
IN.8
Index
T–T terminal
P.10.15
–
P.10.20
application example P.10.16
–
P.10.17
,
P.10.19
–
P.10.20
TERSE P.10.17
text-edit mode P.10.18
–
P.10.20
time
P.7.31
,
P.15.61
Setting Groups multiple setting
P.14.9
nonvolatile P.14.10
Settings data access
SIR
P.3.155
SOTF
See Switch-Onto-Fault
Source to Line Impedance Ratio
See SIR
Specifications
P.1.13
–
P.1.20
Star Network Topology
State Measurement
Station DC Battery System Monitor
See DC Battery System Monitor
Status P.11.39
check relay status
P.10.10
–
P.10.13
application example
AC
SEL
ERATOR
QuickSet software P.10.11
– P.10.12
front panel P.10.12
, P.10.13
terminal P.10.10
CST command P.11.40
,
P.15.17
STATUS command
P.15.53
–
P.15.54
Status Failure
P.11.38
,
P.11.40
front panel P.7.36
Status Warning
P.11.38
,
P.11.40
front panel P.7.35
Subsidence Current
P.3.248
See also Circuit Breaker Failure
Substation Automation
P.14.2
See also SEL
OGIC
Control
Equations
SUM Command P.8.27
,
P.15.55
See also Event Summary
Switch-Onto-Fault P.1.3
,
P.3.217
–
P.3.219
close signal monitor, CLSMON
P.3.217
duration P.3.217
end P.3.218
initiation P.3.217
logic diagram P.3.219
single pole P.3.218
validation P.3.217
Synchronism Check
P.4.49
–
P.4.63
alternate source 2 P.4.62
– P.4.63
angle checks P.4.57
block synchronism check P.4.56
SEL-411L Relay circuit breaker closing P.4.52
enable logic P.4.56
healthy voltage window P.4.55
input angle compensation P.4.53
–
P.4.55
input voltage magnitude compensation P.4.53
–
P.4.55
no slip P.4.57
–
P.4.58
PT connections P.4.53
Relay Word bits P.4.51
–
P.4.52
settings P.4.50
–
P.4.51
single-phase voltage inputs P.4.50
slip, no compensate P.4.59
–
P.4.60
slip, with compensate P.4.60
–
P.4.62
Synchrophasors
–
accuracy
analog quantities
Ethernet
Fast Operate
measurement
protocols
C37.118
Fast Message
Relay Word bits
setting example
settings
,
Time-Synchronized Metering P.9.37
System Integration
T
TARGET Command P.11.8
,
P.15.56
–
P.15.57
Targets
P.7.36
–
P.7.40
front panel P.7.2
instantaneous/time O/C P.7.40
operational P.7.37
phases/ground P.7.39
recloser status P.7.40
regions P.7.37
reset
P.7.37
–
P.7.38
trip type P.7.38
zone activated P.7.39
TCP/IP
FTP anonymous user
Ethernet card related settings
file structure
Telnet
Ethernet card related settings
user interface access
TEST 87L command
P.11.5
characteristic test P.11.5
loopback test P.11.6
,
P.11.26
TEST DB
See Commands
TEST DB Command P.11.8
,
P.15.57
–
P.15.58
TEST DB2 Command P.11.8
TEST FM Command P.11.9
,
P.15.59
–
P.15.61
TEST mode
P.11.4
Testing
P.11.1
–
P.11.37
acceptance testing P.11.1
application example P.11.31
–
P.11.34
ASCII commands P.11.7
,
P.11.9
commissioning testing P.11.2
directional elements P.11.30
–
P.11.34
application example P.11.32
–
P.11.34
distance elements P.11.34
–
P.11.37
application example P.11.36
–
P.11.37
element tests P.11.19
–
P.11.37
features P.11.6
low-level test interface P.11.9
–
P.11.10
maintenance testing P.11.2
–
P.11.3
methods P.11.14
–
P.11.19
application example control outputs P.11.17
–
P.11.19
targets, LCD P.11.16
–
P.11.17
targets, terminal P.11.15
overcurrent elements P.11.27
–
P.11.30
application example P.11.28
–
P.11.30
self-tests P.11.38
–
P.11.40
SER P.11.19
Thermal Demand Metering
P.9.32
See also Demand Metering
Time
P.13.1
–
P.13.8
See also Synchrophasors high-accuracy
P.13.1
–
P.13.8
application example P.13.2
–
P.13.4
, P.13.5
– P.13.8
Relay Word bits P.13.2
, P.13.3
Time Inputs P.2.9
,
P.2.36
See also IRIG-B connecting P.13.3
IRIG-B
P.2.9
TIME Q Command P.13.4
– P.13.5
,
P.15.62
Time Synchronization P.13.1
See also Time Inputs
DNP3
GPS
IRIG-B
P.13.1
,
,
SEL-2407
Date Code 20151029
Index
U–Z
IN.9
Timeout front panel P.7.3
serial port
Time-Overcurrent Curves P.3.207
–
P.3.209
Timers
See SEL
OGIC
Control Equations
Time-Synchronized Measurements
P.13.1
–
P.13.11
See also Synchrophasors time trigger P.13.8
– P.13.11
application example P.13.8
–
P.13.11
Trigger data capture P.8.4
event P.8.4
PMU
TRIGGER Command
P.15.62
Trip output P.2.35
,
P.10.24
Relay Word bit, TRIP
P.8.4
Trip Bus capture external/internal trips P.9.7
Trip Logic
P.3.237
–
P.3.247
logic diagrams P.3.242
– P.3.247
manual trip P.3.240
single-pole tripping
P.3.237
three-pole tripping
P.3.237
trip equations
P.3.238
DTA, DTB, DTC P.3.239
TR P.3.238
TRCOMM P.3.239
TRSOTF P.3.239
trip Relay Word bits P.3.240
trip timers P.3.239
TDUR1D and TDUR3D P.3.239
TOPD P.3.240
trip unlatch options
P.3.239
TULO P.3.239
ULTR P.3.239
Troubleshooting
P.11.43
–
P.11.45
U
UCA2
GOOSE
Underfrequency Elements
P.3.257
User Interface
Telnet access
V
VERSION Command
P.15.63
–
P.15.64
firmware number P.11.39
release numbers P.15.63
sample response P.15.63
Virtual Devices P.15.58
Virtual File Interface
Voltage Checks autoreclose P.4.42
W
Wire grounding size P.2.30
insulation
P.2.25
power connection size
P.2.32
,
P.10.3
Z
Zero-Sequence Current Compensation
P.3.178
, P.3.183
Zone Time Delay
P.3.197
–
P.3.199
common timing P.3.198
independent timing P.3.197
logic diagram P.3.199
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
This page intentionally left blank
SEL-411L Relay Command Summary
COM RTC
CONTROL nn
COPY m n
CPR
CSER
CSTATUS
CSUMMARY
DATE
DNAME X
DNP
ETHERNET
EVENT
EXIT
FILE
GOOSE
GROUP
HELP
HISTORY
ID
Command a
,
b
2ACCESS
89CLOSE
89OPEN
AACCESS
ACCESS
BACCESS
BNAME
BREAKER n
CASCII
CBREAKER
CEVENT
CHISTORY
CLOSE n
COM 87L
COMM c
Date Code 20151029
Description
Go to Access Level 2 (complete relay monitoring and control).
Assert the disconnect 89CCm (m = 1–8) Control Relay Word bits.
Assert the disconnect 89OCm (m = 1–8) Control Relay Word bits.
Go to Access Level A (automation control).
Go to Access Level 1 (monitor relay).
Go to Access Level B (monitor relay and control circuit breakers).
ASCII names of all relay status bits (Fast Meter).
Display the circuit breaker report and breaker history; preload and reset breaker monitor data
(n = 1 is BK1; n = 2 is BK2).
Generate the Compressed ASCII response configuration message.
BREAKER command for the Compressed ASCII response.
EVENT command for the Compressed ASCII response.
HISTORY command for the Compressed ASCII response.
Close the circuit breaker (n = 1 is BK1; n = 2 is BK2).
Displays communications channel statistics.
Display relay-to-relay M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications or remote synchrophasor data (c = A is
Channel A; c = B is Channel B; c = M is either enabled single channel; c = RTC for remote synchrophasors).
Display statistics for synchrophasor client channels.
Set, clear, or pulse an internal remote bit (nn is the remote bit number from 01–32).
Copy settings between instances in the same class (m and n are instance numbers; for example: m = 1 is
Group 1; n = 2 is Group 2).
Access signal profile data for up to 20 user-selectable analog values.
SER command for the Compressed ASCII response.
STATUS command for the Compressed ASCII response.
SUMMARY command for the Compressed ASCII response.
Display and set the date.
ASCII names of all relay digital I/O (Fast Meter).
Display serial port DNP3 settings.
Displays Ethernet port (Port 5) configuration and status.
Display and acknowledge event reports.
Terminates a Telnet session.
Transfer data between the relay and external software.
Displays transmit and receive GOOSE messaging information.
Display the active group number or select the active group.
Display available commands or command help at each access level.
View event summaries/histories; clear event data.
Display the firmware id, user id, device code, part number, and configuration information.
SEL-411L Relay
2
SEL-411L Relay Command Summary
Command a
,
b
Description
IRIG
LOOPBACK
MAC
MAP 1
METER
OACCESS
OPEN n
PACCESS
PASSWORD
PING
PORT
PROFILE
Directs the relay to use the most available demodulated IRIG-B time code.
Connect M
IRRORED
B
ITS
data from transmit to receive on the same port.
Displays the Media Access Control address.
View the relay database organization.
Display metering data and internal relay operating variables.
Go to Access Level O (output control).
Open the circuit breaker (n = 1 is BK1; n = 2 is BK2).
Go to Access Level P (protection control).
Change relay passwords.
Determines if the network is properly connected.
Connect to a remote relay via M
IRRORED
B
ITS
virtual terminal (for port number p = 1–3, and F), or the
Ethernet card (port p = 5).
Access signal profile data.
PULSE OUTnnn
QUIT
RTC
SER
SET c
SHOW
SNS
STATUS
SUMMARY
TARGET
TEC
TEST 87L
TEST DB
TEST DB2
TEST FM
TIME
Pulse a relay control output (OUTnnn is a control output number).
Reduce access level to Access Level 0 (exit relay control).
Display configuration of received remote synchrophasors.
View Sequential Events Recorder reports.
Enter relay settings.
Display relay settings.
Display Sequential Events Recorder settings name strings (Fast SER).
Report or clear relay status and SEL
OGIC
control equation errors.
View summary event reports.
Display relay elements for a row in the Relay Word table.
Display time-error estimate; display or modify time-error correction value.
Test 87L characteristic or place channel in loopback mode.
Test interfaces to a virtual device database.
Test all communications protocols, except Fast Message.
Display or place values in metering database (Fast Meter).
Display and set the internal clock.
TIME Q
TRIGGER
VERSION
VIEW 1
Displays detailed information on the relay internal clock.
Initiate a data capture and record an event report.
Display the relay hardware and software configurations.
View data from the communications card database.
a b c
See
Section 15: ASCII Command Reference in the Protection Manual
.
For help on a specific command, type HELP [command] <Enter> at an ASCII terminal communicating with the relay.
See the table below for SET/SHOW options.
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
SEL-411L Relay Command Summary
3
SET/SHOW Command Options
Option Setting Type
D
F
G
L n
[S] n
B
A n a
Group Settings 1–6
Bay Control
Automation Logic Block 1–10
DNP3
Front Panel
Global
Protection Logic Group 1–6
M
N
O
P n
Breaker Monitor
Notes
Outputs
Port 1–3, F, 5
P 87
R
87L channel
Report
T
Alias a
The -1 relay version has only one instance of automation logic settings.
Description
Particular application settings
Bay Control (Mimic) settings
Automation SEL
OGIC
control equations
Direct Network Protocol remapping (serial port only)
Front-panel HMI settings
Relay-wide settings
Protection SEL
OGIC
control equations
Circuit breaker monitor settings
Notes settings
Output SEL
OGIC
control equations
Communications port settings
87L channel configuration settings
Event report and SER settings
Alias names for analog quantities and Relay Word bits
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
This page intentionally left blank
SEL-411L Relay Command Summary
COM RTC
CONTROL nn
COPY m n
CPR
CSER
CSTATUS
CSUMMARY
DATE
DNAME X
DNP
ETHERNET
EVENT
EXIT
FILE
GOOSE
GROUP
HELP
HISTORY
ID
Command a
,
b
2ACCESS
89CLOSE
89OPEN
AACCESS
ACCESS
BACCESS
BNAME
BREAKER n
CASCII
CBREAKER
CEVENT
CHISTORY
CLOSE n
COM 87L
COMM c
Date Code 20151029
Description
Go to Access Level 2 (complete relay monitoring and control).
Assert the disconnect 89CCm (m = 1–8) Control Relay Word bits.
Assert the disconnect 89OCm (m = 1–8) Control Relay Word bits.
Go to Access Level A (automation control).
Go to Access Level 1 (monitor relay).
Go to Access Level B (monitor relay and control circuit breakers).
ASCII names of all relay status bits (Fast Meter).
Display the circuit breaker report and breaker history; preload and reset breaker monitor data
(n = 1 is BK1; n = 2 is BK2).
Generate the Compressed ASCII response configuration message.
BREAKER command for the Compressed ASCII response.
EVENT command for the Compressed ASCII response.
HISTORY command for the Compressed ASCII response.
Close the circuit breaker (n = 1 is BK1; n = 2 is BK2).
Displays communications channel statistics.
Display relay-to-relay M
IRRORED
B
ITS
communications or remote synchrophasor data (c = A is
Channel A; c = B is Channel B; c = M is either enabled single channel; c = RTC for remote synchrophasors).
Display statistics for synchrophasor client channels.
Set, clear, or pulse an internal remote bit (nn is the remote bit number from 01–32).
Copy settings between instances in the same class (m and n are instance numbers; for example: m = 1 is
Group 1; n = 2 is Group 2).
Access signal profile data for up to 20 user-selectable analog values.
SER command for the Compressed ASCII response.
STATUS command for the Compressed ASCII response.
SUMMARY command for the Compressed ASCII response.
Display and set the date.
ASCII names of all relay digital I/O (Fast Meter).
Display serial port DNP3 settings.
Displays Ethernet port (Port 5) configuration and status.
Display and acknowledge event reports.
Terminates a Telnet session.
Transfer data between the relay and external software.
Displays transmit and receive GOOSE messaging information.
Display the active group number or select the active group.
Display available commands or command help at each access level.
View event summaries/histories; clear event data.
Display the firmware id, user id, device code, part number, and configuration information.
SEL-411L Relay
2
SEL-411L Relay Command Summary
Command a
,
b
Description
IRIG
LOOPBACK
MAC
MAP 1
METER
OACCESS
OPEN n
PACCESS
PASSWORD
PING
PORT
PROFILE
Directs the relay to use the most available demodulated IRIG-B time code.
Connect M
IRRORED
B
ITS
data from transmit to receive on the same port.
Displays the Media Access Control address.
View the relay database organization.
Display metering data and internal relay operating variables.
Go to Access Level O (output control).
Open the circuit breaker (n = 1 is BK1; n = 2 is BK2).
Go to Access Level P (protection control).
Change relay passwords.
Determines if the network is properly connected.
Connect to a remote relay via M
IRRORED
B
ITS
virtual terminal (for port number p = 1–3, and F), or the
Ethernet card (port p = 5).
Access signal profile data.
PULSE OUTnnn
QUIT
RTC
SER
SET c
SHOW
SNS
STATUS
SUMMARY
TARGET
TEC
TEST 87L
TEST DB
TEST DB2
TEST FM
TIME
Pulse a relay control output (OUTnnn is a control output number).
Reduce access level to Access Level 0 (exit relay control).
Display configuration of received remote synchrophasors.
View Sequential Events Recorder reports.
Enter relay settings.
Display relay settings.
Display Sequential Events Recorder settings name strings (Fast SER).
Report or clear relay status and SEL
OGIC
control equation errors.
View summary event reports.
Display relay elements for a row in the Relay Word table.
Display time-error estimate; display or modify time-error correction value.
Test 87L characteristic or place channel in loopback mode.
Test interfaces to a virtual device database.
Test all communications protocols, except Fast Message.
Display or place values in metering database (Fast Meter).
Display and set the internal clock.
TIME Q
TRIGGER
VERSION
VIEW 1
Displays detailed information on the relay internal clock.
Initiate a data capture and record an event report.
Display the relay hardware and software configurations.
View data from the communications card database.
a b c
See
Section 15: ASCII Command Reference in the Protection Manual
.
For help on a specific command, type HELP [command] <Enter> at an ASCII terminal communicating with the relay.
See the table below for SET/SHOW options.
SEL-411L Relay Date Code 20151029
SEL-411L Relay Command Summary
3
SET/SHOW Command Options
Option Setting Type
D
F
G
L n
[S] n
B
A n a
Group Settings 1–6
Bay Control
Automation Logic Block 1–10
DNP3
Front Panel
Global
Protection Logic Group 1–6
M
N
O
P n
Breaker Monitor
Notes
Outputs
Port 1–3, F, 5
P 87
R
87L channel
Report
T
Alias a
The -1 relay version has only one instance of automation logic settings.
Description
Particular application settings
Bay Control (Mimic) settings
Automation SEL
OGIC
control equations
Direct Network Protocol remapping (serial port only)
Front-panel HMI settings
Relay-wide settings
Protection SEL
OGIC
control equations
Circuit breaker monitor settings
Notes settings
Output SEL
OGIC
control equations
Communications port settings
87L channel configuration settings
Event report and SER settings
Alias names for analog quantities and Relay Word bits
Date Code 20151029 SEL-411L Relay
This page intentionally left blank
Download
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
